7 CFR Part 1755 — Telecommunications Policies on Specifications, Acceptable Materials, and Standard Contract Forms

PART 1755—TELECOMMUNICATIONS POLICIES ON SPECIFICATIONS, ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS, AND STANDARD CONTRACT FORMS Authority: 7 U.S.C. 901 et seq., et seq., et seq. Source: 55 FR 39397, Sept. 27, 1990, unless otherwise noted. §§ 1755.1-1755.2 [Reserved] § 1755.3 Field trials. (a) Except as covered in Bulletin 345-3, no loan funds shall be advanced for any product if any item to be included in the project is not included in the “List of Materials Acceptable for Use on Telephone Systems of RUS Borrowers,” RUS Bulletin 344-2. When new items of materials or equipment are considered for acceptance by RUS or when a previously accepted item has been subjected to such major modifications that its suitability cannot be determined based on laboratory data and/or field experience, a field trial shall be required if RUS so determines. This field trial consists of limited field installations of the materials or equipment in closely monitored situations designed to determine, to RUS's satisfaction, their operational effectiveness under actual field conditions. Field trials are to be used only as a means for determining, to RUS's satisfaction, the operational effectiveness of a new or revised product under actual field conditions. Both the manufacturer and borrower are responsible for assuring that the field trial is carried out and that the required information on the product's performance is received by RUS in a timely manner. The use of materials or equipment derived from new inventions or concepts untried within the telephone industry is defined as “an experiment” and shall be handled as a special case using procedures considered appropriate by RUS to meet the individual experiment. (b) To qualify for a field trial, the new and improved materials and equipment must appear to RUS to offer one or more of the following benefits: (1) Improved performance. (2) Decreased cost. (3) Broader application. (c) The item of material or equipment subject to field trial may be only part of the total amount of materials or equipment included in a bid or it may be the key component of the facility or system provided; therefore, RUS shall have authority to require that a satisfactory plan be provided to maintain or restore service in the event that the materials and equipment fail to meet established performance requirements. RUS shall limit the quantity of new materials and equipment installed on any field trial and shall also limit the number of field trials for a given product to what RUS considers reasonable to provide the necessary information. (d) A borrower may participate in a field trial only if, in RUS's opinion, the borrower possesses: (1) Adequate financial resources so that no delay in the project will result from lack of funds. (2) The financial stability to overcome difficulties which may result from an unsuccessful field trial. The borrower must be able to restore and maintain service until the manufacturer meets its financial obligations with respect to the field trial. (3) Qualified personnel to enable it to discharge its responsibilities. (4) A record satisfactory to RUS for maintaining equipment and plant facilities and for providing RUS with information when requested. (5) Willingness to participate in the field trial and awareness of the effort and responsibility this entails. (e) The test site for the field trial shall be, in RUS's opinion, readily accessible and provide the conditions, such as temperature extremes, high probability of lightning damage, etc., for which the product is being evaluated. The material or equipment involved shall be covered by an RUS specification or a suitable standard acceptable to RUS. The supplier is required to submit test data to show conformance with the applicable specification or standard. Further testing shall be performed if required by RUS personnel. (f) A field trial shall normally continue for a minimum of six months, or for a longer period of time determined by RUS to be required to obtain conclusive data that the item either fulfills all requirements or is unacceptable. Either the borrower or supplier may terminate a field trial at any time, in accordance with their contractual agreement. Such termination, if prior to the time required by RUS, shall constitute withdrawal of the product from consideration by RUS. RUS has authority to terminate field trials based on its determination that the equipment is not performing satisfactorily and that this lack of performance may, in RUS's opinion, cause service degradation or hazards to life or property. (g) Field trials shall be conducted in accordance with the instructions set forth in this regulation and the agreement relating to the specific application. Both the supplier and the borrower shall agree, and obtain RUS approval before the start of the trial, on the following: (1) The specific purpose of the field trial; (2) Ownership of items during trial; (3) Starting date and duration; (4) Responsibility for costs and removal of items in the event of noncompliance with the specification or purpose intended and arrangements for service continuity or restoration; (5) Responsibility for testing, test equipment and normal operation and maintenance during the trial period; (6) Availability of test equipment on site during the trial period; and (7) Responsibility for spare parts and components consumed during the trial period. (h) Both the supplier and the borrower shall keep RUS informed of the status of a field trial. These reports shall not be limited to details of problems of failures encountered during installation and subsequent operation but shall include information on progress of the field trial. If these reports are not received in accordance with the requirements of the RUS Form 399b, RUS shall have the authority to deny or suspend loan funds related to these products until the delinquent reports are received. (i) Before a borrower purchases materials or equipment that require a field trial, prior approval must be obtained from RUS and RUS Form 399b, RUS Telecommunications Equipment Field Trial (available from the Director, Administrative Services Division, Rural Utilities Service, Room 0175, South Building, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250) will be completed by RUS and must be signed by both the borrower and supplier as an indication that they understand their responsibilities in the field trial. Assurance must also be obtained from RUS that the “particular item” that is the subject of the field test is eligible for a field trial. To obtain this assurance, any proposal for use of an item on a field trial basis shall be forwarded to the Chief, Area Engineering Branch, for review and approval. (j) Procedures for establishing field trials for the various categories of equipment after RUS has approved the 399b: (1) Electronic transmission equipment. (i) Voice frequency repeaters; (ii) Trunk carriers; (iii) Subscriber carrier; (iv) Point-to-point radio (Microwave); (v) Coaxial cable system electronics; (vi) Fiber optic cable system electronics; (vii) Multiplex equipment; (viii) Mobile and fixed radiotelephone; and (ix) Other items of electronic equipment associated with transmission. (2) Central office equipment. (i) Central office dial equipment; (ii) Direct distance dialing equipment; (iii) Automatic number identification equipment; (iv) Line concentrators; (v) Remote switching equipment; and (vi) All other items of equipment associated with switching equipment, such as loop extenders. (3) Protection equipment and materials, outside plant equipment and materials, and all other equipment and materials, which includes all items not covered in paragraph (j) (1) or (2) of this section, shall be handled as described in Bulletin 344-1 “Methods of Purchasing Materials and Equipment for Use on Systems of Telephone Borrowers” except that the borrower's purchase order form is to be used for purchasing materials and equipment in these categories. In addition, the borrower and supplier shall execute three copies of the “Supplemental Agreement to Equipment Contract for Field Trial,” RUS Form 399, or a “Supplemental Agreement to Equipment Contract for Field Trial (Secondary—Delivery, Installation, Operation)”, RUS Form 399a, as the case may be, as well as three copies of the RUS Form 399b, “RUS Telecommunications Field Trial”, and forward them, together with three copies of the purchase order to the Chief, Area Engineering Branch. (k) For all items except Electronic Central Office Equipment, suppliers and manufacturers must furnish warranties or guarantees satisfactory to RUS against the failure of the material and equipment used in the field trial. Terms of this warranty must not be less than the provisions of the standard warranty included in the “Telephone System Construction Contract”, RUS Form 515, or the warranty provided for similar materials and equipment included in the “List of Materials Acceptable for Use on Telephone Systems of RUS Borrowers”, RUS Bulletin 344-2. In lieu of a warranty, materials and equipment are sometimes furnished to RUS borrowers on a reduced or no cost basis. Terms of such arrangements are subject to RUS approval and should be fully covered in field trial proposals forwarded by borrowers to the Chief, Area Engineering Branch for review and approval. For the purchase of electronic central office equipment, suppliers and manufacturers are to provide warranties as provided in the applicable RUS contract form: RUS Form 397 for electronic equipment and RUS Form 525 for central office equipment. Forms 399 and 399a, which apply to field trials of these devices, specify that the term of the warranty does not begin until the satisfactory conclusion of the field trial. [49 FR 28394, July 12, 1984. Redesignated at 55 FR 39397, Sept. 27, 1990] §§ 1755.4-1755.25 [Reserved] § 1755.26 RUS standard contract forms. (a) The standard loan agreement between RUS and its borrowers provides that, in accordance with applicable RUS regulations, borrowers shall use standard contract forms promulgated by RUS for construction, procurement, engineering services, and architectural services financed by a loan or guaranteed by RUS. This part implements these provisions of the RUS loan agreement and prescribes the procedures that RUS follows in promulgating standard contract forms that borrowers are required to use. Part 1753 prescribes when and how borrowers are required to use these standard forms of contracts. (b) Contract forms. [64 FR 6500, Feb. 10, 1999] § 1755.27 Borrower contractual obligations. (a) Loan agreement. (b) Compliance. (2) The borrower may use electronic reproductions of a contract form if the contract documents submitted for RUS approval are exact reproductions of the RUS form and include the following certification by the borrower: I (Insert name of the person.), certify that the attached (Insert name of the contract form.), between (Insert name of the parties.), dated (Insert contract date.) is an exact reproduction of RUS Form (Insert form number), dated (Insert date of RUS form). (Signature) (Title) (Employer's Address) (c) Amendment. (d) Waiver. (e) Violations. [64 FR 6500, Feb. 10, 1999] § 1755.28 Notice and publication of listed contract forms. (a) Notice. (b) Availability. [64 FR 6500, Feb. 10, 1999] § 1755.29 Promulgation of new or revised contract forms. RUS may, from time to time, promulgate new contract forms or revise or eliminate existing contract forms. In so doing, RUS shall publish a notice of rulemaking in the Federal Register Federal Register [64 FR 6500, Feb. 10, 1999] § 1755.30 List of telecommunications standard contract forms. (a) General. (b) Issuance Date. (c) List of telecommunications standard contract forms. (2) RUS Form 158, issued 10-77, Certification of Contract or Force Account Approval. (3) RUS Form 159, issued 10-77, Summary of Completed Construction. (4) RUS Form 168b, issued 2-04, Contractor's Bond. (5) RUS Form 168c, issued 2-04, Contractor's Bond. (6) RUS Form 181a, issued 3-66, Certificate of Completion (Force Account Construction). (7) RUS Form 187, issued 2-04, Certificate of Completion, Contract Construction. (8) RUS Form 213, issued 2-04, Certificate (Buy American). (9) RUS Form 216, issued 7-67, Construction Change Order. (10) RUS Form 217, issued 3-97, Postloan Engineering Services Contract—Telecommunications Systems. (11) RUS Form 220, issued 6-98, Architectural Services Contract. (12) RUS Form 224, issued 2-04, Waiver and Release of Lien. (13) RUS Form 231, issued 2-04, Certificate of Contractor. (14) RUS Form 238, issued 2-04, Construction or Equipment Contract Amendment. (15) RUS Form 242, issued 11-58, Assignment of Engineering Service Contract. (16) RUS Form 245, issued 11-75, Engineering Services Contract, Special Services—Telephone. (17) RUS Form 257, issued 2-04, Contract to Construct Buildings. (18) RUS Form 257a, issued 10-69, Contractor's Bond. (19) RUS Form 274, issued 6-81, Bidder's Qualifications. (20) RUS Form 276, issued 5-59, Bidder's Qualifications for Buried Plant Construction. (21) RUS Form 281 issued 5-61, Tabulation of Materials Furnished by Borrower. (22) RUS Form 282, issued 11-53, Subcontract (Under Construction or Equipment Contracts). (23) RUS Form 284, issued 4-72, Final Statement of Cost for Architectural Service and Certificate of Architect. (24) RUS Form 307, issued 2-04, Bid Bond. (25) RUS Form 395, October 18, 2016, Equipment Contract. (26) RUS Form 395a, October 18, 2016, Equipment Contract Certificate of Completion (Including Installation). (27) RUS Form 395b, October 18, 2016, Equipment Contract Certificate of Completion (Not Including Installation). (28) RUS Form 395c, October 18, 2016, Certificate of Contractor and Indemnity Agreement. (29) RUS Form 395d, October 18, 2016, Results of Acceptance Tests. (30) RUS Form 506, issued 3-97, Statement of Engineering Fee—Telecommunications. (31) RUS Form 515, issued September 17, 2001, Telecommunications Systems Construction Contract (Labor and Materials). (32) RUS Form 526, issued 8-66, Construction Contract Amendment. (33) RUS Form 527, issued 3-71, Statement of Construction, Telephone System “Outside Plant”. (34) RUS Form 553, issued 5-67, Check List for Review of Plans and Specifications. (35) RUS Form 724, issued 10-63, Final Inventory, Telephone Construction Contract. (36) RUS Form 724a, issued 4-61, Final Inventory, Telephone Construction—Telephone Construction Contract (Labor and Materials), columns 1-8. (37) RUS Form 724b, issued 3-61, Final Inventory, Telephone Construction Contract (Labor and Materials), columns 9-14. (38) RUS Form 771, issued 10-75, Summary of Work Orders (Inspected by RUS Field Engineer). (39) RUS Form 771a, issued 10-75, Summary of Work Orders (Inspected by Licensed Engineer or Borrower's Staff Engineer). (40) RUS Form 773, issued 12-90, Miscellaneous Construction Work and Maintenance Services Contract. (41) RUS Form 787, issued 8-63, Supplement A to Construction Contract. (42) RUS Form 817, issued 6-60, Final Inventory, Telephone Force Account Construction. (43) RUS Form 817a, issued 6-60, Final Inventory, Telephone Force Account Construction, columns 1-8. (44) RUS Form 817b, issued 6-60, Final Inventory, Telephone Force Account Construction, Columns 9-14. (45) RUS Form 835, issued 3-66, Preloan Engineering Service Contract, Telephone System Design. [64 FR 6501, Feb. 10, 1999, as amended at 64 FR 53887, Oct. 5, 1999; 65 FR 51750, Aug. 25, 2000; 69 FR 7111, Feb. 13, 2004; 81 FR 71585, Oct. 18, 2016] §§ 1755.31-1755.96 [Reserved] § 1755.97 Telephone standards and specifications. (a)(1) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. This material is available for inspection at the Rural Utilities Service (RUS) and at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). Contact the RUS at: 1400 Independence Ave. SW, Washington, DC, 202-692-0042; email: [email protected]; https://www.rd.usda.gov/resources/regulations/bulletins. [email protected], www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. (2) To comply with the provisions of this part, you must follow the requirements set out in the RUS telecommunications bulletins incorporated by reference. These materials are incorporated as they exist on the date of the approval and notification of any change in these materials will be published in the Federal Register. (b) Rural Utilities Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Room 5170-S, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, https://www.rd.usda.gov/publications/regulations-guidelines/bulletins. (1) Bulletin 345-39, RUS specification for telephone station protectors, August 19, 1985. (2) Bulletin 345-50 PE-60, RUS specification for trunk carrier systems, September 1979. (3) Bulletin 345-54 PE-52, RUS specification for telephone cable splicing connectors, December 1971. (4) Bulletin 345-55 PE-61, RUS specification for central office loop extenders and loop extender voice frequency repeater combinations, December 1973. (5) Bulletin 345-65, PE-65, Specification for shield bonding connectors, March 22, 1985. (6) Bulletin 345-66 PE-64, RUS specification for subscriber carrier systems, September 1979. (7) Bulletin 345-69 PE-29, RUS specification for two-wire voice frequency repeater equipment, January 1978. (8) Bulletin 345-72 PE-74, RUS specification for filled splice closures, October 1985. (9) Bulletin 345-78 PE-78, RUS specification for carbon arrester assemblies for use in protectors, February 1980. (10) Bulletin 345-180 Form 397a, RUS specifications for voice frequency repeaters and voice frequency repeatered trunks, January 1963. (11) Bulletin 345-183 Form 397d, RUS design specifications for point-to-point microwave radio systems June 1970. (12) Bulletin 345-184 Form 397e, RUS design specifications for mobile and fixed dial radio telephone equipment May 1971. (13) Bulletin 1728F-700, RUS Specification for Wood Poles, Stubs and Anchor Logs, April 18, 2022. (14) Bulletin 1753F-150 Form 515a, Specifications and Drawings for Construction of Direct Buried Plant, September 30, 2010. (15) Bulletin 1753F-151 Form 515b, Specifications and Drawings for Construction of Underground Plan, September 12, 2001. (16) Bulletin 1753F-152 Form 515c, Specifications and Drawings for Construction of Aerial Plant, September 17, 2001. (17) Bulletin 1753F-153 Form 515d, Specifications and Drawings for Service Installation at Customer Access Locations, September 17, 2001. [84 FR 28201, June 18, 2019, as amended at 86 FR 57022, Oct. 14, 2021; 87 FR 26963, May 6, 2022] § 1755.98 List of telecommunications specifications included in other 7 CFR parts. The following specifications are included throughout 7 CFR chapter XVII. These specifications are not incorporated by reference elsewhere in the chapter. The terms “RUS form,” “RUS standard form,” “RUS specification,” and “RUS bulletin” have the same meaning as the terms “REA form,” “REA standard form,” “REA specification,” and “REA bulletin,” respectively, unless otherwise indicated. The list of specifications follows: Section Issue date Title (a) 1728.202 4.18.2022 RUS Specification for Quality Control and Inspection of Timber Products. (b) [Reserved] [55 FR 39397, Sept. 27, 1990, as amended at 84 FR 28201, June 18, 2019; 86 FR 57022, Oct. 14, 2021; 87 FR 26963, May 6, 2022] §§ 1755.99-1755.199 [Reserved] § 1755.200 RUS standard for splicing copper and fiber optic cables. (a) Scope. (2) American National Standard Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA) 70, 1993 National Electrical Code (NEC) referenced in this section is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. A copy of the ANSI/NFPA 1993 NEC standard is available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250-1500, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (3) American National Standard Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (ANSI/IEEE), 1993 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) referenced in this section is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. A copy of the ANSI/IEEE 1993 NESC standard is available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250-1500, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (b) General. (2) The installation instructions provided by the manufacturer of splicing materials shall be followed except where those instructions conflict with the procedures specified in this section. (3) Precautions shall be taken to prevent the ingress of moisture and other contaminants during all phases of the splicing installation. When an uncompleted splice must be left unattended, it shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of moisture and other contaminants. (4) Minor sheath damage during construction may be repaired if the repair is completed immediately and approved by the borrower's resident project representative. Minor damage is typically repaired by: (i) Scuffing the cable sheath associated with the damaged area; (ii) Applying several layers of DR tape over the scuffed and damaged area; (iii) Applying several layers of plastic tape over the DR tape; and (iv) If damage is severe enough to rupture the cable shield, a splice closure shall be installed. (5) All splice cases installed on RUS toll trunk and feeder cables shall be filled, whether aerial, buried, or underground. (c) Splicing considerations for copper cables Preconstruction testing. (2) Handling precautions. (3) Cable sheath removal. (ii) Caution shall be exercised to avoid damaging the conductor insulation when cutting through the cable shield and removing the shield. Sharp edges and burrs shall be removed from the cut end of the shield. (4) Shield bonding and grounding. (5) Binder group identification. (ii) The standard insulation color code used to identify individual cable pairs within 25-pair binder groups shall be as shown in Table 1: Table 1—Cable Pair Identification Within Binder Groups Pair No. Color Tip Ring 1 White Blue. 2 White Orange. 3 White Green. 4 White Brown. 5 White Slate. 6 Red Blue. 7 Red Orange. 8 Red Green. 9 Red Brown. 10 Red Slate. 11 Black Blue. 12 Black Orange. 13 Black Green. 14 Black Brown. 15 Black Slate. 16 Yellow Blue. 17 Yellow Orange. 18 Yellow Green. 19 Yellow Brown. 20 Yellow Slate. 21 Violet Blue. 22 Violet Orange. 23 Violet Green. 24 Violet Brown. 25 Violet Slate. (iii) The standard binder ribbon color code used to designate 25-pair binder groups within 600-pair super units shall be as shown in Table 2: Table 2—Cable Binder Group Identification Group No. Color of bindings Group pair count 1 White-Blue 1-25 2 White-Orange 26-50 3 White-Green 51-75 4 White-Brown 76-100 5 White-Slate 101-125 6 Red-Blue 126-150 7 Red-Orange 151-175 8 Red-Green 176-200 9 Red-Brown 201-225 10 Red-Slate 226-250 11 Black-Blue 251-275 12 Black-Orange 276-300 13 Black-Green 301-325 14 Black-Brown 326-350 15 Black-Slate 351-375 16 Yellow-Blue 376-400 17 Yellow-Orange 401-425 18 Yellow-Green 426-450 19 Yellow-Brown 451-475 20 Yellow-Slate 476-500 21 Violet-Blue 501-525 22 Violet-Orange 526-550 23 Violet-Green 551-575 24 Violet-Brown 576-600 (iv) Super-unit binder groups shall be identified in accordance with Table 3: Table 3—Super-Unit Binder Colors Pair numbers Binder color 1-600 White. 601-1200 Red. 1201-1800 Black. 1801-2400 Yellow. 2401-3000 Violet. 3001-3600 Blue. 3601-4200 Orange. 4201-4800 Green. 4801-5400 Brown. 5401-6000 Slate. (v) Service pairs in screened cables shall be identified in accordance with Table 4: Table 4—Screened Cable Service Pair Identification Service pair No. Color Tip Ring 1 White Red. 2 White Black. 3 White Yellow. 4 White Violet. Red Black. 6 Red Yellow. 7 Red Violet. 8 Black Yellow. 9 Black Violet. (6) Cleaning conductors. (7) Expanded plastic insulated conductor (PIC) precautions. (8) Splice connectors. (ii) Specialized connectors are available for splicing operations such as butt splices, in line splices, bridge taps, clearing and capping, and multiple pair splicing operations. The splice connector manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed concerning connector selection and use. (iii) Caution shall be exercised to maintain conductor and pair association both during and after splicing operations. (iv) Splicing operations that involve pairs containing working services shall utilize splice connectors that permit splicing without the interruption of service. (9) Piecing out conductors. (10) Splice organization. (11) Binder tape. (12) Cable tags. (13) Screened cable. (14) Service wire connections. (ii) Only filled terminal blocks having RUS acceptance shall be used on aerial service wire connections. (15) Copper cable testing. (16) Cable acceptance. (d) Splice arrangements for copper cables Service distribution closures. (ii) Fixed count terminals shall restrict service technician access to the cable core. Predetermined cable pairs shall be spliced to the terminal leads or stub cable in advance of service assignments. (2) Aerial splices. (3) Buried splices. (ii) A treated plank or equivalent shall be placed 15 cm (6 in.) above the buried splice case to prevent damage to the splice case from future digging. Where a firm base for burying a splice cannot be obtained, a treated plank or equivalent shall be placed beneath the splice case. (iii) Each buried splice shall be identified for future locating. One method of marking the splice point is the use of a warning sign. Another method is the burying of an electronic locating device. (4) BD-type pedestals. (ii) The recommended splice capacities for BD-type pedestals are shown in Table 5. However, larger size pedestals are permissible if service requirements dictate their usefulness. Table 5 is as follows: Table 5—Splice Capacities for BD-Type Pedestals Pedestal type Maximum straight splice pair capacity using single pair connectors or multiple pair splice modules Maximum load splice pair capacity using single pair connectors or multiple pair splice modules (see note 1) BD3, BD3A 100 Pair 50 Pair. BD4, BD4A 200 Pair 100 Pair. BD5, BD5A 600 Pair 300 Pair. BD7 1200 Pair 600 Pair. BD14, BD14A 100 Pair 50 Pair. BD15, BD15A 400 Pair 200 Pair. BD16, BD16A 600 Pair 300 Pair. Note 1: This table refers to load coil cases that are to be direct buried with stub cables extending into the pedestal for splicing. Requirements involving individual coil arrangements inside the pedestal should be engineered on a case-by-case basis. (iii) Special distribution pedestals having a divider plate for mounting filled terminal blocks are available. Distribution pedestals are also equipped with service wire channels for installation of buried service wires without disturbing the cabling and gravel inside the base of the pedestal. Distribution pedestals are recommended in locations where the connection of service wires is required. (5) Large pair count splice housings. Table 6—Splice Capacities for Large Count Housings Housing type Maximum straight splice pair capacity using single pair connectors or multiple pair splice modules Maximum load splice pair capacity using single pair connectors or multiple pair splice modules (see note 1) BD 6000 6,000 Pair 3,000 Pair. BD 8000 8,000 Pair 4,000 Pair. BD 10000 10,000 Pair 5,000 Pair. (6) Pedestal restricted access inserts. (7) Serving Area Interface (SAI) Systems. (8) Buried cable splicing arrangements. (9) Underground splices (manholes). (10) Central office tip cable splices. (ii) Tip cables should be spliced in a cable vault. However, as a last resort, tip cables may be spliced inside a central office if flame retardant splice cases or a noncombustible central office splice housing is used to contain the splice. (iii) Splices inside the central office shall be made as close as practical to the point where the outside plant cables enter the building. Except in cable vault locations, outside plant cables within the central office shall be wrapped with fireproof tape or enclosed in noncombustible conduit. (e) Splicing considerations for fiber optic cables Connection characteristics. (2) Fiber core alignment. (3) Splice loss. (ii) Undesirable splice losses are caused by poor splicing techniques including splicing irregularities such as improper cleaves and dirty splices. Typical cleave problems are illustrated in Figure 8: (4) Handling precautions. (i) Avoid damaging the cable during handling operations prior to splicing. Minor damage may change the transmission characteristics of the fibers to the extent that the cable section will have to be replaced; (ii) The cable manufacturer's recommendations concerning pulling tension shall be observed. The maximum pulling tension for most fiber optic cable is 2669 newtons (600 pound-force); (iii) The cable manufacturer's recommendations concerning bending radius shall be observed. Unless the cable manufacturer's recommendation is more stringent, the minimum bending radius for fiber optic cable shall be 20 times the cable diameter; (iv) The cable manufacturer's recommendations concerning buffer tube bending radius shall be observed. Unless the cable manufacturer's recommendation is more stringent, the minimum bending radius for buffer tubes is usually between 38 millimeters (mm) (1.5 in.) and 76 mm (3.0 in.). The bending limitations on buffer tubes are intended to prevent kinking. Buffer tube kinking may cause excessive optical loss or fiber breakage; and (v) Handle unprotected glass fibers carefully to avoid introducing flaws such as scratched or broken fibers. (5) Personnel safety. (i) Safety glasses shall be worn when handling glass fibers; (ii) Never view open-ended fibers with the naked eye or a magnifying device. Improper viewing of a fiber end that is transmitting light may cause irreparable eye damage; and (iii) Dispose of bare scrap fibers by using the sticky side of a piece of tape to pick up and discard loose fiber ends. Fiber scraps easily penetrate the skin and are difficult to remove. (6) Equipment requirements. (ii) Both fusion and mechanical splicing techniques are permitted on RUS financed projects. When using the mechanical splicing technique, only RUS accepted mechanical fiber optic splice connectors can be used. (iii) Fusion splicing machines shall be kept in proper working condition. Regular maintenance in accordance with the machine manufacturer's recommendations shall be observed. (iv) Mechanical splicing tools shall be in conformance with the tool manufacturer's recommendations. (v) An optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) shall be used for testing splices. The OTDR shall be stationed at the central office or launch point for testing individual splices as they are made and for end-to-end signature tests for the fiber optic link. (vi) An optical power meter shall be used for end-to-end cable acceptance tests. (vii) A prerequisite for the successful completion of a fiber optic splicing endeavor is the presence of a talk circuit between the splicing technician in the splicing vehicle and the operator of the OTDR in the central office. The splicing technician and the OTDR operator shall have access to communications with each other in order to inform each other as to: (A) Which splices meet the loss objectives; (B) The sequence in which buffer tubes and fibers are to be selected for subsequent splicing operations; and (C) The timing required for the performance of OTDR testing to prevent making an OTDR test at the same time a splice is being fused. (7) Cable preparation. (ii) The splice case manufacturer's recommendations concerning the amount of cable sheath to be removed shall be followed to facilitate splicing operations. The length of the sheath opening shall be identified with a wrap of plastic tape. (iii) If the cable contains a rip cord, the cable jacket shall be ring cut approximately 15 cm (6 in.) from the end and the 15 cm (6 in.) of cable jacket shall be removed to expose the rip cord. The rip cord shall be used to slit the jacket to the tape mark. (iv) If the cable does not contain a rip cord, the cable jacket shall be slit using a sheath splitter. No cuts shall be made into the cable core nor shall the buffer tubes be damaged. (v) If the cable contains an armor sheath, the outer jacket shall be opened along the slit and the jacket shall be removed exposing the armor sheath. The armor shall be separated at the seam and pulled from the cable exposing the inner jacket. The armor shall be removed making allowances for a shield bond connector. The inner sheath shall be slit using a sheath splitter or rip cord. The cable core shall not be damaged nor shall there be any damage to the buffer tubes. The jacket shall be peeled back and cut at the end of the slit. The exposed buffer tubes shall not be cut, kinked, or bent. (vi) After the cable sheath has been removed, the binder tape shall be removed from the cable. The cable shall not be crushed or deformed. (vii) The buffer tubes shall be unstranded one at a time. The buffer tubes shall not be kinked. (viii) If the cable is equipped with a strength member, the strength member shall be cut to the length recommended by the splice case manufacturer. (ix) Each buffer tube shall be inspected for kinks, cuts, and flat spots. If damage is detected, an additional length of cable jacket shall be removed and all of the buffer tubes shall be cut off at the point of damage. (x) The cable preparation sequence shall be repeated for the other cable end. (8) Shield bonding and grounding. (9) Fiber optic color code. Table 7—Fiber and Buffer Tube Identification Buffer tube and fiber No. Color 1 Blue. 2 Orange. 3 Green. 4 Brown. 5 Slate. 6 White. 7 Red. 8 Black. 9 Yellow. 10 Violet. 11 Rose. 12 Aqua. 13 Blue/Black Tracer. 14 Orange/Black Tracer. 15 Green/Black Tracer. 16 Brown/Black Tracer. 17 Slate/Black Tracer. 18 White/Black Tracer. 19 Red/Black Tracer. 20 Black/Yellow Tracer. 21 Yellow/Black Tracer. 22 Violet/Black Tracer. 23 Rose/Black Tracer. 24 Aqua/Black Tracer. (10) Buffer tube removal. (ii) Experiment with a scrap buffer tube to determine the cutting tool adjustment required to ring cut a buffer tube without damaging the fibers. (iii) Buffer tubes shall be removed by carefully ring cutting and removing approximately 15 to 46 cm (6 to 18 in.) of buffer tube at a time. The process shall be repeated until the required length of buffer tube has been removed, including the tape identification marker. (11) Coated fiber cleaning. (ii) A tissue or cotton ball shall be soaked in the recommended cleaning solvent and the coated fibers shall be carefully wiped one at a time using a clean tissue or cotton ball for each coated fiber. Caution shall be exercised to avoid removing the coloring agent from the fiber coating. (12) Fiber coating removal. (ii) The recommended length of fiber coating shall be removed only on the two fibers to be spliced. Fiber coating removal shall be performed on a one-fiber-at-a-time basis as each splice is prepared. (13) Bare fiber cleaning. (14) Fiber cleaving. (15) Cleaved fiber handling. (16) Completion of the splice. (ii) Each spliced fiber shall be routed through the organizer tray one at a time as splices are completed. The fibers shall be organized one at a time to prevent tangled spliced fibers. The splice case manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed concerning the splice tray selection. (17) Fiber optic testing. (18) Cable acceptance. (f) Splice arrangements for fiber optic cables Aerial splices. (2) Buried splices. (3) Underground manhole splices. (4) Central office cable entrance. (ii) As a first choice, the outside plant fiber optic cable shall be spliced to an all-dielectric fire retardant cable in a cable vault with the all-dielectric cable extending into the central office and terminating inside a fiber patch panel. (iii) As a second choice, the outside plant cable may be spliced inside the central office if a flame retardant fiber optic splice case or a noncombustible central office splice housing equipped with organizer trays is used to contain the splice. (iv) In cases referenced in paragraphs (f)(4)(ii) and (f)(4)(iii) of this section, as a minimum the fire retardant all-dielectric cable used to provide the connection between the cable entrance splice and the fiber patch panel shall be listed as Communication Riser Cable (Type CMR) in accordance with Sections 800-50 and 800-51(b) of the 1993 National Electrical Code. (v) Splices inside the central office shall be made as close as practicable to the point where the outside plant cables enter the building. Except in cable vault locations, outside plant cables within the central office shall be wrapped with fireproof tape or enclosed in noncombustible conduit. (g) Bonding and grounding fiber optic cable, copper cable, and copper service wire Bonding. (2) Copper cable shield bond connections. (ii)(A) Shield bonding conductors shall be either stranded or braided tinned copper wire equivalent to a minimum No. 6 American Wire Gauge (AWG) and shall be RUS accepted. The conductor connections shall be tinned or of a compatible bimetallic design to avoid corrosion problems associated with dissimilar metals. The number of shield bond connectors required per pair size and gauge shall be as shown in Table 8: Table 8—Shield Bond Connectors per Pair Size and Gauge 19 AWG Pair size and gauge No. of shield bond connectors 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 0-25 0-100 0-150 0-200 1 50-100 150-300 200-400 300-600 2 150-200 400-600 600-900 900-1500 3 300-600 900-1200 1200-2100 1800-3600 4 (B) It is permissible to strap across the shield bond connectors of several cables with a single length of braided wire. However, both ends of the braid shall be terminated on the pedestal ground bracket to provide a bonding loop. Shield bond connection methods for individual cables are shown in Figures 13 through 15, and the bonding of several cables inside a pedestal using the bonding loop is shown in Figure 16: (3) Buried service wire shield bond connections. (4) Fiber optic cable bond connections. (ii) Shield bonding conductors shall be either stranded or braided tinned copper wire equivalent to a minimum No. 6 American Wire Gauge (AWG) and shall be RUS accepted. The conductor connections shall be tinned or of a compatible bimetallic design to avoid corrosion problems associated with dissimilar metals. (5) Grounding. (ii) The conductor used for grounding metallic telephone hardware shall be a minimum No. 6 AWG solid, bare, copper conductor. (iii) For copper and fiber optic cable plant, all cable shields, all metallic strength members, and all metallic hardware shall be: (A) Grounded at each splice location to a driven grounding electrode (ground rod) of: ( 1 ( 2 (B) Bonded to a multi-grounded power system neutral when the splice is within 1.8 meters (6 feet) of access to the grounding system of the multi-grounded neutral system. Bonding to the multi-grounded neutral of a parallel power line may help to minimize telephone interference on long exposures with copper cable plant. Consideration, thus, should be given to completing such bonds, at least four (4) times each mile, when splices are greater than 1.8 meters (6 feet) but less than 4.6 meters (15 feet) from access to the multi-grounded neutral. (6) Bonding and grounding splice cases. (ii) Buried splice cases installed in either handholes or pedestals shall be grounded such that the cable shield grounds are attached to a common ground connection that will allow the lifting of a ground on the cable shield in either direction to permit efficient cable locating procedures. As a first choice, buried grounding conductor(s) shall be bare. However, if two or more grounding conductors are buried in the s they shall be insulated to avoid shorts when a locating tone is applied. (iii) A typical bonding and grounding method for fiber optic splices is shown in Figure 19: (7) Bonding and grounding central office cable entrances. [60 FR 5097, Jan. 26, 1995; 60 FR 9079, Feb. 16, 1995] §§ 1755.201-1755.369 [Reserved] § 1755.370 RUS specification for seven wire galvanized steel strand. (a) RUS incorporates by reference ASTM A475-78, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand, issued May 1978. All seven wire galvanized steel strand purchased after April 1, 1990, for use on telecommunications systems financed by RUS loan funds must conform to this standard. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51 on January 19, 1990). Copies of ASTM A475-78 are available for inspection during normal business hours at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA) and the Rural Utilities Service, Administrative Services Division, room 0175-S, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, telephone 202-382-9551. For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (b) In addition to the requirements of ASTM 475-78, all coils and reels having Class B or C coatings shall be marked with a 3-inch wide and 6-inch long deep-colored stripe, green or orange, respectively, to identify the class of galvanized coating of the strand. This marking shall be applied to the exposed convolutions of the strand in the eye of the coils and located near the midpoint on the outside layer of strand on the reels. The marking shall not cover any welded joint markings. [55 FR 1792, Jan. 19, 1990; 55 FR 3685, Feb. 2, 1990. Redesignated at 55 FR 39397, Sept. 27, 1990, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] §§ 1755.371-1755.389 [Reserved] § 1755.390 RUS specification for filled telephone cables. (a) Scope. (i) The conductors are solid copper, individually insulated with an extruded solid insulating compound. (ii) The insulated conductors are twisted into pairs which are then stranded or oscillated to form a cylindrical core. (iii) For high frequency applications, the cable core may be separated into compartments with screening shields. (iv) A moisture resistant filling compound is applied to the stranded conductors completely covering the insulated conductors and filling the interstices between pairs and units. (v) The cable structure is completed by the application of suitable core wrapping material, a flooding compound, a shield or a shield/armor, and an overall plastic jacket. (2) The number of pairs and gauge size of conductors which are used within the RUS program are provided in the following table: AWG 19 22 24 26 Pairs 6 6 6 12 12 12 18 18 18 25 25 25 25 50 50 50 75 75 75 100 100 100 150 150 150 200 200 200 300 300 300 400 400 400 600 600 900 Note: (3) Screened cable, when specified, must meet all requirements of this section. The pair sizes of screened cables used within the RUS program are referenced in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section. (4) All cables sold to RUS borrowers for projects involving RUS loan funds under this section must be accepted by RUS Technical Standards Committee “A” (Telephone). For cables manufactured to the specification of this section, all design changes to an accepted design must be submitted for acceptance. RUS will be the sole authority on what constitutes a design change. (5) Materials, manufacturing techniques, or cable designs not specifically addressed by this section may be allowed if accepted by RUS. Justification for acceptance of modified materials, manufacturing techniques, or cable designs must be provided to substantiate product utility and long-term stability and endurance. (6) The American National Standard Institute/Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ANSI/ICEA) S-84-608-1988 Standard For Telecommunications Cable, Filled, Polyolefin Insulated, Copper Conductor Technical Requirements referenced throughout this section is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988 are available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (7) American Society for Testing and Materials specifications (ASTM) A 505-87, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements For; ASTM B 193-87, Standard Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor Materials; ASTM B 224-80, Standard Classification of Coppers; ASTM B 694-86, Standard Specification for Copper, Copper Alloy, and Copper-Clad Stainless Steel Sheet and Strip for Electrical Cable Shielding; ASTM D 4565-90a, Standard Test Methods for Physical and Environmental Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable; and ASTM D 4566-90, Standard Test Methods for Electrical Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable referenced in this section are incorporated by reference by RUS. These incorporations by references were approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the ASTM standards are available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (b) Conductors and conductor insulation. (2) Each conductor must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 2.1. (3) Factory joints made in conductors during the manufacturing process must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 2.2. (4) The raw materials used for conductor insulation must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 3.1 through 3.1.3. (5) The finished conductor insulation must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 3.2.1 and 3.3. (6) Insulated conductors must not have an overall diameter greater than 2 millimeters (mm) (0.081 inch (in.)). (7) A permissible overall performance level of faults in conductor insulation must average not greater than one fault per 12,000 conductor meters (40,000 conductor feet) for each gauge of conductor. (i) All insulated conductors must be continuously tested for insulation faults during the twinning operation with a method of testing acceptable to RUS. The length count and number of faults must be recorded. The information must be retained for a period of 6 months and be available for review by RUS when requested. (ii) The voltages for determining compliance with the requirements of this section are as follows: AWG Direct Current Voltages (kilovolts) 19 8.0 22 6.0 24 5.0 26 4.0 (8) Repairs to the conductor insulation during manufacture are permissible. The method of repair must be accepted by RUS prior to its use. The repaired insulation must be capable of meeting the relevant electrical requirements of this section. (9) All repaired sections of insulation must be retested in the same manner as originally tested for compliance with paragraph (b)(7) of this section. (10) The colored insulating material removed from or tested on the conductor, from a finished cable, must meet the performance requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 3.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.4.4, 3.4.5, and 3.4.6. (c) Identification of pairs and twisting of pairs. (i) The tip and ring conductor of each pair; and (ii) Each pair in the completed cable. (2) The colors to be used in the pairs in the 25 pair group, together with the pair numbers must be in accordance with the table specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 3.5. (3) Positive identification of the tip and ring conductors of each pair by marking each conductor of a pair with the color of its mate is permissible. The method of marking must be accepted by RUS prior to its use. (4) Other methods of providing positive identification of the tip and ring conductors of each pair may be employed if accepted by RUS prior to its use. (5) The insulated conductors must be twisted into pairs. (6) In order to provide sufficiently high crosstalk isolation, the pair twists must be designed to enable the cable to meet the capacitance unbalance and crosstalk loss requirements of paragraphs (k)(5), (k)(6), and (k)(8) of this section. (7) The average length of pair twists in any pair in the finished cable, when measured on any 3 meter (10 foot) length, must not exceed the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 3.5. (d) Forming of the cable core. (2) When desired for lay-up reasons, the basic group may be divided into two or more subgroups called units. (3) Each group, or unit in a particular group, must be enclosed in bindings of the colors indicated for its particular pair count. The pair count, indicated by the colors of insulation, must be consecutive as indicated in paragraph (d)(6) of this section through units in a group. (4) The filling compound must be applied to the cable core in such a way as to provide as near a completely filled core as is commercially practical. (5) Threads and tapes used as binders must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 4.2 and 4.2.1. (6) The colors of the bindings and their significance with respect to pair count must be as follows: Group No. Color of Bindings Group Pair Count 1 White-Blue 1-25 2 White-Orange 26-50 3 White-Green 51-75 4 White-Brown 76-100 5 White-Slate 101-125 6 Red-Blue 126-150 7 Red-Orange 151-175 8 Red-Green 176-200 9 Red-Brown 201-225 10 Red-Slate 226-250 11 Black-Blue 251-275 12 Black-Orange 276-300 13 Black-Green 301-325 14 Black-Brown 326-350 15 Black-Slate 351-375 16 Yellow-Blue 376-400 17 Yellow-Orange 401-425 18 Yellow-Green 426-450 19 Yellow-Brown 451-475 20 Yellow-Slate 476-500 21 Violet-Blue 501-525 22 Violet-Orange 526-550 23 Violet-Green 551-575 24 Violet-Brown 576-600 (7) The use of the white unit binder in cables of 100 pairs or less is optional. (8) When desired for manufacturing reasons, two or more 25 pair groups may be bound together with nonhygroscopic and nonwicking threads or tapes into a super-unit. Threads or tapes must meet the requirements specified in paragraph (d)(5) of this section. The group binders and the super-unit binders must be color coded such that the combination of the two binders must positively identify each 25 pair group from every other 25 pair group in the cable. Super-unit binders must be of the color shown in the following table: Super-Unit Binder Colors Pair Numbers Binder Color 1-600 White 601-1200 Red 1201-1800 Black 1801-2400 Yellow 2401-3000 Violet (9) Color binders must not be missing for more than 90 meters (300 feet) from any 25 pair group or from any subgroup used as part of a super-unit. At any cable cross-section, no adjacent 25 pair groups and no more than one subgroup of any super-unit may have missing binders. In no case must the total number of missing binders exceed three. Missing super-unit binders must not be permitted for any distance. (10) Any reel of cable which contains missing binders must be labeled indicating the colors and location of the binders involved. The labeling must be applied to the reel and also to the cable. (e) Screened cable. (2) At the option of the user or manufacturer, identified service pairs providing for voice order and fault location may be placed in screened cables. (i) The number of service pairs provided must be one per twenty-five operating pairs plus two for a cable size up to and including 400 pairs, subject to a minimum of four service pairs. The pair counts for screened cables are as follows: Screened Cable Pair Counts Carrier Pair Count Service Pairs Total Pair Count 24 4 28 50 4 54 100 6 106 150 8 158 200 10 210 300 14 314 400 18 418 (ii) The service pairs must be equally divided among the compartments. The color sequence must be repeated in each compartment. (iii) The electrical and physical characteristics of each service pair must meet all the requirements set forth in this section. (iv) The colors used for the service pairs must be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(5) of this section. The color code used for the service pairs together with the service pair number are shown in the following table: Color Code For Service Pairs Service Pair No. Color Tip Ring 1 White Red 2 ” Black 3 ” Yellow 4 ” Violet 5 Red Black 6 ” Yellow 7 ” Violet 8 Black Yellow 9 ” Violet (3) The screen tape must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 5.1 through 5.4. (4) The screen tape must be tested for dielectric strength by completely removing the protective coating from one end to be used for grounding purposes. (i) Using an electrode, over a 30 centimeter (1 foot) length, apply a direct current voltage at the rate of rise of 500 volts/second until failure. (ii) No breakdown should occur below 8 kilovolts. (f) Filling compound. (2) The filling compound must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 4.4 through 4.4.4. (3) The individual cable manufacturer must satisfy RUS that the filling compound selected for use is suitable for its intended application. The filling compound must be applied to the cable in such a manner that the cable components will not be degraded. (g) Core wrap. (2) If required for manufacturing reasons, white or colored binders of nonhygroscopic and nonwicking material may be applied over the core and/or wrap. When used, binders must meet the requirements specified in paragraph (d)(5) of this section. (3) Sufficient filling compound must be applied to the core wrap so that voids or air spaces existing between the core and the inner side of the core wrap are minimized. (h) Flooding compound. (2) The flooding compound must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 4.5 and the jacket slip test requirements of appendix A, paragraph (III)(5) of this section. (3) The individual cable manufacturer must satisfy RUS that the flooding compound selected for use is acceptable for the application. (i) Shield and optional armor. (2) For unarmored cable the shield overlap must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.2. Core diameter is defined as the diameter under the core wrap and binding. (3) For cables containing the coated aluminum shield/coated steel armor (CACSP) sheath design, the coated aluminum shield must be applied in accordance with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.2, Dual Tape Shielding System. (4) General requirements for application of the shielding material are as follows: (i) Successive lengths of shielding tapes may be joined during the manufacturing process by means of cold weld, electric weld, soldering with a nonacid flux, or other acceptable means. (ii) Shield splices must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.3. (iii) The corrugations and the application process of the coated aluminum and copper bearing shields must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.1. (iv) The shielding material must be applied in such a manner as to enable the cable to pass the cold bend test specified in paragraph (l)(3) of this section. (5) The following is a list of acceptable materials for use as cable shielding. Other types of shielding materials may also be used provided they are accepted by RUS prior to their use. Standard Cable Gopher Resistant Cable 8-mil Coated Aluminum 1 10-mil Copper 5-mil Copper 6-mil Copper-Clad 1 1 1 (i) The 8-mil aluminum tape must be plastic coated on both sides and must comply with the requirements of ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.2.2. (ii) The 5-mil copper tape must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.2.3. (iii) The 10-mil copper tape must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.2.4. (iv) The 6-mil copper clad stainless steel tape must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.2.5. (v) The 5-mil copper clad stainless steel tape must be in the fully annealed condition and must conform to the requirements of American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B 694-86, with a cladding ratio of 16/68/16. (A) The electrical conductivity of the clad tape must be a minimum of 28 percent of the International Annealed Copper Standard (IACS) when measured per ASTM B 193-87. (B) The tape must be nominally 0.13 millimeter (0.005 inch) thick with a minimum thickness of 0.11 millimeter (0.0045 inch). (vi) The 5-mil copper clad alloy steel tape must be in the fully annealed condition and the copper component must conform to the requirements of ASTM B 224-80 and the alloy steel component must conform to the requirements of ASTM A 505-87, with a cladding ratio of 16/68/16. (A) The electrical conductivity of the copper clad alloy steel tape must comply with the requirement specified in paragraph (i)(5)(v)(A) of this section. (B) The thickness of the copper clad alloy steel tape must comply with the requirements specified in paragraph (i)(5)(v)(B) of this section. (vii) The 6-mil and 7-mil 194 copper alloy tapes must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.2.6. (6) The corrugation extensibility of the coated aluminum shield must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.4. (7) When the jacket is bonded to the plastic coated aluminum shield, the bond between the jacket and shield must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 7.2.6. (8) A single plastic-coated steel corrugated armor must be applied longitudinally directly over the coated aluminum shield listed in paragraph (i)(5) of this section with an overlap complying with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.2, Outer Steel Tape. (9) Successive lengths of steel armoring tapes may be joined during the manufacturing process by means of cold weld, electric weld, soldering with a nonacid flux, or other acceptable means. Armor splices must comply with the breaking strength and resistance requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.3. (10) The corrugations and the application process of the coated steel armor must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.1. (i) The corrugations of the armor tape must coincide with the corrugations of the coated aluminum shield. (ii) Overlapped portions of the armor tape must be in register (corrugations must coincide at overlap) and in contact at the outer edge. (11) The armoring material must be so applied to enable the cable to pass the cold bend test as specified in paragraph (l)(3) of this section. (12) The 6-mil steel tape must be electrolytic chrome-coated steel (ECCS) plastic coated on both sides and must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.2.8. (13) When the jacket is bonded to the plastic-coated steel armor, the bond between the jacket and armor must comply with the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA-S-84-608-1988, paragraph 7.2.6. (j) Cable jacket. (2) The raw materials used for the cable jacket must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 7.2.1. (3) Jacketing material removed from or tested on the cable must meet the performance requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 7.2.3 and 7.2.4. (4) The thickness of the jacket must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 7.2.2. (k) Electrical requirements Conductor resistance. (2) Resistance unbalance. (ii) The resistance unbalance between tip and ring conductors shall be random with respect to the direction of unbalance. That is, the resistance of the tip conductors shall not be consistently higher with respect to the ring conductors and vice versa. (3) Mutual capacitance. (4) Capacitance difference. (ii) When measuring screened cable, the inner and outer pairs must be selected from both sides of the screen. (5) Pair-to-pair capacitance unbalance Pair-to-pair. (ii) Screened cable. (A) Between pairs adjacent in a layer in an individual compartment; (B) Between pairs in centers of 4 pairs or less in an individual compartment; and (C) Between pairs in adjacent layers in an individual compartment when the number of pairs in the inner (smaller) layer is 6 or less. The center is counted as a layer. (iii) In cables with 25 pairs or less, the root-mean-square (rms) value must include all the pair-to-pair unbalances measured for each compartment separately. (iv) In cables containing more than 25 pairs, the rms value must include the pair-to-pair unbalances in the separate compartments. (6) Pair-to-ground capacitance unbalance Pair-to-ground. (ii) When measuring pair-to-ground capacitance unbalance all pairs except the pair under test are grounded to the shield and/or shield/armor except when measuring cables containing super units in which case all other pairs in the same super unit must be grounded to the shield. (iii) The screen tape must be left floating during the test. (iv) Pair-to-ground capacitance unbalance may vary directly with the length of the cable. (7) Attenuation. (ii) For T1C type cables over 12 pairs, the maximum average attenuation of all pairs on any reel must not exceed the values listed below when measured at a frequency of 1576 kilohertz at or corrected to a temperature of 20 ±1 °C. The test must be conducted in accordance with ASTM D 4566-90. AWG Maximum Average Attenuation decibel/kilometer (dB/km) (decibel/mile) 19 13.4 (21.5) 22 18.3 (29.4) 24 23.1 (37.2) (8) Crosstalk loss. (ii) The near-end power sum crosstalk loss (NEXT) as measured on completed cable must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 8.8, NEXT Table. (iii) Screened cable. (B) For T1C screened cable the NEXT as measured on the completed cable must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 8.9 and 8.9.2. (9) Insulation resistance. (10) High voltage test. (ii) In each length of completed cable, the dielectric between the shield and/or armor and conductors in the core must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 8.13, Single Jacketed, Solid Column. In screened cable the screen tape must be left floating. (iii) Screened cable. (B) In this test, the cable shield and/or armor must be left floating. (11) Electrical variations. (ii) The maximum number of pairs in a cable which may vary as specified in paragraph (k)(11)(iii) of this section from the electrical parameters given in this section are listed below. These pairs may be excluded from the arithmetic calculation. Nominal Pair Count Maximum Number of Pairs With Allowable Electrical Variation 6-100 1 101-300 2 301-400 3 401-600 4 601 and above 6 (iii) Parameter variations. Capacitance unbalance-to-ground. (B) Resistance unbalance. (C) Conductor resistance, maximum. AWG ohms/kilometer (ohms/1000 feet) 19 29.9 (9.1) 22 60.0 (18.3) 24 94.5 (28.8) 26 151.6 (46.2) Note: (l) Mechanical requirements Compound flow test. (2) Water penetration. (3) Cable cold bend test. (4) Cable impact test. (5) Jacket notch test (CACSP sheath only). (6) Cable torsion test (CACSP sheath only). (m) Sheath slitting cord (optional). (2) When a sheath slitting cord is used it must be nonhygroscopic and nonwicking, continuous throughout a length of cable and of sufficient strength to open the sheath without breaking the cord. (n) Identification marker and length marker. (2) The markings must be printed on the jacket at regular intervals of not more than 0.6 meter (2 feet). (3) The completed cable must have sequentially numbered length markers in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 10.1.5. The color of the ink used for the initial outer jacket marking must be either white or silver. (o) Preconnectorized cable (optional). (2) The splicing modules must meet the requirements of RUS Bulletin 345-54, PE-52, RUS Specification for Telephone Cable Splicing Connectors (Incorporated by reference at § 1755.97), and be accepted by RUS prior to their use. (p) Acceptance testing and extent of testing. (2) For initial acceptance, the manufacturer must submit: (i) An original signature certification that the product fully complies with each section of the specification; (ii) Qualification Test Data, per appendix A of this section; (iii) To periodic plant inspections; (iv) A certification that the product does or does not comply with the domestic origin manufacturing provisions of the “Buy American” requirements of the Rural Electrification Act of 1938 (7 U.S.C. 901 et seq. (v) Written user testimonials concerning field performance of the product; and (vi) Other nonproprietary data deemed necessary by the Chief, Outside Plant Branch (Telephone). (3) For requalification acceptance, the manufacturer must submit an original signature certification that the product fully complies with each section of the specification, excluding the Qualification Section, and a certification that the product does or does not comply with the domestic origin manufacturing provisions of the “Buy American” requirements of the Rural Electrification Act of 1938 (7 U.S.C. 901 et seq. (4) Initial and requalification acceptance requests should be addressed to: Chairman, Technical Standards Committee “A” (Telephone), Telecommunications Standards Division, Rural Utilities Service, Washington, DC 20250-1500. (5) Tests on 100 percent of completed cable. (ii) The screen tape of each length of screened cable must be tested for continuity in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 8.16. (iii) Dielectric strength between conductors and shield and/or armor must be tested to determine freedom from grounds in accordance with paragraph (k)(10)(ii) of this section. (iv) Dielectric strength between conductors and screen tape must be tested to determine freedom from grounds in accordance with paragraph (k)(10)(iii) of this section. (v) Each conductor in the completed cable must be tested for continuity in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 8.16. (vi) Dielectric strength between conductors must be tested to insure freedom from shorts and crosses in each length of completed cable in accordance with paragraph (k)(10)(i) of this section. (vii) Each conductor in the completed preconnectorized cable must be tested for continuity. (viii) Each length of completed preconnectorized cable must be tested for split pairs. (ix) The average mutual capacitance must be measured on all cables. If the average mutual capacitance for the first 100 pairs tested from randomly selected groups is between 50 and 53 nanofarad/kilometer (nF/km) (80 and 85 nanofarad/mile), the remainder of the pairs need not be tested on the 100 percent basis (See paragraph (k)(3) of this section). (6) Capability tests. (i) Performance requirements for conductor insulation, jacketing material, and filling and flooding compounds; (ii) Bonding properties of coated or laminated shielding and armoring materials and performance requirements for screen tape; (iii) Sequential marking and lettering; (iv) Capacitance difference, capacitance unbalance, crosstalk, and attenuation; (v) Insulation resistance, conductor resistance and resistance unbalance; (vi) Cable cold bend and cable impact tests; (vii) Water penetration and compound flow tests; and (viii) Jacket notch and cable torsion tests. (q) Summary of records of electrical and physical tests. (2) Measurements and computed values must be rounded off to the number of places or figures specified for the requirement according to ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 1.3. (r) Manufacturing irregularities. (2) Minor defects in jackets (defects having a dimension of 3 millimeters (0.125 inch) or less in any direction) may be repaired by means of heat fusing in accordance with good commercial practices utilizing sheath grade compounds. (s) Preparation for shipment. (2) The thermal wrap must comply with the requirements of ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 10.3. When a thermal reel wrap is supplied, the wrap must be applied to the reel and must be suitably secured in place to minimize thermal exposure to the cable during storage and shipment. The use of the thermal reel wrap as a means of reel protection will be at the option of the manufacturer unless specified by the end user. (3) The outer end of the cable must be securely fastened to the reel head so as to prevent the cable from becoming loose in transit. The inner end of the cable must be securely fastened in such a way as to make it readily available if required for electrical testing. Spikes, staples, or other fastening devices which penetrate the cable jacket must not be used. The method of fastening the cable ends must be accepted by RUS prior to its use. (4) Each length of cable must be wound on a separate reel unless otherwise specified or agreed to by the purchaser. (5) The arbor hole must admit a spindle 63 millimeters (2.5 inches) in diameter without binding. Steel arbor hole liners may be used but must be accepted by RUS prior to their use. (6) Each reel must be plainly marked to indicate the direction in which it should be rolled to prevent loosening of the cable on the reel. (7) Each reel must be stenciled or labeled on either one or both sides with the information specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 10.4 and the RUS cable designation: Cable Designation BFC Cable Construction Pair Count Conductor Gauge A = Coated Aluminum Shield C = Copper Shield Y = Gopher Resistant Shield X = Armored, Separate Shield H = T1 Screened Cable H1C = T1C Screened Cable P = Preconnectorized Example: BFCXH100-22 Buried Filled Cable, Armored (w/separate shield), T1 Screened Cable, 100 pair, 22 AWG. (8) When cable manufactured to the requirements of this section is shipped, both ends must be equipped with end caps acceptable to RUS. (9) When preconnectorized cables are shipped, the splicing modules must be protected to prevent damage during shipment and handling. The protection method must be acceptable to RUS and accepted prior to its use. (10) All cables ordered for use in underground duct applications must be equipped with a factory-installed pulling-eye on the outer end in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 10.5.2. (The information and recordkeeping requirements of this section have been approved by the Office of Management and Budget under the control number 0572-0059) Appendix A to § 1755.390—Qualification Test Methods (I) The test procedures described in this appendix are for qualification of initial designs and major modification of accepted designs. Included in (V) of this appendix are suggested formats that may be used in submitting the test results to RUS. (II) Sample selection and preparation. (a) Length A shall be 10 ±0.2 meters (33 ±0.5 feet) long and must be maintained at 23 ±3 °C. One length is required. (b) Length B shall be 12 ±0.2 meters (40 ±0.5 feet) long. Prepare the test sample by removing the jacket, shield or shield/armor and core wrap for a sufficient distance on both ends to allow the insulated conductors to be flared out. Remove sufficient conductor insulation so that appropriate electrical test connections can be made at both ends. Coil the sample with a diameter of 15 to 20 times its sheath diameter. Three lengths are required. (c) Length C shall be one meter (3 feet) long. Four lengths are required. (d) Length D shall be 300 millimeters (1 foot) long. Four lengths are required. (e) Length E must be 600 millimeters (2 feet) long. Four lengths are required. (f) Length F shall be 3 meters (10 feet) long and must be maintained at 23 ±3 °C for the duration of the test. Two lengths are required. (2) Data reference temperature. (III) Environmental tests Heat aging test Test samples. (b) Sequence of tests. (i) Water Immersion Test outlined in (III)(2) of this appendix; (ii) Water Penetration Test outlined in (III)(3) of this appendix; (iii) Insulation Compression Test outlined in (III)(4) of this appendix; and (iv) Jacket Slip Strength Test outlined in (III)(5) of this appendix. (c) Initial measurements. (ii) The attenuation at 150 and 772 kilohertz may be calculated from open circuit admittance (Yoc) and short circuit impedance (Zsc) or may be obtained by direct measurement of attenuation. (iii) Record on suggested formats in (V) of this appendix or on other easily readable formats. (d) Heat conditioning. (ii) At the end of this period note any exudation of cable filler. Measure and calculate the parameters given in (III)(1)(c) of this appendix. Record on suggested formats in (V) of this appendix or on other easily readable formats. (iii) Cut away and discard a one meter (3 foot) section from each end of length B. (e) Overall electrical deviation. (ii) The stability of the electrical parameters after completion of this test must be within the following prescribed limits: (A) Capacitance. (B) The change in average mutual capacitance must be less than 5 percent over frequency 1 to 150 kilohertz; and (C) Attenuation. (2) Water immersion electrical test Test sample selection. (b) Test sample preparation. (c) Capacitance testing. (i) Remeasure the mutual capacitance after the cables have been submerged for 24 hours and again after 30 days. (ii) Record each sample separately on suggested formats in (V) of this appendix or on other easily readable formats. (d) Overall electrical deviation. (ii) The average mutual capacitance must be within 5 percent of its original value. (3) Water penetration testing. (b) Test per Option A or Option B—(i) Option A. (ii) Option B. (4) Insulation compression test Test Sample D. (b) Sample testing. (5) Jacket slip strength test Sample selection. (b) Sample preparation. (c) Sample conditioning and testing. (6) Humidity exposure. (b) Immediately after completing the measurements, expose the test sample to 100 temperature cyclings. Relative humidity within the chamber must be maintained at 90 ±2 percent. One cycle consists of beginning at a stabilized chamber and test sample temperature of 52 ±1 °C, increasing the temperature to 57 ±1 °C, allowing the chamber and test samples to stabilize at this level, then dropping the temperature back to 52 ±1 °C. (c) Repeat steps (III)(1)(d)(ii) through (III)(5)(c) of this appendix. (7) Temperature cycling. (b) Immediately after completing the measurements, subject the test sample to the 10 cycles of temperature between a minimum of −40 °C and + 60 °C. The test sample must be held at each temperature extreme for a minimum of 1 1/2 (c) Repeat steps (III)(1)(d)(ii) through (III)(5)(c) of this appendix. (IV) Control sample Test samples. (2) Repeat steps (III)(2) through (III)(5)(c) of this appendix except use length A instead of length B. (3) Surge Test. (b) The samples must be capable of withstanding without damage, a single surge voltage of 20 kilovolts peak between conductors, and a 35 kilovolts peak surge voltage between conductors and the shield or shield/armor as hereinafter described. The surge voltage must be developed from a capacitor discharged through a forming resistor connected in parallel with the dielectric of the test sample. The surge generator constants must be such as to produce a surge of 1.5 × 40 microsecond wave shape. (c) The shape of the generated wave must be determined at a reduced voltage by connecting an oscilloscope across the forming resistor with the cable sample connected in parallel with the forming resistor. The capacitor bank is charged to the test voltage and then discharged through the forming resistor and test sample. The test sample will be considered to have passed the test if there is no distinct change in the wave shape obtained with the initial reduced voltage compared to that obtained after the application of the test voltage. (V) The following suggested formats may be used in submitting the test results to RUS: Environmental Conditioning______________ Frequency kilohertz Pair Number Capacitance nF/km (nanofarad/mile) Initial Final 1 ____________ ____________ 3 ____________ ____________ 5 ____________ ____________ 7 ____________ ____________ 9 ____________ ____________ 11 ____________ ____________ 13 ____________ ____________ 15 ____________ ____________ 17 ____________ ____________ 19 ____________ ____________ 21 ____________ ____________ 23 ____________ ____________ 25 ____________ ____________ Average x ____________ ____________ Overall Percent Difference in Average x Environmental Conditioning______________ Frequency kilohertz Pair Number Capacitance Attenuation nF/km (nanofarad/mile) dB/km (decibel/mile) Initial Final Initial Final 1 ______ ______ ______ ______ 3 ______ ______ ______ ______ 5 ______ ______ ______ ______ 7 ______ ______ ______ ______ 9 ______ ______ ______ ______ 11 ______ ______ ______ ______ 13 ______ ______ ______ ______ 15 ______ ______ ______ ______ 17 ______ ______ ______ ______ 19 ______ ______ ______ ______ 21 ______ ______ ______ ______ 23 ______ ______ ______ ______ 25 ______ ______ ______ ______ Average x ______ ______ ______ ______ Overall Percent Difference in Average x Environmental Conditioning______________ Frequency kilohertz Pair Number Capacitance Attenuation nF/km (nanofarad/mile) dB/km (decibel/mile) Initial Final Initial Final 1 ______ ______ ______ ______ 3 ______ ______ ______ ______ 5 ______ ______ ______ ______ 7 ______ ______ ______ ______ 9 ______ ______ ______ ______ 11 ______ ______ ______ ______ 13 ______ ______ ______ ______ 15 ______ ______ ______ ______ 17 ______ ______ ______ ______ 19 ______ ______ ______ ______ 21 ______ ______ ______ ______ 23 ______ ______ ______ ______ 25 ______ ______ ______ ______ Average x ______ ______ ______ ______ Overall Percent Difference in Average x Environmental Conditioning______________ Water Immersion Test ( kilohertz) Pair Number Capacitance nF/km (nanofarad/mile) Initial 24 Hours Final 1 ______ ______ ______ 3 ______ ______ ______ 5 ______ ______ ______ 7 ______ ______ ______ 9 ______ ______ ______ 11 ______ ______ ______ 13 ______ ______ ______ 15 ______ ______ ______ 17 ______ ______ ______ 19 ______ ______ ______ 21 ______ ______ ______ 23 ______ ______ ______ 25 ______ ______ ______ Average x ______ ______ ______ Overall Percent Difference in Average x Water Penetration Test Option A Option B End Leakage grams Weight Gain grams End Leakage grams Penetration mm (in.) Control Heat Age Humidity Exposure Temperature Cycling Insulation Compression Failures Control ________________ Heat Age ________________ Humidity Exposure ________________ Temperature Cycling ________________ Jacket Slip Strength @ 50 °C Load in newtons (pound-force) Control ________________ Heat Age ________________ Humidity Exposure ________________ Temperature Cycling ________________ Filler Exudation (grams) Heat Age ________________ Humidity Exposure ________________ Temperature Cycle ________________ Surge Test (kilovolts) Conductor to Conductor ________________ Shield to Conductors ________________ [58 FR 29338, May 20, 1993; 58 FR 32749, June 11, 1993, as amended at 60 FR 1711, Jan. 5, 1995; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] §§ 1755.391-1755.396 [Reserved] § 1755.397 RUS performance specification for line concentrators. (a) General. (i) Terminating subscriber lines at a location remote from the serving central office; (ii) Concentrating the subscriber lines over a few transmission and supervisory paths to the serving central office; and (iii) Terminating the lines at the central office without loss of individual identity. A subscriber connected to a line concentrator shall be capable of having essentially the same services as a subscriber connected directly to the central office equipment (COE). Intra-unit calling among subscribers connected to the concentrator may be provided, but is not required. (2) Industry standards, or portions thereof, referred to in this paragraph (a) are incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552 (a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of these standards are available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2838, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (3) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards are available from ANSI Inc., 11 West 42nd Street, 13th floor, New York, NY 10036, telephone 212-642-4900. (i) ANSI Standard S1.4-1983, Specification for Sound Level Meters, including Amendment S1.4A-1985. (ii) [Reserved] (4) American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) are available from 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103, telephone 215-299-5400. (i) ASTM Specification B33-91, Standard Specifications for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. (ii) [Reserved] (5) Bell Communications Research (Bellcore) standards are available from Bellcore Customer Service, 8 Corporate Place, Piscataway, NJ 08854, telephone 1-800-521-2673. (i) TR-TSY-000008, Issue 2, August 1987, Digital Interface between the SLC 96 Digital Loop Carrier System and a Local Digital Switch. (ii) Bell Communications Research (Bellcore) document TR-TSY-000057, Issue 1, April 1987, including Revision 1, November 1988, Functional Criteria for Digital Loop Carrier Systems. (iii) Bell Communications Research (Bellcore) Document TR-NWT-000303, Issue 2, December 1992, including Revision 1, December 1993, Integrated Digital Loop Carrier System Generic Requirements, Objectives, and Interface. (6) Federal Standard H28, Screw-Thread Standards for Federal Services, March 31, 1978, including Change Notice 1, May 28, 1986; Change Notice 2, January 20, 1989; and Change Notice 3, March 12, 1990. Copies may be obtained from the General Services Administration, Specification Section, 490 East L'Enfant Plaza SW, Washington, DC 20407, telephone 202-755-0325. (7) IEEE standards are available from IEEE Service Center, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscataway, NJ 08854, telephone 1-800-521-2673. (i) IEEE Standard 455-1985, Standard Test Procedure for Measuring Longitudinal Balance of Telephone Equipment Operating in the Voice Band. (ii) [Reserved] (8) RUS standards are available from Publications and Directives Management Branch, Administrative Services Division, Rural Utilities Service, room 0180, South Building, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250-1500. (i) RUS Bulletin 345-50, PE-60 (Sept 1979), RUS Specification for Trunk Carrier Systems. (ii) [Reserved] (b) Types of requirements. (2) The concentrator system shall communicate with standard T1 digital transmission format at a minimum between the concentrator and central office terminals. Analog conversion functions at remote and central office terminals shall be capable of being eliminated to accommodate end-to-end digital transmission. (3) The LC shall operate properly as an integral part of the telephone network when connected to physical or carrier derived circuits and central offices meeting RUS specifications and other generally accepted telecommunications practices, such as Bellcore documents TR-NWT-000303, Integrated Digital Loop Carrier System Generic Requirements, Objectives and Interface; TR-TSY-000008, Digital Interface between the SLC 96 Digital Loop Carrier System and a Local Digital Switch; and TR-TSY-000057, Functional Criteria for Digital Loop Carrier Systems. (4) For RUS acceptance consideration of a LC, the manufacturer must certify and demonstrate that all requirements specified in this section are available and in compliance with this section. (5) Certain requirements are included in this section for features which may not be needed for every application. Such features are identifiable by the inclusion in the requirements of some such phrase as “when specified by the owner” or “as specified by the owner.” In some cases where an optional feature will not be required by an owner, either now or in the future, a system which does not provide this feature shall be considered to be in compliance with the specification for the specific installation under consideration, but not in compliance with the entire specification. (6) The owner may properly request bids from any supplier of an RUS accepted LC whose system provides all the features which will be required for a specific installation. (7) When required by the owner, the supplier shall state compliance to the Carrier Serving Area (CSA) requirements, as stated in Bell Communications Research (Bellcore) Standard TR-TSY-000057, Functional Criteria for Digital Loop Carrier Systems. (c) Reliability. (2) The line concentrator terminal units shall be designed such that there will be no more than 4 hours of total outages in 20 years. (d) System type acceptance tests. (e) Features required. (f) Subscriber lines General. (ii) There should be provisions for such types of lines as ground start, loop start, regular subscriber, pay stations, etc. (2) Dialing. General. (ii) Subscriber dial interdigital time. (iii) Subscriber line pushbutton dialing frequencies. Low group frequencies (Hz) High group frequencies (Hz) 1209 1336 1477 1633 697 1 2 3 Spare. 770 4 5 6 Spare. 852 7 8 9 Spare. 941 * 0 # Spare. (3) Ringing. (ii) When ringing generators are provided in the LC on an ancillary basis, they shall be accepted or technically accepted by RUS. (iii) Where ringing is generated at the remote end, the ringing system shall provide sufficient ringing on a bridged basis over the voltage and temperature limits of this specification and over subscriber loops within the limits stated by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall state the minimum number (not less than two) of main station ringers that can be used for each ringing option available. (g) Traffic. (ii) Service to customers served by a traffic sensitive LC should not be noticeably different than the service to customers served by the dedicated physical pairs from the central office so that uniform grade of service will be provided to all customers in any class of service. Reference § 1755.522(p)(1)(i), RUS General Specification for Digital, Stored Program Controlled Central Office Equipment. (2) Traffic and Plant Registers. (3) When required, traffic data will be stored in electronic storage registers or a block of memory consisting of one or more traffic counters for each item to be measured. The bidder shall indicate what registers are to be supplied, their purpose and the means for displaying the information locally (or at a remote location when available). (h) Transmission requirements General. (2) Telephone transmitter battery supply. (3) Impedance—subscriber loops. (4) Battery noise. (5) Stability. (6) Return loss. Line-to-Line or Line-to-Trunk (2-Wire) Echo Return Loss (ERL)—18 dB, Minimum Singing Return Loss (SRL)—Low—15 dB, Minimum Singing Return Loss (SRL)—High—18 dB, Minimum (7) Longitudinal balance. (8) 60 hz longitudinal current immunity. (9) Steady noise (idle channel at 900 ohm impedance). Maximum—23 dBrnC0 Average—18 dBrnC0 or Less 3KHz Flat—Less than 35 dBrnO as an Objective (10) Impulse noise. (11) Crosstalk coupling. (12) Digital error rate. 8 (13) Quantizing distortion. Input level (dBm0) 1004 or 1020 Hz Minimum signal to distortion with C-message weighting 0 to −30 33 dB −30 to −40 27 dB −40 to −45 22 dB (ii) Due to possible loss of the least significant bit on direct digital connections, a signal to distortion degradation of up to 2 dB may be allowed where adequately justified by the bidder. (14) Overload level. (15) Gain tracking (linearity) Input signal level 1 Maximum gain deviation + 3 to −37 dBm0 ±0.5 dB −37 to −50 dBm0 ±1 dB 1 (16) Frequency response (loss relative to 1004 Hz) Frequency (Hz) Loss at 0 dBm0 input 1 60 20 dB Min. 2 300 −1 to + 3 dB 600 to 2400 + 1 dB 3400 −1 to + 3 dB 1 2 (17) Envelope delay distortion. Frequency (Hz) Microseconds 1000 to 2600 190 800 to 2800 350 600 to 3000 500 400 to 3200 700 (18) Absolute delay. (19) Insertion loss. (20) Detailed requirements for direct digital connections. (ii) The output of a digital-to-digital port shall be Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), encoded in eight-bit words using the mu-255 encoding law and D3 encoding format, and arranged to interface with a T1 span line. (iii) Signaling shall be by means of Multifrequency (MF) or Dual Pulsing (DP) and the system which is inherent in the A and B bits of the D3 format. In the case where A and B bits are not used for signaling or system control, these bits shall only be used for normal voice and data transmission. (iv) When a direct digital interface between the span line and the host central office equipment is to be implemented, the following requirements shall be met: (A) The span line shall be terminated in a central office as a minimum a DS1 (1.544Mb/s) shall be provided; (B) The digital central office equipment shall be programmed to support the operation of the digital port with the line concentrator subscriber terminal; (C) The line concentrator subscriber terminal used with a direct digital interface shall be interchangeable with the subscriber terminal used with a central office terminal. (i) Alarms. (j) Electrical protection Surge protection. (ii) Equipment must pass laboratory tests, simulating a hostile electrical environment, before being placed in the field for the purpose of obtaining field experience. For acceptance consideration RUS requires manufacturers to submit recently completed results (within 90 days of submittal) of data obtained from the prescribed testing. Manufacturers are expected to detail how data and tests were conducted. There are five basic types of laboratory tests which must be applied to exposed terminals in an effort to determine if the equipment will survive. Figure 2 of this section, Summary of Electrical Requirements and Tests, identifies the tests and their application as follows: Figure 2—Summary of Electrical Requirements and Tests Test Application criteria Peak voltage or current Surge waveshape Number of applications and maximum time between Comments Current surge Low impedance paths exposed to surges 500A or lesser current (see fig. 4) 10 × 1000 µs 5 each polarity at 1 minute intervals None. 60 Hz current carrying High or low impedance paths exposed to surges 10A rms or lesser current (see fig. 6) 11 Cycles of 60 Hz (0.183 Sec.) 3 each at 1 minute intervals None. AC Power service surge voltage AC power service connection 2500V or + 3 σ clamping V of arrester employed at 10kV/µs 1.2 × 50 µs 5 each polarity at 1 minute intervals AC arrester, if used, must be removed. Communications line arresters, if used, remain in place. Voltage surge High impedance paths exposed to surges 1000V or + 3 σ dc breakdown of arrester employed 10 × 1000 µs 5 each polarity at 1 minute intervals All primary arresters, if used, must be removed. Arrester response delay Paths protected by arresters, such as gas tubes, with breakdown dependent on V. rate of rise + 3 σ breakdown of arrester employed at 100V/µs of rise 100V/µs rise decay to 1 2 5 each polarity at 1 minute intervals All primary arrestors, if used, must be removed. (iii) Electrical protection requirements for line concentrator equipment can be summarized briefly as follows: (A) Current surge tests simulate the stress to which a relatively low impedance path may be subjected before main frame protectors break down. Paths with a 100 Hz impedance of 50 ohms or less shall be subjected to current surges, employing a 10 × 1000 microsecond waveshape as defined in Figure 3 of this section, Surge Waveshape. For the purpose of determining this impedance, arresters which are mounted within the equipment are to be considered zero impedance. The crest current shall not exceed 500A; however, depending on the impedance of the test specimen this value of current may be lower. The crest current through the sample, multiplied by the sample's 100 Hz impedance, shall not exceed 1000 V. Where sample impedance is less than 2 ohms, peak current shall be limited to 500A as shown in Figure 4 of this section, Current Surge Tests. Figures 3 and 4 follow: (B) Sixty Hertz (60 Hz) current carrying tests shall be applied to simulate an ac power fault which is conducted to the unit over the cable pairs. The test shall be limited to 10 amperes Root Mean Square (rms) of 60 Hz ac for a period of 11 cycles (0.1835 seconds) and shall be applied longitudinally from line to ground. (C) AC power service surge voltage tests shall be applied to the power input terminals of ac powered devices to simulate switching surges or lightning-induced transients on the ac power system. The test shall employ a 1.2 × 50 microsecond waveshape with a crest voltage of 2500 V. Communications line protectors may be left in place for these tests. (D) Voltage surge tests which simulate the voltage stress to which a relatively high impedance path may be subjected before primary protectors break down and protect the circuit. To ensure coordination with the primary protection while reducing testing to the minimum, voltage surge tests shall be conducted at a 1000 volts with primary arresters removed for devices protected by carbon blocks, or the + 3 sigma dc breakdown voltage of other primary arresters. Surge waveshape should be 10 × 1000 microseconds. (E) Arrester response delay tests are designed to stress the equipment in a manner similar to that caused by the delayed breakdown of gap type arresters when subjected to rapidly rising voltages. Arresters shall be removed for these tests, the peak surge voltage shall be the + 3 sigma breakdown voltage of the arrester in question on a voltage rising at 100 V per microsecond, and the time for the surge to decay to half voltage shall equal at least the delay time of the tube as explained in Figure 5 of this section, Arrester Response Delay Time as follows: (iv) Tests shall be conducted in the following sequence. As not all tests are required in every application, non-applicable tests should be omitted: (A) Current Impulse Test; (B) Sixty Hertz (60 Hz) Current Carrying Tests; (C) AC Power Service Impulse Voltage Test; (D) Voltage Impulse Test; and (E) Arrester Response Delay Time Test. (v) A minimum of five applications of each polarity for the surge tests and three for the 60 Hz Current Carrying Tests are the minimum required. All tests shall be conducted with not more than 1 minute between consecutive applications in each series of three or five applications to a specific configuration so that heating effects will be cumulative. See Figure 6 of this section, 60 Hz Current Surge Tests as follows: (vi) Tests shall be applied between each of the following terminal combinations for all line operating conditions: (A) Line tip to ring; (B) Line ring to ground; (C) Line tip to ground; and (D) Line tip and ring tied together to ground. (2) Dielectric strength. (ii) Direct current potentials shall be applied between all line terminals and the equipment chassis and between these terminals and grounded equipment housings in all instances where the circuitry is dc open circuit from the chassis, or connected to the chassis through a capacitor. The duration of all dielectric strength tests shall be at least 1 second. The applied potential shall be at a minimum equal to the plus 3 sigma dc breakdown voltage of the arrester, provided by the line concentrator manufacturer. (3) Insulation resistance. (4) Self-protection. (ii) Printed circuit boards or similar equipment employing electronic components should be self-protecting against external grounds applied to the connector terminals. Board components and coatings applied to finished products shall be of such material or so treated that they will not support combustion. (iii) Every precaution shall be taken to protect electrostatically sensitive components from damage during handling. This shall include written instructions and recommendations. (k) Miscellaneous Interconnect wire. (2) Wire wrapped terminals. (i) 6 turns of 30 gauge; (ii) 6 turns of 26 gauge; (iii) 6 turns of 24 gauge; or (iv) 5 turns of 22 gauge. (3) Protection against corrosion. (4) Screws and bolts. (5) Environmental requirements. (ii) To the extent practicable, the following temperature range objectives shall be met: (A) For equipment mounted in central office and subscriber buildings, the carrier equipment shall operate satisfactory within an ambient temperature range of 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C) and at 80 percent relative humidity between 50 °F and 100 °F (10 °C and 38 °C); and (B) Equipment mounted outdoors in normal operation (with cabinet doors closed) shall operate satisfactorily within an ambient temperature range (external to cabinet) of −40 °F to 140 °F (−40 °C to 60 °C) and at 95 percent relative humidity between 50 °F to 100 °F (10 °C to 38 °C). As an alternative to the (60 °C) requirement, a maximum ambient temperature of 120 °F (49 °C) with equipment (cabinet) exposed to direct sunlight may be substituted. (6) Stenciling. (7) Quantity of equipment bays. (8) Radio and television interference. (9) Housing. (ii) In order to limit corrosion, all metal parts of the housing and mounting frames shall be constructed of suitable corrosion resistant materials or materials protectively coated to render them adequately resistant to corrosion under the climatic and atmospheric conditions existing in the area in which the housing is to be installed. (10) Distributing frame. (ii) The distributing frame shall provide terminals for terminating all incoming cable pairs. Arresters shall be provided for all incoming cable pairs, or for a smaller number of pairs if specified. (iii) The current carrying capacity of each arrester and its associated mounting shall coordinate with a #22 gauge copper conductor without causing a self-sustaining fire or permanently damaging other arrester positions. Where all cable pairs entering the housing are #24 gauge or finer, the arresters and mountings need only coordinate with #24 gauge cable conductors. (iv) Remote terminal protectors may be mounted and arranged so that outside cable pairs may be terminated on the left or bottom side of protectors (when facing the vertical side of the MDF) or on the back surface of the protectors. Means for easy identification of pairs shall be provided. (v) Protectors shall have a “dead front” (either insulated or grounded) where live metal parts are not readily accessible. (vi) Protectors shall be provided with an accessible terminal of each incoming conductor which is suitable for the attachment of a temporary test lead. They shall also be constructed so that auxiliary test fixtures may be applied to open and test the subscriber's circuit in either direction. Terminals shall be suitable for wire wrapped connections or connectorized. (vii) If specified, each protector group shall be furnished with a factory assembled tip cable for splicing to the outside cable; the tip cable shall be 20 feet (6.1 m) in length, unless otherwise specified. Tip cable used shall be RUS accepted. (viii) Protector makes and types used shall be RUS accepted. (l) Power equipment General. (2) Operating voltage. (ii) Where equipment is dc powered, it must operate satisfactorily over a range of 50 volts ±6 volts dc. (iii) Where equipment is ac powered, it must operate satisfactorily over a range of 120±10 volts or 220±10 volts ac. (3) Batteries. (ii) The batteries shall have an ampere hour load capacity of no less than 8 busy hours. When an emergency ac supply source is available, the battery reserve may be reduced to 3 busy hours. (iii) The batteries shall be sealed when they are mounted in the cabinet with the concentrator equipment. (iv) When specified by the owner, battery heaters shall be supplied in a bidder-furnished housing. (4) Charging equipment. (ii) Charging shall be on a full float basis. The rectifiers shall be of the full wave, self-regulating, constant voltage, solid-state type and shall be capable of being turned on and off manually. (iii) When charging batteries, the voltage at the battery terminals shall be adjustable and shall be set at the value recommended for the particular battery being charged, provided it is not above the maximum operating voltage of the central office switching equipment. The voltage shall not vary more than ±0.02 volt dc per cell between 10% load and 100% load. Between 3% and 10% load, the output voltage shall not vary more than ±0.04 volt dc per cell. Beyond full load current the output voltage shall drop sharply. The above output voltage shall be maintained with input line voltage variations of plus or minus 10 percent. Provision shall be made to manually change the output voltage of the rectifier to 2.25 volts per cell to provide an equalization charge on the battery. (iv) The charger noise, when measured with a suitable noise measuring set and under the rated battery capacitance and load conditions, shall not exceed 22 dBrnC. See Figure 7 of this section, Charger Noise Test as follows: (v) The charging equipment shall be provided with a means for indicating a failure of charging current whether due to ac power failure, an internal failure in the charger, or to other circumstances which might cause the output voltage of the charger to drop below the battery voltage. Where a supplementary constant current charger is used, an alarm shall be provided to indicate a failure of the charger. (vi) Audible noise developed by the charging equipment shall be kept to a minimum. Acoustic noise resulting from operation of the rectifier shall be expressed in terms of dB indicated on a sound level meter conforming to American National Standards Institute S1.4, and shall not exceed 65 dB (A-weighting) measured at any point 5 feet (1.5m) from any vertical surface of the rectifier. (vii) The charging equipment shall be designed so that neither the charger nor the central office equipment is subject to damage in case the battery circuit is opened for any value of load within the normal limits. (5) Power panel. (ii) Power panels, cabinets and shelves, and associated wiring shall be designed initially to handle the line concentrator terminal when it reaches its ultimate capacity as specified by the owner. (iii) The power panel shall be of the “dead front” type. (6) Ringing equipment. (7) Interrupter equipment. (8) Special systems. (m) Fusing requirements General. (ii) Design precautions shall be taken to prevent the possibility of equipment damage arising from the insertion of an electronic package into the wrong connector or the removal of a package from any connector or improper insertion of the correct card in its connector. (2) Fuses. (n) Trouble location and test Equipment. (ii) When required, a jack or other connector shall be provided to connect a fault or trouble recorder (printer or display). (2) Maintenance system. (ii) The maintenance system shall be arranged to provide the ability to determine trouble to an individual card, functional group of cards, or other equipment unit. (o) Spare parts. (p) Drawings and printed material. (2) Three complete sets of legible drawings shall be provided for each central office to be accessed. Each set shall include all of the following: (i) Drawings of major equipment items such as frames, with the location of major component items of equipment shown therein; (ii) Wiring diagrams indicating the specific method of wiring used on each item of equipment and interconnection wiring between items of equipment; (iii) Maintenance drawings covering each equipment item that contains replaceable parts, appropriately identifying each part by name and part number; and (iv) Job drawings including all drawings that are individual to the particular line concentrator involved such as mainframe, power equipment, etc. (3) The following information shall also be furnished: (i) A complete index of required drawings; (ii) An explanation of electrical principles of operation of overall concentrator system; (iii) A list of tests which can be made with each piece of test equipment furnished and an explanation of the method of making each test; (iv) A sample of each form recommended for use in keeping records; (v) The criteria for analyzing results of tests and determining appropriate corrective action; (vi) A set of general notes on methods of isolating equipment faults to specific printed circuit cards in the equipment; (vii) A list of typical troubles which might be encountered, together with general indications as to probable location of each trouble; and (viii) All special line concentrator system grounding requirements. (4) When installation is to be done by the bidder a complete set of drawings shall be provided by the owner, such as floor plans, lighting, grounding and ac power access. (q) Installation and acceptance General. (2) Responsibilities of owner. (i) Allow the bidder and its employees free access to the premises and facilities at all hours during the progress of the installation; (ii) Provide access to the remote site and any other site for development work needed during the installation; (iii) Take such action as necessary to ensure that the premises are dry and free from dust and in such condition as not to be hazardous to the installation personnel or the material to be installed (not required when remote terminal is not installed in a building); (iv) Provide heat or air conditioning when required and general illumination in rooms in which work is to be performed or materials stored; (v) Provide suitable openings in buildings to allow material to be placed in position (not required when a remote terminal is not installed in a building); (vi) Provide the necessary conduit and commercial and dc-ac inverter output power to the locations shown on the approved floor plan drawings; (vii) Provide 110 volts a.c., 60 Hz commercial power equipped with a secondary arrester and a reasonable number of outlets for test, maintenance and installation equipment; (viii) Provide suitable openings or channels and ducts for cables and conductors from floor to floor and from room to room; (ix) Provide suitable ground leads, as designated by the bidder (not required when remote terminal is not installed in a building); (x) Provide the necessary wiring, central office ground and commercial power service, with a secondary arrester, to the location of an exterior remote terminal installation based on the voltage and load requirements furnished voltage and load requirements furnished by the bidder; (xi) Test at the owners expense all lines and trunks for continuity, leakage and loop resistance and ensure that all lines and trunks are suitable for operation with the central office and remote terminal equipment specified; (xii) Make alterations and repairs to buildings necessary for proper installation of material, except to repair damage for which the bidder or its employees are responsible; (xiii) Connect outside cable pairs on the distributing frame (those connected to protectors); (xiv) Furnish all line, class of service assignment, and party line assignment information to permit bidder to program the data base memory within a reasonable time prior to final testing; (xv) Release for the bidder's use, as soon as possible, such portions of the existing plant as are necessary for the proper completion of such tests as require coordination with existing facilities including facilities for T1 span lines with properly installed repeaters between the central office and the remote terminal installations; (xvi) Make prompt inspections as it deems necessary when notified by the bidder that the equipment, or any part thereof, is ready for acceptance; (xvii) Provide adequate fire protection apparatus at the remote terminal, including one or more fire extinguishers or fire extinguishing systems of the gaseous type, that has low toxicity and effect on equipment; (xviii) Provide necessary access ports for cable, if underfloor cabling is selected; (xix) Install equipment and accessory plant devices mounted external to the central office building and external to the repeater and other outside housings including filters, repeater housings, splicing of repeater cable stubs, externally mounted protective devices and other such accessory devices in accordance with written instructions provided by the bidder; and (xx) Make all cross connections (at the MDF or Intermediate Distribution Frame IDF) between the physical trunk or carrier equipment and the central office equipment unless otherwise specified in appendix A of this section. (3) Responsibilities of bidder. (i) Allow the owner and its representatives access to all parts of the building at all times; (ii) Obtain the owner's permission before proceeding with any work necessitating cutting into or through any part of the building structure such as girders, beams, concrete or tile floors, partitions or ceilings (does not apply to the installation of lag screws, expansion bolts, and similar devices used for fastening equipment to floors, columns, walls, and ceilings); (iii) Be responsible for and repair all damage to the building due to carelessness of the bidder's workforce, exercise reasonable care to avoid any damage to the owner's switching equipment or other property, and report to the owner any damage to the building which may exist or may occur during its occupancy of the building; (iv) Consult with the owner before cutting into or through any part of the building structure in all cases where the fireproofing or moisture proofing may be impaired; (v) Take necessary steps to ensure that all fire fighting apparatus is accessible at all times and all flammable materials are kept in suitable places outside the building; (vi) Not use gasoline, benzene, alcohol, naphtha, carbon tetrachloride or turpentine for cleaning any part of the equipment; (vii) Be responsible for delivering the CO and remote terminal equipment to the sites where they will be needed; (viii) Install the equipment in accordance with the specifications for the line concentrator; (ix) Have all leads brought out to terminal blocks on the MDF (or IDF if stated in appendix A of this section) and have all terminal blocks identified and permanently labeled; (x) Use separate shielded type leads grounded at one end only unless otherwise specified by the owner or bidder or tip cables meeting RUS cable crosstalk requirements for carrier frequencies inside the central office; (xi) Group the cables to separate carrier frequency, voice frequency, signaling, and power leads; (xii) Make the necessary power and ground connections (location as shown in appendix A of this section) to the purchaser's power terminals and ground bus unless otherwise stated in appendix A of this section (ground wire shall be 6 AWG unless otherwise stated); (xiii) Place the battery in service in compliance with the recommendations of the battery manufacturer; (xiv) Make final charger adjustments using the manufacturer's recommended procedure; (xv) Run all jumpers, except line and trunk jumpers (those connected to protectors) unless otherwise specified in appendix A of this section; (xvi) Establish and update all data base memories with subscriber information as supplied by the owner until an agreed turnover time; (xvii) Give the owner notice of completion of the installation at least one week prior to completion; (xviii) Permit the owner or its representative to conduct tests and inspections after installation has been completed in order that the owner may be assured the requirements for installation are met; (xix) Allow access, before turnover, by the owner or its representative, upon request, to the test equipment which is to be turned over as a part of the delivered equipment, to permit the checking of the circuit features which are being tested and to permit the checking of the amount of connected equipment to which the test circuits have access; (xx) Notify the owner promptly of the completion of work of the central office terminals, remote terminals or such portions thereof as are ready for inspection; and (xxi) Correct promptly all defects for which the bidder is responsible. (4) Information to be furnished by bidder. (i) Two copies of the equipment list and the traffic calculations from which the quantities in the equipment list are determined; (ii) Two copies of the traffic tables from which the quantities are determined, if other than the Erlang B traffic tables; (iii) A block diagram of the line concentrator and associated maintenance equipment will be provided; (iv) A prescribed method and criteria for acceptance of the completed line concentrator which will be subject to review; (v) This special grounding requirements including the recommended configuration, suggested equipment and installation methods to be used to accomplish them; (vi) The special handling and equipment requirements to avoid damage resulting from the discharge of static electricity (see paragraph (j)(4)(iii) of this section) or mechanical damage during transit installation and testing; (vii) The location of technical assistance service, its availability and conditions for owner use and charges for the service by the bidder; and (viii) The identification of the subscriber loop limits available beyond the line concentrator. (5) Installation requirements. (ii) All multiple and associated wiring shall be continuous, free from crosses, reverses, and grounds and shall be correctly wired at all points. (iii) An inspection shall be made by the owner or its representatives prior to performing operational and performance tests on the equipment, but after all installing operations which might disturb apparatus adjustments have been completed. The inspection shall be of such character and extent as to disclose with reasonable certainty any unsatisfactory condition of apparatus or equipment. During these inspections, or inspections for apparatus adjustments, or wire connections, or in testing of equipment, a sufficiently detailed examination shall be made throughout the portion of the equipment within which such condition is observed, or is likely to occur, to disclose the full extent of its existence, where any of the following conditions are observed: (A) Apparatus or equipment units failing to compare in quantity and type to that specified for the installation; (B) Apparatus or equipment units damaged or incomplete; (C) Apparatus or equipment affected by rust, corrosion or marred finish; and (D) Other adverse conditions resulting from failure to meet generally accepted standards of good workmanship. (6) Operational tests. (ii) All equipment shall be tested to ensure proper operation with all components connected in all possible combinations and each line shall be tested for proper ring, ring trip and supervision. (iii) All fuses shall be verified for continuity and correct rating. Alarm indication shall be demonstrated for each equipped fuse position. An already failed fuse compatible with the fuse position may be used. (iv) Each alarm or signal circuit shall be checked for correct operation. (v) A sufficient quantity of locally originating and incoming calls shall be made to demonstrate the function of the line concentrator including all equipped transmission paths. When intra-link calling is supplied, all intra-link transmission paths shall be demonstrated. (7) Acceptance tests and data required. (A) A detailed cross connect drawing of alarm to power board, central office battery to physical trunks or carrier system, wiring options used in terminals, channels, filters, repeaters, etc., marked in the owner's copy of the equipment manual or supplied separately; (B) The measured central office supply voltages applied to the equipment terminals or repeaters at the time the jack and test point readings are made and ac supply voltages where equipment is powered from commercial ac sources; (C) A list of all instruments, including accessories, by manufacturer and type number, used to obtain the data; and (D) The measurements at all jack or test points recommended by the manufacturer, including carrier frequency level measurements at all carrier terminals and repeaters where utilized. (ii) Data in the form of a checklist or other notations shall be supplied showing the results of the operational tests. (iii) The bidder shall furnish to the owner a record of the battery cell or multicell unit voltages measured at the completion of the installation of the switching system before it is placed in commercial service. This is not required at a site where the owner furnishes dc power. (8) Joint inspection requirements. (A) The owner shall review the acceptance test data and compare it to the requirements of this section. (B) Sample measurements shall be made on all systems installed under this contract. Test methods should follow procedures described in paragraph (g)(5) of this section. (C) A check shall be made of measured test point and jack readings for compliance with the manufacturer's specifications. This applies also to channels, terminals, carrier frequency repefault locating circuits. (ii) In the event that the measured data or operational tests show that equipment fails to meet the requirements quirements of this section, the deficiencies are to be resolved as set forth in Article II of the 397 Special Equipment Contract. (Copies are available from RUS, room 0174, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250-1500.) The reports of the bidder and the owner shall be detailed as to deficiencies, causes, corrective action necessary, corrective action to be taken, completion time, etc. (The information and recordkeeping requirements of this section have been approved by the Office of Management and Budget under the control number 0572-0059) Appendix A to § 1755.397—Specification for Line Concentrator Detailed Equipment Requirements (Information To Be Supplied by Owner) Telephone Company (Owner) Name: Location: Number of LC's Required: ________ Line Concentrator Locations: Location No. of Lines Central 1. General 1.1 Notwithstanding the bidder's equipment lists, the equipment and materials furnished by the bidder must meet the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (p) of this section, and this appendix A. 1.2 Paragraph (a) through (p) of this section cover the minimum general requirements for line concentrator equipment. 1.3 Paragraph (q) of this section covers the requirements for installation, inspection and testing when such service is included as part of the contract. 1.4 This appendix A covers the technical data for application engineering and detailed equipment requirements insofar as they can be established by the owner. This appendix A shall be filled in by the owner. 1.5 Appendix B of this section covers detailed information on the line concentrator equipment, information on system reliability and traffic capacity as proposed by the bidder. Appendix B of this section is to be filled in by the bidder and must be presented with the bid. Office Name (By Location) LC Designation 2. Number of Subscriber Lines Equipped Wired only Single-Party Pay Station (Type:________) Other (Describe:________) Total 3. Loop Resistance 3.1 Number of non-pay station lines having a loop resistance, including the telephone set as follows: 3.1.1 For physical trunks between the remote and the office units, the loop resistance is to include the resistance of the trunk. No. of lines 1200-1900 ohms 1901-3200 ohms 3201-4500 ohms 3.1.2 Number of pay station lines having a loop resistance, excluding the telephone set, greater than: No. of lines 1200 ohms (Prepay) 1000 ohms (Semi-Postpay) When physical trunks are used, these resistances include that of the facility between the CO and the remote. 3.1.3 Range extension equipment, if required, is to be provided: ________ By Bidder ________ By Owner (Quantity and Type) 4. Traffic Data 4.1 Average combined originating and terminating hundred call seconds (CCS) per line in the busy hour: ______ CCS/Line. (Assume originating & terminating equal.) 4.2 Percent Intra-Calling ________ 4.3 Total Busy Hour Calls ________ 5. TYPE or RINGING 5.1 Frequency No. 1. 2. 3. 4. Frequency (Hz) Max. No. of Phones/Freq. 5.2 Minimum ringing generator capacity to be supplied shall be sufficient to serve ________ lines (each frequency). 6. Central Office Equipment Interface 6.1 COE will be: 6.1.1 COE Manufacturer Type Year Generic 6.1.2 ________ See digital central office specification for the switchboard at ____________________ . 6.2 Interface will be: 6.2.1 ________ Line Circuit(s) 6.2.2 ________ Direct Digital Interface 6.2.3 ________ Other (Describe) 6.3 Mounting rack for line concentrator furnished by: ________ Bidder ________ Owner (Specify width and height of rack available) (Width) (Height) 6.4 Equipment to be installed in existing building: ________ Yes (Attach detailed plan) ________ No 7. Transmission Facilities 7.1 Transmission facilities between the central office and remote terminals shall be: 7.1.1 Type: ________ VF Carrier Derived Circuits ________ Digital Span Line (DS1) ________ Other (Attach a layout of the transmission facilities between the central office and the remote terminals describing transmission and signaling parameters, routing and resistance where applicable.) 7.1.2 Utilizes physical plant ________ Cable Pairs (Existing/New) ________ Other Note: Unless otherwise stated, physical plant will be supplied by the owner. 7.1.3 Terminal equipment for transmission facility to be supplied by: ________ Owner ________ Bidder 7.1.3.1 Carrier e/w voice terminations ________ Yes ________ No Manufacturer and type Central office voice terminations Equipped ________, Wired Only ________ 7.1.3.2 Digital span line (DS1) supplied by ________ Owner ________ Bidder Manufacturer and Type 7.1.3.3 Number of repeaters (per span line) ________ 7.1.3.4 Diverse (alternate) span line routing required ________ Yes (Describe in Item 11) ________ No 7.1.3.5 Span line terminations only ________ Yes ________ No 7.1.3.6 Span line power required (CO and Remote Terminals) ________ Yes ________ No 7.1.3.7 Physical facility between CO and remote Loop Resistance ________ ohms, Length ________ meters 8. Power Equipment Requirements 8.1 Central Office Terminal 8.1.1 Owner-furnished −48 volt dc power ________ Yes ________ No 8.1.2 Other (Describe) 8.1.3 Standby power is available ________ Yes ________ No 8.2 Remote Terminal 8.2.1 Owner-furnished −48 vdc power ________ Yes ________ No 8.2.2 Bidder-furnished power supply ________ Yes ________ No 8.2.3 AC power available at site: ________ 110 vac, 60 Hz, single-phase ________ Other (Describe in Item 11) 8.2.4 A battery reserve of ________ busy hours shall be provided for this line concentrator terminal when it reaches ________ lines at the traffic rates specified. 8.2.5 Batteries supplied shall be: ________ Lead Calcium ________ Stabilized Electrolyte ________ Sealed Lead Acid ________ Other (Describe in item 11) 8.2.6 Standby power is available ________ Yes ________ No 9. Remote Terminal 9.1 Mounting 9.1.1 ________ Outside Housing (To be furnished by bidder) 9.1.2 ________ Concrete Slab to be furnished by owner (Bidder to supply construction details after award.) 9.1.3 ________ Manhole, environmentally controlled (Describe in Item 11) 9.1.4 ________ Pedestal Mounting 9.1.5 ________ Pole Mounting (Owner-furnished installed pole) 9.1.6 ________ Prefab Building (Owner-furnished site) 9.2 Equipment is to be installed in an existing building. ________ Yes ________ No (Attach detailed plan.) 9.3 Other (Describe) 10. Alternates 11. Explanatory Notes Appendix B to § 1755.397—Specification for Line Concentrators Detailed Requirements; Bidder Supplied Information Telephone Company (Owner) Name: Location: Line Concentrator Equipment Locations Central Office Terminal: Remote Terminal: 1. General 1.1 The equipment and materials furnished by the bidder must meet the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (p) of this section. 1.2 Paragraph (a) through (p) of this section cover the minimum general requirements for line concentrator equipment. 1.3 Paragraph (q) of this section covers requirements for installation, inspection and testing when such service is included as part of the contract. 1.4 Appendix A of this section covers the technical data for application engineering and detailed equipment requirements insofar as they can be established by the owner. Appendix A of this section is to be filled in by the owner. 1.5 This appendix B covers detailed information on the line concentrator equipment, information as to system reliability and traffic capacity as proposed by the bidder. This appendix B shall be filled in by the bidder and must be presented with the bid. 2. Performance Objectives 2.1 Reliability (See paragraph (c) of this section) 2.2 Busy Hour Load Capacity and Traffic Delay (See Paragraph (g) of this section) 3. Equipment Quantities Dependent on System Design 3.1 Transmission Facilities between the Central Office and Remote Terminals Type Quantity equipped Quantity wired only 4. Power Requirements 4.1 Central Office Terminal Voltage Current Drain (Amps) Normal ________, Peak ________ Fuse Qty ________, Size ________, Type ________ Heat Dissipation (BTU/Hr.) ________ 4.2 Remote Terminal AC or DC Voltage Current Drain (Amps) Normal ________, Peak ________ Fuse Qty ________, Size ________, Type ________ Heat Dissipation (BTU/Hr.) ________ Power required for heating or cooling equipment in remote bidder-furnished housing 5. Temperature and Humidity Limitations 5.1 Temperature Central office Remote* Maximum °F (°C) Minimum °F (°C) 5.2 Relative Humidity Central office Remote* Maximum Minimum * Show conditions outside bidder-furnished housing. 6. Explanatory Notes [60 FR 44729, Aug. 29, 1995, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] §§ 1755.398-1755.399 [Reserved] § 1755.400 RUS standard for acceptance tests and measurements of telecommunications plant. Sections 1755.400 through 1755.407 cover the requirements for acceptance tests and measurements on installed copper and fiber optic telecommunications plant and equipment. [62 FR 23960, May 2, 1997] § 1755.401 Scope. (a) Acceptance tests outlined in §§ 1755.400 through 1755.407 are applicable to plant constructed by contract or force account. This testing standard provides for the following: (1) Specific types of tests or measurements for the different types of telecommunications plant and equipment; (2) The method of measurement and types of measuring equipment; (3) The expected results and tolerances permitted to meet the acceptable standards and objectives; (4) Suggested formats for recording the results of the measurements and tests; and (5) Some probable causes of nonconformance and methods for corrective action, where possible. (b) Alternative methods of measurements that provide suitable alternative results shall be permitted with the concurrence of the Rural Utilities Service (RUS). (c) For the purpose of this testing standard, a “measurement” shall be defined as an evaluation where quantitative data is obtained (e.g., resistance in ohms, structural return loss in decibels (dB), etc.) and a “test” shall be defined as an evaluation where no quantitative data is obtained (e.g., a check mark indicating conformance is usually the result of the test). (d) The sequence of tests and measurements described in this standard have been prepared as a guide. Variations from the sequence may be necessary on an individual application basis. (e) There is some overlap in the methods of testing shown; also, the extent of each phase of testing may vary on an individual basis. The borrower shall determine the overall plan of testing, the need and extent of testing, and the responsibility for each phase of testing. [62 FR 23960, May 2, 1997] § 1755.402 Ground resistance measurements. (a) The resistance of the central office (CO) and the remote switching terminal (RST) ground shall be measured before and after it has been bonded to the master ground bar (MGB) where it is connected to the building electric service ground. (b) The ground resistance of electronic equipment such as span line repeaters, carrier terminal equipment, concentrators, etc. shall be measured. (c) Method of measurement. (d) Test equipment. (e) Applicable results. (2) For electronic equipment, the ground resistance shall not exceed 25 ohms. Where the measured ground resistance exceeds 25 ohms, the borrower shall determine what additional grounding, if any, shall be provided. (3) When ground resistance measurements exceed the ground resistance requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) and (e)(2) of this section, refer to RUS Bulletin 1751F-802, “Electrical Protection Grounding Fundamentals,” for suggested methods of reducing the ground resistance. (f) Data record. (g) Probable causes for nonconformance. [62 FR 23960, May 2, 1997] § 1755.403 Copper cable telecommunications plant measurements. (a) Shield or shield/armor continuity. (2) Measurement techniques outlined here for verification of shield or shield/armor continuity are applicable to buried cable plant. Measurements of shield continuity between splices in aerial cable plant should be made prior to completion of splicing. Conclusive results cannot be obtained on aerial plant after all bonds have been completed to the supporting strand, multigrounded neutral, etc. (3) Method of measurement. (ii) Cable shield or shield/armor continuity within pedestals or splices shall be measured with a cable shield splice continuity test set. The step-by-step measurement procedure outlined in the manufacturer's operating instructions for the specific test equipment being used shall be followed. (4) Test equipment. (ii) A cable shield splice continuity tester shall be used to measure shield or shield/armor continuity within pedestals or splices. (5) Applicable results. Table 1—Shield Resistance @ 68 °F (20 °C) Cable Diameters Versus Shield Types [English Units] Outside diameter inches (in.) Nominal resistance ohm/1000 ft. A B C D E F 0.40-0.49 0.77 1.54 1.65 1.96 2.30 5.51 0.50-0.59 0.64 1.28 1.37 1.63 1.91 4.58 0.60-0.69 0.51 1.03 1.10 1.31 1.53 3.67 0.70-0.79 0.44 0.88 0.94 1.31 3.14 0.80-0.89 0.38 0.77 0.82 1.14 2.74 0.90-0.99 0.35 0.69 0.74 1.03 2.47 1.00-1.09 0.31 0.62 0.66 0.92 2.20 1.10-1.19 0.28 0.56 0.60 0.84 2.00 1.20-1.29 0.26 0.51 0.55 0.77 1.84 1.30-1.39 0.24 0.48 0.51 0.71 1.70 1.40-1.49 0.22 0.44 0.47 0.65 1.57 1.50-1.59 0.21 0.41 0.44 0.61 1.47 1.60-1.69 0.19 0.38 0.41 0.57 1.37 1.70-1.79 0.18 0.37 0.39 0.54 1.30 1.80-1.89 0.17 0.35 0.37 0.51 1.24 1.90-1.99 0.16 0.33 0.35 0.49 1.17 2.00-2.09 0.15 0.31 0.33 0.46 1.10 2.10-2.19 0.15 0.29 0.31 0.43 1.03 2.20-2.29 0.14 0.28 0.30 0.42 1.00 2.30-2.39 0.14 0.27 0.29 0.40 0.97 2.40-2.49 0.13 0.25 0.27 0.38 0.90 2.50-2.59 0.12 0.24 0.26 0.36 0.87 2.60-2.69 0.12 0.23 0.25 0.35 0.83 2.70-2.79 0.11 0.22 0.24 0.33 0.80 2.80-2.89 0.11 0.22 0.24 0.33 0.80 2.90-2.99 0.11 0.22 0.23 0.32 0.77 3.00-3.09 0.10 0.21 0.22 0.31 0.73 3.10-3.19 0.10 0.20 0.21 0.29 0.70 3.20-3.29 0.10 0.20 0.21 0.29 0.70 3.30-3.39 0.09 0.19 0.20 0.28 0.67 3.40-3.49 0.09 0.18 0.19 0.26 0.63 3.50-3.59 0.09 0.18 0.19 0.26 0.63 3.60-3.69 0.08 0.17 0.18 0.25 0.60 3.70-3.79 0.08 0.17 0.18 0.25 0.60 3.80-3.89 0.08 0.16 0.17 0.24 0.57 3.90-3.99 0.08 0.16 0.17 0.24 0.57 4.00-4.99 0.07 0.15 0.16 0.22 0.53 Where: Column B—5 mil Copper shield. Column C—8 mil Coated Aluminum and 8 mil Coated Aluminum/6 mil Coated Steel shields. Column D—7 mil Alloy 194 shield. Column E—6 mil Alloy 194 and 6 mil Copper Clad Stainless Steel shields. Column F—5 mil Copper Clad Stainless Steel and 5 mil Copper Clad Alloy Steel shields. Table 2—Shield Resistance @ 68 °F (20 °C) Cable Diameters Versus Shield Types [Metric Units] Outside diameter millimeters (mm) Nominal Resistance ohm/km A B C D E F 10.2—12.5 2.53 5.05 5.41 6.43 7.55 18.08 12.7—15.0 2.10 4.20 4.49 5.35 6.27 15.03 15.2—17.5 1.67 3.38 3.61 4.30 5.02 12.04 17.8—20.1 1.44 2.89 3.08 4.30 10.30 20.3—22.6 1.25 2.53 2.69 3.74 8.99 22.9—25.1 1.15 2.26 2.43 3.38 8.10 25.4—27.7 1.02 2.03 2.16 3.02 7.22 27.9—30.2 0.92 1.84 1.97 2.76 6.56 30.5—32.8 0.85 1.67 1.80 2.53 6.04 33.0—35.3 0.79 1.57 1.67 2.33 5.58 35.6—37.8 0.72 1.44 1.54 2.13 5.15 38.1—40.4 0.69 1.34 1.44 2.00 4.82 40.6—42.9 0.62 1.25 1.34 1.87 4.49 43.2—45.5 0.59 1.21 1.28 1.77 4.26 45.7—48.0 0.56 1.15 1.21 1.67 4.07 48.3—50.5 0.52 1.08 1.15 1.61 3.84 50.8—53.1 0.49 1.02 1.08 1.51 3.61 53.3—55.6 0.49 0.95 1.02 1.41 3.38 55.9—58.2 0.46 0.92 0.98 1.38 3.28 58.4—60.7 0.46 0.89 0.95 1.31 3.18 61.0—63.2 0.43 0.82 0.89 1.25 2.95 63.5—65.8 0.39 0.79 0.85 1.18 2.85 66.0—68.3 0.39 0.75 0.82 1.15 2.72 68.6—70.9 0.36 0.72 0.79 1.08 2.62 71.1—73.4 0.36 0.72 0.79 1.08 2.62 73.7—75.9 0.36 0.72 0.75 1.05 2.53 76.2—78.5 0.33 0.69 0.72 1.02 2.39 78.7—81.0 0.33 0.66 0.69 0.95 2.30 81.3—83.6 0.33 0.66 0.69 0.95 2.30 83.6—86.1 0.29 0.62 0.66 0.92 2.20 86.4—88.6 0.29 0.59 0.62 0.85 2.07 88.9—91.2 0.29 0.59 0.62 0.85 2.07 91.4—93.7 0.26 0.56 0.59 0.82 1.97 94.0—96.3 0.26 0.56 0.59 0.82 1.97 96.5—98.8 0.26 0.52 0.56 0.79 1.87 99.1—101.3 0.26 0.52 0.56 0.79 1.87 101.6—103.9 0.23 0.49 0.52 0.72 1.74 Where: Column A—10 mil Copper shield. Column B—5 mil Copper shield. Column C—8 mil Coated Aluminum and 8 mil Coated Aluminum/6 mil Coated Steel shields. Column D—7 mil Alloy 194 shield. Column E—6 mil Alloy 194 and 6 mil Copper Clad Stainless Steel shields. Column F—5 mil Copper Clad Stainless Steel and 5 mil Copper Clad Alloy Steel shields. (ii) All values of shield and shield/armor resistance provided in Tables 1 and 2 in (a)(5)(i) of this section are considered approximations. If the measured value corrected to 68 °F (20 °C) is within #30 percent (%) of the value shown in Table 1 or 2, the shield and shield/armor shall be assumed to be continuous. (iii) To correct the measured shield resistance to the reference temperature of 68 °F (20 °C) use the following formulae: R 68 R 20 Where: R 68 R 20 R t A = Temperature coefficient of the shield tape. t = Measurement temperature in °F or (°C). (iv) The temperature coefficients (A) for the shield tapes to be used in the formulae referenced in paragraph (a)(5)(iii) of this section are as follows: (A) 5 and 10 mil copper = 0.0021 for English units and 0.0039 for Metric units; (B) 8 mil coated aluminum and 8 mil coated aluminum/6 mil coated steel = 0.0022 for English units and 0.0040 for Metric units; (C) 5 mil copper clad stainless steel and 5 mil copper clad alloy steel = 0.0024 for English units and 0.0044 for Metric units; (D) 6 mil copper clad stainless steel = 0.0019 for English units and 0.0035 for Metric units; and (E) 6 and 7 mil alloy 194 = 0.0013 for English units and 0.0024 for Metric units. (v) When utilizing shield continuity testers to measure shield and shield/armor continuity within pedestals or splices, refer to the manufacturer's published information covering the specific test equipment to be used and for anticipated results. (6) Data record. (7) Probable causes for nonconformance. (b) Conductor continuity. (c) Dc insulation resistance (IR) measurement. (2) Method of measurement. (ii) IR tests are normally made from the MDF with all CO equipment disconnected at the MDF, but this test may be made on new cables at field locations before they are spliced to existing cables. The method of measurement shall be as shown in Figure 3 as follows: (iii) If the IR of the conductor cannot be measured because of breakdown of lightning arresters by the test voltage, the arrester units shall be removed and the conductor IR retested. If the IR then meets the minimum requirements, the conductor will be considered satisfactory. Immediately following the IR tests, all arrester units which have been removed shall be reinstalled. (3) Test equipment. (ii) The IR test set shall have an output voltage not to exceed 500 volts dc and shall be of the hand cranked or battery operated type. (iii) The dc bridge type megohmmeter, which may be alternating current (ac) powered, shall have scales and multiplier which make it possible to accurately read IR from 1 megohm to 1 gigohm. The voltage applied to the conductors under test shall not exceed “250 volts dc” when using an instrument having adjustable test voltage levels. This will help to prevent breakdown of lightning arresters. (4) Applicable results. (ii) The megohm-mile (megohm-km) value for a conductor may be computed by multiplying the actual scale reading in megohms on the test set by the length in miles (km) of the conductor under test. (iii) The objective insulation resistance may be determined by dividing 500 by the length in miles (805 by the length in km) of the cable or wire conductor being tested. The resulting value shall be the minimum acceptable meter scale reading in megohms. (iv) Due to the differences between various insulating materials and filling compounds used in manufacturing cable or wire, it is impractical to provide simple factors to predict the magnitude of variation in insulation resistance due to temperature. The variation can, however, be substantial for wide excursions in temperature from the ambient temperature of 68 °F (20 °C). (v) Borrowers should be certain that tip and ring IR measurements of each pair are approximately the same. Borrowers should also be certain that IR measurements are similar for cable or wire sections of similar length and cable or wire type. If some pairs measure significantly lower, borrowers should attempt to improve these pairs in accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations. Note: Only the megohm-mile (megohm-km) requirement shall be cause for rejection, not individual measurement differences. (5) Data record. (6) Probable causes for nonconformance. (ii) Should the cable or wire fail to meet the 500 megohm-mile (805 megohm-km) requirement when the temperature is known to be approximately 68 °F (20 °C) there is not yet justification for rejection of the cable or wire. Protectors, lightning arresters, etc., may be a source of low insulation resistance. These devices shall be removed from the cable or wire and the cable or wire IR measurement shall be repeated. If the result is acceptable, the cable or wire shall be considered acceptable. The removed devices which caused the low insulation resistance value shall be identified and replaced, if found defective. (iii) When the cable or wire alone is still found to be below the 500 megohm-mile (805 megohm-km) requirement after completing the steps in paragraph (c)(6)(i) and/or paragraph (c)(6)(ii) of this section, the test shall be repeated to measure the cable or wire in sections to isolate the piece(s) of cable or wire responsible. The cable or wire section(s) that is found to be below the 500 megohm-mile (805 megohm-km) requirement shall be either repaired in accordance with the cable or wire manufacturer's recommended procedure or shall be replaced as directed by the borrower. (d) Dc loop resistance and dc resistance unbalance measurement. (2) Dc loop resistance and dc resistance unbalance measurements shall be made on all cable pairs used as subscriber loop circuits when: (i) Specified by the borrower; (ii) A large number of long loops terminate at one location (similar to trunk circuits); or (iii) Circuit balance is less than 60 dB when computed from noise measurements as described in paragraph (e) of this section. (3) Dc resistance unbalance is controlled to the maximum possible degree by the cable specification. Allowable random unbalance is specified between tip and ring conductors within each reel. Further random patterns should occur when the cable conductor size changes. Cable meeting the unbalance requirements of the cable specification may under some conditions result in unacceptable noise levels as discussed in paragraph (d)(6)(iii) of this section. (4) Method of measurement. (5) Test equipment. (6) Applicable results. (ii) The calculated dc loop resistance is computed as follows: (A) Multiply the length of each different gauge by the applicable resistance per unit length as shown in Table 3 as follows: Table 3—DC Loop Resistance @ 68 °F (20 °C) American wire gauge (AWG) Loop resistance ohms/1000 ft ohms/km 19 16.1 52.8 22 32.4 106.3 24 51.9 170.3 26 83.3 273.3 (B) Add the individual resistances for each gauge to give the total calculated dc loop resistance at a temperature of 68 °F (20 °C). (C) Correct the total calculated dc loop resistance at the temperature of 68 °F (20 °C) to the measurement temperature by the following formulae: R t 68 R t 20 Where: R t R 68 R 20 t = Measurement temperature in °F or (°C). (D) Compare the calculated dc loop resistance at the measurement temperature to the measured dc loop resistance to determine compliance with the requirement specified in paragraph (d)(6)(i) of this section. (iii) Resistance varies directly with temperature change. For copper conductor cables, the dc resistance changes by ±1% for every ±5 °F (2.8 °C) change in temperature from 68 °F (20 °C). (iv) The dc resistance unbalance between the individual conductors of a pair shall not exceed that value which will result in a circuit balance of less than 60 dB when computed from noise measurements as described in paragraph (e) of this section. It is impractical to establish a precise limit for overall circuit dc resistance unbalance due to the factors controlling its contribution to circuit noise. These factors include location of the resistance unbalance in relation to a low impedance path to ground (close to the central office) and the magnitude of unbalance in short lengths of cable making up the total circuit length. The objective is to obtain the minimum unbalance throughout the entire circuit when it is ascertained through noise measurements that dc resistance unbalance may be contributing to poor cable balance. (v) Pairs with poor noise balance may be improved by reversing tip and ring conductors of pairs at cable splices. Where dc resistance unbalances are systematic over the total trunk circuit or loop circuit length, tip and ring reversals may be made at frequent intervals. Where the unbalances are concentrated in a shorter section of cable, only one tip and ring reversal should be required. Concentrated dc resistance unbalance produces maximum circuit noise when located adjacent to the central office. Concentrated dc resistance unbalance will contribute to overall circuit noise at a point approximately two-thirds ( 2/3 (vi) A systematic dc resistance unbalance can sometimes be accompanied by other cable parameters that are marginal. Among these are pair-to-pair capacitance unbalance, capacitance unbalance-to-ground, and 150 kilohertz (kHz) crosstalk loss. Engineering judgment has to be applied in each case. Rejection of cable for excessive dc resistance unbalance shall only apply to a single reel length, or shorter. (7) Data record. (8) Probable causes for nonconformance. (e) Subscriber loop measurement (loop checking). (2) At a minimum, insertion loss and frequency response of subscriber loop plant shall be measured at 1,000, 1,700, 2,300, and 2,800 Hertz (Hz). When additional testing frequencies are desired, the additional frequencies shall be specified in the applicable construction contract. (3) Measurements of insertion loss and noise shall be made on five percent or more of the pairs. A minimum of five pairs shall be tested on each route. Pairs shall be selected on a random basis with greater consideration in the selection given to the longer loops. Consideration shall be given to measuring a large percentage, up to 100 percent, of all loops. (4) Method of measurement Insertion loss. (ii) Noise. (5) Test equipment. (ii) There should be no measurable transmission loss when testing through loop extenders. (6) Applicable results Insertion loss. (B) For H88 loaded cables (a specific loading scheme using an 88 millihenry inductor spaced nominally at 6,000 ft [1,829 m] intervals) measured at a point one-half section length beyond the last load point, the measured nonrepeatered insertion loss shall be within ±10% at 1000, 1700, and 2300 Hz, ±15% at 2800 Hz, and ±20% at 3400 Hz of the calculated insertion loss at the same frequencies and temperature. (C) For nonloaded cables, the measured insertion loss shall be within ±10% at 1000, 1700, 2300, and 2800 Hz, ±15% at 3400 Hz and ±20% at 4000 Hz of the calculated insertion loss at the same frequencies and temperature. (D) For loaded cables, the calculated loss at each desired frequency shall be computed as follows: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 1 2 (E) For nonloaded cables, the calculated loss at each desired frequency shall be computed by multiplying the length in miles (km) of each different gauge by the applicable dB/mile (dB/km) value shown in Table 6 and then adding the individual losses for each gauge to determine the total calculated insertion loss for the nonloaded loop. (F) The attenuation information in Tables 4, 5, and 6 are based on a cable temperature of 68 °F (20 °C). Insertion loss varies directly with temperature. To convert measured losses for loaded cables to a different temperature, use the following value for copper conductors: For each ±5 °F (±2.8 °C) change in the temperature from 68 °F (20 °C), change the insertion loss at any frequency by ±1%. To convert measured losses for nonloaded cables to a different temperature, use the following value for copper conductors: For each ±10 °F (±5.6 °C) change in the temperature from 68 °F (20 °C), change the insertion loss at any frequency by ±1%. Tables 4, 5, and 6 are as follows: Table 4—Frequency Attenuation @ 68 °F (20 °C) D66 Loaded Exchange Cables 83 nanofarad (nF)/mile (52 nF/km) (See Note) Frequency (Hz) Attenuation dB/mile (dB/km) AWG 19 22 24 26 200 0.41 (0.26) 0.67 (0.42) 0.90 (0.56) 1.21 (0.75) 400 0.43 (0.26) 0.77 (0.48) 1.09 (0.68) 1.53 (0.95) 600 0.44 (0.27) 0.80 (0.49) 1.17 (0.73) 1.70 (1.06) 800 0.44 (0.27) 0.81 (0.50) 1.21 (0.75) 1.80 (1.12) 1000 0.44 (0.27) 0.82 (0.51) 1.23 (0.76) 1.86 (1.15) 1200 0.45 (0.28) 0.83 (0.52) 1.24 (0.77) 1.91 (1.19) 1400 0.45 (0.28) 0.83 (0.52) 1.26 (0.78) 1.94 (1.20) 1600 0.45 (0.28) 0.84 (0.52) 1.26 (0.78) 1.96 (1.22) 1800 0.45 (0.28) 0.84 (0.52) 1.27 (0.78) 1.98 (1.23) 2000 0.46 (0.29) 0.85 (0.53) 1.28 (0.79) 1.99 (1.24) 2200 0.46 (0.29) 0.85 (0.53) 1.29 (0.80) 2.01 (1.25) 2400 0.47 (0.29) 0.86 (0.53) 1.30 (0.81) 2.02 (1.26) 2600 0.47 (0.29) 0.87 (0.54) 1.31 (0.81) 2.04 (1.27) 2800 0.48 (0.30) 0.88 (0.55) 1.32 (0.82) 2.07 (1.29) 3000 0.49 (0.30) 0.89 (0.55) 1.34 (0.83) 2.10 (1.30) 3200 0.50 (0.31) 0.91 (0.57) 1.36 (0.84) 2.13 (1.32) 3400 0.52 (0.32) 0.93 (0.58) 1.40 (0.87) 2.19 (1.36) 3600 0.54 (0.34) 0.97 (0.60) 1.45 (0.90) 2.26 (1.40) 3800 0.57 (0.35) 1.02 (0.63) 1.52 (0.94) 2.36 (1.47) 4000 0.62 (0.38) 1.10 (0.68) 1.63 (1.01) 2.53 (1.57) Note: Table 5—Frequency Attenuation @ 68 °F (20 °C) H88 Loaded Exchange Cables 83 nF/ mile (52 nF/km) (See Note) Frequency (Hz) Attenuation dB/mile (dB/km) AWG 19 22 24 26 200 0.40 (0.25) 0.66 (0.41) 0.90 (0.56) 1.20 (0.75) 400 0.42 (0.26) 0.76 (0.47) 1.08 (0.67) 1.53 (0.95) 600 0.43 (0.27) 0.79 (0.49) 1.16 (0.72) 1.70 (1.06) 800 0.43 (0.27) 0.80 (0.50) 1.20 (0.75) 1.80 (1.12) 1000 0.43 (0.27) 0.81 (0.50) 1.23 (0.76) 1.86 (1.15) 1200 0.44 (0.27) 0.82 (0.51) 1.24 (0.77) 1.91 (1.19) 1400 0.44 (0.28) 0.82 (0.51) 1.25 (0.78) 1.94 (1.20) 1600 0.44 (0.27) 0.83 (0.52) 1.26 (0.78) 1.97 (1.22) 1800 0.45 (0.28) 0.84 (0.52) 1.28 (0.79) 1.99 (1.24) 2000 0.46 (0.29) 0.85 (0.53) 1.29 (0.80) 2.02 (1.26) 2200 0.47 (0.29) 0.86 (0.53) 1.31 (0.81) 2.06 (1.28) 2400 0.48 (0.30) 0.89 (0.55) 1.34 (0.83) 2.10 (1.30) 2600 0.50 (0.31) 0.92 (0.57) 1.39 (0.86) 2.18 (1.35) 2800 0.53 (0.33) 0.97 (0.60) 1.47 (0.91) 2.29 (1.42) 3000 0.59 (0.37) 1.07 (0.66) 1.60 (0.99) 2.48 (1.54) 3200 0.71 (0.44) 1.26 (0.78) 1.87 (1.16) 2.86 (1.78) 3400 1.14 (0.71) 1.91 (1.19) 2.64 (1.64) 3.71 (2.30) 3600 4.07 (2.53) 4.31 (2.68) 4.65 (2.90) 5.30 (3.29) 3800 6.49 (4.03) 6.57 (4.08) 6.72 (4.18) 7.06 (4.39) 4000 8.22 (5.11) 8.27 (5.14) 8.36 (5.19) 8.58 (5.33) Note: Table 6—Frequency Attenuation @ 68 °F (20 °C) Nonloaded Exchange Cables 83 nF/ mile (52 nF/km) AWG Frequency (Hz) Attenuation dB/mile (dB/km) AWG 19 22 24 26 200 0.58 (0.36) 0.82 (0.51) 1.03 (0.64) 1.30 (0.81) 400 0.81 (0.51) 1.15 (0.71) 1.45 (0.90) 1.84 (1.14) 600 0.98 (0.61) 1.41 (0.87) 1.77 (1.10) 2.26 (1.40) 800 1.13 (0.70) 1.62 (1.01) 2.04 (1.27) 2.60 (1.61) 1000 1.25 (0.78) 1.80 (1.12) 2.28 (1.42) 2.90 (1.80) 1200 1.36 (0.84) 1.97 (1.22) 2.50 (1.55) 3.17 (1.97) 1400 1.46 (0.91) 2.12 (1.32) 2.69 (1.67) 3.42 (2.12) 1600 1.55 (0.96) 2.26 (1.40) 2.87 (1.78) 3.65 (2.27) 1800 1.63 (1.01) 2.39 (1.48) 3.04 (1.89) 3.87 (2.40) 2000 1.71 (1.06) 2.51 (1.56) 3.20 (1.99) 4.08 (2.53) 2200 1.78 (1.11) 2.62 (1.63) 3.35 (2.08) 4.27 (2.65) 2400 1.85 (1.15) 2.73 (1.70) 3.49 (2.17) 4.45 (2.76) 2600 1.91 (1.19) 2.83 (1.76) 3.62 (2.25) 4.63 (2.88) 2800 1.97 (1.22) 2.93 (1.82) 3.75 (2.33) 4.80 (2.98) 3000 2.03 (1.26) 3.02 (1.88) 3.88 (2.41) 4.96 (3.08) 3200 2.08 (1.29) 3.11 (1.93) 4.00 (2.48) 5.12 (3.18) 3400 2.13 (1.32) 3.19 (1.98) 4.11 (2.55) 5.27 (3.27) 3600 2.18 (1.35) 3.28 (2.04) 4.22 (2.62) 5.41 (3.36) 3800 2.22 (1.38) 3.36 (2.09) 4.33 (2.69) 5.55 (3.45) 4000 2.27 (1.41) 3.43 (2.13) 4.43 (2.75) 5.69 (3.53) (G) For loaded subscriber loops, the 1 kHz loss shall be approximately 0.45 dB per 100 ohms of measured dc loop resistance. This loss shall be the measured loss less the net gain of any voice frequency repeaters in the circuit. Testing shall also be conducted to verify that the loss increases gradually as the frequency increases. The loss on H88 loaded loops should be down only slightly at 2.8 kHz but drop rapidly above 2.8 kHz. The loss on D66 loaded loops shall be fairly constant to about 3.4 kHz and there shall be good response at 4.0 kHz. When voice frequency repeaters are in the circuit there will be some frequency weighting in the build-out network and the loss at the higher frequencies will be greater than for nonrepeatered loops. (H) For nonloaded subscriber loops, the 1 kHz loss shall be approximately 0.9 dB per 100 ohms of measured dc loop resistance. Testing shall also be conducted to verify that the loss is approximately a straight line function with no abrupt changes. The 3 kHz loss should be approximately 70% higher than the 1 kHz loss. (ii) Noise. (7) Data record. (8) Probable causes for nonconformance Insertion loss. (ii) Noise. (f) One-person open circuit measurement (subscriber loops). (2) For loaded loops, open circuit measurements shall be made using one of the following methods: (i) Impedance or pulse return pattern, with cable pair trace compared to that of an artificial line of the same length and gauge. For best results, a level tracer or fault locator with dual trace capability is required; (ii) Return loss using a level tracer, with cable pair compared to an artificial line of the same length and gauge connected in lieu of a Precision Balance Network (PBN). This method can be made with level tracers having only single trace capability; or (iii) Open circuit structural return loss using a level tracer. This method can be made with level tracer having only single trace capability. (3) Of the three methods suggested for loaded loops, the method specified in paragraph (f)(2)(ii) of this section is the preferred method because it can yield both qualitative and quantitative results. The methods specified in paragraphs (f)(2)(i) and (f)(2)(iii) of this section can be used as trouble shooting tools should irregularities be found during testing. (4) For nonloaded loops, open circuit measurements shall be made using the method specified in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section. (5) Method of measurement. (i) Impedance or pulse return pattern. (ii) Return loss balanced to artificial line. (iii) Open circuit structural return loss using level tracer. (6) Test equipment. (7) Applicable results. (ii) For loaded loops, results for return loss measurements using a level tracer, with artificial line, in lieu of a PBN (paragraph (f)(5)(ii) of this section) shall meet the following requirements: (A) For D66 and H88 loaded cables the structural return loss (SRL) values shall range between 28 and 39 dB, respectively, at the critical frequency of structural return loss (CFSRL) within the pass band of the loading system being used. The minimum SRL value for uniform gauge shall be 25 dB CFSRL. These SRL values apply for loaded cables of uniform gauge for the entire length of the subscriber loop circuit. Subscriber loop circuits shall meet the loading spacing deviations and the cable mutual capacitance requirements in the applicable RUS cable specifications; (B) For mixed gauge loaded cables the SRL values shall be 25 and 27 dB CFSRL, respectively, and the minimum SRL value shall be 22 dB CFSRL; and (C) The two traces in the pulse return pattern should be essentially identical. The degree of comparison required of the two traces is determined by experience. (iii) For loaded loops, the results of open circuit structural return loss measurements using a level tracer (paragraph (f)(5)(iii) of this section) shall meet the following requirements. For D66 and H88 loaded cables with uniform or mixed gauges, the worst value allowed for measured open circuit structural return loss between 1,000-3,500 Hz and 1,000-3,000 Hz, respectively, shall be approximately 0.9 dB (round trip) for each 100 ohms outside plant dc loop resistance including the resistance of the load coils. The value of 0.9 dB per 100 ohms for the round trip loss remains reasonably accurate as long as: (A) The subscriber end section of the loaded pair under test is approximately 2,250 ft (685 m) for D66 loading or 3,000 ft (914 m) for H88 loading in length; and (B) The one-way 1,000 Hz loss does not exceed 10 dB. (iv) For loaded loops, the measured value of open circuit structural return loss can only be as accurate as the degree to which the dc loop resistance of the loaded pair under test is known. Most accurate results shall be obtained when the dc loop resistance is known by actual measurements as described in paragraph (d) of this section. Furthermore, where the dc loop resistance is measured at the same time as the open circuit structural return loss, no correction for temperature is needed because the loss is directly proportional to the loop resistance. Where it is not practical to measure the dc loop resistance, it shall be calculated and corrected for temperature as specified in paragraph (d)(6)(ii) of this section. When measuring existing plant, care shall be taken to verify the accuracy of the records, if they are used for the calculation of the dc loop resistance. For buried plant, the temperature correction shall be based at the normal depth of the cable in the ground. (Temperature can be measured by boring a hole to cable depth with a ground rod, placing a thermometer in the ground at the cable depth, and taking and averaging several readings during the course of the resistance measurements.) For aerial cable it shall be based on the temperature inside the cable sheath. (v) For loaded loops, the best correlation between the measured and the expected results shall be obtained when the cable is of one gauge, one size, and the far end section is approximately 2,250 ft (685 m) for D66 loading or 3,000 ft (914 m) for H88 loading. Mixing gauges and cable sizes will result in undesirable small reflections whose frequency characteristics and magnitude cannot be accurately predicted. In subscriber loop applications, cable gauge may be somewhat uniform but the cable pair size most likely will not be uniform as cable pair sizes taper off toward the customer access location and a downward adjustment of 1 dB of the allowed value shall be acceptable. “Long” end sections (as defined in TE&CM Section 424, “Guideline for Telecommunications Subscriber Loop Plant”) lower the expected value, a further downward adjustment of 3 dB in the allowed value shall be acceptable. (vi) For loaded loops, the limiting factor when making open circuit structural return loss measurements is when the 1,000 Hz one-way loss of the loaded cable pair under test becomes 10 dB or greater; it becomes difficult to detect the presence of irregularities beyond the 10 dB point on the loop. To overcome this difficulty, loaded loops having a one-way loss at 1,000 Hz greater than 10 dB shall be opened at some convenient point (such as a pedestal or ready access enclosure) and loss measurements at the individual portions measuring less than 10 dB one-way shall be made separately. When field mounted voice frequency repeaters are used, the measurement shall be made at the repeater location in both directions. (8) Data record. (ii) When performing open circuit return loss measurements using the return loss balanced to an artificial line or return loss using a level tracer on loaded loops, the value of the poorest (lowest numerical value) SRL and its frequency in the proper column between 1,000 and 3,500 Hz for D66 loading or between 1,000 and 3,000 Hz for H88 loading shall be recorded. A suggested format similar to Format I for subscriber loops in § 1755.407 or a format specified in the applicable construction contract may be used. (9) Probable causes for nonconformance. (g) Cable insertion loss measurement (carrier frequencies). (2) Method of measurement. (3) Test equipment. (4) Applicable results. (ii) The measured insertion loss of the cable shall be within ±10% of the calculated loss in dB when the loss is corrected for temperature. (iii) The calculated insertion loss is computed as follows: (A) Multiply the length of each different gauge by the applicable dB per unit length as shown in Table 7 or 8 as follows: Table 7—Cable Attenuation @ 68 °F (20 °C) Filled Cables—Solid Insulation Frequency (kHz) Attenuation dB/mile (dB/km) Gauge (AWG) 19 22 24 26 10 2.8 (1.7) 4.8 (2.9) 6.4 (3.9) 8.5 (5.3) 20 3.2 (2.0) 5.8 (3.6) 8.2 (5.1) 11.2 (6.9) 40 3.6 (2.2) 6.5 (4.0) 9.6 (6.0) 13.9 (8.6) 60 4.0 (2.5) 6.9 (4.2) 10.3 (6.4) 15.2 (9.4) 80 4.5 (2.8) 7.3 (4.5) 10.7 (6.6) 16.0 (9.9) 100 4.9 (3.0) 7.7 (4.7) 11.1 (6.8) 16.5 (10.2) 112 5.2 (3.2) 8.0 (4.9) 11.3 (7.0) 16.8 (10.5) 120 5.4 (3.3) 8.1 (5.0) 11.5 (7.1) 17.0 (10.6) 140 5.8 (3.6) 8.6 (5.3) 11.9 (7.4) 17.4 (10.8) 160 6.2 (3.8) 9.0 (5.6) 12.3 (7.6) 17.8 (11.1) 180 6.6 (4.1) 9.5 (5.9) 12.7 (7.9) 18.2 (11.3) 200 7.0 (4.3) 10.0 (6.2) 13.2 (8.2) 18.6 (11.5) 300 8.7 (5.4) 12.2 (7.5) 15.4 (9.6) 20.6 (12.8) 400 10.0 (6.2) 14.1 (8.8) 17.7 (11.0) 22.9 (14.2) 500 11.2 (6.9) 15.9 (9.8) 19.8 (12.3) 25.2 (15.6) 600 12.2 (7.5) 17.5 (10.9) 21.8 (13.6) 27.4 (17.0) 700 13.2 (8.2) 19.0 (11.8) 23.6 (14.7) 29.6 (18.4) 772 13.8 (8.5) 19.9 (12.4) 24.8 (15.4) 31.4 (19.5) 800 14.2 (8.8) 20.1 (12.5) 27.4 (17.1) 31.7 (19.7) 900 14.8 (9.2) 21.6 (13.4) 29.0 (18.0) 33.8 (21.0) 1000 15.8 (9.8) 22.7 (14.1) 31.1 (19.3) 35.9 (22.3) 1100 16.4 (10.2) 23.8 (14.8) 32.7 (20.3) 38.0 (23.6) 1200 17.4 (10.8) 24.8 (15.4) 34.3 (21.3) 40.0 (24.9) 1300 17.9 (11.1) 25.9 (16.1) 35.4 (22.0) 41.7 (25.9) 1400 19.0 (11.8) 26.9 (16.7) 37.0 (23.0) 43.3 (26.9) 1500 19.5 (12.1) 28.0 (17.4) 38.0 (23.6) 44.3 (27.6) 1576 20.1 (12.4) 29.0 (18.0) 39.0 (24.3) 44.4 (28.2) Table 8—Cable Attenuation @ 68 °F (20 °C) Filled Cables—Expanded Insulation Frequency (kHz) Attenuation dB/mile (dB/km) Gauge (AWG) 19 22 24 26 10 3.0 (1.8) 4.9 (3.0) 6.5 (4.0) 8.6 (5.3) 20 3.5 (2.1) 6.0 (4.1) 8.5 (5.2) 11.5 (7.1) 40 4.0 (2.5) 7.0 (4.3) 10.2 (6.3) 14.4 (8.9) 60 4.5 (2.8) 7.5 (4.6) 11.1 (6.8) 16.0 (9.9) 80 5.2 (3.3) 7.9 (4.9) 11.3 (6.9) 16.2 (10.1) 100 5.8 (3.6) 8.4 (5.2) 11.6 (7.2) 16.4 (10.2) 112 6.0 (3.8) 8.8 (5.4) 11.9 (7.4) 16.6 (10.3) 120 6.2 (3.9) 9.0 (5.6) 12.1 (7.5) 16.9 (10.5) 140 6.6 (4.1) 9.5 (5.9) 12.7 (7.9) 17.2 (10.7) 160 6.9 (4.3) 10.0 (6.2) 13.2 (8.2) 17.4 (10.8) 180 7.4 (4.6) 10.6 (6.6) 13.7 (8.5) 17.9 (11.1) 200 7.9 (4.9) 11.1 (6.9) 14.2 (8.8) 18.5 (11.5) 300 9.5 (5.9) 13.2 (8.2) 16.8 (10.5) 21.6 (13.4) 400 11.1 (6.9) 15.3 (9.5) 19.5 (12.1) 24.3 (15.1) 500 12.1 (7.5) 17.9 (11.1) 22.2 (13.8) 27.4 (17.1) 600 13.7 (8.5) 19.5 (12.1) 24.3 (15.1) 29.6 (18.4) 700 14.8 (9.2) 21.1 (13.1) 26.4 (16.4) 32.2 (20.0) 772 15.3 (9.5) 21.6 (13.4) 27.4 (17.1) 33.8 (21.90) 800 15.8 (9.8) 22.2 (13.8) 28.0 (17.4) 34.4 (21.3) 900 17.0 (10.5) 23.8 (14.8) 29.6 (18.4) 36.4 (22.6) 1000 17.4 (10.8) 24.8 (15.4) 31.1 (19.3) 38.5 (23.9) 1100 17.9 (11.1) 26.4 (16.4) 33.3 (20.7) 40.6 (25.3) 1200 19.0 (11.8) 27.4 (17.1 34.3 (21.3) 42.2 (26.2) 1300 19.5 (12.1) 28.5 (17.7) 35.9 (22.3) 43.8 (27.2) 1400 20.1 (12.5 29.6 (18.4) 37.0 (23.0) 45.9 (28.5) 1500 20.6 (12.8) 30.6 (19.0) 38.5 (23.9) 47.5 (29.5) 1576 21.6 (13.4) 31.1 (19.3) 39.1 (24.3) 48.6 (30.2) (B) Add the individual losses for each gauge to give the total calculated insertion loss at a temperature of 68 °F (20 °C); (C) Correct the total calculated insertion loss at the temperature of 68 °F (20 °C) to the measurement temperature by the following formulae: A t 68 A t 20 Where: A t A 68 A 20 t = Measurement temperature in °F or (°C); and (D) Compare the calculated insertion loss at the measurement temperature to the measured insertion loss to determine compliance with the requirement specified in paragraph (g)(4)(ii) of this section. ( Note: (iv) If the measured value exceeds the ±10% allowable variation, the cause shall be determined and corrective action shall be taken to remedy the problem. (5) Data record. (6) Probable causes for nonconformance. [62 FR 23962, May 2, 1997] § 1755.404 Fiber optic cable telecommunications plant measurements. (a) Armor continuity. (2) Measurement techniques outlined here for verification of armor continuity are applicable to buried fiber optic cable plant. Measurements of armor continuity between splices in aerial, armored, fiber optic cable should be made prior to completion of splicing. Conclusive results cannot be obtained on aerial plant after all bonds have been completed to the supporting strand, multigrounded neutral, etc. (3) Method of measurement. (4) Test equipment. (5) Applicable results. (6) Data record. (7) Probable causes for nonconformance. (b) Fiber optic splice loss measurement. (2) Method of measurement. (ii) CO splice loss measurements shall be made at 1310 and/or 1550 nanometers for single mode fibers and in accordance with Figure 15. Two splice loss measurements shall be made between the end termination points. The first measurement shall be from termination point A to termination point B. The second measurement shall be from termination point B to termination point A. (3) Test equipment. (4) Applicable results. (ii) When specified in the applicable construction contract, the splice loss of each field splice at 1310 and/or 1550 nanometers shall not exceed the limit specified in the contract. (iii) When no limit is specified in the applicable construction contract, the splice loss of each field splice shall not exceed 0.2 dB at 1310 and/or 1550 nanometers. (iv) The splice loss for each single mode CO splice shall be the bi-directional average of the two OTDR reading. To calculate actual splice loss, substitute the OTDR reading, maintaining the sign of the loss (+) or apparent gain (−), into the equation specified in paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section. (v) When specified in the applicable construction contract, the splice loss of each central office splice at 1310 and/or 1550 nanometers shall not exceed the limit specified in the contract. (vi) When no limit is specified in the applicable construction contract, the splice loss of each central office splice shall not exceed 1.2 dB at 1310 and/or 1550 nanometers. (5) Data record. (6) Probable causes for nonconformance. (i) Proper end preparation of the fibers; (ii) End separation between the fiber ends; (iii) Lateral misalignment of fiber cores; (iv) Angular misalignment of fiber cores; (v) Fresnel reflection; (vi) Contamination between fiber ends; (vii) Core deformation; or (viii) Mode-field diameter mismatch. (c) End-to-end attenuation measurement. (2) Method of measurement. (3) Test equipment. (4) Applicable results. (5) Data record. (6) Probable causes for nonconformance. (i) Excessive field or central office splice loss; (ii) Excessive cable attenuation; or (iii) Damage to the fiber optic cable during installation. (d) End-to-end fiber signature measurement. (2) Method of measurement. (3) Test equipment. (4) Applicable results. (5) Data record. (6) Probable causes for nonconformance. [62 FR 23989, May 2, 1997; 62 FR 25017, May 7, 1997] § 1755.405 Voiceband data transmission measurements. (a) The data transmission measurements listed in this section shall be used to determine the acceptability of trunk and nonloaded subscriber loop circuits for data modem transmission. (b) Signal-to-C notched noise (S/CNN) measurement. (2) S/CNN is the logarithmic ratio expressed in dB of a 1,004 Hz holding tone signal compared to the C-message weighted noise level. S/CNN is one of the most important transmission parameters affecting the performance of data transmission because proper modem operation requires low noise relative to received power level. Since modulated carriers are used in data communication systems, noise measurements need to be performed with power on the connection to activate equipment having signal-level-dependent noise sources. For 4 kHz channels, a 1,004 Hz holding tone is used to activate the signal-dependent equipment on the channel or connection. (3) Method of measurement. http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (4) Test equipment. (5) Applicable results. (6) Data record. (7) Probable causes for nonconformance. (c) Signal-to-intermodulation distortion (S/IMD) measurement. (2) S/IMD is a measure of the distortion produced by extraneous frequency cross products, known as intermodulation products, when a multi-tone tone signal is applied to a system. (3) Intermodulation distortion (IMD) is caused by system nonlinearities acting upon the harmonic frequencies produced from an input of multiple tones. The products resulting from IMD can be more damaging than noise in terms of producing data transmission errors. (4) IMD is measured as a signal to distortion ratio and is expressed as the logarithmic ratio in dB of the composite power of four resulting test frequencies to the total power of specific higher order distortion products that are produced. The higher order products are measured at both the 2nd order and 3rd order and are designated R2 and R3, respectively. The four frequency testing for IMD is produced with four tones of 857, 863, 1,372, and 1,388 Hz input at a composite power level of −13 dBm0. (5) Method of measurement. (6) Test equipment. (7) Applicable results. (8) Data record. (9) Probable causes for nonconformance. (d) Envelope delay distortion (EDD) measurement. (2) EDD is a measure of the linearity or uniformity of the phase versus frequency characteristics of a transmission facility. EDD is also known as relative envelope delay (RED). (3) EDD is specifically defined as the delay relative to the envelope delay at the reference frequency of 1,704 Hz. EDD is typically measured at two frequencies, one low and one high in the voiceband. The low frequency measurement is made at 604 Hz. The high frequency measurement is made at 2,804 Hz. (4) Method of measurement. (5) Test equipment. (6) Applicable results. (7) Data record. (8) Probable causes for nonconformance. (e) Amplitude jitter (AJ) measurement. (2) AJ is any fluctuation in the peak amplitude value of a fixed tone signal at 1,004 Hz from its nominal value. AJ is expressed in peak percent amplitude modulation. (3) AJ is measured in two separate frequency bands, 4-300 Hz and 20-300 Hz. The 4-300 Hz band is important for modems employing echo canceling capabilities. The 20-300 Hz band is used for modems that do not employ echo cancelers. (4) Amplitude modulation can affect the error performance of voiceband data modems. The measurement of amplitude jitter indicates the total effect on the amplitude of the holding tone of incidental amplitude modulation and other sources including quantizing and message noise, impulse noise, gain hits, phase jitter, and additive tones such as single-frequency interference. (5) Method of measurement. (6) Test equipment. (7) Applicable results. (8) Data record. (9) Probable causes for nonconformance. (f) Phase jitter (PJ) measurement. (2) PJ is any fluctuation in the zero crossings of a fixed tone signal (usually 1,004 Hz) from their nominal position in time within the voiceband. PJ is expressed in terms of either degrees peak-to-peak (° p-p) or in terms of a Unit Interval (UI). One UI is equal to 360° p-p. (3) PJ measurements are typically performed in two nominal frequency bands. The frequency bands are 20-300 Hz band and either the 2-300 Hz band or the 4-300 Hz band. The 20-300 Hz band is important to all phase-detecting modems. The 4-300 Hz band or the 2-300 Hz band is important for modems employing echo canceling capabilities. (4) Phase jitter can affect the error performance of voiceband data modems that use phase detection techniques. The measurement of phase jitter indicates the total effect on the holding tone of incidental phase modulation and other sources including quantizing and message noise, impulse noise, phase hits, additive tones such as single-frequency interference, and digital timing jitter. (5) Method of measurement. (6) Test equipment. (7) Applicable results. (8) Data record. (9) Probable causes for nonconformance. (g) Impulse noise measurement. (2) Impulse noise is a measure of the presence of unusually large noise excursions of short duration that are beyond the normal background noise levels on a facility. Impulse noise is typically measured by counting the number of occurrences beyond a particular noise reference threshold in a given time interval. The noise reference level is C-message weighted. (3) Method of measurement. (4) Test equipment. (5) Applicable results. (6) Data record. (7) Probable causes for nonconformance. [62 FR 23996, May 2, 1997, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1755.406 Shield or armor ground resistance measurements. (a) Shield or armor ground resistance measurements shall be made on completed lengths of copper cable and wire plant and fiber optic cable plant. (b) Method of measurement. (2) The method of measurement using either an insulation resistance test set or a dc bridge type megohmmeter shall be as shown in Figure 18 as follows: (c) Test equipment. (2) The insulation resistance test set should have an output voltage not to exceed 500 volts dc and may be hand cranked or battery operated. (3) The dc bridge type megohmmeter, which may be ac powered, should have scales and multipliers which make it possible to accurately read resistance values of 50,000 ohms to 10 megohms. The voltage that is applied to the shield or armor during the test should not be less than “250 volts dc” nor greater than “1,000 volts dc” when using an instrument having adjustable test voltage levels. (4) Commercially available fault locators may be used in lieu of the above equipment, if the devices are capable of detecting faults having resistance values of 50,000 ohms to 10 megohms. Operation of the devices and method of locating the faults should be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. (d) Applicable results. (2) Shield or armor ground resistance varies inversely with length and temperature. In addition other factors which may affect readings could be soil conditions, faulty test equipment and incorrect test procedures. (3) For the resistance test method and dc bridge type megohmmeter, the ohm-mile (ohm-km) value for the shield or armor ground resistance shall be computed by multiplying the actual scale reading in ohms on the test set by the length in miles (km) of the cable or wire under test. (4)(i) The objective shield or armor ground resistance may be determined by dividing 100,000 by the length in miles (161,000 by the length in km) of the cable or wire under test. The resulting value is the minimum acceptable meter scale reading in ohms. Examples for paragraphs (d)(3) and (d)(4) of this section are as follows: Equation 1. Test Set: Scale Reading * Length = Resistance-Length 75,000 ohms * 3 miles = 225,000 ohm-mile (75,000 ohms * 4.9 km = 367,000 ohm-km) Equation 2. 100,000 ohm-mile ÷ Length = Minimum Acceptable Meter Scale Reading 100,000 ohm-mile ÷ 3 miles = 33,333 ohms (161,000 ohm-km ÷ 4.9 km = 32,857 ohms) (ii) Since the 33,333 ohms (32,857 ohms) is the minimum acceptable meter scale reading and the meter scale reading was 75,000 ohms, the cable is considered to have met the 100,000 ohm-mile (161,000 ohm-km) requirement. (5) Due to the differences between various jacketing materials used in manufacturing cable or wire and to varying soil conditions, it is impractical to provide simple factors to predict the magnitude of variation in shield or armor to ground resistance due to temperature. The variations can, however, be substantial for wide excursions in temperature from the ambient temperature of 68 °F (20 °C). (e) Data record. (f) Probable causes for nonconformance. (2) When the resistance value of the cable or wire is still found to be below 100,000 ohm-mile (161,000 ohm-km) requirement after completion of the steps listed in paragraph (f)(1) of this section, the fault shall be isolated by performing shield or armor ground resistance measurements on individual cable or wire sections. (3) Once the fault or faults have been isolated, the cable or wire jacket shall be repaired in accordance with § 1755.200, RUS Standard for Splicing Copper and Fiber Optic Cables or the entire cable or wire section may be replaced at the request of the borrower. [62 FR 23998, May 2, 1997] § 1755.407 Data formats. The following suggested formats listed in this section may be used for recording the test data: [62 FR 24000, May 2, 1997] §§ 1755.408-1755.499 [Reserved] § 1755.500 RUS standard for service installations at customers access locations. (a) Sections 1755.501 through 1755.510 cover service installations at permanent or mobile home customer access locations. Sections 1755.501 through 1755.510 do not cover service installations at customer access locations associated with boat yards or marinas. (b) Service installations for customer access locations in boat yards or marinas shall be performed in accordance with Article 800, Communications Circuits, of the American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA) 70-1999, National Electrical Code NEC National Electrical Code NEC NEC NEC http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. [66 FR 43317, Aug. 17, 2001, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1755.501 Definitions applicable to §§ 1755.501 through 1755.510. For the purpose of this section and §§ 1755.502 through 1755.510, the following terms are defined as follows: American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Ampacity. NEC National Electrical Code © National Electrical Code NEC NEC NEC http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. AWG. BET. Bonding (Bonded). NEC National Electrical Code © Bonding harness wire. Building entrance terminal (BET). Demarcation point (DP). (1) Single unit installations. (2) Multiunit installations. (ii) In multiunit premises in which wiring is installed after August 13, 1990, including additions, modifications, and rearrangements of wiring existing prior to that date, the telecommunications company may establish a reasonable and nondiscriminatory practice of placing the demarcation point at the minimum point of entry. If the telecommunications company does not elect to establish a practice of placing the demarcation point at the minimum point of entry, the multiunit premises owner shall determine the location of the demarcation point or points. The multiunit premises owner shall determine whether there shall be a single demarcation point for all customers or separate such locations for each customer. Provided, however, that where there are multiple demarcation points within the multiunit premises, a demarcation point for a customer shall not be further inside the customer's premises than a point 12 in. (305 mm) from where the wiring enters the customer's premises. DP. Eligible country. FCC. Fuse link. NEC National Electrical Code © Grounding conductor. NEC National Electrical Code © Listed. NEC National Electrical Code © Manufactured home. NEC National Electrical Code © Mobile home. NEC National Electrical Code © Motor home. NEC National Electrical Code © Network interface device (NID). NID. Primary station protector. Qualified Installer. NEC Recreational vehicle. NEC National Electrical Code © RUS. RUS accepted (material and equipment). (1) Final assembly or manufacture of the equipment is completed in the United States, its territories and possessions, or in an eligible country; (2) The cost of components within the material or equipment manufactured in the United States, its territories and possessions, or in an eligible country is more than 50 percent of the total cost of all components used in the material or equipment; and (3) The material or equipment is suitable for use on systems of RUS telecommunications borrowers. RUS technically accepted (material and equipment). (1) Final assembly or manufacture of the equipment is not completed in the United States, its territories and possessions, or in an eligible country; and (2) The cost of components within the material or equipment manufactured in the United States, its territories and possessions, or in an eligible country is 50 percent or less than the total cost of all components used in the material or equipment. SEA. SEB. Travel trailer. NEC National Electrical Code © Truck camper. NEC National Electrical Code © [66 FR 43317, Aug. 17, 2001, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1755.502 Scope. (a) Sections 1755.503 through 1755.510 cover approved methods of making service installations at customer access locations in telecommunications systems of RUS borrowers. (b) Requirements in §§ 1755.503 through 1755.510 cover facilities of the type described in the FCC rules in 47 CFR part 68 for one and multi-party customer owned premises wiring. [66 FR 43317, Aug. 17, 2001] § 1755.503 General. (a) For the purposes of this section and §§ 1755.504 through 1755.510, a NID shall be as defined in § 1755.501 and shall contain both a fuseless primary station protector and a modular plug and jack for each conductor pair, up to a maximum of 11 pairs, and shall be provided by the telecommunications company and used by customers. (b) For the purposes of this section and §§ 1755.504 through 1755.510, BET shall be as defined in § 1755.501 and shall contain both primary station protectors and connector terminals for each conductor pair, of 12 or more pairs, and shall be provided by the telecommunications company and used by customers. The primary station protectors may be either fuseless or fused. (c) The requirements provided in this section and §§ 1755.504 through 1755.510 have been designed to coordinate with the provisions of the ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC National Electrical Code NEC NEC NEC http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. NEC NEC NEC (d) RUS borrowers shall make certain that all construction financed with RUS loan funds comply with: (1) The provisions of this section and §§ 1755.504 through 1755.510 and the ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (2) The provisions of this section and §§ 1755.504 through 1755.510 with borrower added adjustments to bring construction into compliance with any more stringent local codes. (e) This section and §§ 1755.504 through 1755.510 are intended primarily for the installer who will perform the work. It assumes that decisions regarding the selection of grounding electrodes, locations, and types of equipment have been made by the RUS borrower or the engineer delegated by the RUS borrower. (f) Only a qualified installer (g) This section and §§ 1755.504 through 1755.509 contain information which is normally not provided on the construction drawings which are included in § 1755.510. (h) All work shall be conducted in a careful and professional manner. Service wire and cable shall not be trampled on, run over by vehicles, pulled over or around abrasive objects or otherwise subjected to abuse. (i) When situations not covered by this section and §§ 1755.504 through 1755.510 arise, the RUS borrower or the engineer delegated by the borrower, shall specify the installation procedure to be used. The requirements of paragraph (j) of this section shall be complied with in every installation. (j) NIDs, BETs, and fused primary station protectors shall be installed and grounded to meet the requirements of the ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (k) Battery polarity and conductor identification shall be maintained throughout the system as indicated on construction drawings 815 and 815-1 contained in § 1755.510. Color codes and other means of conductor identification of buried and aerial service wires shall conform to the requirements of this section and §§ 1755.504 through 1755.510. (l) All materials for which RUS makes acceptance determinations, such as service wires and cables, ground rods, ground rod clamps, etc., used in service entrance installations shall be RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted. Borrowers shall require contractors to obtain the borrower's approval before RUS technically accepted materials are to be used in service entrance installations. Borrower's shall also ensure that the cost of the RUS technically accepted materials are at least 6 percent less than the cost of equivalent RUS accepted materials, as specified in “Buy American” Requirement of the Rural Electrification Act of 1938, as amended (7 U.S.C. 903 note). Materials used in service entrance installations which are of the type which RUS does not make acceptance determinations shall be of a suitable quality for their intended application as determined by the RUS borrower or the engineer delegated by the RUS borrower. (m) On completion of an installation, borrowers shall require the installer to make all applicable tests required by §§ 1755.400 through 1755.407, RUS standard for acceptance tests and measurements of telecommunications plant. [66 FR 43317, Aug. 17, 2001, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1755.504 Demarcation point. (a) The demarcation point (DP) provides the physical and electrical interface between the telecommunications company's facilities and the customer's premises wiring. (b) The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules in 47 CFR part 68 require telecommunications providers to establish a “DP” which marks a separation of the provider's facilities from the customer's (owned) premises wiring and equipment. (c) RUS borrowers shall observe the FCC DP requirement by installing NIDs, BETs, or fused primary station protectors when required by section 800-30(a)(2) of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC The National Electrical Code NEC NEC NEC http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (d) For all customer access locations of less than 12 pairs, RUS borrowers shall establish DPs by using either NIDs or fused primary station protectors when required by section 800-30(a)(2) of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC NEC [66 FR 43317, Aug. 17, 2001, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1755.505 Buried services. (a) Buried services of two or three pairs shall consist of Service Entrance Buried (SEB) assembly units, in accordance with RUS Bulletin 1753F-153 (RUS Form 515d), Specifications and Drawings for Service Installations at Customer Access Locations. The wire used for buried services shall conform to the requirements of § 1755.860, RUS specification for filled buried wires, and shall be RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted. The conductor size for two and three pair buried service wires shall be 22 American Wire Gauge (AWG). Copies of RUS Bulletin 1753F-153 are available upon request from RUS/USDA, 1400 Independence Avenue, SW., STOP 1522, Washington, DC 20250-1522, FAX (202) 690-2268. (b) Buried services of six or more pairs shall be RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted 22 AWG filled buried cable conforming to the requirements of § 1755.390, RUS specification for filled telephone cables. (c) Buried service wire or cable shall be terminated in buried plant housings using either splicing connectors or filled terminal blocks in accordance with the applicable paragraphs of § 1755.200, RUS standard for splicing copper and fiber optic cables. (d) Buried service wire or cable shall be identified at buried plant housings in accordance with construction drawing 958 contained in § 1755.510. (e) Buried service wire or cable shall be installed up to the building in the same general manner as buried exchange cable but in addition must meet the following requirements: (1) Light weight lawn plows or trenchers shall be used; (2) The shortest feasible route commensurate with the requirements of § 1755.508(i), (j), and (k), and paragraph (f)(1) of this section shall be followed; (3) Buried service wire or cable shall be plowed or trenched to a depth of 12 in. (305 mm) or greater where practicable in soil, 36 in. (914 mm) in ditches, or 3 in. (76 mm) in rock. Depths shall be measured from the top of the wire or cable to the surface of the ground or rock; (4) In the case of a layer of soil over rock either the minimum depth in rock measured to the surface of the rock, or the minimum depth in soil measured to the surface of the soil may be used; and (5) Where adequate advance planning has been done, burial of telecommunications services jointly with electric power services may be feasible. If a decision has been reached by management to provide joint occupancy services, the services may be installed using the recommendations in RUS Bulletin 1751F-640, “Design of Buried Plant—Physical Considerations.” Copies of RUS Bulletin 1751F-640 are available upon request from RUS/USDA, 1400 Independence Avenue, SW., STOP 1522, Washington, DC 20250-1522, FAX (202) 720-4120. (f) Buried service wire or cable shall be installed on or in buildings as follows: (1) Each buried service wire or cable shall contact the building as close to the NID, BET, or fused primary station protector as practicable. Service wire or cable runs on buildings shall normally consist of a single vertical run held to the minimum practical length. Horizontal and diagonal runs shall not be permitted. (2) Buried service wire or cable shall be located so as to avoid damage from lawn mowers, animals, gardening operations, etc. (3) Buried service wire or cable shall be installed against a foundation wall or pillar to provide adequate support and mechanical protection. (4) Where it is likely that the service wire or cable shall be subjected to mechanical damage, the wire or cable shall be enclosed in a guard in accordance with assembly unit drawing BM83 contained in § 1755.510. (5) The first above-ground attachment for a buried service wire or cable, unless it is enclosed in a guard, shall not be more than 4 in. (100 mm) above final grade. (6) Uninsulated attachment devices may be used to attach buried service wire and cable to masonry and other types of noncombustible buildings and on any type of building if fuseless primary station protectors incorporated in NIDs or BETs are used and installations fully comply with section 800-30(a)(1) of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC National Electrical Code NEC NEC NEC http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (7) Insulated attachments shall be used to separate service wires or cables from woodwork where section 800-30(a)(2) of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (8) Minimum separation between buried service wire or cable and other facilities shall be as listed in Table 1, as follows: Table 1—Minimum Separation for Telecommunications Wires and Cables on or in Buildings Foreign facility or obstruction Minimum clearance in. [mm] 1 2 Electric supply wire including neutral and grounding conductors: Open 4 [102] In conduit 2 [50.8] Radio and television antennas, Lead-in and grounding conductors 4 [102] Lightning rods and lightning conductors 3 All foreign grounding conductors except lightning rod ground conductors 2 [50.8] Neon signs and associated wiring 6 [150] Metallic objects—pipes (gas, cold water, oil, sewer) and structures 4 Wires or cables of another communications system 2 [50.8] 1 2 3 4 (9) Wire and cable attachments to buildings for outside mounted NIDS, BETs, or fused primary station protectors shall be in accordance with construction drawing 962 contained in § 1755.510. (10) Appropriate devices for attaching service wire or cable on or in buildings vary with the type of building construction and the wire or cable size. Figures 1 and 2 illustrate various types of anchoring devices and their applications. The size and type of fastening device for the wire or cable size and type of surface shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation; Figures 1 and 2 are as follows: (11) Experience indicates that there are objections from many owners of buildings covered with aluminum or vinyl siding to the drilling of holes in the siding for the attachment of wires or cables, and NIDs, BETs, or fused primary station protectors. It is, therefore, important to obtain permission from the owner before drilling holes in such siding. (12) If the NID, BET, or fused primary station protector must be mounted inside (not recommended by RUS), the service entrance into the building shall be installed in accordance with section 800-12(c) of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (13) If the customer requests an all buried installation for an alarm system or objects to above-ground facilities because of appearance and one-party service is involved, the entrance hole shall be made below grade as shown in sketch C of construction drawing 510-2 contained in § 1755.510. Care shall be exercised to prevent damage to the building foundation. The hole shall be sealed as specified in paragraph (f)(12) of this section. The installation shall comply with all the requirements of section 800-12(c) of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (g) When the NID, BET, or fused primary station protector is to be installed inside the building, the installation shall comply with section 800-12(c) of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC NEC NEC (h) An inside NID, BET, or fused primary station protector installation may also be made without use of a rigid metal or intermediate metal conduit provided that the ingress of the outside plant wire or cable complies with section 800-12(c) of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (1) The NID, BET, or fused primary station protector is located as close as practicable to the point where the outside plant wire or cable emerges through an exterior wall. The length of outside plant wire or cable exposed within the building shall be as short as practicable but in no case shall it be longer than 50 feet (ft) (15.2 meters (m)) in accordance with the allowable exception No. 3 of section 800-50 of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC NEC NEC NEC (2) Where the NID, BET, or fused primary station protector must be located within the building remote from the entrance point and the entrance point of the outside plant wire or cable cannot be designed to be closer to the NID, BET, or fused primary station protector location, the outside plant wire or cable shall be spliced, as close as practicable to the point where the outside plant wire or cable emerges through an outside wall, to an inside wiring cable that is “Listed” as being suitable for the purpose in accordance with part E of article 800 of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC NEC NEC NEC NEC (i) The polarity of buried wire or cable “tip” and “ring” conductors shall be maintained by making the connections in accordance with Table 2, as follows: Table 2—Color Codes For Tip And Ring Connections of Inside Wiring Cable Pair Tip Ring Color of insulation Color of marking Color of insulation Color of marking 1 White Blue Blue White 2 White Orange Orange White 3 White Green Green White 4 White Brown Brown White 5 White Slate Slate White 6 Red Blue Blue Red 7 Red Orange Orange Red 8 Red Green Green Red 9 Red Brown Brown Red 10 Red Slate Slate Red 11 Black Blue Blue Black 12 Black Orange Orange Black 13 Black Green Green Black 14 Black Brown Brown Black 15 Black Slate Slate Black 16 Yellow Blue Blue Yellow 17 Yellow Orange Orange Yellow 18 Yellow Green Green Yellow 19 Yellow Brown Brown Yellow 20 Yellow Slate Slate Yellow 21 Violet Blue Blue Violet 22 Violet Orange Orange Violet 23 Violet Green Green Violet 24 Violet Brown Brown Violet 25 Violet Slate Slate Violet [66 FR 43317, Aug. 17, 2001, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1755.506 Aerial wire services. (a) Aerial services of one through six pairs shall consist of Service Entrance Aerial (SEA) assembly units, in accordance with RUS Bulletin 1753F-153 (RUS Form 515d), Specifications and Drawings for Service Installations at Customer Access Locations. The wire used for aerial services shall conform to the requirements of §§ 1755.700 through 1755.704, RUS specification for aerial service wires, and shall be RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted. Copies of RUS Bulletin 1753F-153 are available upon request from RUS/USDA, 1400 Independence Avenue, SW., STOP 1522, Washington, DC 20250-1522, FAX (202) 720-4120. (b) If aerial wire services are to be connected to aerial cable pairs, the NIDs or fused primary station protectors and grounds shall be installed and connected before the aerial service wires are attached to the customer's structure. (c) Kinks or splices shall not be permitted in aerial service wire spans. (d) Aerial service wires shall be run in accordance with the construction drawings contained in § 1755.510 and shall conform to all clearance requirements of the ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC National Electrical Code NEC NEC NEC NEC http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (e) Aerial service wire shall be installed using the maximum practicable sag consistent with the required ground clearance and good construction practices. In no event shall the minimum sags be less than the values shown on construction drawing 505 contained in § 1755.510 for various span lengths and loading areas provided. Span lengths shall not exceed 250 ft (76 m). (f) To reduce vibration and galloping, aerial service wire shall be twisted one complete turn for each 10 ft (3 m) of span length at the time of installation. (g) The methods of attaching aerial service wires at poles shall be as illustrated in construction drawings 503-2 and 504 contained in § 1755.510. (h) Horizontal and vertical climbing spaces on poles used jointly with power circuits shall be provided in conformance with the requirements of Rule 236 of ANSI/IEEE C2-1997, NESC. (i) Not more than four aerial service wires shall be distributed from any one 7/16 5/16 (j) When connecting aerial service wires to cable pairs at terminals, sufficient slack shall be provided so that each aerial service wire shall reach any binding post position as shown on construction drawing 312-1 contained in § 1755.510. (k) Aerial service wire attachments on utility poles and the manner of placing bridle rings and entering cable terminals shall be as shown on construction drawing 503-2 contained in § 1755.510. (l) Not more than two conductors shall be connected to any terminal binding post. Where it is necessary to bridge more than two aerial service wires at the same closure, the aerial service wires shall be terminated in aerial service wire terminals connected in parallel with a No. 20 AWG bridle wire which shall be terminated on the binding posts of the filled terminal block. (m) Where aerial service wire is attached to aerial plastic cable, it shall be brought directly into a ready-access closure and shall be terminated on the binding posts of the filled terminal block as shown on construction drawing 503-2 contained in § 1755.510. (n) The conductor of copper coated steel reinforced aerial service wires identified by tracer ridges shall be used as the ring (negative battery) conductor of the pair, and shall normally be connected to the right or lower binding post of a pair on filled terminal blocks and NIDs or fused primary station protectors. (o) Nonmetallic reinforced aerial service wire pair identification. Table 3—Nonmetallic Reinforced Aerial Service Wire Color Code Pair number Conductor color Tip Ring 1 White/Blue or White Blue 2 White/Orange or White Orange 3 White/Green or White Green 4 White/Brown or White Brown 5 White/Slate or White Slate 6 Red/Blue or Red Blue (2) The ring (negative battery) conductor of the pair shall normally be connected to the right or lower binding post of a pair on filled terminal blocks and NIDs or fused primary station protectors. (p) When it is necessary to avoid intervening obstacles between a pole and a building, span clamp attachments shall be used to support the aerial service wires at points between the poles that are supporting the cable on the suspension strand as indicated by construction drawings 501-1 and 501-2 contained in § 1755.510. (q) Aerial service wire strung from pole to pole shall be placed entirely below or entirely above any existing wire or cable. When adequate ground clearance can be obtained, preference shall be given to placing aerial service wire below wire and cable. (r) When more than one aerial service wire is installed from pole to pole, the first aerial service wire shall be sagged in accordance with construction drawing 505 contained in § 1755.510. Succeeding aerial service wires shall be sagged with 2 in. (50.8 mm) more sag for each aerial service wire. (s) Aerial service wire spans from pole lines to buildings shall follow the shortest feasible route commensurate with the requirements of paragraph (t) of this section and shall be sagged in accordance with construction drawing 505 contained in § 1755.510. The route shall avoid trees and other obstructions to the extent practicable. Where trees cannot be avoided, tree trimming permission shall be obtained from the owner or the owner's representative, and all limbs and foliage within 2 ft (600 mm) of the finally sagged wire shall be removed. If tree trimming permission cannot be obtained, the matter shall be referred to the borrower for resolution before proceeding with the installation. (t) Aerial service wires shall contact buildings as closely as practicable at a point directly above the NID, or fused primary station protector. Generally, horizontal drop wire runs on buildings shall not exceed 20 ft (6 m). The warning given in § 1755.505(f)(11) regarding drilling holes in aluminum and vinyl siding applies also to attaching aerial service wires. (u) The point of the first building attachment shall be located so that the aerial service wire will be clear of roof drainage points. (v) Where practicable, aerial service wires shall pass under electrical guys, power distribution secondaries and services, tree limbs, etc. (w) Aerial service wire shall not pass in front of windows or immediately above doors. (x) Aerial service wires shall be routed so as to have a minimum clearance of 2 ft (600 mm) from any part of a short wave, ham radio, etc. antenna mast and a television antenna mast in its normal vertical position and of the possible region through which it sweeps when being lowered to a horizontal position. (y) Aerial service wires shall be installed such that all clearances and separations comply with either section 237 of ANSI/IEEE C2-1997, NESC, or ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (z) Aerial service wire attachments to buildings shall be as follows: (1) First attachments on buildings shall be made in accordance with construction drawings 506, 507, or 508-1 contained in § 1755.510, as applicable; (2) Intermediate attachments on buildings shall be made in accordance with construction drawings 510 or 510-1 contained in § 1755.510; and (3) Uninsulated attachments shall be permitted to be used as follows: (i) Wherever NIDS are used as permitted by section 800-30(a)(1) of the ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (ii) On masonry and other types of nonflammable buildings. (aa) Insulated attachments shall be used on wooden frame, metallic siding and other types of combustible buildings where fused primary station protectors are used, as required by section 800-30(a)(2) of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (bb) Aerial service wire runs on buildings shall be attached vertically and horizontally in a neat and most inconspicuous possible manner. See construction drawing 513 contained in § 1755.510. Horizontal runs on buildings are undesirable and shall be kept to a minimum. Diagonal runs shall not be made. (cc) Aerial service wire runs on buildings shall be located so as not to be subjected to damage from passing vehicles, pedestrians, or livestock. (dd) Minimum separation between aerial service wires and other facilities on or in buildings shall be in accordance with § 1755.505(f)(8), Table 1. (ee) Appropriate devices for attaching aerial service wires to buildings vary with the type of building construction and with the type of customer access location equipment. Table 4 lists various types of attachments and their application with respect to construction, customer access location equipment, and proper mounting devices. Construction drawings 506 through 513 contained in § 1755.510 illustrate requirements with respect to various angles of service wire contacts and uses of various attachments. Table 4 is as follows: Notes: 1. Screw dimensions are minimum. Where appropriate, either or both dimensions shall be increased. All wood screws for exterior use shall be stainless steel. All other exterior metal devices shall be stainless steel, zinc coated steel, silicon bronze, or corrosion resistant aluminum alloy. 2. Toggle bolt dimensions are minimum. Where appropriate, either or both dimensions shall be increased. 3. All devices should be attached to studding. 4. Screw-type devices shall be secured by means of expansion-type anchors. Equivalent manual or machine-driven devices may be used. Where toggle bolts are specified equivalent devices may be used. 5. Pilot holes shall be provided for screws and bridle rings in shingles and dropsiding. 6. Attachment device not applicable. 7. Attachment device applicable but no separate fastening device required. 8. To convert English units to Metric units use 1 in. = 25.4 mm. (ff) Fastener spacings for vertical and horizontal runs on frame or masonry buildings shall not be more than 6 ft (2 m) apart. Fasteners should be spaced close enough to prevent the aerial service wire from “slapping” against the building during windy conditions. (gg) When it is necessary to pass behind or around obstructions such as downspouts and vertical conduits, the aerial service wire shall be supported firmly with attachment devices placed not more than 6 in. (152 mm) from the obstruction as illustrated in Figures 4 and 5 of paragraph (hh) of this section. Preferably, the aerial service wire should be routed behind obstructions to minimize the possibility of mechanical damage to the aerial service wire in the event repair work to the obstruction is required. (hh) When passing around building projections of masonry or wood or around corners, aerial service wires shall be installed as illustrated in Figures 5 and 6. Figures 4, 5, and 6 are as follows: (ii) In areas where ice and snow conditions are severe, aerial service wires shall be located so that ice and snow falling from the roof will not strike the wires. However, where aerial service wires must pass under the sloping part of the roof, first attachments shall be made as close as practicable to the eaves. (jj) If two aerial service wire spans are required to the same building, the first attachment shall be such that both aerial service wires can be attached at the same attachment device. Refer to construction drawing 508-1 contained in § 1755.510. Where more than two aerial service wires are required, additional attachment devices in the same general location on the building shall be used. (kk) When two or more aerial service wire runs are required on the same building they shall share the same type of attachment devices. (ll) Aerial service wire entrances to buildings shall conform to sketch B of construction drawing 510-2 contained in § 1755.510, unless the entrance is made through a conduit. (mm) When the aerial service wire approaches the entrance hole from above, a 1.5 in. (40 mm) minimum drip loop shall be formed in accordance with sketch B of construction drawing 510-2 contained in § 1755.510. (nn) If an entrance conduit which slopes upward from outside to inside is available and suitably located, it shall be used for the aerial service wire entrance. [66 FR 43317, Aug. 17, 2001, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1755.507 Aerial cable services. (a) Where more than six pairs are needed initially, and where an aerial service is necessary, the service shall consist of 22 AWG filled aerial cable of a pair size adequate for the ultimate anticipated service needs of the building. The cable shall comply with the requirements of § 1755.390, RUS specification for filled telephone cables, and shall be RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted. (b) Aerial cable services shall be constructed in accordance with specific installation specifications prepared by the RUS borrower or the engineer delegated by the borrower. (c) Unless otherwise specified in the installation specifications, aerial cable service installations shall meet the following requirements: (1) Strand supported lashed construction shall be used. (2) Where practicable a 5/16 (3) Construction on poles shall comply with applicable construction drawings for regular line construction. Aerial service cable shall be spliced to the main cable in accordance with § 1755.200, RUS standard for splicing copper and fiber optic cables. (4) Where practicable, aerial cable shall pass under electrical guys, distribution secondaries, and services. (5) The suspension strand shall be attached to the building by wall brackets as indicated in Figure 7 as follows: (i) If taut spans are necessary, appropriate size strand may be used if the pull is in line with one wall of the building, or within 20 degrees of being in line as illustrated in sketch A of Figure 7. If the angle of pull is greater than 20 degrees from the building, the wall bracket shall be reinforced against pullout by an arrangement equivalent to sketch B of Figure 7. Taut spans may be strung using the recommendations in RUS Bulletin 1751F-630, Design of Aerial Plant. The same tension as would be used in normal line construction so as not to exceed 60 percent of the breaking strength of the strand under maximum loading shall be used. Taut spans shall not exceed 100 ft (30.5 m) in length and the cable weight shall not exceed 1 pound/foot (lb/ft) [1.5 kilogram/meter (kg/m)] except when equivalent combinations of greater span lengths with cable weight less than 1 lb/ft (1.5 kg/m) are permissible. Copies of RUS Bulletin 1751F-630 are available upon request from RUS/USDA, 1400 Independence Avenue, SW., STOP 1522, Washington, DC 20250-1522, FAX (202) 720-4120. (ii) When an attachment must be made to the face of a building wall away from a corner, a “U” type wall bracket shall be used as indicated in sketch C of Figure 7. Only slack span construction with 5/16 (6) Aerial cable shall be located on the rear or side of the building and shall be run only in a horizontal or a vertical direction. The cable route shall be selected so as to avoid building projections and obstructions to the extent practicable. (7) Cable attachment devices shall be located on solid masonry or on studs of wood frame buildings. Cable attachment devices may be installed on sheet surface materials only when such materials are reinforced with a backing material which allows penetration and firm holding of the attachment devices through the backing material. (8) The minimum separation on or in buildings between cable and other facilities shall be as indicated in § 1755.505(f)(8), Table 1. (9) On horizontal runs, cable clamps shall be placed so that the attachment is below the cable. On vertical runs, cable clamps shall be placed so that the attachment is on the same side as horizontal runs. Cable clamps shall be placed on the inside of cable bends. (10) On horizontal runs, cable clamps shall be placed not more than 16 in. (400 mm) apart for cable diameters equal to or greater than 1 in. (25.4 mm) and 24 in. (600 mm) apart for cable diameters less than 1 in. (25.4 mm). (11) On vertical runs, cable clamps shall be approximately 24 in. (600 mm) apart for all sizes of cable. (12) For the cable entrance, holes shall be bored slightly larger in diameter than the cable and shall slope upward from outside to inside. A duct sealer having RUS acceptance or RUS technical acceptance shall be applied to both ends of the hole after the cable is pulled in. (13) Section 1755.505(g) and (h) shall also apply to aerial cable services. [66 FR 43317, Aug. 17, 2001] § 1755.508 Customer access location protection. (a) All customer access locations shall be protected. (b) Customer access location protection shall consist of installing the telecommunications facilities with proper clearances and insulation from other facilities, providing primary voltage limiting protection, fuse links, NIDs, BETs, or fused primary station protectors, if required, and adequate bonding and grounding. (c) All NIDs shall be RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted or the RUS borrower shall obtain RUS regional office approval on a case by case basis as applicable. (d) All BETs shall be RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted. (e) All fused primary station protectors shall be RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted. (f) NIDs, BETs, or fused primary station protectors shall be mounted outside for all applications except for those described in paragraphs (g)(1) through (g)(3) of this section. (g) NIDs, BETs, or fused primary station protectors may be mounted inside when: (1) Large buildings are to be served and the customer requests an inside installation; (2) Buried alarm circuits are requested by the subscriber; or (3) The customer requests an all buried installation for appearance or to prevent the drilling of holes in aluminum or vinyl siding. (h) Outside mounted NIDs, BETs, or fused primary station protectors shall be easily accessible and shall be located between 3 to 5 ft (1 to 1.5 m) above final grade. (i) The locations of NIDs, BETs, or fused primary station protectors shall be selected with emphasis on utilizing the shortest primary station protector grounding conductor practicable and on grounding of the telecommunications primary station protector to the electric service grounding system established at the building served utilizing electrodes (c) through (g) cited in section 800-40(b)(1) of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC National Electrical Code NEC NEC NEC http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (j) If access to the building electric service grounding system, as referenced in paragraph (i) of this section, is not possible or is not reasonable (telecommunications primary station protector grounding conductor will be longer than 10 ft (3 m)), the NID, BET, or fused primary station protector shall be located as close as practicable to electrodes (a) or (b) cited in section 800-40(b)(1) of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (k) In addition, the NID, BET, or fused primary station protector shall be located in, on, or immediately adjacent to the structure or building to be served as close as practicable to the point at which the telecommunications service wire attaches to the building, making sure that the telecommunications primary station protector grounding conductor is connected to the closest, existing, and accessible electrode, of the electrodes cited in paragraph (i) or (j) of this section. (l) For the preferred customer access location installation, the ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (1) Connections to metallic conduits shall be made by ground straps clamped over a portion of the conduit that has been cleaned by sanding down to bare metal. (2) Connections to metallic service equipment closures shall be made by attaching a connector which is listed for the purpose by some organization acceptable to the local authority (State, county, etc.) per article 100 of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (m) Where it is not possible to accomplish the objective of paragraphs (i), (j), and (k) of this section, interior metallic pipes may be used to the maximum practicable extent to gain access to the electric service ground as shown in Figure 9. Note that the water pipe in Figure 9 is electrically continuous between electric and telecommunications bonds to the cold water pipe and it is used only as a portion of a bonding conductor and, therefore, does not have to be “acceptable” as a ground electrode but may be floating (isolated from ground by a plastic pipe section). ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (n) Where the telecommunications premises system at a customer's access location is grounded to a separate electrode (of any type) this telecommunications grounding electrode must be bonded to the electric grounding system with a No. 6 AWG or larger copper insulated grounding conductor. Bonding of separate electrodes is a requirement of the ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (o) The NID, BET, or fused primary station protector pair size shall be selected for the number of lines anticipated within five years. (p) When lightning damage is considered probable or customer access locations are remote from the borrower's headquarters, use of maximum duty gas tube primary station protectors incorporated in NIDs, BETs, or fused primary station protectors should be considered. (See RUS TE&CM 823, Electrical Protection by Use of Gas Tube Arresters). Copies of RUS TE&CM 823 are available upon request from RUS/USDA, 1400 Independence Avenue, SW., STOP 1522, Washington, DC 20250-1522, FAX (202) 720-4120. (q) NIDs or BETs incorporating fuseless station protectors shall always be used in preference to fused station protectors or BETs incorporating fused protectors, when in the judgment of the RUS borrower or the engineer delegated by the RUS borrower, the requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (r) A fuse link consisting of a copper conductor two gauges (AWG) finer (numerically higher) conductivity than the aerial service wire shall be provided between the cable and aerial service wire where NIDs or BETs incorporating fuseless station protectors are used. Thus for a 22 AWG drop, a fuse link of No. 24 AWG or finer copper wire shall be provided. If the cable circuit is No. 24 gauge or finer, the cable conductors serve as the fuse link for the 22 AWG aerial service wire and no separate fuse link is necessary. (Note: The fuse link or the facilities serving as the fuse link must be located between the telecommunications facilities that are exposed to possible power cross and the customer drop where there is no exposure to possible power cross.) (s) RUS's buried plant practices require buried main line plant to be protected against power contacts to aerial plant extensions and aerial inserts by No. 24 AWG fuse links at every buried-aerial junction. (t) In aerial cable plant, fuse links are usually provided by No. 24 AWG leads on filled terminal blocks regardless of the gauge of the cable conductors. This practice is acceptable if the ampacity of the aerial service wire is sufficiently higher than the fuse link's ampacity. (u) The grounding and bonding of each NID, BET, or fused primary station protector shall be selected by consulting paragraphs (i) through (n) of this section. The “first choice” assembly unit shall be selected whenever the prevailing conditions make its use practicable. The NID, BET, or fused primary station protector assembly unit selected shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate construction drawing specified in RUS Bulletin 1753F-153 (RUS Form 515d), Specifications and Drawings for Service Installations at Customer Access Locations (Incorporated by reference at § 1755.97). Copies of RUS Bulletin 1753F-153 are available upon request from RUS/USDA, 1400 Independence Avenue, SW., STOP 1522, Washington, DC 20250-1522, FAX (202) 720-4120. (v) The minimum size grounding conductor that can be used with a single NID; a group of NIDs; a multipair NID; fused protector; or BET shall be in accordance Table 5, as follows: Table 5—Grounding Conductor Size Versus Number of Circuits Minimum grounding conductor size Number of circuits Fuseless (carbon or gas tube) Fused #12 AWG, copper, insulated 1 to 2 1 to 3. #10 AWG, copper, insulated 3 to 5 4 to 7. #6 AWG, copper, insulated 6 or more 8 or more. (w) Grounding conductor runs between the NID, BET, or fused station protector and the ground electrode shall conform to the following: (1) The shortest, most direct route practicable shall be used; (2) Sharp bends in the grounding conductor shall be avoided during installation; (3) No splices shall be made in the grounding conductor; (4) Grounding conductors shall not be fished through walls, under floors, or placed in bridle rings or any metal conduit unless the grounding conductor is bonded to the conductor at both ends of the metallic conduit; (5) Grounding conductor runs from an outside mounted NID, BET, or fused station protector to an inside ground electrode shall use the same entrance as the station wire; and (6) Grounding conductor runs from an outside mounted NID, BET, or fused station protector to an outside ground electrode at the building shall be attached to the exterior surface of the building or buried. If buried, the grounding conductor shall be either plowed or trenched to a minimum depth of 12 in. (300 mm). When trenched, the trenches shall be as close to the side of the building as practicable, backfilled, and tamped to restore the earth to its original condition. (x) Telecommunications grounding connectors shall be RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted. Grounding and bonding conductors shall be made of copper. Where the grounding and bonding conductors must be connected to aluminum electric service grounding conductors, bimetal grounding connectors shall be used. (y) Grounding conductor attachments shall conform to the following: (1) Galvanized nails or clamps, or nickel-copper alloy staples shall be used for grounding conductor attachments in accordance with Table 6 in paragraph (y)(3) of this section; (2) Grounding conductors, station or buried service wires in parallel runs may share the same fastening device when the device is specifically designed for two wires. See Table 6 in paragraph (y)(3) of this section for station wire and grounding conductor fasteners; and (3) Grounding conductor fasteners shall be placed 12 to 18 in. (300 to 450 mm) apart on straight runs and 2 to 4 in. (50.8 to 100 mm) apart at corners and at bends. Table 6 is as follows: Notes: 1. Screw dimensions are minimum. Where appropriate, either or both dimensions shall be increased. All wood screws for exterior use shall be stainless steel. All other exterior metal devices shall be stainless steel, zinc coated steel, silicon bronze, or corrosion resistant aluminum alloy. 2. Toggle bolt dimensions are minimum. Where appropriate, either or both dimensions shall be increased. 3. Wall screw anchors may be used in wall board, plaster or tile walls. Screws and nails in masonry shall be secured by means of expansions type anchors. Equivalent manual or machine-driven devices may be used. Where toggle bolts are specified, equivalent devices may be used. 4. Lead holes shall be drilled for screws, nails, and bridle rings in shingles and dropsiding. 5. Sheet metal screws shall be used except where toggle bolts are required. Where wood sheathing under sheet metal siding is encountered, the sheet metal may be drilled or punched and a wood screw used. 6. Machine-driven staples of nickel-copper composition may be used for exterior wiring. 7. Galvanized clamps and wiring nails may be used for exterior and interior wiring. Enameled clamps shall be used for interior wiring only. Where toggle bolts or equivalent devices require holes in the structure larger than the clamp being fastened, a suitable washer of sufficient size to cover the hole must be used under the clamp. 8. Double clamp may be used where two #22 AWG station wires, two #12 AWG grounding conductors, or one #22 AWG station wire and one #12 grounding conductor parallels one another. 9. For converting English units to Metric units use 1 in. = 25.4 mm. (z) Grounding conductors shall be separated from non-telecommunications company wires in accordance with section 800-12(b) of ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (aa) Grounding conductors run through metal conduits shall be bonded to the conduit at each end. RUS accepted and RUS technically accepted pipe type ground clamps and grounding connectors shall be used for bonding. (bb) Where NID, BET, or fused station protector assembly units require grounding conductor connections to pipe systems, the following apply: (1) The connection shall be made to a cold water pipe of an operating water system; (2) The connection point shall be preferably inside the building; (3) Allow a minimum of 6 in. (152 mm) between the last fastener and the point where the grounding conductor first touches the water pipe; (4) Leave 2 in. (50.8 mm) of slack in the grounding conductor to avoid breaking the conductor at the terminating point. Tape the grounding conductor to the pipe where possible to avoid movement. In no case, shall the grounding conductor be coiled or wrapped around the pipe; (5) The pipe shall be cleaned with fine sand paper to make a good electrical connection. Care should be taken to avoid damaging the pipe while cleaning it; (6) Attach the pipe grounding conductor connector to the cleaned area of pipe and tighten. Care shall be exercised to avoid deforming, crushing, or otherwise damaging the pipe. A simple continuity check with an ohmmeter between the connector and the pipe will indicate whether or not a good electrical contact has been made. Set the ohmmeter to “Rx1” scale to ensure that a low resistance contact is made; (7) A warning tag shall be attached to the ground clamp with the following or equivalent statement: “Call the telecommunications company if this connector or grounding conductor is loose or must be removed;” and (8) When the water pipe is used, the ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC (cc) Bonding conductors shall consist of either copper or tinned copper insulated wires of appropriate sizes. (1) Bonding conductors shall be run and attached in the same manner as grounding conductors. (2) Attaching and terminating devices for bonding conductors shall be adequate for the size of wire involved. The No. 6 AWG copper insulated conductor or larger shall not be terminated by bending it around a threaded stud. (dd) Where NID, BET, or fused station protector assembly units require a driven ground rod the following shall apply to the ground rod installation: (1) Locate the ground rod at least 1 ft (300 mm) from buildings, poles, trees and other obstruction; (2) Ground rods shall not be installed within 6 ft (2 m) of electric service ground rods (Note: This minimum separation is provided to avoid mutual impedance effects of multiple grounding electrodes that will deleteriously degrade the effective impedance-to-earth if grounding electrodes are installed any closer than 6 ft (2 m) to one another. This requirement is included for cases where the telecommunications company is not allowed, for some reason, to observe the RUS preferred grounding method of attaching the primary protector grounding conductor directly to an accessible point on the building electric service grounding system. RUS believes that if the primary protector location can be sited within 6 ft (2 m) of the electric service ground rod then the electric service ground rod could be used as the preferred telecommunications grounding electrode and a separate telecommunications ground rod is unnecessary); (3) A hole, 15 in. (350 mm) deep and 6 in. (150 mm) in diameter, shall be dug at the location where the ground rod is to be driven; (4) Where “slip-on” type ground rod clamps are used instead of “clamp-around” type clamps, the ground rod clamps shall be placed onto the rod prior to driving the rod into the ground (Note there should be one clamp for the NID, BET, or fused station protector grounding conductor and one clamp for the conductor required to bond the telecommunications ground rod to the electric grounding system). However, the clamp shall not be tightened until the rod is completely driven. The end of the rod shall be placed in the bottom of the hole and the rod shall be aligned vertically adjacent to one wall of the hole prior to driving. The rod shall be driven until its tip is 12 in. (300 mm) below final grade. The grounding conductor shall then be attached, the clamp shall be tightened, and hole backfilled. Clamps employed in this manner shall be suitable for direct burial and shall be RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted; and (5) Where rods are manually driven, a large number of blows from a light hammer (4 lbs (1.8 kg)) shall be used instead of heavy sledgehammer type blows. This should keep the rod from bending. (ee) Terminations on fuseless primary station protectors incorporated in NIDs and on fused primary station protectors shall be as shown in Figures 10, 11, 12, and 13 of paragraph (ee)(1) of this section, Figure 14 of paragraph (ee)(4) of this section, and Figure 15 of paragraph (ee)(6) of this section. The inner jackets of buried service wires and outer jackets of cables used as service drops shall be extended into the NID or the fused primary station protector. A 10 in. (250 mm) length of each spare wire shall be left in NIDs or fused primary station protectors. The spare wires shall be coiled up neatly and stored in the NID or fused primary station protector housing. (1) The shields of buried service wires may be connected to the ground binding post using RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted buried service shield bond connectors as shown in Figure 10 for NIDs and Figure 11 for fused primary station protectors. RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted buried service wire harness wires designed for customer access location installations may also be used for terminating buried service wire shields to the ground binding post of the NID as shown in Figure 12 and Figure 13 for fused primary station protectors. Figures 10 through 13 are as follows: (2) On buried service drops and aerial service drops of more than 6 pairs using RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted cables, the shields shall be terminated with a RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted cable shield bonding connector and extended to the ground binding post of the NID, BET, or fused primary station protector with an RUS accepted or RUS technically accepted bonding harness wire. The installation of the shield bond connector and bonding harness wire shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. (3) The shield and other conductors at the fuseless primary station protector incorporated in the NID shall be terminated as shown on Figure 14 in paragraph (ee)(4) of this section. The pronged or cupped washer shall be placed above the shield. The grounding conductor shall be placed around the post on top of the pronged or cupped washer. A flat washer shall be placed above the grounding conductor. (4) The station wire signaling ground conductor, if required, shall be placed above the first flat washer and beneath the second flat washer as indicated in Figure 14 as follows: (5) The shield and other conductors at the fused primary station protector shall be terminated as shown on Figure 15 in paragraph (ee)(6) of this section. The pronged or cupped washer shall be placed above the shield. The grounding conductor shall be placed around the post on top of the pronged or cupped washer. A flat washer shall be placed above the grounding conductor. (6) The station wire signaling ground conductor, if required, shall be placed above the first flat washer and beneath the second flat washer as indicated in Figure 15 as follows: (7) Indoor NIDs or BETs that are equipped with “Quick Connect” type terminals shall not have more than one wire connected per clip. No. 19 AWG copper and No. 18 AWG copper covered-steel reinforced aerial service wire conductors shall not be connected to quick connect terminals. Nonmetallic reinforced aerial service wire using No. 22 AWG copper conductors may be connected to the quick connect terminals. (8) Tip and ring connections and other connections in multipair NIDs or BETs shall be as indicated in Figure 16 as follows: (ff) System polarity and conductor identification shall be maintained in NIDs, BETs, or fused primary station protectors in accordance with construction drawings 815 and 815-1 contained in § 1755.510. [66 FR 43317, Aug. 17, 2001, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1755.509 Mobile homes. (a) Customer access location installations at mobile homes shall be treated the same whether the homes are mounted on permanent foundations or temporary foundations and shall be installed as specified in §§ 1755.500 through 1755.510. For the purpose of this section, mobile homes include manufactured homes, motor homes, truck campers, travel trailers, and all forms of recreational vehicles. Customer access location installations at mobile homes can be considerably different than customer access location installations at regular homes and borrowers shall be certain that the two types of installations are properly applied. (b) The method of customer access location installation prescribed by the ANSI/NFPA 70-1999, NEC National Electrical Code NEC NEC NEC http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. NEC NEC NEC NEC NEC (c) NIDs shall be installed at mobile homes as follows: (1) Where the mobile home electric service equipment (power meter, etc.,) or the electric service disconnecting means associated with the mobile home is located within 35 ft (10.7 m) of the exterior wall of the mobile homes it serves, the NID shall be installed in accordance with Figure 17 as follows: (2) Where the mobile home electric service equipment (power meter, etc.,) or the electric service disconnecting means associated with the mobile home is located more than 35 ft (10.7 m) from the exterior wall of the mobile homes it serves, the NID shall be installed in accordance with Figure 18 as follows: (d) The service wire and station wire shall be terminated in the NID in accordance with Figure 19 in paragraph (e) of this section. (e) Installation of the station wire and grounding conductor at the mobile home shall be in accordance with Figure 20. Figures 19 and 20 are as follows: [66 FR 43317, Aug. 17, 2001, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1755.510 Construction and assembly unit drawings. (a) The construction and assembly unit drawings in this section shall be used by borrowers to assist the installer in making the customer access location installations. (b) The asterisks appearing on the construction drawings indicate that the items are no longer listed in the RUS Informational Publication (IP) 344-2, “List of Materials Acceptable for Use on Telecommunications Systems of RUS Borrowers.” RUS IP 344-2 can be obtained from the Superintendent of Documents, P. O. Box 371954, Pittsburgh, PA 15250-7954, telephone number (202) 512-1800. (c) Drawings BM50, BM83, 312-1, 501-1, 501-2, 503-2, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508-1, 510, 510-1, 510-2, 513, 815, 815-1, 958, and 962 are as follows: [66 FR 43327, Aug. 17, 2001] §§ 1755.511-1755.521 [Reserved] § 1755.522 RUS general specification for digital, stored program controlled central office equipment. (a) General. (2) The output of a digital-to-digital port shall be Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), encoded in eight-bit words using the mu-255 encoding law and D3 encoding format, and arranged to interface with a T1 span line. (3) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard S1.4-1983, Specification for Sound Level Meters, is incorporated by reference by RUS. This includes S1.4A-1985 that is also incorporated by reference. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from ANSI Inc., 11 West 42nd Street, 13th Floor, New York, NY 10036, telephone 212-642-4900. Copies may be inspected during normal business hours at RUS, room 2838-S, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (4) American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Specification B 33-91, Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes, is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from ASTM, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA, telephone 215-299-5400. Copies may be inspected during normal business hours at RUS, room 2838-S, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (5) Bell Communications Research (Bellcore) document SR-TSV-002275, BOC Notes on the LEC Networks—1990, March 1991, is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51. Copies may be obtained from Bellcore Customer Service, 60 New England Avenue, Piscataway, NJ 08854, telephone 1-800-521-2673. Copies may be inspected during normal business hours at RUS, room 2838-S, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (6) Bellcore TR-TSY-000508, Automatic Message Accounting, July 1987, is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from Bellcore Customer Service, 60 New England Avenue, Piscataway, NJ 08854, telephone 1-800-521-2673. Copies may be inspected during normal business hours at RUS, room 2838-S, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (7) Federal Standard H28, Screw-Thread Standards for Federal Services, March 31, 1978, is incorporated by reference by RUS. This includes: Change Notice 1, Federal Standard, Screw-Thread Standards for Federal Services, May 28, 1986; Change Notice 2, Federal Standard, Screw-Thread Standards for Federal Services, January 20, 1989; and Change Notice 3, Federal Standard, Screw-Thread Standards for Federal Services, March 12, 1990. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from the General Services Administration, Specification Section, 490 East L'Enfant Plaza SW, Washington, DC 20407, telephone 202-755-0325. Copies may be inspected during normal business hours at RUS, room 2838-S, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (8) Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Std 455-1985, IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Measuring Longitudinal Balance of Telephone Equipment Operating in the Voice Band, is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from IEEE Service Center, 445 Hoes Lane, P. O. Box 1331, Piscataway, NJ 08854, telephone (201) 981-0060. Copies may be inspected during normal business hours at RUS, room 2838-S, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (9) Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Std 730-1989, IEEE Standard for Software Quality Assurance Plans, is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from IEEE Service Center, 445 Hoes Lane, P. O. Box 1331, Piscataway, NJ 08854, telephone (201) 981-0060. Copies may be inspected during normal business hours at RUS, room 2838-S, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (10) RUS Bulletin 345-50, PE-60, RUS Specification for Trunk Carrier Systems, September 1979, is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552 (a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from the Rural Utilities Service, Administrative Services Division, room 0175-S, Washington, DC 20250. The bulletin may be inspected at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (11) RUS Bulletin 345-55, PE-61, Central Office Loop Extenders and Loop Extender Voice Frequency Repeater Combinations, December 1973, is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552 (a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from the Rural Utilities Service, Administrative Services Division, room 0175-S, Washington, DC 20250. The bulletin may be inspected at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (12) RUS Bulletin 345-87, PE-87, RUS Specification for Terminating (TIP) Cable, December 1983, is incorporated by reference RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552 (a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from the Rural Utilities Service, Administrative Services Division, room 0175-S, Washington, DC 20250. The bulletin may be inspected at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (b) Reliability. (2) The central office switching system shall be designed such that the expected individual line downtime does not exceed 30 minutes per year. This is the interval that the customer is out of service as a result of all failure types, excluding dispatch and travel time, i.e., hardware, software, and procedural errors. (3) The central office switching system shall be designed such that there will be no more than 1 hour of total outages in 20 years, excluding dispatch and travel time for unattended offices. (c) System type acceptance tests. (2) A “completed call” test shall be made part of these system type acceptance tests. There shall be no more than two in 10,000 locally originating and incoming calls misdirected, unsuccessfully terminated, prematurely disconnected or otherwise failing as a result of equipment malfunction and/or equipment failures, or as a result of transients, noise or design deficiencies. This test shall be made with a load box with no less than 10 lines access and 10 subscriber numbers for completion, or equivalent, with no other traffic in the system. If there is a failure in the equipment during this test, the cause shall be repaired and the test restarted at zero calls. (3) System type acceptance testing applies basically to factory type testing, and not to owner acceptance testing for individual installations. The overall installed and operating system shall also meet these requirements, except for unusual circumstances or where specifically excluded by this or other RUS requirements. (d) Types of requirements. (2) Optional requirements are those which may not be needed for every office and are identifiable by a phrase such as, “when specified by the owner,” or, “as specified by the owner.” (3) In some cases where an optional feature specified in paragraph (e) of this section will not be required by an owner, either now or in the future, a system which does not provide this feature will be considered to be in compliance with this section for the specific installation under consideration, but not in compliance with the entire section. (4) The owner may request bids from any RUS accepted supplier whose system provides all the features which will be required for a specific installation. (5) The Application Guide, RUS TE&CM 322, provides information about the economic and service factors involved in all optional features, as well as instructions for the completion of appendices A and B of this section. (e) General requirements. (2) Complete flexibility shall be provided for assigning any subscriber directory number to any central office line equipment by the use of internal programmed memory. Thus, any subscriber line and/or directory number may be moved to another terminal to distribute traffic loads, if the line equipment hardware is compatible with the service provided. (3) The system shall be arranged to interface with interexchange carrier trunks and networks using single digit or multi-digit access codes. The system shall be equipped to handle at least 20-digit subscriber dialed numbers. All subscriber directory numbers in the office shall be seven-digit numbers. (4) The network and the control equipment shall be comprised of solid-state and integrated circuitry components. Peripheral equipment shall be comprised of solid-state and integrated circuitry components as far as practical and consistent with the state-of-the-art and economics of the subject system. (5) The basic switching system shall include the provision of software programming and necessary hardware, including memory, for optional custom calling services such as call waiting, call forwarding, three-way calling, and abbreviated dialing. It shall be possible to provide these services to any individual line (single-party) subscriber. The addition of these services shall not reduce the anticipated ultimate engineered line, trunk, and traffic capacity of the switching system as specified in appendix A of this section. (6) The requirements in this specification apply only to single party lines. Although only single frequency ringing is required, other types may be requested in appendix A of this section. (7) Provision shall be made for local automatic message accounting (LAMA), and for traffic service position system (TSPS) trunks, or equivalent, to the operator's office when required either initially or in the future. (8) Tandem switching features shall be provided if specified in appendix A of this section. (9) The system shall be arranged to serve a minimum of eight All Number Calling (ANC) office codes per office, with discrimination on terminating calls by trunk group, numbering plan, or programmed memory and class mark, if specified in appendix A of this section. (10) Busy hour load handling capacity is an important feature when an office approaches capacity. The delays which may occur in call completion during busy hour periods may prove to be excessive in some system designs. Accordingly, each bidder shall provide, in appendix C of this section, data satisfactory to RUS regarding the busy hour load handling capacity and traffic delays of the system. (11) Provision shall be made for hotel-motel arrangements, as required by the owner, to permit the operation of message registers at the subscriber's premises to record local outdial calls by guests (see Item 10.5, appendix A of this section). (12) Provision shall be made to identify the calling line or incoming trunk on nuisance calls (see paragraph (g)(10) of this section for details). (13) Full access from every subscriber line to every interoffice trunk shall be provided. (14) Facilities shall be provided to implement service orders, make traffic studies, and perform switching and transmission tests by means of remote control devices if such operations are specified in Items 11.2 and 11.3 of appendix A of this section. (15) Provision shall be made for the addition of facilities to record all subscriber originated calls based on dialed directory number, time of day, and duration of conversation. They shall be such that the additional equipment (if any is required) may be added to an in-service system without interruption of service and a minimum of equipment, wiring and software modifications. (16) The system shall be capable of distributed switching operation where groups of subscriber lines can be remotely located from the central office. The remotely situated units are known as “Remote Switching Terminals” (RST's) (see paragraph (w) of this section). This does not eliminate the use of pair gain devices such as direct digitally connected concentrators, regular concentrators or subscriber carrier equipment, where specifically ordered by the owner and its engineer. (17) The switching system shall have means to synchronize its clock with switches above it in the network hierarchy, when specified by the owner in item 3, appendix A of this section (see paragraph (j) of this section). (18) Consistent with system arrangements and ease of maintenance, space shall be provided on the floor plan for an orderly layout of future equipment bays that will be required for anticipated traffic when the office reaches its ultimate size. Readily accessible terminals shall be provided for connection to interbay and frame cables to future bays. All cables, interbay and intrabay (excluding power), if technically feasible, shall be terminated at both ends by use of connectors. (19) When specified in appendix A of this section, the system shall be capable of processing emergency calls to a 911 service bureau connected either by a group of one-way 911 lines or a trunk group. (i) It shall be possible to reach the service bureau by dialing 911, 1 + 911, or a 7-digit number. (ii) The system shall select an idle 911 line or trunk. (iii) The system shall provide usual ringing and ringback signal until the called 911 line answers. (iv) If the calling line goes on-hook first, the system shall hold the connection from the called 911 line and return steady low tone to the service bureau. The system shall then begin a 45-minute timeout, after which the calling line is disconnected and an alarm message is printed on a TTY. If the calling line goes off-hook before timeout, the system shall reestablish the conversation path. (v) If the calling line does not disconnect, the service bureau attendant shall have the ability to force a disconnect of the established connection with the calling party. (vi) When the 911 call is answered, the equipment shall be arranged so that coin lines are not charged for the call. Similarly, if some form of local call charging is used, there shall be no charge for the 911 call. (vii) If the 911 service bureau is holding a calling line, it shall be possible for the 911 line to cause the equipment to ring back the calling line. This is done by providing a flash of on-hook signal from the 911 line lasting from 200 to 1,100 milliseconds. The signal to the calling line shall be ringing current if the line is on-hook, or receiver off-hook (ROH) tone if the line is off-hook. (viii) Calls shall not be originated from the service bureau via the dedicated 911 lines. If an attempt is made to originate a call, it shall receive reorder tone. After 6 minutes, the system shall print an alarm message. (ix) If 911 calls pass through intermediate switching, the forced-hold control, emergency ringback, and calling line status monitoring capabilities are lost. (f) Line circuit requirements General. (ii) In addition to operating on nonloaded cable pairs and subscriber carrier, the equipment shall function properly with D-66 and H-88 loaded cable pairs, including any provisions the equipment must control for the purposes of proper transmission. (2) Dialing Subscriber dial speed. (ii) Subscriber dial interdigital time. (iii) Subscriber line pushbutton dialing frequencies. Low Group Frequencies (Hz) High Group Frequencies (Hz) 1209 1336 1477 1633 697 1 2 3 Spare 770 4 5 6 Spare 852 7 8 9 Spare 941 * 0 # Spare (B) The receiver shall comply with the operating parameters of the dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) central office receiver as described in section 6 of Bell Communications Research (Bellcore) document SR-TSV-002275, BOC Notes on the LEC Networks—1990. (3) Impedance. (4) Lockout. (ii) The line on lockout shall be reconnected automatically to the central office when the permanent off-hook condition is cleared. (5) Pay stations. (6) Loop extension. (ii) Working limits for subscriber lines with loop extenders are covered in RUS Bulletin 345-55, PE-61, Central Office Loop Extenders and Loop Extender Voice Frequency Repeater Combinations. (iii) Ringing from RUS accepted loop extenders, or their equivalent, shall be cut off from the called line when the handset at the called station is removed during the ringing or the silent interval. (7) Private branch exchange (PBX) lines. (8) Quantity. (9) Types. (g) Intraoffice switching requirements. (i) Provide dial tone in response to origination of a call by a subscriber, except on special lines where the application of dial tone is not applicable, such as manual and hot lines; (ii) Remove dial tone immediately after the first digit has been dialed; (iii) Recognize the class of service of the calling subscriber; (iv) Register the digits dialed by the calling subscriber where the rotary dial or pushbutton dialing characteristics and the minimum interdigital times are as specified; (v) Perform the necessary translation functions when the required number of digits have been registered, and select a channel to a proper outgoing trunk, if one is available, to the designated interexchange carrier; (vi) Provide a transmission path from the calling subscriber line to the selected trunk, if an idle one is found; (vii) Provide for more than one alternate route to the desired destination when specified by the owner, select an idle outgoing trunk in the first or second choice alternate route trunk group, if all trunks in the higher choice groups are busy, and provide a reorder signal (see paragraph (i)(2)(iv) of this section) to the subscriber if no trunks are available in the last choice alternate route; (viii) Translate the proper part of the registered incoming routing data on tandem calls into an identification of an outgoing trunk group, select an idle trunk in that group, initiate the connection of the incoming trunk to the outgoing trunk, set the trunks in the proper configuration for tandem operation, and transmit information as required to permit completion to the desired destination in the distant office; (ix) Transmit the proper stored information over the selected trunk to permit completion of outgoing calls to the desired destination by the distant office or offices, and provide multifrequency (MF) outpulsing when specified; (x) Register all the digital information on calls incoming from a distant office, when dial or MF pulsing characteristics and interdigital times are as specified; (xi) Translate internally a registered directory number into line equipment location, ringing code and terminating class (such as “PBX hunting”) on incoming or intraoffice calls; (xii) Test the called line for a busy condition; (xiii) Connect the incoming trunk or locally originated call to the called line if the called line is idle; (xiv) Permit any type of ringing voltage available in the central office to be associated with any Subscriber Directory Number (SDN), cause the proper type of ringing voltage to be connected to the called line, and remove ringing from the line upon answer whether in the ringing or silent period; and (xv) Test and monitor the switching system continually during periods of low traffic using the maintenance and diagnostic subsystem. (2) The switching system shall offer at least the following originating and terminating class-of-service indications on a per-line basis to subscribers, as specified by the owner: (i) Flat rate individual line, bridged ringing; (ii) Flat rate PBX and trunk hunting numbers, bridged ringing; (iii) Pay station; (iv) Message rate subscriber line; (v) Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS); (vi) Extended Area Service (EAS); (vii) Data service; (viii) Hotel-Motel capability; (ix) Denied originating; (x) Denied terminating; (xi) Custom calling features; (xii) Special interexchange carrier accesses; and (xiii) Presubscription to designated interexchange carrier. (3) The switching system shall provide PBX hunting. (i) At least one trunk hunting group in each 100 SDN's equipped shall be provided. More may be provided as specified by the owner. (ii) PBX groups shall be of a reasonable size commensurate with the ultimate size of the switching system. (iii) Any available SDN may be used for PBX trunk hunting. (iv) Each PBX group shall have the capability of being assigned one or more nonhunting SDN's for night service. (v) If the called line is a PBX hunting line, the switching system shall test all assigned lines in the hunting group for a busy condition. (vi) If the called PBX group is busy, line busy tone, as specified in paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section, shall be returned to the originating end of the connection. (4) The switching system shall provide pay stations which may be prepay or semi-postpay. The system shall be arranged so that an operator and emergency service (911) may be reached from prepay or semi-postpay coin lines without the use of a coin, when the proper pay station equipment is provided. (5) To meet dialing requirements, the switching system shall: (i) Initiate the line lockout function after a delay, as specified in paragraph (r)(3) of this section, if dial or pushbutton dialing pulses are not received after initiation of a call, preferably routing the subscriber line to a holding circuit for tones and then automatically to lockout; (ii) Connect 120 interruptions per minute (IPM) paths busy tone, recorded message, or other distinctive tone to the calling subscriber if an interval longer than that specified in paragraph (r)(4) of this section elapses between dialed digits; (iii) Register the standard tone calling signals received from a subscriber station arranged for pushbutton dialing if specified by the owner, provide arrangements to function properly with 12-button pushbutton dialing sets, and return a reorder signal to the subscriber upon receipt of signal from the 11th or 12th buttons if neither of these buttons is assigned functions; and (iv) Connect the incoming trunk to the digit register equipment within 120 milliseconds after seizure where direct dialing is received on calls from a distant office, cancel the bid for a register, and return reorder tone to the calling end if dial pulses are received before a register is attached. (6) The switching system shall provide for appropriate circuit usage. (i) To avoid inefficient utilization of the switching network, that portion of the common equipment that establishes the connection on intramachine calls shall not require more than 500 milliseconds, exclusive of ringing and ring trip, to complete its function under no-delay conditions. (ii) The switching system shall provide for duplication in a load sharing or redundant configuration any circuit elements or components, the failure of which would reduce the grade of service of 100 or more lines by more than 25 percent of the traffic carrying capacity. (iii) The switching system shall ensure that failure of access to a high choice circuit will not prevent subsequent calls from being served by lower choice circuits, wherever possible. (iv) Where only two circuits of a type are provided, circuits shall be designed so that failure of one circuit will not permanently block any portion of the system for the duration of the failure. (v) Where more than two circuits of a type are provided, successive usages should be on a rotational or random basis rather than the step-up selection with the possible exception of a last choice trunk. (vi) The system shall be designed so that, in the event of a network failure, the system shall immediately or simultaneously use a redundant portion of the network to complete the call. (7) The switching system shall provide busy verification facilities with the method of access specified by the owner. (i) Only an operator or a switchman shall be able to override a busy line condition. (ii) If the called line is busy, off-hook supervision shall be given the operator or switchman. (iii) The responsibility of restricting subscribers in distant offices from having access to busy verification shall be on the distant office personnel when the toll trunks are used for both toll connecting and verification traffic. (iv) When a verification code is used, all digits of the code must be dialed before cut-through to the called line can be accomplished. (8) The switching system shall provide intercept facilities. (i) All unused numbering plan area codes, home numbering plan area office codes, service codes and subscriber directory numbers (SDN's) shall be routed to intercept. All intercept administration shall be by changes in memory administrable by telephone company personnel. Maximum machine time to place a subscriber on intercept shall be 15 seconds. (ii) Unequipped SDN's intercept shall be effective if the processor memory does not have information concerning the SDN in question. (iii) The intercept equipment shall be arranged so that specific SDN's can be routed to a separate intercept circuit for changed numbers. (iv) When an intercept call is answered, either by an operator or by a recorded announcement, an off-hook or charge supervision signal shall not be returned, even momentarily, to the originating end. (v) When intercepting service is to be handled over the regular interoffice toll trunks, a distinctive identifying tone shall be transmitted when the operator answers. This tone shall be of the frequency and duration specified in paragraph (i)(2)(x) of this section. (9) The switching system shall provide nuisance call trap facilities which, when activated, provide a permanent record of the calling and called numbers complete with date and time of day. Where the call originates over an interoffice trunk, the actual trunk number shall be recorded. There shall be provision for the called subscriber to hold the connection and for the positive trace of the call from origination to termination within the office. (10) The switching system shall follow appropriate release procedures. (i) The office shall be arranged so a connection to a terminating channel other than assistance operator shall be released under control of the calling party so that the channel can be reseized, unless the call is to emergency 911 service or other termination arranged for called party control. (ii) If the called party disconnects first, the channel used in the originally established connection shall be held until the calling party disconnects or until the timing interval specified in paragraph (r)(7) of this section has elapsed. This feature shall not interfere with the normal operation of calls to intercept, fire alarm, or other special services. (11) The switching system shall provide line load control facilities, when specified by the owner, to give preference for originating service to a limited group of subscribers during emergencies. (i) These facilities may be activated manually by input-output (I/O) device or automatically after a manual setting of a key (or equivalent) to put line load control into effect, as determined by the bidder. The automatic procedure is preferable. (ii) Procedures shall be established to avoid the unauthorized use of the line load control facilities. (iii) Where automatic activation is provided, service may be provided to small groups of nonemergency subscribers on limited grade of service whenever the office load becomes low enough to permit this to be done safely. (h) Interoffice trunk circuit requirements General. (ii) Trunks shall not be directly driven from the subscriber's dial on outward calls. (iii) In order to reduce the spares inventory and minimize incidence of improper maintenance replacement of circuit assemblies, the types of trunk circuits shall be kept to a minimum. Variation in assemblies should be mainly limited to variation in signaling modes. (iv) Trunk circuits which connect with carrier or 4-wire transmission facilities shall be arranged for 4-wire transmission to avoid an intermediate 2-wire interface between a 4-wire switching system and trunk facilities. (2) Quantity. (3) Requirements for interoffice connections. (ii) There are no requirements for trunks arranged for manual re-ring by a toll operator, either with the receiver on or off the hook, except to coin stations with the receiver on the hook. (iii) On calls from subscribers to the assistance operator, the release of the connection shall be under control of the last party to disconnect. An exception is operator control of disconnect that is used on outgoing trunks to a TSP/TSPS system. (iv) On calls originated by an operator, the release of the connection shall be under control of the operator. (v) Where trunks with E and M lead signaling are used, the trunk circuits for Type I signaling shall be arranged to place ground on the M lead during the on-hook condition and battery on the M lead in the off-hook condition. For E and M Type II, only a make contact between the MA and MB lead will be required. In either type, current limiting shall be provided in the E lead of the trunk circuit itself, as required for proper operation. It shall be assumed that connection equipment in the form of trunk carrier, multiplex, or associated signaling apparatus furnishes only a contact closure to ground (Type I) or to a signal ground lead (Type II) for an off-hook condition on the E lead. (vi) Where answer supervision is used to determine the initiation of the charging interval for a call, such answer supervision shall not be effective for charging until after the elapse of the timing interval listed in paragraph (r)(5) of this section. (vii) When necessary, provision shall be made for reception of start and stop dial signals on toll trunk equipment. (viii) When trunks arranged for automatic message accounting (AMA), toll ticketing, or centralized automatic message accounting (CAMA) are specified by the owner, these trunks shall provide the pertinent features described in paragraph (k) of this section applicable to such functions. (4) Requirements for direct digital connections. (ii) Each interface circuit shall connect 24 voice channels to the switching system from a 1.544 megabit per second DS1 bit stream. The DS1 bit stream entering or exiting the system shall be in the D3 format and the voice signals shall be encoded in 8 bit mu-255 PCM. The format and processing of the bit stream must be compatible with characteristics of the D3 channel bank such as alarm and maintenance characteristics. Loss of receive signal (DS1) shall be detected and the equivalent of a carrier group alarm shall be executed in 2.5 ±0.5 seconds. Loss of synchronization shall be detected by slips, timing jitter, and wander in accordance with industry standards. (iii) Signaling shall be by means of MF or dial pulse (DP) and the system which is inherent in the A and B bits of the D3 format. In the case where they are not used for signaling, the A and B bits shall be used only for normal voice and data transmission. (i) Tone requirements General. (2) Tone specifications. (ii) Low tone shall consist of 480 Hz plus 620 Hz at a composite level of −21 dBm0 which equates to −24 dBm0 per frequency. (iii) Line busy tone shall be low tone interrupted at 60 IPM, with tone on 0.5 seconds and off 0.5 seconds. (iv) Reorder, all paths busy, and no circuit tone shall be low tone interrupted at 120 IPM, with tone on 0.25 seconds and off 0.25 seconds. (v) Identifying tone on calls from coin lines shall be uninterrupted low tone. (vi) High tone shall consist of 480 Hz at −17 dBm0. (vii) Audible ringback tone shall consist of 440 plus 480 Hz at a composite level of −16 dBm0 which equates to −19 dBm0 per frequency. (viii) The call progress tones listed in this section are described in Bellcore document SR-TSV-002275, BOC Notes on the LEC Networks—1990, section 6. The 350, 440, 480, and 620 Hz tones shall be held at ±0.5 percent frequency tolerance and ±3 dB amplitude variation. The amplitude levels specified are to be measured at the main distributing frame, excluding cable loss. (ix) Distinctive tone, when required for alarm calls, or other features, shall consist of high tone interrupted at 200 IPM with tone on 150 ms and off 150 ms. (x) Identifying tone on intercepted calls shall consist of uninterrupted high tone impressed on the trunk circuit 300 to 600 milliseconds following the operator's answer of intercepted calls. (xi) An ROH circuit shall have output tones which do not interfere with the pushbutton or multifrequency signaling tones. The ROH tone may be introduced digitally internal to the system near the overload level of + 3 dBm0. No power adjustment will be required. The frequency of the output shall be distinctive and urgent in order to attract the subscriber's attention to an off-hook situation. (Warning: In order to determine the signal level, a frequency selective voltmeter must be used to determine the level of each signal component and mathematical power addition used to combine these measurements into a single level value.) (xii) During application of tones, office longitudinal balance shall be maintained within 15 dB of that specified in paragraph (q)(8) of this section. (j) System clock. (2) The end office central office system clock shall be a Stratum 3 clock with: (i) A minimum long-term accuracy of ±4.6 × 10 −6 (ii) A minimum stability of 3.7 × 10 −7 (iii) A “Pull-In Range” for the capability of synchronizing to a clock with accuracy of ±4.6 × 10 −6 (3) The access tandem central office system clock shall be a Stratum 2 clock with: (i) A minimum long-term accuracy of ±1.6 × 10 −8 (ii) A minimum stability of 1 × 10 −10 (iii) A “Pull-In Range” for the capability of synchronization to a clock with accuracy of ±1.6 × 10 −8 (k) Switched access service arrangements General. (2) Operation. (ii) All equipment shall be arranged for Feature Group B given that appendix A of this section requires the equipment of the necessary trunks (Trunk Side Connection). (iii) The equipment shall be arranged for Feature Group C on the trunk groups specified in appendix A of this section. Even though appendix A of this section specifies Feature Group D or some other trunk group, it shall be possible through software commands available to the owner to use Feature Group C signaling protocols on a trunk group basis until such time that the trunk group in question converts to Feature Group D signaling protocols. (iv) The equipment shall be arranged for Feature Group D on the trunk groups specified in appendix A of this section. (v) Calls originating from coin lines toward switched access service shall be arranged either to provide signaling protocols for TSPS, or in the absence of TSPS-type service, such calls shall be blocked. (vi) The equipment shall be arranged for forwarding routing information, calling party identification, and called party numbers in the proper feature group protocols, by trunk group as specified in appendix A of this section. (vii) The equipment shall be arranged for AMA data collection as specified in appendix A of this section by trunk group. Unless otherwise specified by the owner, the equipment shall be arranged to collect the billing data in the Bellcore AMA format as described in Bellcore document TR-TSY-000508, Automatic Message Accounting. (viii) If specified in Item 9.4, appendix A of this section, the equipment shall be arranged to store the billing data in a pollable system. If specified in Item 9.5, appendix A of this section, equipment shall be furnished to poll the pollable systems associated with the contract. (l) Fusing and protection requirements General. (ii) Design precautions shall be taken to prevent the possibility of equipment damage arising from the insertion of an electronic package into the wrong connector, the removal of a package from any connector, or the improper insertion of the correct card in its connector. (2) Fuses. (3) Components. (ii) Printed circuit boards or similar equipment employing electronic components shall be self-protecting against external grounds applied to the connector terminals, where feasible. Board components and coatings applied to finished products shall be of such material or treated so they will not support combustion. (iii) Every precaution shall be taken to protect electrostatically sensitive components from damage during handling. This shall include written instructions and recommendations (see Item 6.1,h of appendix C of this section). (m) Switching network requirements The network. (ii) The switching network shall employ time division digital switching and be compatible for connection to D3 type PCM channel banks without conversion to analog. (iii) Equipment shall be available as required to connect analog lines and trunks, analog or digital service circuits, digital carriers to RST's, D3 channel banks or other digital switching units. (2) Network quantity. (n) Stored program control (SPC) equipment requirements. (2) Programs shall be modular, flexible and structured. In the interest of more dependable and more easily read programs, it is desirable to use a language which is more person-oriented leaving the detailed machine-oriented problems to a compiler program. Quality assurance of all software programs shall be in accordance with IEEE Std 730-1989, IEEE Standard for Software Quality Assurance Plans, or equivalent. (3) The office administration program shall have checks within it to prevent failure due to erroneous or inconsistent input data. It shall safeguard against the possibility of upsetting machine performance with improper instructions or information. In addition, modular structure shall allow the use of a variety of human-engineered service order formats. Service changes may be performed remotely if so desired. Average machine time for service change shall be 15 seconds or less. Service changes shall not be registered in permanent memory until verified. The access to the service change shall not have access to generic program. (4) The switching system shall be able to offer, by request, at least the following printouts of its routine stored data for administrative purposes: (i) A list of all assigned directory numbers, in numerical order, with their assigned class of service and line terminal numbers; (ii) A list of all directory numbers, in numerical order, associated with a class of service; (iii) A list of all unassigned line terminals; (iv) Traffic data in proper form for separation studies in accordance with the revenue separations procedures current at the time of the contract; (v) All lines on lockout; (vi) All lines assigned to intercept; (vii) All available (unassigned) directory numbers in the working thousands group; and (viii) A list of equipment busied out for maintenance. (5) The printouts in paragraph (n)(4) of this section may be delayed to times of light traffic. (6) Maintenance diagnostics shall be performed by a fault recognition system utilizing both software and hardware, each being used where they are most effective for maintenance and reliability. In the economic interests of providing early and efficient fault detection and accurate pinpointing of faulty areas, it is desirable to have a comprehensive person-machine interface supported by extensive automatic fault detection and analysis, involving diagnostic software for fault resolution and automatic recovery mechanisms to maintain continuous service. Maintenance messages may be channeled to a remote maintenance center if so desired. (7) Information in memory, having no requirement for changes to be introduced in the maintenance or operation of the system, may be stored in memory devices such as programmable read-only memory (PROM) or other devices that cannot be reprogrammed in the field. (o) Maintenance facilities Alarm features, including alarm sending. (ii) The alarms shall be classified in accordance with their effect on the system. (A) Catastrophic alarms demand immediate attention and require notification of the highest level of supervisory personnel. Conditions such as loss of service, loss of one or more remote line switches or line concentrators connected through Direct Digital Interface, loss of network control, and loss of computer program in all processors shall produce catastrophic alarms. (B) Major alarms demand rapid action. Conditions such as loss of one or more groups of subscribers or trunk ports, blown fuses for common groups of channels, loss of control to groups of channels, failure of one or both redundant units, and total loss of battery charging current for more than 15 minutes shall produce major alarms. (C) Minor alarms indicate nonemergency conditions which cause degraded service or fault conditions which causes the system to operate within less-than-optimum performance. Conditions discovered in automatic routining which have not shown in the operation of the equipment but require attention and cumulative line lockout (level adjustable) are examples of minor alarm conditions. (iii) When the office is arranged for unattended operation, facilities shall be provided for extending the alarm indications to an attended point. (iv) When the use of a separate outside plant facility for alarm sending is specified, the nature of the alarm may be indicated to the distant point by machine printout or other display device. (v) When alarm sending is accomplished over a regular operator office trunk, the operator shall be apprised that the call is an alarm indication by a distinctive tone, as specified by the owner in appendix A of this section. It shall be possible for the operator to determine at any time the presence of a trouble condition by dialing a number set aside for that purpose. This number shall also be accessible from lines classmarked for this feature. (vi) When the alarm sending circuit seizes an interoffice operator trunk, the operator must dial the alarm checking code over another trunk before the first trunk can be released except where the alarm condition has disappeared first. (vii) The alarm sending circuit shall have access to two or more trunks if the trunks are used for subscriber traffic. (viii) An alarm indication of higher priority shall supersede an original alarm indication and reseize an interoffice operator trunk. (ix) In any group of offices purchased under one contract, the same codes shall be used in each office for alarm checking and test. (x) When the alarm checking number is dialed, the alarm indications received shall be as follows: (A) Catastrophic alarm—No tone. (B) Major alarm—Continuous busy tone 60 IPM, unless alarm is overridden. (C) Minor alarm—Continuous 1-ring code ringback tone, unless alarm is overridden. (D) No trouble—Continuous 2-ring code ringback tone, unless alarm is overridden. (xi) Audible and visual local alarms and transmitted alarms shall be provided as follows: Delay Interval Classification Local Alarms Alarms Transmitted Catastrophic 0 0 Major 0 0 1 Minor 0 0-30 Min. 1 (xii) The central office alarm circuits shall be arranged to provide optional wiring to transmit either a minor alarm or a major alarm and a printout to accommodate various types of trunk and subscriber carrier systems, microwave, mobile radio, other transmission systems, and environmental protection systems with different priorities when a set of contacts is closed in the equipment of such systems and the alarm checking code is dialed. The alarm relay shall be furnished by the supplier of the carrier multiplex and/or mobile radio equipment. The option or options shall be specified by the owner. (2) Trouble location and test. Equipment. (B) The fault recorder shall provide a permanent or semi-permanent record of the circuit elements involved whenever a trouble is encountered. It shall be arranged to recognize an existing fault condition and not cause multiple printouts of the same fault, except during test routine. (ii) Maintenance system. (B) The maintenance system shall provide both specialized maintenance hardware circuits and an extensive software package to enable maintenance to determine trouble to an individual card or functional group of cards. (C) Maintenance programs may be both on-line and off-line. On-line maintenance programs are activated by system errors and shall be scheduled to execute call tests during low traffic periods and periodic hardware tests at specific time intervals. Programs shall provide diagnostic tools for the maintenance personnel and be initiated by them. (D) Scheduled periodic hardware tests shall automatically detect faults and alert maintenance personnel via alarm or appropriate input/output device(s) at local and/or remote locations. (E) Facilities shall be provided so that test calls can be set up using pre-selected items of switching equipment. (F) The maintenance personnel shall be able to make tests to determine if every trunk and every item of switching equipment are functioning properly. Also, it shall be possible to make each trunk and each SPC equipment, or part thereof, busy to service calls. Where possible, equipment which is made busy to service calls shall still be accessible for test calls. (iii) Outside plant and subscriber stations. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 ( 7 ( 8 ( 9 ( 10 (B) An acceptable arrangement for making the tests shown in paragraph (o)(2)(iii)(A) of this section is to have them under software control with results displayed at one of the system's I/O ports. (C) A howler circuit for maintenance purposes, if ordered by the owner, shall have output tones which do not interfere with the pushbutton or multifrequency signaling tones. The harmonics of the output tones shall be attenuated at least 26 dB below the fundamental frequency for all load conditions. The frequency stability shall be 2 percent or less for all output tones when the unit is operated in the specified load and environmental range. It shall be possible to vary the output voltage (power) of the howler circuit. It shall remove tone and restore the line to service when the telephone instrument receiver is placed on-hook. The frequency of the output shall be chosen to be distinctive and urgent in order to attract the subscriber's attention to an off-hook situation. (D) When a dial speed test facility is specified by the owner, it shall be accessed by dialing a special code and shall return to the calling station readily identifiable signals to indicate that the dial speed is slow, normal, or fast. (E) When the office is arranged for pushbutton dialing, optional facilities shall be provided for testing the pushbutton dialing equipment at the subscriber station. (F) When a system for testing subscriber lines in remote offices from a test position in a centrally located office is specified by the owner, it shall be capable of working with all the central offices and RST's in the remote areas. This testing equipment shall preferably be solid-state with a minimum of electromechanical devices and shall operate from central office battery. It shall be capable of working over any voice grade telephone circuit and shall not require a dedicated trunk. There shall be no interference to or from “in-band” voice channel tones. When used over a network, the verification or access shall be guarded to prevent unauthorized access by subscribers. Access to this system shall only be available to the test operator in all cases. (3) Transmission testing. (ii) Transmission test circuits are available with a variety of options. These include single frequency and multifrequency tone generators with one or more generator output terminals, quiet terminations, and loop around test arrangements for both one-way and two-way trunks. (iii) Where multifrequency generators are used, they are usually arranged to provide a minimum of three frequencies. With some equipment, up to seven additional frequencies may be provided if needed. No industry standardization of test frequencies is as yet provided. Therefore, it is important that the selection of frequencies, the order in which they are applied and the time interval for application of each frequency be agreed upon by the connecting company and the RUS borrower and listed in appendix A of this section in those situations where connecting companies request the installation of multifrequency generators in borrowers' central offices. (iv) The milliwatt generator shall be solid-state and generate the analog or digital equivalent of 1004 Hz. The milliwatt generator shall be assigned to a 4-wire analog test port or be digitally generated. All 2-wire and 4-wire voice frequency ports are at a nominal 0 dBm0 level. The level of the 1004 Hz tone generator shall appear at outgoing 2-wire and 4-wire ports at 0 dBm ±0.5 dB. For direct digital connections, the encoded output shall be the digital equivalent of a 0 dBm0 ±0.5 dB signal. (v) Reference tone generators can be used individually or they can be part of a loop around test arrangement. If both single frequency and multifrequency reference tone generators are to be provided, only one can be arranged as part of a loop around test. Where a loop around arrangement is provided, the generator output can be obtained by dialing singly one of the two line terminals. By dialing the other line terminal singly, usually a 900 ohm resistor in series with a 2.16 microfarad capacitor is connected to the circuit under test to act as a “quiet termination” for noise measurements and other tests. Whenever both line terminals are held simultaneously, both the milliwatt supply and the quiet termination shall be lifted off and a “loop around” condition established. This permits the overall loss to be determined from the distant office by going out over one trunk, looping around in the end office and returning over the other trunk. The insertion loss of this test arrangement when used in a loop around configuration should not exceed 0.1 dB at the frequencies specified for the milliwatt supply. Unless otherwise specified, continuous off-hook supervision is to be provided on both line terminals to prevent collusive calling without charge. It will be permissible to accomplish the quiet termination by opening the 4-wire path internally and to accomplish the loop around by digital switching. (vi) Provision shall be made so that the milliwatt supply can be manually patched to circuits. (vii) Test jack access shall be provided for all interoffice trunks of the voice frequency type. The jack access shall be properly designated for line, drop, monitor, and signaling leads plus any other jacks as requested by the owner. This may be accomplished by a set of jacks located at the maintenance center which have access to each trunk on a switching basis. (p) Traffic General engineering guidelines. Traffic Table Full Availability for Random Traffic Lost-Calls-Cleared Offered Traffic Expressed in CCS Number of Trunks B-.001 .002 .005 .01 .02 .05 .1 .2 .5 Number of Trunks 1 0 0 0 0 1 2 4 9 36 1 2 2 3 4 5 8 14 22 36 98 2 3 7 9 13 17 22 32 46 69 165 3 4 16 19 25 31 39 55 74 106 234 4 5 27 32 41 49 60 80 104 144 304 5 6 41 48 58 69 82 107 135 184 374 6 7 57 65 78 90 106 135 168 224 445 7 8 74 83 98 113 131 163 202 265 516 8 9 92 103 120 136 156 193 236 307 586 9 10 111 123 143 161 183 224 270 348 656 10 11 131 145 166 186 210 255 306 391 729 11 12 152 167 190 212 238 286 341 433 801 12 13 174 190 215 238 266 318 377 476 872 13 14 196 213 240 265 295 350 413 519 944 14 15 219 237 266 292 324 383 449 562 1015 15 16 242 261 292 320 354 415 486 605 1087 16 17 266 286 318 347 384 449 523 648 1158 17 18 290 311 345 376 414 482 560 692 1230 18 19 314 337 372 404 444 515 597 735 1302 19 20 339 363 399 433 474 549 634 779 1374 20 21 364 388 427 462 505 583 671 823 1445 21 22 389 415 455 491 536 617 709 866 1517 22 23 415 441 483 521 567 651 747 910 1589 23 24 441 468 511 551 599 685 784 954 1661 24 25 467 495 540 580 630 720 822 998 1733 25 26 493 523 568 611 662 754 860 1042 1805 26 27 520 550 598 641 693 788 898 1086 1876 27 28 546 578 627 671 725 823 936 1130 1948 28 29 573 606 656 702 757 858 974 1174 2020 29 30 600 634 685 732 789 893 1012 1218 2092 30 31 628 662 715 763 822 928 1050 1263 2164 31 32 655 690 744 794 854 963 1089 1307 2236 32 33 683 719 774 825 887 998 1127 1351 2308 33 34 711 747 804 856 919 1033 1165 1395 2380 34 35 739 776 834 887 951 1068 1203 1439 2452 35 36 767 805 864 918 984 1104 1242 1484 2524 36 37 795 834 895 950 1017 1139 1281 1528 2595 37 38 823 863 925 981 1050 1174 1319 1572 2667 38 39 851 892 955 1013 1083 1210 1358 1617 2739 39 40 880 922 986 1044 1116 1246 1396 1661 2811 40 41 909 951 1016 1076 1149 1281 1435 1706 2883 41 42 937 980 1047 1108 1182 1317 1474 1750 2955 42 43 966 1010 1078 1140 1215 1352 1512 1795 3027 43 44 995 1040 1109 1171 1248 1388 1551 1839 3099 44 45 1024 1070 1140 1203 1282 1424 1590 1884 3171 45 46 1053 1099 1171 1236 1315 1459 1629 1928 3243 46 47 1083 1129 1202 1268 1349 1495 1668 1973 3315 47 48 1112 1159 1233 1300 1382 1531 1706 2017 3387 48 49 1141 1189 1264 1332 1416 1567 1745 2062 3459 49 50 1170 1220 1295 1364 1449 1603 1784 2106 3531 50 51 1200 1250 1327 1397 1483 1639 1823 2151 3603 51 52 1229 1280 1358 1429 1516 1675 1862 2195 3675 52 53 1259 1310 1390 1462 1550 1711 1901 2240 3747 53 54 1289 1341 1421 1494 1584 1747 1940 2285 3819 54 55 1319 1371 1453 1527 1618 1783 1979 2329 3891 55 56 1349 1402 1484 1559 1652 1819 2018 2374 3962 56 57 1378 1432 1516 1592 1686 1856 2057 2418 4034 57 58 1408 1463 1548 1625 1719 1892 2096 2463 4106 58 59 1439 1494 1579 1657 1753 1928 2136 2508 4178 59 60 1468 1525 1611 1690 1787 1965 2174 2552 4250 60 61 1499 1556 1643 1723 1821 2001 2214 2597 4322 61 62 1529 1587 1675 1756 1855 2037 2253 2642 4394 62 63 1559 1617 1707 1789 1889 2073 2292 2687 4466 63 64 1590 1648 1739 1822 1923 2110 2331 2731 4538 64 65 1620 1679 1771 1855 1958 2146 2370 2776 4610 65 66 1650 1710 1803 1888 1992 2182 2409 2821 4682 66 67 1681 1742 1835 1921 2026 2219 2449 2865 4754 67 68 1711 1773 1867 1954 2060 2255 2488 2910 4826 68 69 1742 1804 1900 1987 2094 2291 2527 2955 4898 69 70 1773 1835 1932 2020 2129 2328 2566 3000 4970 70 71 1803 1867 1964 2053 2163 2364 2606 3044 5042 71 72 1834 1898 1997 2087 2197 2401 2645 3089 5114 72 73 1865 1929 2029 2120 2232 2438 2684 3134 5186 73 74 1895 1961 2061 2153 2266 2474 2723 3178 5258 74 75 1926 1992 2093 2186 2300 2511 2763 3223 5330 75 76 1957 2024 2126 2219 2335 2547 2802 3268 5402 76 77 1988 2055 2159 2253 2369 2584 2841 3313 5474 77 78 2019 2087 2191 2286 2404 2620 2881 3357 5546 78 79 2050 2118 2223 2319 2438 2657 2920 3402 5618 79 80 2081 2150 2256 2353 2473 2694 2959 3447 5690 80 81 2112 2182 2289 2386 2507 2730 2999 3492 5762 81 82 2143 2213 2321 2420 2542 2767 3038 3537 5834 82 83 2174 2245 2354 2453 2577 2803 3077 3581 5906 83 84 2206 2277 2386 2487 2611 2840 3117 3626 5977 84 85 2237 2309 2419 2521 2646 2877 3156 3671 6049 85 86 2268 2340 2452 2554 2680 2913 3196 3716 6121 86 87 2299 2372 2485 2588 2715 2950 3235 3761 6193 87 88 2331 2404 2517 2621 2750 2987 3275 3805 6265 88 89 2362 2436 2550 2655 2784 3024 3314 3850 6337 89 90 2393 2468 2583 2688 2819 3060 3353 3895 6409 90 91 2425 2500 2616 2722 2854 3097 3393 3940 6481 91 92 2456 2532 2649 2756 2889 3134 3432 3984 6553 92 93 2488 2564 2682 2790 2923 3171 3471 4029 6625 93 94 2519 2596 2715 2823 2958 3208 3511 4074 6697 94 95 2551 2628 2748 2857 2993 3244 3551 4119 6769 95 96 2582 2660 2781 2891 3028 3281 3590 4164 6841 96 97 2614 2692 2814 2925 3063 3318 3630 4209 6913 97 98 2645 2724 2847 2958 3097 3355 3669 4253 6985 98 99 2677 2757 2880 2992 3132 3392 3708 4298 7057 99 100 2709 2789 2913 3026 3167 3429 3748 4343 7129 100 105 2867 2950 3078 3196 3342 3613 3946 4567 7489 105 110 3027 3112 3244 3366 3516 3798 4143 4792 7849 110 115 3186 3275 3411 3536 3691 3983 4341 5016 8209 115 120 3347 3437 3578 3707 3867 4168 4539 5241 8569 120 125 3507 3601 3745 3878 4043 4353 4737 5465 8929 125 130 3669 3765 3912 4049 4219 4539 4935 5689 9289 130 135 3830 3929 4081 4221 4395 4724 5133 5914 9649 135 140 3992 4093 4249 4392 4571 4910 5332 6138 10009 140 145 4155 4258 4418 4564 4748 5095 5530 6363 10369 145 150 4318 4423 4586 4737 4925 5282 5728 6587 10729 150 155 4481 4589 4755 4909 5102 5467 5927 6812 11089 155 160 4644 4755 4925 5082 5279 5654 6125 7037 11449 160 165 4808 4920 5094 5255 5457 5840 6324 7261 11809 165 170 4972 5087 5264 5428 5634 6026 6523 7486 12169 170 175 5137 5253 5434 5602 5811 6213 6722 7710 12529 175 180 5301 5420 5604 5775 5989 6399 6920 7935 12889 180 185 5466 5587 5775 5949 6167 6586 7119 8160 13249 185 190 5631 5754 5945 6123 6345 6773 7318 8384 13609 190 195 5797 5922 6116 6296 6524 6960 7517 8609 13969 195 200 5962 6089 6287 6471 6702 7146 7716 8834 14329 200 (ii) The traffic capacity for all interoffice trunks shall be based on full availability, even though the distant office itself is not engineered to provide full availability access. (iii) The Traffic Table may also be used to determine the approximate traffic capacity of high-usage intertoll trunks. The traffic offered to high-usage groups may be read at B.10, signifying that 10 percent of the traffic overflows to the alternate route. This approximates the HU12 table used by AT&T. (iv) In reading the trunk quantity from the table, the higher quantity shall be used when the CCS load is three or more CCS over the lower quantity. For example, the number of trunks justified for 294 CCS at B.005 is 16, but for 295 CCS 17 trunks are justified. (v) Limited availability is not permitted. (vi) The traffic capacity in the following table should be used for small trunk groups such as pay station, special service trunks, intercept, and PBX trunks, unless otherwise specified in appendix A of this section: Number of Circuits Permissible CCS 1 10 2 20 3 30 4 40 (vii) The percentage of lines equipped for pushbutton dialing is to be used to determine the number of tone receivers. Local registers, if required, shall be supplied on the basis of all dial pulse. (2) Grade of service. (ii) The number of calls encountering dial tone delay in excess of 3 seconds, measured over the busy hour of the four high-consecutive week (4HW) period, shall not be more than 1.5 percent. (iii) The average post dialing delay objective for an intraoffice call shall not exceed 1 second. This includes all connect, operate, and translation time. (iv) The line to line (intraoffice) network matching loss objective shall be 0.02 or less. (v) The blocking probabilities related to trunks include both “mismatch” probability and probability of “all trunks busy.” It is likely that the “mismatch” will be negligible in that many digital central offices have essentially nonblocking switching characteristics. The objectives for trunk connections are as follows: (A) Subscriber to outgoing trunk objective 0.01 or less; (B) Incoming trunk to subscriber objective 0.02 or less; and (C) Local trunk tandem objective 0.01 or less. (vi) Groups of common service circuits are to be engineered utilizing the full availability traffic tables that appear in paragraph (p)(1)(i) of this section at the following stipulated probabilities: (A) Outgoing trunks to 2/6 MF or dial pulse senders at B.001; (B) Incoming trunks to 2/6 MF receivers at B.001; (C) Incoming nondelay dial trunks to receivers at B.001; and (D) Incoming trunks with start dial at B.01. (vii) Remote Switching Terminals (RST's) shall meet the same grade of service objectives as the host. (3) Holding times. (i) The following average call holding times (HT) may be used. Type of Call HT—Seconds Intraoffice 120 EAS 150 Special Service, Intercept, Verification 60 Toll, CLR 300 Toll, S-S 24 Toll, PPCS 270 (ii) The following average subscriber dialing holding times may be used (times used to dial digits do not include machine time). Digits Dialed DP Sec. Pushbutton Sec. Operator, Non-Pay Station 1 4.7 3.4 Special Service 3 7.7 5.0 Local 7 13.7 8.2 EAS 7 13.7 8.2 DDD: 1/0 + 7 8 15.2 9.0 DDD: 1/0 + 10 11 19.7 11.4 Dialing Time Per Digit - 1.5 0.8 Dial Tone Response - 3.2 2.6 (iii) The following average incoming register holding times may be used (times for digit registrations do not include machine time). Basic Additional Per Digit Holding Time (Sec.) Digits MF Receiver from: No. 5 Crossbar—Non-LAMA 1.4 4 0.14 No. 5 Crossbar—LAMA 2.3 4 0.14 Crossbar Tandem & 4A Toll 3.1 4 0.14 No. 1 ESS 1.4 4 0.14 Key Pulsing Switchboard 5.2 4 0.60 DP Receivers—10 PPS from: SxS 6.0 4 1.5 Dialing Switchboard 6.6 4 1.3 4A Toll 5.6 5 1 - Crossbar Tandem 4.9 4 1.2 1 (iv) The following average sender holding times may be used (does not include machine setup and release time). Basic Additional Per Digit Holding Time (Sec.) Digits MF Senders: No. 5 Crossbar 1.5 4 0.14 Crossbar Tandem & 4A Toll 1 2.0 4 0.14 TSP/TSPS 2.4 7 0.14 SxS—CAMA, Called Number 3.7 7 0.14 SxS—CAMA, Calling Number 1.3 7 - DP Senders—10 PPS: With Overlap Pulsing 2 9.1 Up to 6 1.8 Without Overlap Pulsing 4.6 4 1.2 1 2 (4) Traffic data requirements. (A) Peg count (B) Overflow count (C) Network blockage count (D) Usage (E) Service delay (ii) Traffic data shall be stored in electronic storage registers or block of memory consisting of one or more traffic counters for each item to be measured. The registers listed in paragraph (p)(4)(i) of this section shall be associated with the interoffice trunks, switching network and central control equipment in such a manner that the register readings can be used to determine the traffic load and flow to, from and within the system. Two-way trunks shall be metered to indicate inward and outward seizures. The bidder shall indicate what registers are to be supplied and their purpose. (iii) The measured data shall be shown on a printout. It should be possible to have local or remote printout, or both. Arrangement shall be made for automatic data printout on command for 15-, 30-, or 60-minute intervals as required, and be arranged for automatic start-stop and in accordance with revenue separation procedures current at the time of contract. (iv) All traffic records shall have dates and times and office identification. (q) Transmission General. (2) Impedance. (3) Insertion loss. (i) Trunk-to-trunk or trunk-to-line. (ii) Line-to-line. (iii) Direct digital interface. (iv) Stability. (4) Frequency response (loss relative to 1004 hz) (i) Trunk-to-trunk. Loss at 0 dBm0 Input 1 Frequency (Hz) 2-Wire to 2-Wire 4-Wire to 4-Wire 60 20 dB Min. 2 16 dB Min. 2 200 0 to 5 dB 0 to 3 dB 300-3000 −0.5 dB to 1 dB −0.3 to + 0.3 dB 3300 1.5 dB Max. 1.5 dB Max. 3400 0 to 3 dB 0 to 3 dB 1 2 (ii) Line-to-line. Frequency (Hz) Loss at 0 dBm0 Input 1 60 20 dB Min. 2 300 −1 to + 3 dB 600-2400 ±1 dB 3200 −1 to + 3 dB 1 2 (iii) Trunk-to-line. (5) Overload level. (6) Gain tracking (linearity) Input Signal Level 1 Maximum Gain Deviation + 3 to −37 dBm0 ±0.5 dB −37 to −50 dBm0 ±1 dB 1 (7) Return loss. (ii) Far end test terminations shall be as follows: (A) Loaded line circuit—1650 ohms in parallel with the series combination of .005 microfarads and 100 ohms; (B) Nonloaded line circuit—800 ohms in parallel with the series combination of .05 microfarads and 100 ohms; (C) Special service line circuit including electronic lines and carrier lines—900 ohms in series with 2.16 microfarads; (D) Two-wire trunk—900 ohms in series with 2.16 microfarads; and (E) Four-wire trunk—600 ohms. (iii) For trunk-to-trunk (2-wire or 4-wire) connections the echo return loss (ERL) shall be 27 dB, minimum and the singing return loss (SRL) shall be 20 dB, minimum low and 23 dB, minimum high. (iv) For trunk-to-line (2-wire or 4-wire) connections the ERL shall be 24 dB, minimum and the SRL shall be 17 dB, minimum low and 20 dB, minimum high. (v) For line-to-line or line-to-trunk (2-wire or 4-wire) connections the ERL shall be 18 dB, minimum and the SRL shall be 12 dB, minimum low and 15 dB, minimum high. (8) Longitudinal balance. (9) 60 hz longitudinal current immunity. Figure 1—Measuring the Effects of Low Frequency Induction Notes: 1. 900 ohm termination, C-message weighting, hold coil off 2. SNC Noise Choke 35 W, or equivalent 3. Test at 0.020 Adc and 0.070 Adc 4. 2 ±0.001 microfarad, 150 Vdc (10) Steady noise (11) Impulse noise. (12) Crosstalk coupling. (13) Quantizing distortion. Input Level (dBm0) 1004 or 1020 Hz Minimum Signal to Distortion with C-Message Weighting 0 to −30 33 dB −30 to −40 27 dB −40 to −45 22 dB (ii) Due to the possible loss of the least significant bit on direct digital connections, a signal to distortion degradation of up to 2 dB may be allowed where adequately justified by the bidder. (14) Absolute delay. (15) Envelope delay distortion. Frequency Range (Hz) Microseconds 1000 to 2600 190 800 to 2800 350 600 to 3000 500 400 to 3200 700 (16) Digital error rate. 8 (17) Battery noise. (18) Radio and television interference. The central office switching equipment shall be designed and installed so that radiation of high frequency noise will be limited so as not to interfere with radio and television receivers. (r) Timing intervals Type of equipment required. (2) Tolerance. (3) Permanent signal timing. (4) Partial dial timing. (5) Charge delay timing. (6) Called party disconnect timing. (7) Timing intervals for signals involved in distance dialing. (i) Disconnect signal; (ii) Wink signal; (iii) Start dialing signal; (iv) Pulse delay signal; (v) Go signal; (vi) Digit timing; and (vii) Sender, register, and link attachment timing. (s) Power requirements and equipment Operating voltage. (2) Batteries. (ii) When lead calcium cells are specified, no cell shall differ from the average voltage of the string of fully charged cells by more than ±0.03 volt when measured at a charging rate in amperes equivalent to 10 percent of the ampere hour capacity of the cells. Similarly, when cells are fully charged and floating between 2.30 and 2.33 volts per cell, the cell voltage of any cell in a given string shall not differ more than ±0.03 volt from the average. These requirements are for test purposes only and do not apply to operating conditions. (iii) Voltage readings shall be corrected by a temperature coefficient of 0.0033 volt per degree F (0.006 per degree C), whenever temperature variations exist between cells in a given string. This correction factor shall also be applied when comparing cell voltages taken at different times and at different temperatures. The correction factor shall be added to the measured voltage when the temperature is above 77 °F (25 °C) and subtracted when the temperature is below 77 °F (25 °C). (iv) The specific gravity readings of lead antimony cells at full charge shall be 1.210 ±.010 at 77 °F (25 °C) at maximum electrolyte height. (v) When counter cells are supplied by the bidder, they shall be the dry counter electromotive force (CEMF) type. (vi) When lead antimony batteries are specified, they shall be designed to last a minimum of 10 years when maintained on a full float operation between 2.15 and 2.17 volts per cell. When lead calcium batteries are specified, they shall be designed to last a minimum of 20 years when maintained on full float operation between 2.17 and 2.25 volts per cell. The battery shall be clearly designated as “antimony” or “calcium” by means of stencils, decals or other devices. (vii) Each battery cell shall be equipped with an explosion control device. (viii) The battery size shall be calculated in accordance with standard procedures. The battery in no case shall have a reserve capacity in ampere hours less than four times the current capacity of the largest charger. (3) Charging equipment. (ii) When charging batteries, the voltage at the battery terminals shall be adjustable and shall be set at the value recommended for the particular battery being charged, providing it is not above the maximum operating voltage of the switching system equipment. The voltage shall not vary more than plus or minus 0.02 volt per cell between 10 percent load and 100 percent load. Between 3 percent and 10 percent load, the output voltage shall not vary more than plus or minus 0.04 volt per cell. Beyond full load current, the output voltage shall drop sharply. The output voltage shall be maintained with the line voltage variations of plus or minus 10 percent. Provision shall be made to change the output voltage of the rectifier manually to 2.25 volts per cell to provide an equalization charge on the battery. (iii) The charger noise shall not exceed 22 dBrnC when measured with a suitable noise measuring set and under the rated battery capacitance and load conditions as determined in Figure 2. Figure 2—Charger Noise Test The manufacturer may elect to eliminate the capacitor C from the measurement. A. Capacitance in µF = 30,000 µF per ampere-hour per cell. For example, 25 cells at 100 ampere-hour would be equivalent to a capacitance of: (30,000 × 100) / 25 = 120,000 µF B. The value of the resistive load R is determined by the nominal battery voltage in volts divided by the full load rating in amperes. For example, for a 48 volt battery and a full load current of 24 amperes, the load resistance R is 48/24 = 2 ohms of appropriate power handling capacity. (iv) The charging equipment shall indicate a failure of charging current, whether due to ac power failure, an internal failure in the charger, or to other circumstances which might cause the output voltage of the charger to drop below the battery voltage. Where a supplementary constant current charger is used, an alarm shall be provided to indicate a failure of the charger. (v) Audible noise developed by the charging equipment shall be kept to a minimum. Acoustic noise resulting from operation of the rectifier shall be expressed in terms of dB indicated on a sound level meter conforming to ANSI S1.4-1983, Specification for Sound Level Meters, and shall not exceed 65 dB (A-weighting) measured at any point 5 feet (152.4 cm) from any vertical surface of the rectifier. (vi) The charging equipment shall be designed so that neither the charger nor the central office switching equipment is subject to damage in case the battery circuit is opened for any value of load within the normal limits. (vii) The charging equipment shall have a capacity to meet the requirements of central office size and special requirements of the owner in appendix A of this section. (viii) Minimum equipment requirement for chargers is one of the following: (A) Two chargers either capable of carrying the full office load as specified in Item 12 of appendix A of this section; or (B) Three chargers each capable of carrying half the office load as specified in Item 12 of appendix A of this section. (4) Miscellaneous voltage supplies. (ii) Power converters required for the purpose of providing various operating voltages to printed circuit boards or similar equipment employing electronic components shall be provided in duplicate with each unit capable of immediately assuming the full operating load upon failure of a unit. An exception to the duplicate power converter requirement permits nonduplicated power converter(s) to be utilized where there is full compliance with the following criteria. (A) The failure of any single nonduplicated power converter shall not reduce the grade of service of common control and service circuits to any individual line or trunk by more than 50 percent. (B) The failure of any single nonduplicated power converter shall not reduce the traffic carrying capacity of any interoffice trunk group by more than 50 percent. (C) In central office switching systems of 400 or more equipped lines, any single nonduplicated power converter failure shall not cause a complete loss of service to more than 100 equipped lines. (D) In central office switching systems of less than 400 equipped lines, any single nonduplicated power converter failure shall not cause a complete loss of service to more than 25 percent of the total equipped lines. (5) Ringing generators. (i) Ringing equipment provisioning. (B) An exception to the redundant ringing equipment requirement permits nonredundant ringing equipment to be utilized where there is full compliance with the following service criteria. ( 1 ( 2 (ii) Output voltage. (B) The ringing generator shall obtain its energy from the nominal 48-volt office battery. (C) The output of each generator shall have three or more voltage taps or a single tap with associated variable control. Taps or control shall be easily accessible as installed in the field. Software control of ringing generator outputs via I/O devices may be provided in lieu of taps. The taps, or equivalent, shall be designated L, M, and H. The variable control shall have a locking device to prevent accidental readjustment. The outputs at the terminals of the generators with a voltage input of 52.1 volts and rated full resistive load shall be as follows for the ringing frequencies provided: Frequency Range (Hz) Output Volts rms L M H 16 2 3 90 105 120 21 through 30 95 110 120 31 through 42 100 115 130 43 through 54 110 125 140 (D) No voltages in excess of the values in column H of the table in paragraph (s)(5)(ii)(C) of this section shall be provided at the output taps. Additional intermediate and/or lower taps may be provided without restriction. (iii) Voltage regulation. 1/2 (B) The output voltage for resistive, capacitive power factor of 0.8, and inductive power factor of 0.5 from no load to full rated output with input battery variations between 48-56 volts dc shall not vary more than ±10 percent from the output voltage measured at 1/2 (C) The output voltage for resistive, capacitive power factor of 0.8, and inductive power factor of 0.5 loads from no load to full rated output and with input battery variations between 44-56 volts dc shall not vary more than + 10/−15 percent from the output voltage measured at 1/2 (iv) Cross ringing. (v) Frequency stability. (vi) Self-protection on overloads. (6) Interrupter equipment. (ii) The ringing cycle provided by the interrupter equipment shall not exceed 6 seconds in length. The ringing period shall be 2 seconds. (7) Power panels. (ii) Portable or panel mounted frequency meters shall be provided as specified by the owner unless the system is equipped to measure actual ringing generator voltage and frequency outputs internally. If the system is equipped to make such measurements and print the results, the bidder is not required to provide a frequency meter. (iii) Power panels, cabinets and shelves, and associated wiring shall be designed initially to handle the exchange when it reaches its ultimate capacity as specified by the owner. (iv) The power panel shall be of the “dead front” type. (t) Main distributing frames. (2) The current carrying capacity of each arrester and its associated mounting shall coordinate with a #22 gauge copper conductor without causing a self-sustaining fire or permanently damaging other arrester positions. Where all cable pairs entering the central office are #24 gauge or finer, the arresters and mountings need only coordinate with #24 gauge cable conductors. Item 13 of appendix A of this section designates the gauge of the cable conductors serving the host office. Item 7 of appendix B of this section designates the gauge of the cable conductors serving the RST(s). (3) Central office protectors shall be mounted and arranged so that outside cable pairs may be terminated on the left side of protectors (when facing the vertical side of the MDF) or on the back surface of the protectors. Means for easy identification of pairs shall be provided. (4) Protectors shall have a “dead front” (either insulated or grounded) whereby live metal parts are not readily accessible. (5) Protectors shall be provided with an accessible terminal of each incoming conductor which is suitable for the attachment of a temporary test lead. They shall also be constructed so that auxiliary test fixtures may be applied to open and test the subscriber's circuit in either direction. Terminals shall be tinned or plated and shall be suitable for wire wrapped, insulation displacement or connectorized connections. (6) If specified in appendix A of this section, each protector group shall be furnished with a factory assembled tip cable for splicing to the entrance cable; the tip cable to be 20 feet (610 cm) in length unless otherwise specified. Factory assembled tip cable shall be #22 gauge and selected from RUS Bulletin 1755I-100, List of Materials Acceptable for Use on Telephone Systems of RUS Borrowers. Tip cable requirements are provided in RUS Bulletin 345-87, PE-87, RUS Specification for Terminating (TIP) Cable. Cables having other kinds of insulation and jackets which have equivalent resistance to fire and which produce less smoke and toxic fumes may be used if specifically approved by RUS. (7) Protectors shall be mounted on vertical supports, with centers not exceeding 9 inches (22.9 cm). The space between protector units shall be adequate for terminating conductors. (8) Cable supporting framework shall be provided between the cable entrance and the MDF when overhead cable entrance is specified in Item 14.3.3 of appendix A of this section. (9) The main distributing frame shall be equipped with a copper ground bus bar having the conductivity of a #6 American Wire Gauge (AWG) copper conductor or a greater conductivity, or may consist of another metal if specifically approved, provided it has adequate cross-sectional area to provide conductivity equivalent to, or better than, bare copper. A guardrail or equivalent shall also be furnished. (10) Other features not specified in paragraph (t) of this section may be required at the option of the owner, if checked in Item 13.4 of appendix A of this section. (11) Main frame protector makes and types shall be selected only from RUS Bulletin 1755I-100, List of Materials Acceptable for Use on Telephone Systems of RUS Borrowers. Protectors shall be capable of easy removal. (u) Electrical protection Surge protection. (ii) Central office switching equipment shall pass laboratory tests, simulating the hostile electrical environment, before being placed in the field for the purpose of obtaining field experience. There are five basic types of laboratory tests which shall be applied to exposed terminals in an effort to determine if the equipment will survive. Figure 3 summarizes these tests and the minimum acceptable levels of protection for equipment to pass them. Figure 3—Summary of Electrical Requirements and Tests Test Application Criteria Peak Voltage or Current Surge Waveshape No. of Applications & Max. Time Between Comments Current Surge Low Impedance Paths Exposed to Surges 500A or Lesser Current (See Fig. 5) 10 × 1000 µs 5 each Polarity at 1 minute intervals 60 Hz Current Carrying High or Low Impedance paths Exposed to Surges 10A rms or Lesser Current (See Fig. 6) 11 Cycles of 60 Hz (0.183 Sec.) 3 each Polarity at 1 minute intervals AC Power Service Surge Voltage AC Power Service Connection 2500V or + 3 σ clamping V of arrester employed at 10kV/µs 1.2 × 50 µs 5 each Polarity at 1 minute intervals AC arrester, if used, must be removed. Communications line arresters, if used, remain in place. Voltage Surge High Impedance Paths Exposed to Surges 1000V or + 3 σ dc breakdown of arrester employed 10 × 000 µs Same All primary arresters, if used, must be removed. Arrester Response Delay Paths protected by arresters, such as gas tubes, with breakdown dependent on V. rate of rise. + 3 σ breakdown of arrester employed at 100V/µs of rise 100V/µs rise decay to 1/2 V. in tube's delay time Same Same (iii) Two categories of surge tests. Figure 4—Explanation of Surge Waveshape Surge Waveshape is defined as follows: Rise Time × Time to Decay to Half Crest Value (For example, 10 × 1000 µs) Notes: T 1 T 2 Figure 5—Explanation of Surge Waveshape V L V B Z 100 R P R S Z 100 R S R P V B 0 5 ∞ 2500 1 4 ∞ 2500 2 3 ∞ 2500 3 2 ∞ 1670 4 1 ∞ 1250 5 0 ∞ 1000 7.5 0 15 1000 10 0 10 1000 15 0 7.5 1000 20 0 6.7 1000 25 0 6.25 1000 30 0 6 1000 40 0 5.7 1000 50 0 5.5 1000 (B) Sixty Hertz (60 Hz) current-carrying tests should be applied to simulate an ac power fault which is conducted to the unit over the cable pairs. The test should be limited to 10 amperes rms at 60 Hz for a period of 11 cycles (0.1835 seconds) and should be applied longitudinally from line to ground (see Figures 3 and 6 of this section). Figure 6—60 Hz Current Surge Test V—700 Volts RMS (Approximately 1000V Peak). Z 60 R S Z 60 R S 0 140 10 120 20 100 50 100 Over 50 100 (C) AC power service surge voltage tests should be applied to the power input terminals of ac powered devices to simulate switching surges or lightning-induced transients on the ac power system. The test shall employ a 1.2 × 50 microseconds waveshape with a crest voltage of 2500V. Communications line protectors may be left in place for this test. Borrowers are urged to install commercially available surge protectors at the ac service entrance as part of their COE building program. (D) Voltage surge tests simulate the voltage stress to which a relatively high impedance path may be subjected before primary protectors break down and protect the circuit. To assure coordination with the primary protection while reducing testing to the minimum, voltage surge tests should be conducted at a 1000 volts with primary arresters removed for devices protected by carbon blocks, or the + 3 sigma dc breakdown of other primary arresters. Surge waveshape should be 10 × 1000 microseconds. (E) Arrester response delay tests are designed to stress the equipment in a manner similar to that caused by the delayed breakdown of gap type arresters when subjected to rapidly rising voltages. Arresters shall be removed for these tests, the peak surge voltage should be the + 3 sigma breakdown of the arrester in question on a voltage rising at 100V per microsecond and the time for the surge to decay to half voltage shall equal at least the delay time of the tube, as explained in Figure 7. Figure 7—Explanation of Arrester Response Delay Time The delay time is that period of time when the potential across an arrester exceeds its dc firing level. (iv) Five applications of each polarity for the surge tests and three for the 60 Hz Current Carrying Test are the minimum required. All tests should be conducted with not more than 1 minute between consecutive applications in each series of three or five to a specific configuration so that heating effects will be cumulative. As not all tests are required in every application, nonapplicable tests should be omitted. Tests should be conducted in the following sequence. (A) Current Impulse Test. (B) Sixty Hertz (60 Hz) Current Carrying Test. (C) AC Power Service Impulse Voltage Test. (D) Voltage Impulse Test. (E) Arrester Response Delay Test. (v) Tests should be applied between each of the following terminal combinations for all line operating conditions. (A) Line tip to ring. (B) Line ring to ground. (C) Line tip to ground. (D) Line tip to ring tied together to ground. (2) Extraordinary surge protection. (3) Dielectric strength. (4) Insulation resistance. (5) Self-protection. (ii) The unit equipment shall not be permanently damaged by accidental short circuits of any duration across either the central office side tip and ring or the line side tip and ring. A test is to be made with the unit energized at the highest recommended voltages. (6) Static discharge. (v) Miscellaneous Office wire. (2) Wire wrapped terminals. (i) 6 Turns of 30 Gauge. (ii) 6 Turns of 26 Gauge. (iii) 6 Turns of 24 Gauge. (iv) 5 Turns of 22 Gauge. (3) Protection against corrosion. (4) Screws and bolts. (5) Temperature and humidity range. (6) Stenciling. (7) Equipment frame design. (8) Quantity of equipment bays. (w) Remote switching terminal (RST) General. (2) Span line. (3) Switching. (ii) As long as the connecting span line is intact, the subscribers served by the RST shall have all features, traffic capacity, and services including busy verification, available to all other subscribers in the system. (iii) The RST shall have available an emergency call processing option which permits calling among all subscribers and from subscribers to emergency numbers within the RST if control link connections to the host central office are severed or otherwise disabled. The RST shall be capable of rerouting normally used emergency numbers, such as 911, to predetermined line terminations in this emergency stand-alone operating condition. This RST emergency call processing option shall be provided only when specified by the owner in Item 6.1 of appendix B of this section. (4) Subscriber line test. (ii) If tests in paragraph (w)(4)(i) of this section are not requested by the owner for a particular installation, a subscriber loop test set (see paragraph (o)(2)(iii)(A) of this section) shall be supplied at the RST with a means to access all lines. (5) Housing. (6) Power Chargers. (ii) Ringing equipment provisioning. (B) An exception to the duplicated ringing source requirement permits nonduplicated ringing source(s) to be utilized where there is full compliance with the following service criteria. ( 1 ( 2 (iii) Power converter. (B) An exception to the duplicate power converter requirement permits nonduplicated power converter(s) to be utilized where there is full compliance with the following criteria. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (7) Alarm. (x) Responsibilities of the bidder Central office layout. (ii) The layout drawings shall also show provision for the ultimate capacity of the central office as specified by the owner. (iii) After approval by the owner of the tentative floor plan, and within 10 calendar days after approval of the contract by the Administrator, the owner shall furnish the bidder the necessary data on the actual floor plan. Within 20 calendar days after receiving the necessary building data, the bidder shall then supply floor plan drawings showing exact locations of all equipment, both initial and ultimate, including points where connection to commercial power are required, with voltage and wattage indicated at each point. Within 20 calendar days after receiving the floor plan drawings from the bidder, the owner shall approve these drawings or take the necessary steps to have the drawings changed to meet his approval. The layout planning must be so coordinated between the owner and the bidder as not to delay the scheduled equipment installation date. (2) Shipment of main distributing frame (MDF). (3) Drawings and printed material. (A) A floor plan showing exact dimensions and location of each equipment frame or item to a convenient scale; (B) A block schematic drawing showing the various equipment components in the system, and their identifying circuit number (e.g., MDF, line circuits, memory, trunks, etc.); (C) Drawings of major equipment items such as frames, with the location of major component items of equipment shown; (D) Individual functional drawings for electrical circuits in the system; (E) A detailed description of the operation of each circuit down to a circuit package level; (F) Wiring diagrams indicating the specific method of wiring used on each item of equipment and interconnection wiring between items of equipment; (G) Sufficient software documentation to maintain and service the system, including drawings showing principal aspects of the software architecture; (H) Individual maintenance drawings covering each equipment item that contains replaceable parts, appropriately identifying each part by name and part number, or, complete ordering instructions for all replaceable parts if individual item drawings are not provided; and (I) Job drawings including all drawings that are individual to the particular office involved, such as main frame, power panel, test board, etc. (ii) The following information shall also be furnished: (A) Complete index of the required drawings; (B) Explanation of electrical principles of operation of the overall switching system; (C) List of tests which can be performed with each piece of test equipment furnished, and explanation of the method of performing each test; (D) Sample of each form recommended for use in keeping records of tests; (E) Criteria for analyzing results of tests and determining appropriate corrective action; (F) General notes on the methods of isolating equipment faults to specific printed circuit cards in the equipment; (G) List of typical troubles which might be encountered, together with general indications as to the probable location of each trouble; (H) Special office grounding requirements; (I) A site specific central office ground system acceptance checklist that is consistent with industry practice; and (J) A site specific layout of the master ground bar (MGB) showing assignment of P, A, N, and I equipment areas. (4) Distributing frame wire. (5) Technical assistance service. (6) Spare parts. (A) “Units” are defined as user replaceable components used in the central office equipment. “Spare Parts” are direct replacements for units. Spare parts are necessary for the maintenance and diagnostic operations where the suspected faulty unit may be removed and a spare part substituted in anticipation that the trouble will be cleared. (B) Examples of units for which spare parts should be furnished are printed circuit cards; circuit pack assemblies; fuses; and power supplies. (C) Spare parts are not required as part of this addendum for items such as connectorized cables, nuts, bolts, and similar hardware; nor for items which can be obtained from sources other than the bidder such as battery cells, chargers, powerboards, magnetic tape transport assemblies, disk drives, ringing machines, recorded announcement machines, loop extenders and voice frequency repeaters, fire bars, teletypewriters, and video monitors. (D) When 100 or more like units are used in the hosts and RST's to be bid, the quantity of spares to be furnished is determined by multiplying the total number of like units in the contract by .05 or .03, as applicable, and rounding off to the next lowest integer. For example, 119 Class 1 units require five spares; 120 require six. (E) When alternates are required, the price of the spare parts for the alternates shall be included with the price of the alternate. (F) For equipment in which the line cards consist of a number of plug-in “daughter” boards on a “mother” board, the line card is defined as the “daughter” board unit. In a similar manner for those designs which have line cards backed up by a “control card,” the “control card” is not, by definition, a line card. (G) The quantities of spare parts determined in paragraph (x)(6)(vi) of this section are a minimum quantity. The bidder may add quantities of spare parts to bring the number of spare parts up to the bidder's list of spare parts necessary for proper operation in the field. (ii) A Class 1 unit does not have automatic transfer to a redundant or standby pool of identical units, and provides any function for 24 or more lines or trunks or for all trunks in a group. Nonredundant digital trunk interfaces are included in this category. (iii) A Class 2 unit has automatic transfer to a redundant or standby pool of identical units, and provides any function for 24 or more lines or trunks or for all trunks in a group. Redundant digital trunk interfaces and units of a redundant stored program processor are included in this category. (iv) A Class 3 unit does not have automatic transfer to a redundant or standby pool of identical units and provides any function for no more than 23 lines or trunks or for less than all trunks in a group. Nonredundant analog trunks are included in this category. Excluded from this category are line cards, which are in Class 4. (v) A Class 4 unit has automatic transfer to a redundant or standby pool of identical units and provides any function for no more than 23 lines or trunks or for less than all trunks in a group. Also, any line cards are in Class 4. (vi) The spare parts for all of the hosts and the RST's included in this contract shall be provided as follows: Quantity of Units used in the CO's & RST's To Be Bid Required Quantity of Spares By Class of Unit Class ---> 1 2 3 4 1 through 9 1 1 0 0 10 through 24 2 2 1 0 25 through 49 3 2 2 0 50 through 99 4 3 2 0 100 or More 5% 3% 3% 0 (vii) As a part of the response to the bid, the supplier shall furnish a list of units used by class and a list of spare parts to be furnished with this contract. This list shall be placed in Item 6.2 of appendix C of this section for only one of the host specifications included in the entire contract. (7) Environmental requirements. (8) Unit costs for cost separation purposes. (9) Single-point grounding system acceptance. (y) Installation. (1) Responsibilities of owner. (i) Allow the bidder and its employees free access to the premises and facilities at all hours during the progress of the installation; (ii) Take such action as necessary to ensure that the premises are dry and free from dust and in such condition as not to be hazardous to the installation personnel or the material to be installed (not required for an RST installed in a self-contained environmentally controlled cabinet); (iii) Provide heat or air conditioning when required and general illumination in rooms in which work is to be performed or materials stored (not required for an RST installed in a self-contained environmentally controlled cabinet); (iv) Provide suitable openings in buildings to allow material to be placed in position (not required for an RST installed in a self-contained environmentally controlled cabinet); (v) Provide the necessary conduit and commercial and dc-ac inverter output power to the locations shown on the approved floor plan drawings; provide 120 volts, 60 Hz commercial power equipped with a secondary arrester and a reasonable number of outlets for test, maintenance and installation equipment; provide suitable openings or channels and ducts for cables and conductors, from floor to floor and from room to room; provide an acceptable central office grounding system and at a ground resistance level that is reasonable for office site conditions (not required for an RST installed in a self-contained environmentally controlled cabinet); (vi) Provide the necessary wiring, central office grade ground and commercial power service, with a secondary arrester, to the location of an exterior RST installation based on the voltage and load requirements furnished by the bidder; (vii) Test at the owner's own expense all lines and trunks for continuity, leakage and loop resistance and ensure that all lines and trunks are suitable for operation with the central office equipment specified; (viii) Make alterations and repairs to buildings necessary for proper installation of material, except to repair damage for which the bidder or its employees are responsible; (ix) Connect outside cable pairs on the distributing frame and run all line and trunk jumpers (those connected to protectors); (x) Furnish all trunk, line, and party assignment information to permit the bidder to program the data base memory within a reasonable time prior to final testing; (xi) Release for the bidder's use such portions of the existing plant as are necessary for the proper completion of such tests as require coordination with existing facilities including facilities for T1 span lines with properly installed repeaters between the central office and the RST installations; (xii) Make prompt inspections as it deems necessary when notified by the bidder that the equipment, or any part of the equipment, is ready for acceptance; (xiii) Provide and install adequate fire protection apparatus, including one or more fire extinguishers or fire extinguishing systems of the gaseous type that has low toxicity and effect on equipment; and (xiv) Provide necessary access ports for cable, if underfloor cable is selected. (2) Responsibilities of bidder. (i) Allow the owner and its representatives access to all parts of the buildings at all times during the installation; (ii) Obtain the owner's permission before cutting into or through any part of the building structure such as girders, beams, concrete or tile floors, partitions or ceilings (not applicable to the installation of lag screws, expansion bolts, and similar devices used for fastening equipment to floors, columns, walls and ceilings); (iii) Be responsible for reporting to the owner any damage to the building which may exist or may occur during its occupancy of the building, repairing all damage to the building due to carelessness of the bidder's workforce, and exercising reasonable care to avoid any damage to the owner's property; (iv) Consult with the owner before cutting into or through any part of the building structure where the fireproofing or moisture proofing may be impaired; (v) Take necessary steps to ensure that all fire fighting apparatus is accessible at all times and all flammable materials are kept in suitable places outside the building; (vi) Not use gasoline, benzene, alcohol, naphtha, carbon tetrachloride or turpentine for cleaning any part of the equipment; (vii) Install the equipment in accordance with the specifications for the office; (viii) Run all jumpers, except line and trunk jumpers (those connected to protectors); (ix) Establish and update all data base memories with subscriber and trunk information as supplied by the owner until an agreed turnover time; (x) Give the owner notice of completion of the installation at least 1 week prior to completion; (xi) Permit the owner or its representative to conduct tests and inspections after installation has been completed in order that the owner may be assured that the requirements for installation are met; (xii) Allow access, before turnover, by the owner or its representative, upon request, to the test equipment which is to be turned over as a part of the office equipment, to permit the checking of the circuit features which are being tested and to permit the checking of the amount of connected equipment to which the test circuits have access; (xiii) Make final charger adjustments using the manufacturer's recommended procedure; (xiv) Notify the owner promptly of the completion of work of the central office, or such portions as are ready for inspection; (xv) Correct promptly all defects for which the bidder is responsible; (xvi) Provide the owner with one set of marked prints, or strapping prints, showing which of the various options and figures are in use on each switching system as specified in paragraph (x)(3)(i) of this section; (xvii) Place the battery in service in compliance with the recommendations of the battery manufacturer; and (xviii) Furnish the owner with a record of the cell voltages and specific gravity readings made at the completion of the installation of the switching system and before it is placed in commercial service. (3) Installation requirements. (ii) All multiple and associated wiring shall be continuous, free from crosses, reverses and grounds and shall be correctly wired at all points. (iii) An inspection shall be made by the owner or its representatives prior to performing operational and performance tests on the equipment. However, this inspection shall be made after all installing operations which might disturb apparatus adjustments have been completed. The inspection shall be of such character and extent as to disclose with reasonable certainty any unsatisfactory condition of apparatus or equipment. During these inspections, or inspections for apparatus adjustments, or soldering, or in testing of equipment, a sufficiently detailed examination shall be made throughout the portion of the equipment within which such condition is observed, or is likely to occur, to disclose the full extent of its existence, where any of the following conditions are observed: (A) Apparatus or equipment units failing to compare in quantity and code with that specified for the installation; (B) Apparatus or equipment units damaged or incomplete; (C) Apparatus or equipment affected by rust, corrosion or marred finish; or (D) Other adverse conditions resulting from failure to meet generally accepted standards of good workmanship. (4) Operational test requirements. (ii) A sufficient quantity of overall tests shall be made to ensure proper operation of all specified features. (iii) A sufficient quantity of locally originating and incoming calls shall be made to prove the switching system can accept and process calls to completion. (5) Grounding system audit. (ii) This single-point grounding system audit is to be conducted by authorized representatives of the supplier and owner, and with the RUS general field representative participating at his discretion. (iii) The single-point grounding system audit is to be conducted using the checklist contained in appendix D of this section. (iv) Appendix D of this section shall be the principal single-point grounding system audit guideline document. A supplemental checklist may be prepared and provided by the switching system supplier which recognizes unique grounding requirements related to their particular switching system. The scope of this supplier checklist is to be confined to unique and specific switching system requirements only. Acceptable supplier supplemental grounding checklist must have prior approval of and be on file with the Central Office Equipment Branch of the Telecommunications Standards Division of RUS. (v) It is the responsibility of the central office supplier to ensure that the grounding system evaluation criteria contained in the combination of the appendix D checklist of this section and their optional supplemental checklist adequately fulfill requirements for warranty coverage. (vi) All deficiencies in the single-point grounding system are to be corrected prior to the switching system being placed into full service operation. Exceptions are permitted only by mutual agreement of the owner and supplier and with written approval of the RUS general field representative. (vii) The acceptance statement facesheet of the audit checklist in appendix D of this section shall be signed by authorized representatives of the supplier and owner to indicate mutual approval of the single-point grounding system. Copies of all completed grounding system audit documents are to be provided to the supplier, owner and appropriate RUS telephone program regional offices. (The information and recordkeeping requirements of this section have been approved by the Office of Management and Budget under the control number 0572-0059) Appendix A to § 1755.522—Specification for Digital, Stored Program Controlled Central Office Equipment Detailed Requirements (Host) (Information To Be Supplied by Owner) Telephone Company Name Location Central Office Name (By Location) Town County State ________ Attended ________ Unattended ________ Remotes 1. General 1.1 Notwithstanding the bidder's equipment lists, the equipment and materials furnished by the bidder must meet the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (x), Appendix A and Appendix B of § 1755.522. 1.2 Paragraphs (a) through (x) of § 1755.522 cover the minimum general requirements for digital, stored program controlled central office switching equipment. 1.3 Paragraph (y) of § 1755.522 covers requirements for installation, inspection, and testing when such service is included as part of the contract. 1.4 Appendices A and B of § 1755.522 cover the technical data for application engineering and detailed equipment requirements insofar as they can be established by the owner. These appendices are to be filled in by the owner. 1.5 Appendix C of § 1755.522 covers detailed information on the switching network equipment and the common control equipment, and information as to system reliability and heavy traffic delays as proposed by the bidder. This appendix is to be filled in by the bidder and must be presented with the bid. 1.6 Appendix D of § 1755.522 is the single-point grounding system audit checklist. 2. Numbering Scheme 2.1 This office shall be arranged to serve the following area and office code(s): If more than one code is to be served, discrimination shall be determined by the following: Number Translation ____ Separate Trunk Groups ____ Both (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) ____ 2.2 This office shall be arranged to provide EAS service to the following: Connecting office Code Connecting office Code 2.2.1 Seven digits shall be dialed for all local and EAS calls. 2.3 Additional dialing procedures to be provided include the following: Feature Required Station Paid Toll (Including Coin): Home Numbering Plan Area (HNPA): “1” + 7 Digits ______________ “1” + 10 Digits ______________ Other (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) ______________ Foreign Numbering Plan Area (FNPA): “1” + 10 Digits ______________ Other (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) ______________ 10XXX Dialing to Interexchange Carriers: Name Access code Feature Required Person, Special (Including Coin): HNPA—“0” + 7 Digits “0” + 10 Digits FNPA “0” + 10 Digits Other (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) Directory Assistance: HNPA Local—411 “1” + 411 HNPA Toll “1” + 555-1212 FNPA Toll “1” + NPA + 555-1212 IDDD: Operator Serviced 01 Station-Station 011 Other service codes No. to be dialed Wire Chief Repair Service Business Office Emergency Calls to 911 Lines Emergency Calls to 911 Trunks Time Weather 100 Test Line 102 Test Line 105 Test Line Other (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 2.4 Assistance calls are answered: (Check appropriate items) 2.4.1 At the operator office in ________________ 2.4.1.1 By means of the regular interoffice toll trunks ________ 2.4.1.2 By means of the regular interoffice EAS trunks ________ 2.4.1.3 By means of a separate special service trunk group ________ 2.4.1.4 Locally ________ Explain: 3. Office Clock 3.1 This office is to be slave clock synchronized with another office: ________ Yes ________ No (Explain details in Appendix A, Item 16 if “Yes”.) 3.2 This office is to be a master clock office to provide synchronization timing for other offices: ________ Yes ________ No (Explain details in Appendix A, Item 16 if “Yes”.) 4. Interoffice Trunking Diagram 4.1 A sketch showing relative location of exchanges, RST's, and number of circuits shall be included, also the office and area codes of the direct trunk points. The diagram should indicate whether toll or EAS trunk groups are “High Usage” or “Final.” Alternate routes should be included. Indicate whether the trunk termination is direct digital or analog. 5. Translator Function Chart Called point Subscriber dials First route Alternate routes Translator action Send Translator action Send Deletes Prefixes Deletes Prefixes 6. Line Circuit Requirements (Includes all lines associated with RST's.) 6.1 Types of Lines No. of lines No. of EAS areas Total No. of lines required Local service only both local and EAS service 6.1.1 Individual—Flat Rate ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ 6.1.2 Individual—Message Rate ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ 6.1.3 Pay Station ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ 6.1.4 Telephone Company Official Lines ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ 6.1.5 Wire Chief ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ 6.1.6 911 Emergency Service Bureau Lines ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ 6.1.7 Number Hunting PBX Groups: ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ No. of lines in group No. of groups Direct in dial * Restricted service at COE Type No. of lines No. of EAS areas Total No. of lines required Ground start Loop start Local service only Both local and EAS service ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ * Furnish translation information under Item 5. 6.1.8 WATS Lines (Give details in Appendix A, Item 16) Number of Inward WATS Lines ________ Number of Outward WATS Lines ________ 6.1.9 Special Lines Required ________ (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 6.1.10 Total Number of Lines Required Host ______ (Incl. DDI Concentrator Lines) RST 1 ______ RST 2 ______ RST 3 ______ Total ______ 6.1.11 Total Director Numbers Required ______ (Including RST's) (see Item 7.1, Appendix A) 6.1.12 Pay Station Type ____________ New ____ Reused ____ (Describe in Item 16, Appendix A) 6.1.13 Line Concentrator 6.1.13.1 Supplied by Owner (see Item 16, Appendix A, for details) ____ Yes ____ No 6.1.13.2 Supplied by Bidder (If “Yes”, attach REA Form 397g, Performance Specification for Line Concentrators) ____ Yes ____ No 6.2. Data on Lines Required Range Extension 6.2.1 Number of non-pay station lines having a loop resistance, including the telephone set, as follows: No. of lines 1901-3200 ohms ______ 3201-3600 ohms ______ 6.2.2 Number of pay station lines having loop resistance, excluding the telephone set, greater than: No. of lines 1200 ohms (For Prepay) ______ 1000 ohms (For Semi-Postpay Operation) ______ 6.2.3 Range extension equipment is to be provided: 6.2.3.1 Loop Extenders: Total Quantity ______ By Bidder—Quantity ______ By Owner—Quantity ______ (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 6.2.3.2 VF Repeaters: Total Quantity ______ By Bidder—Quantity ______ (Bidder must have information on loading and cable size.) By Owner—Quantity ______ (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 6.2.3.3 Range extension may be furnished as an extended range line circuit at the option of the supplier. If this option is used, the quantities of loop extenders and VF repeaters will be different from the quantities listed above (see Item 6.1,a, Appendix C). ____ Yes ____ No 7. Traffic Data-Line Originating and Terminating Traffic 7.1 Originating Line Traffic—Estimated per Busy Hour (Includes all Lines Associated With RST's): (a) (b) (axb) No. of Lines Required 1 Ind.—Res __________ __________ __________ __________ Ind.—Bus __________ __________ __________ __________ Special Lines __________ __________ __________ __________ Pay Station __________ __________ __________ __________ Telco Official __________ __________ __________ __________ Wire Chief __________ __________ __________ __________ No. Htg. or PBX __________( 2 __________( 3 __________ __________ WATS __________ __________ __________ __________ Data Service __________ __________ __________ __________ 911 Emerg. Service __________ __________ __________ __________ Total __________ __________ __________( 4 (c) (d) (e) 1 2 3 4 7.2 Average Originating CCS per Line per Busy Hour (d) / (e) = ____ / ____ = ____ CCS/Line This office shall be engineered to handle an initial average originating busy hour traffic of ____ CCS per line. It is anticipated that the average originating busy hour traffic will increase to ____ CCS per line. Originating Traffic Attributed to Host Only ____ CCS/Line 7.3 Terminating Traffic—Estimated CCS per Busy Hour It is assumed that the total CCS for terminating traffic is the same as for originating traffic. Since digital switch networks are on a terminal per line basis, the terminating CCS per line will be the same as the originating CCS per line as shown in Item 7.2, Appendix A. Terminating Traffic Attributed to Host Only ____ CCS/Line 7.4 Percent of Pushbutton Lines ____ 7.5 Anticipated Ultimate Capacity (20 years) 7.5.1 Subscriber Lines Host ________ (Incl. DDI Concentrator Lines) RST 1 ________ RST 2 ________ RST 3 ________ Total ________ 8. Trunk Circuit Requirements 8.1 Interoffice Trunking 8.1.1 Trunking Requirements 1. Connecting Office 2. Use of Trunk 3. Trk. Grp. Ntwk. Connection 1 4. Quantity Equipped 5. Ultimate % Growth 6. CCS Capacity 7. Direction 8. No. Digits Dialed 9. No. Digits Outpulsed 10. No. Digits Inpulsed 11. Type Signaling 12. Type Pulsing 13. Carrier Type (2-Wire) 14. Carrier Type (4-Wire) 15. Physical 16. Repeat Coils 2 17. DX Signaling Set 18. Other Type Signaling 19. Delay Dial 20. Direct Digital Interface 21. a. Feature Group B b. Feature Group C c. Feature Group D 1 IC—Direct Inter-LATA Connecting Trunk = (IC/POP) TC—Tandem Connecting Trunks IT—Intertandem Connecting Trunks IL—Intra-LATA Connecting Trunks TIC—Tandem Inter-LATA Connecting Trunks Misc.—Intercept, Busy Verification, etc. 2 8.1.2 Pads for 4-Wire Carrier (7dB and 16dB) Total Quantity ______ By Bidder Quantity ______ By Owner Quantity ______ Refer to the attached information regarding connecting company trunk circuit drawing numbers and name of manufacturer. 8.2 Switched Traffic Data 8.2.1 Originating Traffic Type CCS H.T. secs. BHC No. of digits out-pulsed Sender sig. mode Remarks Toll “0”− 1 Toll “0” + 7 1 2 Toll “0” + 10 1 2 Toll S-S “1” + 7 2 Toll S-S “1” + 10 2 Toll Other Special Service Intercept Intraoffice XXXXXXX XXXXXXX EAS EAS EAS Tandem Tandem Tandem 911 Emerg. Service Total 1 2 Busy Hour Attempts = BHC Total × 1.4 = ____ 8.2.2 Terminating Traffic Type CCS H.T. secs. BHC No. of digits inpulsed Receiver sig. mode Remarks Toll Compl. Test & Ver. Intraoffice EAS EAS EAS Tandem Tandem Tandem Total 9. Checklist of Features Required 9.1 Alternate Routing (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 9.2 Data Service (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 9.3 This office shall be: 9.3.1 End Office Only 9.3.2 End Office and Intermediate Tandem (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 9.3.3 End Office and Access Tandem (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 9.4 Billing Data Trunk group Send ANI feature group Store billing data B C D AMA system Pollable system 9.4.1 This office only 9.4.2 Trunks from Tributaries 9.4.3 Local Message Detail Recording: 9.5 Pollable Systems 9.5.1 Polling device to be provided on this contract ____ Required ____ Not Required (Provide details in Item 16, Appendix A) 9.5.2 Pollable system to be backed up by tape or disc standby ____ Required ____ Not Required 9.6 AMA Format 9.6.1 Bellcore Format ____ Required ____ Not Required (Provide details in Item 16, Appendix A) 10. Miscellaneous Operating Features 10.1 Busy Verification 10.1.1 By dedicated trunk from toll operator: ____ 10.1.1.1 One-Way, Inward ____ 10.1.1.2 Two-Way (Busy verification inward, intercept outward) ____ 10.1.2 By prefix digit over intertoll trunk ____ (Indicate digit(s) dialed) ____ 10.1.3 Access by Switchman 10.1.3.1 Dedicated Trunk ____ 10.1.3.2 Multiple of Operator Trunk ____ 10.2 Intercept Facilities 10.2.1 Vacant code, disconnected number, and unassigned number intercept shall be: (Check One) By recorded announcement: Without cut-through to operator ____ With cut-through to operator ____ By operator ____ 10.2.2 Changed number intercept shall be: (Check One) By recorded announcement: Without cut-through to operator ____ With cut-through to operator ____ By operator ____ By automatic intercept system (AIS) in distant office ____ 10.2.3 Method of Reaching Operator, if required: Separate trunk group ____ Regular interoffice toll trunks with idle trunk selecting over at least three trunks when three or more toll trunks are equipped ____ 10.2.4 Number of separate intercept trunk circuits ____ 10.3 Line Load Control 10.3.1 Line load control facilities are: ____ Required ____ Not Required (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 10.4 Service Observing Facilities 10.4.1 Service observing facilities are: ____ Required ____ Not Required (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 10.5 Hotel-Motel Arrangements 10.5.1 Hotel-motel arrangements for operation of message registers at the subscriber's premises are: ____ Required ____ Not Required (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 10.5.1.1 How are message registers to be activated? Line Reversal ____ Third Wire ____ Other ____ (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 10.6 Nailed-Up Connections ____ Required ____ Not Required (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 10.7 Vertical Services: Initially Ultimate 10.7.1 Call Waiting—No. of Lines ____________ ____________ 10.7.2 Call Forwarding—No. of Lines ____________ ____________ ____ Local ____ Remote (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 10.7.3 Abbreviated Dialing No. of Lines ____________ ____________ No. of Codes per Line ____ for ____ Lines No. of Codes per Line ____ for ____ Lines 10.7.4 Three-Way Calling—No. of Lines ____________ ____________ CCS Per Line ____________ ____________ 10.7.5 Other ____ (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 11. Maintenance Facility Requirements 11.1 Alarm Signals 11.1.1 Handled locally ____ Explain in Detail: 11.1.2 Transmitted to attended point 11.1.2.1 Via operator office trunks ____ 11.1.2.2 Via printout or other display service ____ Explain in Detail: 11.1.2.3 Type of tone to operator 11.1.2.3.1 Distinctive tone (see (i)(2)(ix) of § 1755.522) ____ 11.1.2.3.2 Other Explain in Detail: 11.1.3 Alarm checking signals for carrier and mobile radio systems 11.1.3.1 Minor Alarm 11.1.3.2 Major Alarm 11.1.3.3 Terminals for both 11.2 Trouble Location and Test 11.2.1 Outside plant and stations (check desired items) 11.2.1.1 Subscriber's loop test circuit: 11.2.1.1.1 As part of the maintenance center 11.2.1.1.2 Separately 11.2.1.2 Remote test set (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 11.2.1.3 Dial speed test circuit (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 11.2.1.4 Pushbutton dialing test circuit 11.2.1.5 Howler (per (o)(2)(iii)(C) of § 1755.522) 11.2.1.6 Hand test sets, number required ____ (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 11.3 Transmission Tests 11.3.1 Furnish reference tone Yes ____ No ____ Frequencies and order in which applied Time interval for application of each frequency ____ Hz ____ Seconds ____ Hz ____ Seconds ____ Hz ____ Seconds ____ Hz ____ Seconds 11.3.2 Test Lines 11.3.2.1 Test Line 100 ____ 11.3.2.2 Test Line 102 ____ 11.3.2.3 Test Line 104 ____ 11.3.2.4 Test Line 105 ____ (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 11.3.2.5 Test Line 107 ____ 11.3.2.6 Remote Office Test Line ____ (Explain in Item 16, Appendix A) 11.4 Line Testing 11.4.1 Automatic line insulation testing Yes ____ No ____ 11.4.2 Owner supplied equipment Yes ____ No ____ 11.4.2.1 Vendor supplied interface only Yes ____ No ____ If supplied by owner, explain in Item 16, Appendix A, including manufacturer, model, location. 11.5 Remote Control 11.5.1 Remote control of the system shall be provided. Yes ____ No ____ If required, explain in Item 16, Appendix A, including number, type and location. 12. Power Equipment Requirements (Host Office Only) 12.1 Central Office Battery 12.1.1 A battery reserve of ____ busy hours shall be provided for this office when it reaches ____ lines at the ultimate anticipated traffic rates specified in Item 7.2, Appendix A. 12.1.1.1 The owner will furnish a standby generator, permanently installed in this office, with capacity sufficient to power air conditioning equipment required for cooling of the central office equipment and to maintain an adequate dc supply in the event of a failure of the commercial ac supply. Yes ____ No ____ 12.1.2 Type of battery: Lead Calcium ____ Lead Antimony ____ 12.1.3 Voltmeter (portable 3-60-150 volt scale, 1% accuracy) shall be furnished. Yes ____ No ____ 12.1.4 Hydrometer in a hydrometer holder with glass or plastic drop cup shall be furnished. Yes ____ No ____2112.1.5 Type of battery rack required: (Check One) Two Tier ____ Other ____ Explain: 12.1.6 Special equipment power requirements (carrier, voice frequency repeaters, etc.). Drain in amperes ____ 12.1.6.1 Supply all necessary equipment to provide the following 48-volt battery taps: Number of circuits Fuse (or circuit breaker) size 12.2 Charging Equipment 12.2.1 Charging equipment shall be provided capable of charging the office battery on a full float basis when the office reaches ____ lines at the ultimate anticipated traffic rates specified in Item 7.2, Appendix A. 12.2.2 Charger input rating shall be: 3-Phase Connection: Voltage ____ 3-Wire ____ Phase ____ 4-Wire ____ Frequency ____ Delta ____ Y ____ 12.3 Ringing Equipment 12.3.1 Solid-state ringing equipment in accordance with paragraph (s)(5)(i) of § 1755.522 shall be provided for generating the frequencies specified by check marks in the following table. Ringing generator sets serving the entire office shall each be sized to carry the full office ringing load when the office size reaches ____ lines at the ultimate anticipated traffic rates specified in Item 7.2, Appendix A. 12.3.2 Ringing frequencies to be supplied: Frequency in Hz Maximum No. of telephones Single Frequency 20 Decimonic 20 30 40 50 Harmonic 16 2 3 25 33 1 3 50 Synchromonic 20 30 42 54 12.3.3 Furnish frequency meter (accurate within 1.3 Hz) and voltmeter (5% accuracy) for ringing measurements (see paragraph (s)(7)(ii) of § 1755.522). Check One: Panel Mounted ____ Portable ____ Not Required ____ 12.4 Power Board The power panel and associated wiring shall be of ample size to meet the load requirements when this office reaches ____ lines at the ultimate anticipated traffic rates specified in Item 7.2, Appendix A. 13. Distributing Frame Requirements (Host Office Only) 13.1 Total number of outside plant cable pairs to be terminated 13.1.1 Gauge of outside plant cable pairs 13.2 Number of outside plant cable pairs to be protected 13.3 Number of additional protector pair units to be provided on MDF Explain: 13.4 Main Frame Details Is present MDF to be reused? Yes ____ No ____ If “Yes,” Type ____ Reused protectors are: ____ (Mfgr.) ____ (Type) 13.4.1 Number of pairs of arrester units (switching equipment) ____ 13.4.2 Number of pairs of gas tube arrester units (special equipment) ____ 13.4.2.1 Gas tubes to be: ____ light, ____ medium, ____ heavy, ____ max. duty units 13.4.2.2 Fail shorted/low breakdown failure mode required Yes ____ No ____ 13.4.2.3 Breakdown voltage of gas tube arresters ____ 13.4.3 Number of terminated pairs to be grounded ____ 13.4.4 Factory assembled tip cable Yes ____ No ____ 13.4.4.1 Tip cable length [if other than 20 feet (610 cm)] ____ 13.4.4.2 Tip cable formed Up ____ Down ____ 13.4.5 Pairs per vertical ____ 13.4.6 Height of vertical ____ feet ____ inches 14. Building and Floor Plan Information (Host Office Only) 14.1 Equipment is to be installed in an existing building (Attach detailed plan.) ____ 14.2 A new building is planned ____ 14.2.1 Tentative plan ( Note to Engineer: 14.3 Detailed Arrangements 14.3.1 Partition required (to isolate space containing battery, charger, power board, test panel, main distributing frame and subscriber's loop test circuit (wire chief's test desk) from that of the remaining equipment). Yes ____ No ____ 14.3.2 Vestibule required Yes ____ No ____ 14.3.3 Cable entrance Overhead____ Underground ____ 14.3.4 Additional floor space will be required for the following equipment which is being furnished by the owner or by the connecting company: 14.3.5 The office will be arranged for Overhead Interbay Cabling ____ Underfloor (Computer Room Type) Interbay Cabling ____ 14.3.6 Is earthquake bracing required? Yes ____ No ____ (If “Yes,” explain zone and criteria used for zone in Item 16, Appendix A.) 14.3.7 Office ground will be ____ ohms or less (Refer to Item 4.6.3 of RUS TE&CM 810.) 14.3.8 The office is considered to be in the following category for lightning damage probability based on the Figure 1 map of RUS TE&CM 823 (see paragraph (u)(2) of 1755.522). ____ Very High ____ Higher than Average ____ Average ____ Lower than Average ____ Very Low 14.3.9 The following is additional information regarding operating environment conditions which should be considered in determining system protection requirements (tower in vicinity, high exposure, etc.): 15. Alternate Requests 16. Explanatory Notes (Include a detailed description of any equipment to be reused, or otherwise supplied by the owner, loop extenders, subscriber carrier, VF repeaters, etc.) Appendix B to 7 CFR 1755.522—Detailed Information on Remote Switching Terminals (RST's) (Complete One Form For Each RST) 1. Number of Subscriber Lines (These lines included in totals in Item 6, Appendix A). 1.1 Single-Party: ________ Flat Rate ________ Message Rate. 1.2 Semi-Postpay Pay Station ________. 1.3 Prepay Pay Station ________. 1.4 PABX Lines ________ Loop Start________ Ground Start ________ Restricted at Office ________ Other ________ (Describe in Item 12, Appendix B) 1.5 Number of lines to be pushbutton ________________ 1.6 911 Emergency Lines ________ 1.7 Anticipated ultimate capacity (20-Year) ________ 2. Traffic 2.1 Originating traffic per line—CCS/BH: ________ Initial ________ Ultimate. 2.2 Terminating traffic per line—CCS/BH: ________ Initial ________ Ultimate 2.2.1 Terminating will be made equal to originating if it is not known to be different. 3. Subscriber Loop Resistance 3.1 Number of subscriber lines having loop resistance, including the telephone set of: No. of Lines 1501-1900 Ohms __________ 1901-3200 Ohms ________ 3.2 Number of pay station lines having loop resistance, excluding the telephone set, greater than: No. of Lines 1200 Ohms (For Prepay) ____________ 1000 Ohms (For Semi-Post Pay Operation) __________. 4. Range Extension 4.1 If no standby power is available at the site, loop extenders may be required on 1501 to 1900 ohms loops. 4.2 Loop extenders: (Explain in Item 12, Appendix B) 4.3 VF repeaters: (Explain in Item 12, Appendix B) 5. Power Supply 5.1 Power Board. 5.1.1 The power board and associated wiring shall be of ample size to meet the load requirements when this RST reaches ________ lines at the ultimate anticipated traffic rates specified in Item 2, Appendix B. 5.2 Charger input rating shall be: 3-Phase Connection: 3-Wire __________ 4-Wire __________ Delta __________ Y__________ 5.2.1 Charger shall be capable of charging the RST battery on a full float basis when the RST reaches ________ lines at ultimate traffic rate specified in Item 2, Appendix B. 5.2.2 Charger shall be redundant ________. 5.3 Battery reserve shall be ________ busy hours when the RST reaches ________ lines at the ultimate anticipated traffic specified in Item 2, Appendix B. 5.4 Standby power is available. Yes ______ No ______. 5.5 Special equipment power requirements ________ amps. 5.6 Ringing. 5.6.1 Type of Ringing. 5.6.2 Frequency No. 1. 2. 3. 4. Frequency (Hz) Max. No. Phones/Frequency 5.6.3 Wattage to be sized for ________ lines. 5.6.4 Frequency Meter (see Item 12.3.3, Appendix A). Panel Mounted ______ Not Required ______. 6. Emergency Operation 6.1 If path to central office is opened, the RST shall be able to complete calls between subscribers in its own system: Yes ______ No ______ Further requirements should be listed under Item 12, Appendix B. 7. RST Distribution Frame Requirements 7.1 Total number of outside plant cable pairs to be terminated ______. 7.1.1 Gauge of outside plant cable pairs ________. 7.2 Number of outside plant cable pairs to be protected ________. 7.3 Number of additional protector pair units to be provided on MDF ________. Explain: 7.4 Main Frame Details 7.4.1 Present MDF to be reused Yes______ No______. If “Yes”, Type ________. Reused protectors are: ________ (Mfr.) ________ (Type). 7.4.2 Number of pairs of arrester units (switching equipment) ________. 7.4.3 Number of pairs of gas tube arrester units (special equipment) ________. 7.4.3.1 Gas tubes to be: ______ light, ______ medium, ______ heavy, ______ maximum duty units. 7.4.3.2 Fail shorted/low breakdown failure mode required Yes ______ No ______. 7.4.3.3 Breakdown voltage of gas tube arresters ________. 7.4.4 Number of terminated pairs to be grounded ________. 7.4.5 Factory assembled tip cable Yes ______ No ______. 7.4.5.1 Tip cable length [if other than 20 feet (610 cm)] ______. 7.4.5.2 Tip cable formed Up ______ Down ______. 7.4.6 Pairs per vertical ________. 7.4.7 Height of vertical ________ feet ________ inches. 8. Building and Floor Plan Information 8.1 RST to be mounted in building ______. 8.1.1 Earthquake bracing required Yes ______ No ______ (see Item 14.3.6, Appendix A). 8.1.2 Supply building floor plan. 8.2 RST to be mounted in cabinet out of doors ______. 8.2.1 Cabinet to be mounted ______ on pole ______ on ground. 9. Subscriber Line Test 9.1 Remote testing of subscriber lines is required Yes ______ No ______. 9.2 Subscriber loop test set ______. 10. Span Lines to Host Central Office 10.1 To be supplied by Owner ______. 10.2 To be supplied by Bidder ______. 10.2.1 When the bidder is to supply the span lines, an RUS Form 397b, Trunk Carrier Systems, with the applicable parts completed must be attached with a physical layout of the span line. 11. Grounding Considerations 11.1 The RST ground will be ______ ohms or less. (Refer to Item 4.6.3 of RUS TE&CM 810.) 11.2 This RST is considered to be in the following category for lightning damage probability based on the Figure 1 map of RUS TE&CM 823.________ Very High ________ Higher than Average ________ Average ________ Lower than Average ________ Very Low 11.3 The following is additional information regarding operating environment conditions which should be considered in determining system protection requirements (tower in vicinity, high exposure, etc.): 12. Explanatory Notes Appendix C to 7 CFR 1755.522—Specifications for Digital, Stored Program Controlled Central Office Equipment Detailed Requirements—Bidder Supplied Information Telephone Company Name Location Central Office Name (By Location) Town __________ County __________________ State ______ Attended ______ Unattended ______ 1. General 1.1 The equipment and materials furnished by the bidder must meet the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (x), Appendix A, and Appendix B of § 1755.522. 1.2 Paragraphs (a) through (x) of § 1755.522 cover the minimum general requirements for digital, stored program controlled central office switching equipment. 1.3 Paragraph (y) of § 1755.522 covers requirements for installation, inspection, and testing when such service is included as part of the contract. 1.4 Appendices A and B of § 1755.522 cover the technical data for application engineering and detailed equipment requirements insofar as they can be established by the owner. These appendices are to be filled in by the owner. 1.5 Appendix C of § 1755.522 covers detailed information on the switching network equipment and the stored program controlled equipment, and information as to system reliability and heavy traffic delays as proposed by the bidder. This appendix is to be filled in by the bidder and must be presented with the bid. 1.6 Appendix D of § 1755.522 is the single-point grounding system audit checklist. 2. Performance Objectives 2.1 Reliability 2.2 Busy Hour Load Capacity and Traffic Delay 3. Equipment Quantities Dependent on System Design 3.1 Switch Frames and Circuits. 3.1.1 Number of Lines. 3.1.1.1 The number of lines to be provided shall include the number required for the termination of subscriber lines, Item 7, Appendix A, plus the number required for routine testing plus any additional to meet the minimum switch increment of the selected system. 3.1.1.2 The number of lines provided for this office will be ______ 3.1.2 Number of Ports Used for Trunks 3.1.2.1 The number of trunk ports to be provided shall be based on the trunk quantities required (Item 8, Appendix A) as modified by the minimum increment of the selected system. Provision shall be made for at least 5 percent additional inlet and outlet ports over those required initially. The additional ports shall be used for connecting additional trunks that may be required in the future. 3.1.2.2 The number of trunk ports provided for this office will be ____________ 3.1.3 Number of Subscriber Directory Numbers 3.1.3.1 The number of directory numbers provided shall be based on the total directory numbers required (Item 6.1.11, appendix A), as modified by the memory increment of the proposed system. 3.1.3.2 The number of subscriber directory numbers provided for this office will be ____________ 4. RST 4.1 Information for RST's must be supplied for each RST to be furnished. 4.2 Number of line terminals for this RST will be ____________ . 4.3 Number of span line terminations to the central office being supplied ____________ . 4.4 If the emergency operation option is required, it will provide the following service when connection to the main office is severed: 4.5 The ac power drain at the remote end will be: Initial ____________ Ultimate ____________ Voltage: Single-Phase ____________ Three-Phase ____________ 4.6 Special environmental requirements for the remote end: 5. Power 5.1 AC Power Drain Watts Initial ____________ Ultimate ____________ 5.2 Heat Dissipation Watts Provide the initial and ultimate equipment dissipation for each equipment room. 5.2.1 Operating Temperature Range Minimum ____________ Maximum ____________ 5.2.2 Operating Humidity Range Minimum ____________ Maximum ____________ 6. Additional Information to be Furnished by Bidder 6.1 The bidder shall accompany its bid with the following information: a. Two copies of the equipment list and the calculations from which the quantities in the equipment list are determined; b. Two copies of the traffic tables from which the quantities are determined, other than the full availability tables shown in paragraph (p)(1)(i) of § 1755.522; c. Two copies of detailed switching diagram showing the traffic on each route, the grade of service, the quantity of circuits, and main distributing frames; d. Block diagram of stored program control and associated maintenance equipment; e. A prescribed method and criteria for acceptance of the completed central office, which is subject to review; f. Location of technical assistance service with 24-hour maintenance, and conditions when owner will be charged for access to the service; g. Calculations showing the method by which ringing machine sizes were derived; h. Precautions to be taken against static discharge; i. Details of central office grounding requirements, recognizing local grounding conditions; j. Details concerning traffic measurement capabilities and formats; and k. Details concerning AMA features and formats to be provided. 6.2 As a part of the response to the bid, the bidder must also list information concerning the types and quantities of spare parts to be furnished. All units, excluding those units described in paragraph (x)(6)(i)(C) of § 1755.522, must fall into one of the four classes. The information must be in the following format: Unit No. Unit name Quantity of units in the CO's and RST's which are bid Quantity of spare parts furnished with this bid Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 7. Explanatory Notes Appendix D to 7 CFR 1755.522—Acceptance Checklist—Single-point Grounding System 1. Approval Statement Telephone Company: RUS Borrower Designation: RUS Contract Number: N/A Name: Central Office: Remote: Date of Inspection: Names of Inspectors: Owner Representative Central Office Supplies Consulting Engineer Mutually Approved Exceptions: Grounding System Approval: Name (Owner Representative) Signature Title Date Name (Supplier Representative) Signature Title Date 2. General Survey 2.1 This office is considered to be in the following category for probability of lightning damage based on the Figure 1 map in RUS TE&CM 823 (also refer to paragraph (u)(2) of § 1755.522) ____ Very High ____ Higher than Average ____ Average ____ Lower than Average ____ Very low 2.2 Central office ground field (COGF) to be inspected for proper bonding of conductors to ground rods, etc. COGF to earth grounding reading is ________ ohms. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 802, Appendices C and D, Measurement Techniques.) Is this resistance reading acceptable? (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Items 1.6, 4.6.2 and 4.6.3 for protection considerations.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.3 Ground connection to be inspected from the master ground bar (MGB) to the central office ground field (COGF) to ensure it is properly sized and installed by most direct route with no sharp bends. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 4.3.2 and section 8.1.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.4 Building structure grounds (steel rebar in footings, ironwork, etc.) are to be properly bonded and connected to the MGB. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 4.3.4.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.5 Metallic central office door(s) are to be painted with metallic paint with doorknobs left bare. Door(s) and frames are to be grounded to the building structural ground or the MGB. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.6 Metallic fences within 6 feet (183 cm) of the exchange building, storage facilities ground field, etc. are to be properly bonded to the COGF outside of the central office building. Handhole enclosure is to be used for the COGF connection to permit inspection and disconnect for earth resistance testing. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Appendix C, Item 4.6.1.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.7 Lightning rod systems are to be grounded by a separate dedicated ground field. A bond should be provided between the COGF and the lightning rod ground field. Handhole enclosure is to be used for the COGF connection to permit inspection and disconnect for earth resistance testing. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 4.3.2.1.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.8 Radio/microwave tower ground grid is to be properly bonded to the COGF by a direct outside connection. Handhole enclosure is to be used for the COGF connection to permit inspection and disconnect for earth resistance testing. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 4.3.2 and section 10.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.9 If a qualified metallic water system is present, inspect the MGB connecting conductor to ensure that it is properly sized and installed by the most direct route with no sharp bends and that it is clamped solidly on the water pipes. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 4.3.3 for details on metallic water system grounding.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.10 All power and grounding conductors are to be continuous, end to end, with no splices, size discontinuity or intermediate terminations. If an exception is necessary, unusual care must be taken to assure proper bonding between the two sections. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Appendix C, section 5.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.11 All ground conductors should be void of sharp bends along their entire lengths. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 8.2.2.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.12 Ground conductors should only be placed in nonmetallic conduit. Those routed through metallic conduit require that both ends of the conduit be bonded to the ground conductor. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 8.2.4.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.13 Ground conductors should not be encircled by metallic clamp. Metallic straps are to be removed and replaced with nonmetallic clamps. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 8.2.4.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.14 If metallic conduit is used, it is to be insulated from all ironwork. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.15 Inspect to determine if the required central office supplier electrostatic discharge plates, wrist wraps, antistatic floor mats, etc. are available and properly installed. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 12.3.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 2.16 Ground conductors, except green wires, should not be routed close and parallel to other conductors so as to minimize induction on surges into equipment wiring. It is also better not to route these ground conductors through cable racks or troughs, or within the confines of any iron work. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 8.2.3.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 3. Master Ground Bar (MGB) 3.1 The designated P, A, N, and I segments of the master ground bar (MGB) should be clearly identified. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Figure 1 for MGB segmentation arrangement.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 3.2 Check for appearance and proper location of following on MGB: (a) R—Interior radio equipment 1 1 (b) C—Cable entrance ground bar 1 (c) M—MDF ground bar 1 (d) G—Standby power equipment frame ground 1 (e) N—Commercial power MGN 2 2 (f) B—Building structure ground 2 (g) L—Central office ground field 2 (h) W—Water pipe system 2 (i) N 1 3 3 (j) N 2 3 (k) N 3 3 (l) I 1 4 4 (m) I 2 4 Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 3.3 All connections to MGB are to be two-hole bolted down copper crimped or compression type terminal lugs. (NOTE: No solder connections are permitted.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 3.4 MGB is to be properly insulated from the mounting surface. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 3.5 All connections are to be tight. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 3.6 The MGB is to have an anticorrosion coating of the type which enhances conductivity. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 3.7 Bar is to be clearly stenciled or legibly labeled “MGB.” Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 3.8 All ground leads are to be properly sized and labeled as to point of origin. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 8.3.1 and section 8.1.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 4. Ground Window Bar (GWB) 4.1 All equipment grounds that originate inside of an Isolated Ground Zone (IGZ) are to be terminated on the GWB which is preferably located physically inside the IGZ and insulated from its support. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 5.1.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 4.2 Each GWB is to be connected to the MGB by the most direct route with a conductor of 2/0-gauge or coarser, or resistance of less than 0.005 ohms. Parallel conductors for redundancy if required by the supplier. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 8.1.2.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 4.3 The metal framework grounds of only that switching equipment and associated electrical equipment located inside of the IGZ should be connected to the GWB as required by the central office equipment supplier. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 5.5.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 4.4 GWB is to be clearly stenciled or labeled “GWB.” Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 4.5 All connections are to be tight. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 5. Isolated Ground Zone (IGZ) 5.1 IGZ areas are to be clearly marked on the floor or in some other easily recognizable manner. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 6.1.1) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 5.2 Confirm that all framework, cabinets, etc., within the IGZ are ground connected only to the GWB. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 5.5.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 5.3 All cable racks, ground mats, switching and transmission equipment within the IGZ are to have ground leads only Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 5.4 Review ac power feed arrangement within the IGZ for acceptable receptacle type and confirm that all green wires are properly connected. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 5.5.4.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 5.5 All ironwork, metallic conduit, and other equipment associated with the switch are to be properly insulated at the IGZ boundary as stipulated by the supplier. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 6.2.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 5.6 With the GWB disconnected from the MGB, the resistance reading of ______ ohms between the GWB and the MGB indicates adequate isolation. (CAUTION: Test is to be conducted only with the approval and under the direction of the central office supplier.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments 6. Entrance and Tip Cables 6.1 When neither a cable vault nor a splicing trough exists, the outside plant cable should be brought into the central office and spliced to tip cables with a PVC outer jacket (ALVYN R Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 6.2 All outside entrance cables and all tip cable shields are to be separated by at least a 3-inch (7.6 cm) gap between shield ends. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 6.3 All entrance cable shields are to be bonded separately to #6 AWG or larger insulated wire or bonding ribbon and connected to the Cable Entrance Ground Bar (CEGB) by most direct route with minimum bends. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 6.4 Outside plant cable shields are to be connected only to the CEGB, and the tip cable shields are to be connected only to the Main Distributing Frame Bar (MDFB). Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 7. Cable Entrance Ground Bar (CEGB) 7.1 The CEGB is to be properly insulated from the mounting surface. (Refer to TE&CM 810, Item 4.2.1.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 7.2 The CEGB is to be located as close as possible to the physical ends of the entrance cable shields. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 7.3 All connections are to use two-hole bolted down copper crimped or compression type terminal lugs. (NOTE: No solder connections are permitted.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 7.4 All connections are to be tight. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 7.5 Bar is to be clearly stenciled or legibly labeled “CEGB.” Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 7.6 All ground leads are to be properly sized and labeled. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 7.7 The CEGB is to have an anticorrosion coating of the type which enhances conductivity. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 7.8 The CEGB is to be connected to the MGB by a properly sized conductor and by the most direct route. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, section 8.1.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 8. Main Distributing Frame (MDF) 8.1 RUS strongly recommends that MDF protectors be furnished without heat coils. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, section 7.6.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 8.2 Incoming cable pairs terminated on MDF protector assemblies should be protected with protector modules. These modules should contain white coded carbon blocks or orange coded gas tube arrestors that are included in the RUS List of Materials. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 7.4) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 7 8.3 All incoming subscriber cable pairs are to be properly terminated at either a protector equipped terminal or connected to ground. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments 8.4 MDF protector assemblies may be mounted directly on the vertical frame ironwork. Protector assemblies on each vertical are interconnected with each other and the Main Distributing Frame Bar (MDFB) with a #6 copper grounding conductor. Alternative means of connecting to the MDFB are also acceptable which do not rely on the frame ironwork for conducting surge currents to ground. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, section 7.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments 8.5 Protective “ground connections” should be provided between the MDFB and the frame ironwork for personnel protection regardless of the type of protector assembly used. Protective ground leads should be 14-gauge, less than 12 inches (30.5 cm) in length with paint thoroughly removed at point of connection to the ironwork. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 7.1.3.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments 8.6 The MDFB should be insulated from the frame ironwork in all cases where it is used as a Master Ground Bar (MGB). (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 7.1.2.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments 8.7 Where the MDFB is used as the MGB in very small offices the protective “ground connections” should be connected on the N section of the bar. The MDF line protector assembly grounds should be connected to the P section of the bar. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 7.1.4.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments 8.8 The MDFB is to be connected to the MGB by the most direct path with minimum bends and proper conductor size. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 8.1.4.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments 8.9 The MDFB should be free of all other ground leads when not used as an MGB. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments 8.10 Alternative arrangements which insulate the line protector assemblies and MDFB from the frame ironwork may require a direct ground connection of the frame ironwork to the MGB for personnel protection. Conductor is properly sized and tightened with paint removal on main frame ironwork at point of connection. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments 9. Power Service Protection and Grounding 9.1 The ground conductor between the ac power system multigrounded neutral (MGN) at the main ac disconnect panel and the master ground bar (MGB) is to be properly sized and connected. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Items 2.19, 4.3.1 and 8.1.3.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 9.2 If there is a non-MGN ac power system, there is to be a properly sized and connected insulated conductor bond between the power service ground electrode and the MGB. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 4.3.1.1.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 9.3 AC conductors including ground conductors serving 120-volt ac electric convenience receptacles and all direct wire peripheral equipment, located in the IGZ, should be sized in accordance with normal “green wire” criteria. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Items 5.5.4, 5.5.5, and 5.5.6.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 9.4 Minimum protection for ac power serving the central office buildings should consist of an RUS accepted secondary arrestor at the service entrance. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, section 9.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 9.5 A properly sized conductor for ground bonding between the standby power plant framework (not separately derived) and the MGB is to be provided to equalize framework voltages for personnel safety reasons. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 4.2.4.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 10. Miscellaneous 10.1 All non-IGZ equipment frames, relay racks, cable racks and other ironwork are to be properly connected to the MGB. (Refer to TE&CM 810, Item 4.4.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 10.2 Shields on high frequency intra-office cables are to be properly isolated and connected only to an isolation ground bar in the relay rack. All shielded cables entering the IGZ should only be referenced at the IGZ termination point as given by the manufacturer. (Refer to RUS TE&CM 810, Item 7.2.1.2.) Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 10.3 Isolation ground bars in the relay racks are to be properly connected to the MGB with appropriate sized conductor with no sharp bends. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 10.4 All radio equipment cabinet(s) are to be at least 10 feet (305 cm) from the IGZ. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: 10.5 The metal spare parts cabinet is to be grounded with a #6 AWG or larger insulated wire to non-IGZ cable rack, etc. or directly to the MGB. Acceptable: ____ Yes ____ No Comments: [58 FR 30938, May 28, 1993; 58 FR 36252, July 6, 1993, as amended at 60 FR 1711, Jan. 5, 1995, 60 FR 64312, 64314, Dec. 15, 1995; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] §§ 1755.523-1755.699 [Reserved] § 1755.700 RUS specification for aerial service wires. §§ 1755.701 through 1755.704 cover the requirements for aerial service wires. [61 FR 26074, May 24, 1996] § 1755.701 Scope. (a) This section covers the requirements for aerial service wires intended for aerial subscriber drops. (b) The aerial service wires can be either copper coated steel reinforced or nonmetallic reinforced designs. (c) For the copper coated steel reinforced design, the reinforcing members are the conductors. (1) The conductors are solid copper-covered steel wires. (2) The wire structure is completed by insulating the conductors with an overall extruded plastic insulating compound. (d) For the nonmetallic reinforced design, the conductors are solid copper individually insulated with an extruded solid insulating compound. (1) The insulated conductors are either laid parallel (two conductor design only) or twisted into pairs (a star-quad configuration is permitted for two pair wires). (2) The wire structure is completed by the application of nonmetallic reinforcing members and an overall plastic jacket. (e) All wires sold to RUS borrowers for projects involving RUS loan funds under §§ 1755.700 through 1755.704 must be accepted by RUS Technical Standards Committee “A” (Telecommunications). For wires manufactured to the specification of §§ 1755.700 through 1755.704, all design changes to an accepted design must be submitted for acceptance. RUS will be the sole authority on what constitutes a design change. (f) Materials, manufacturing techniques, or wire designs not specifically addressed by §§ 1755.700 through 1755.704 may be allowed if accepted by RUS. Justification for acceptance of modified materials, manufacturing techniques, or wire designs must be provided to substantiate product utility and long term stability and endurance. [61 FR 26074, May 24, 1996] § 1755.702 Copper coated steel reinforced (CCSR) aerial service wire. (a) Conductors. http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (2) Factory joints in conductors shall comply with the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 2.1.6. (b) Conductor insulation. (2) The raw materials shall be accepted by RUS prior to their use. (3) The finished conductor insulation shall be free from holes, splits, blisters, or other imperfections and shall be as smooth as is consistent with best commercial practice. (4) The finished conductor insulation shall comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraphs 3.1.5 through 3.1.5.4. (5) The insulation shall have a minimum spot thickness of not less than 0.9 millimeters (mm) (0.03 inches (in.)) at any point. (c) Wire assembly. (2) The finished wire assembly shall be either a flat or a notched oval. Other finished wire assemblies may be used provided that they are accepted by RUS prior to their use. (3) The overall dimensions of the finished wire assembly shall be in accordance with the following requirements: Diameter Dimensions Minimum Maximum Major 5.5 (0.22) 8.0 (0.31) Minor 3.0 (0.12) 5.0 (0.19) (d) Conductor marking. (e) Electrical requirements Conductor resistance. (2) Wet mutual capacitance. (3) Wet attenuation. (4) Wet insulation resistance. (5) Dielectric strength. (ii) The dry dielectric strength between conductors of the completed CCSR aerial service wire shall comply with the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 7.1.7. (6) Fusing coordination. (7) Insulation imperfections. (f) Mechanical requirements Impact test. (ii) All CCSR aerial service wires manufactured in accordance with this section shall comply with the aged impact test specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 8.1.3. (2) Abrasion resistance test. (3) Static load test. (4) Plasticizer compatibility test. (g) Environmental requirements Cold temperature handling test. (ii) All CCSR aerial service wires manufactured in accordance with this section shall comply with the aged cold temperature handling test specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 8.2.2. (2) Light absorption test. (3) Low temperature separation test. (4) Flammability test. (5) Wire listing. (h) Identification marker. (i) Length marking (optional). (2) When sequentially numbered length markings are used, the length markings shall be in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 9.1.5. The color of the initial marking shall be either white or silver. (j) Durability of marking. [61 FR 26075, May 24, 1996, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1755.703 Nonmetallic reinforced (NMR) aerial service wire. (a) Conductors. http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (2) Factory joints made in the conductors during the manufacturing process shall comply with the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 2.2.2. (b) Conductor insulation. (2) The finished conductor insulation shall comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 3.2.3. (3) The dimensions of the insulated conductors shall comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 3.2.3.1. (4) The colors of the insulation shall comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 3.2.3.2. (5) A permissible overall performance level of faults in conductor insulation shall comply with the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 3.2.4.6. The length count and number of faults shall be recorded. The information shall be retained for a period of 6 months and be available for review by RUS when requested. (6) Repairs to the conductor insulation during manufacture are permissible. The method of repair shall be accepted by RUS prior to its use. The repaired insulation shall comply with the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 3.2.3.3. (7) All repaired sections of insulation shall be retested in the same manner as originally tested for compliance with paragraph (b)(5) of this section. (8) The colored insulating material removed from or tested on the conductor, from a finished wire shall comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraphs 3.2.4 through 3.2.4.5. (c) Identification of pairs and layup of pairs. (i) The tip and ring conductor of each pair; and (ii) Each pair in the completed wire. (2) The colors to be used in the pairs together with the pair numbers shall be in accordance with the table specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 4.1.1. (3) The insulated conductors shall be either layed parallel (two conductor design only) or twisted into pairs. (4) When using parallel conductors for the two conductor design, the parallel conductors shall be designed to enable the wire to meet the electrical requirements specified in paragraph (g) of this section. (5) When twisted pairs are used, the following requirements shall be met: (i) The pair twists shall be designed to enable the wire to meet the electrical requirements specified in paragraph (g) of this section; and (ii) The average length of pair twists in any pair in the finished wire, when measured on any 3 meter (10 foot) length, shall not exceed the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 4.1. (6) An alternative method of forming the two-pair wire is the use of a star-quad configuration. (i) The assembly of the star-quad shall be such as to enable the wire to meet the electrical requirements specified in paragraph (g) of this section. (ii) The star-quad configuration shall be assembled in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 4.1.2. (iii) The average length of twist for the star-quad in the finished wire, when measured on any 3 meter (10 foot) length, shall not exceed the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 4.1. (iv) The color scheme used to provide identification of the tip and ring conductors of each pair in the star-quad shall comply with the table specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 4.1.2. (d) Strength members. (e) Wire jacket. (2) The jacket raw materials shall be accepted by RUS prior to their use. (f) Wire assembly. (g) Electrical requirements Conductor resistance. (2) Resistance unbalance. (ii) The resistance unbalance between tip and ring conductors shall be random with respect to the direction of unbalance. That is, the resistance of the tip conductors shall not be consistently higher with respect to the ring conductors and vice versa. (3) Dry mutual capacitance. (4) Pair-to-pair capacitance unbalance. (5) Attenuation. (ii) The wet attenuation of the completed NMR aerial service wire shall comply with the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 7.2.8. (6) Insulation resistance. (ii) The wet insulation resistance of the completed NMR aerial service wire shall comply with the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 7.2.10. (7) Wet dielectric strength. (8) Fusing coordination. (9) Crosstalk loss. (ii) The input-to-input near-end crosstalk loss (NEXT) for any pair of completed NMR aerial service wire shall comply with the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 7.2.14. (h) Mechanical requirements Impact test. (ii) All NMR aerial service wires manufactured in accordance with this section shall comply with the aged impact test specified in § 1755.702(f)(1)(ii). (2) Abrasion resistance test. (3) Static load test. (4) Elongation test. (5) Plasticizer compatibility test. (i) Environmental requirements Cold temperature handling test. (ii) All NMR aerial service wires manufactured in accordance with this section shall comply with the aged cold temperature handling test specified in § 1755.702(g)(1)(ii). (2) Light absorption test. (3) Flammability test. (4) Wire listing. (j) Ripcord (optional). (2) When a ripcord is used it shall comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraphs 4.2 through 4.2.3. (k) Identification marker. (l) Length marking (optional). (2) When sequentially numbered length markings are used, the length markings shall be in accordance with in accordance with § 1755.702(i)(2). (m) Durability of marking. [61 FR 26076, May 24, 1996, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1755.704 Requirements applicable to both CCSR and NMR aerial service wires. (a) Acceptance testing. (2) For initial acceptance, the manufacturer shall: (i) Certify that the product fully complies with each paragraph in §§ 1755.700 through 1755.704; (ii) Agree to periodic plant inspections by RUS; (iii) Certify whether the product complies with the domestic origin manufacturing provisions of the “Buy American” requirements of the Rural Electrification Act of 1938 (7 U.S.C. 903 note), as amended (the “REA Buy-American provision”); (iv) Submit at least three written user testimonials concerning field performance of the product; and (v) Provide any other nonpropriety data deemed necessary by the Chief, Outside Plant Branch (Telecommunications). (3) In order for RUS to consider a manufacturer's request that a product be requalified, the manufacturer shall certify not later than June 30 of the year in which requalification is required, that the product: (i) Fully complies with each paragraph in §§ 1755.700 through 1755.704; and (ii) Does or does not comply with the domestic origin manufacturing provisions of the REA Buy American provisions. The required certifications shall be dated within 90 days of the submission. (4) Initial and requalification acceptance requests should be addresses to: Chairman, Technical Standards Committee “A” (Telecommunications), Telecommunications Standards Division, Rural Utilities Service, AG Box 1598, Washington, DC 20250-1598. (b) Extent of testing Tests on 100 percent of completed wire. http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (ii) Each conductor in the completed CCSR and NMR aerial service wire shall be tested for shorts in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraphs 7.1.1 and 7.2.1, respectively. (iii) Each length of completed CCSR and NMR aerial service wire shall be tested for insulation imperfections in accordance with § 1755.702(e)(7) and § 1755.703(b)(5), respectively. (2) Capability tests. (i) Performance of the conductors; (ii) Performance of the conductor insulation and jacket material; (iii) Sequential marking and lettering; (iv) Mutual capacitance, capacitance unbalance, attenuation, and crosstalk; (v) Conductor resistance, resistance unbalance, and insulation resistance; (vi) Dielectric strength and fusing coordination; (vii) Impact, abrasion, static load, elongation, and plasticizer compatibility tests; and (viii) Cold temperature handling, light absorption, low temperature separation, and flammability tests. (c) Summary of records of electrical and physical tests. (2) Measurements and computed values shall be rounded off to the number of places or figures specified for the requirement according to ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 1.3. (d) Manufacturing irregularities. (2) Repairs to the jacket of NMR aerial service wires are not permitted in wires supplied to end users under §§ 1755.700 through 1755.704. (e) Splicing. (f) Preparation for shipment. (2) When CCSR and NMR aerial service wires are shipped on reels the following provisions shall apply: (i) The diameter of the drum shall be large enough to prevent damage to the wire from reeling or unreeling. The reels shall be substantial and so constructed as to prevent damage to the wire during shipment and handling; (ii) A waterproof corrugated board or other suitable means of protection accepted by RUS prior to its use may be applied to the reel. If the waterproof corrugated board or other suitable material is used for protection, it shall be suitably secured in place to prevent damage to the wire during storage and handling. The use of the waterproof corrugated board or other suitable means of protection shall be at the option of the manufacturer unless specified by the end user; (iii) The outer end of the wire shall be securely fastened to the reel head so as to prevent the wire from becoming loose in transit. The inner end of the wire shall be securely fastened in such a way as to make it readily available if required for electrical testing. Spikes, staples, or other fastening devices which penetrate the conductor insulation of the CCSR aerial service wire and the jacket of the NMR aerial service wire shall not be used. The method of fastening the wire ends shall be accepted by RUS prior to their use; (iv) Each length of wire shall be wound on a separate reel; (v) Each reel shall be plainly marked to indicate the direction in which it should be rolled to prevent loosening of the wire on the reel; and (vi) Each reel shall be stenciled or labeled on either one or both sides with the following information: (A) Customer order number; (B) Manufacturer's name and product code; (C) Factory reel number and year of manufacture; (D) Gauge of conductors and pair size of wire; (E) Length of wire; and (F) RUS designation letter “K.” (3) When CCSR and NMR aerial service wires are shipped in coils the following provisions shall apply: (i) The diameter of the coil shall be large enough to prevent damage to the wire from coiling or uncoiling; (ii) The nominal length of the wire in a coil shall be 305 meters (1,000 feet). No coil shall be less than 290 meters (950 feet) long or more than 460 meters (1,500 feet) long; however, 25 percent of the total number of coils may be less than 305 meters (1,000 feet); (iii) The coils of wire shall be wound securely with strong tape in four separate evenly spaced places; (iv) The coils may be protected from damage by wrapping the coil with heavy paper, burlap, or other suitable material accepted by RUS prior to its use. The use of the heavy paper, burlap, or other suitable means of protection shall be at the option of the manufacturer unless specified by the end user; and (v) Each coil shall be tagged with the following information: (A) Customer order number; (B) Manufacturer's name and product code; (C) Year of manufacture; (D) Gauge of conductors and pair size of wire; (E) Length of wire; and (F) RUS designation letter “K.” (4) In lieu of wrapping the coil with heavy paper, burlap, or other suitable material, the coil may be packaged in a moisture resistant carton. (5) When the coils are shipped in moisture resistant cartons, each carton shall be marked with the information specified in paragraphs (f)(3)(v)(A) through (f)(3)(v)(F) of this section. (6) Other methods of shipment may be used if accepted by RUS prior to their use. (7) When NMR aerial service wire is shipped, the ends of the wire shall be sealed in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-89-648-1993, paragraph 9.2. [61 FR 26077, May 24, 1996, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] §§ 1755.705-1755.859 [Reserved] § 1755.860 RUS specification for filled buried wires. (a) Scope. (i) The conductors are solid copper, individually insulated with an extruded solid insulating compound. (ii) The insulated conductors are twisted into pairs (a star-quad configuration is permitted for the two pair wires) which are then stranded or oscillated to form a cylindrical core. (iii) A moisture resistant filling compound is applied to the stranded conductors completely covering the insulated conductors and filling the interstices between the pairs. (iv) The wire structure is completed by the application of an optional core wrapping material, an inner jacket, a flooding compound, a shield, a flooding compound, and an overall plastic jacket. (2) The number of pairs and gauge size of conductors which are used within the RUS program are provided in the following table: American Wire Gauge (AWG) 22 24 Pairs 2 2 3 3 (3) All wires sold to RUS borrowers for projects involving RUS loan funds under this section must be accepted by RUS Technical Standards Committee “A” (Telephone). For wires manufactured to the specification of this section, all design changes to an accepted design must be submitted for acceptance. RUS will be the sole authority on what constitutes a design change. (4) Materials, manufacturing techniques, or wire designs not specifically addressed by this section may be allowed if accepted by RUS. Justification for acceptance of modified materials, manufacturing techniques, or wire designs must be provided to substantiate product utility and long term stability and endurance. (5) The American National Standards Institute/Electronic Industries Association (ANSI/EIA) 359-A-84, EIA Standard Colors for Color Identification and Coding, referenced in this section is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of ANSI/EIA 359-A-84 are available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845, U.S Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250-1500, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (6) American Society for Testing and Materials specifications (ASTM) A 505-87, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for; ASTM B 3-90, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; ASTM B 193-87, Standard Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor Materials; ASTM B 224-91, Standard Classification of Coppers; ASTM B 694-86, Standard Specification for Copper, Copper Alloy, and Copper-Clad Stainless Steel Sheet and Strip for Electrical Cable Shielding; ASTM D 150-87, Standard Test Methods for A-C Loss Characteristics and Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials; ASTM D 257-91, Standard Test Methods for D-C Resistance or Conductance of Insulating Materials; ASTM D 1238-90b, Standard Test Method for Flow Rates of Thermoplastics by Extrusion Plastometer; ASTM D 1248-84(1989), Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials; ASTM D 1535-89, Standard Test Method for Specifying Color by the Munsell System; ASTM D 3349-86, Standard Test Method for Absorption Coefficient of Carbon Black Pigmented Ethylene Plastic; ASTM D 4101-82(1988), Standard Specification for Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials; ASTM D 4565-90a, Standard Test Methods for Physical and Environmental Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable; ASTM D 4566-90, Standard Test Methods for Electrical Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable; ASTM D 4568-86, Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Compatibility between Cable Filling and Flooding Compounds and Polyolefin Cable Materials; ASTM D 4872-88, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Testing of Wire and Cable Filling Compounds; ASTM E 8-91, Standard Test Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials; and ASTM E 29-90, Standard Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with Specifications, referenced in this section are incorporated by reference by RUS. These incorporations by references were approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the ASTM standards are available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845, U.S. Department Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250-1500, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (b) Conductors and conductor insulation. Dimensions and Permissible Variations (2) The minimum conductor elongation in the final wire must comply with the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM E 8-91. Conductor—AWG Minimum Elongation—Percent 22 20 24 16 (3) Joints made in conductors during the manufacturing process may be brazed, using a silver alloy solder and nonacid flux, or they may be welded using either an electrical or cold welding technique. In joints made in uninsulated conductors, the two conductor ends must be butted. Splices made in insulated conductors need not be butted but may be joined in a manner acceptable to RUS. (4)(i) The tensile strength of any section of a conductor containing a factory joint must not be less than 85 percent of the tensile strength of an adjacent section of the solid conductor of equal length without a joint. (ii) Engineering Information: AWG Nominal Diameter Millimeters (mm) (Inches (in.)) 22 0.643 (0.0253) 24 0.511 (0.0201) (5) Each conductor must be insulated with either a colored, solid, insulating grade, high density polyethylene or crystalline propylene/ethylene copolymer or with a solid natural primary layer and a colored, solid outer skin using one of the insulating materials listed in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (b)(5)(ii) of this section. (i) The polyethylene raw material selected to meet the requirements of this section must be Type III, Class A, Category 4 or 5, Grade E9, in accordance with ASTM D 1248-84(1989). (ii) The crystalline propylene/ethylene raw material selected to meet the requirements of this section must be Class PP 200B 40003 E11 in accordance with ASTM D 4101-82(1988). (iii) Raw materials intended as conductor insulation furnished to these requirements must be free from dirt, metallic particles, and other foreign matter. (iv) All insulating raw materials must be accepted by RUS prior to their use. (6) All conductors in any single length of wire must be insulated with the same type of material. (7) A permissible overall performance level of faults in conductor insulation must average not greater than one fault per 12,000 conductor meters (40,000 conductor feet) for each gauge of conductor. (i) All insulated conductors must be continuously tested for insulation faults during the twinning operation with the method of test acceptable to RUS. The length count and number of faults must be recorded. The information must be retained for a period of 6 months and be available for review by RUS when requested. (ii) The voltages for determining compliance with the requirements of this section are as follows: AWG Direct Current Voltages (Kilovolts) 22 6.0 24 5.0 (8) Repairs to the conductor insulation during manufacturing are permissible. The method of repair must be accepted by RUS prior to its use. The repaired insulation must be capable of meeting the relevant electrical requirements of this section. (9) All repaired sections of insulation must be retested in the same manner as originally tested for compliance with paragraph (b)(7) of this section. (10) Colored insulating material removed from or tested on the conductor, from a finished wire, must be capable of meeting the following performance requirements: Property Polyethylene Crystalline Propylene/Ethylene Copolymer Melt Flow Rate Percent increase from raw material, Maximum <0.5 (Initial Melt Index) 50 — 0.5-2.00 (Initial Melt Index) 25 — ≤5.0 (Initial Melt Index) — 110 Tensile Strength—Minimum Megapascals (MPa) 16.5 21.0 (Pounds per Square Inch (psi)) (2,400) (3,000) Ultimate Elongation Minimum, Percent 300 300 Cold Bend Failures, Maximum 0/10 0/10 Shrinkback Maximum, mm (in.) 10 (0.375) 10 (0.375) Oxygen Induction Time Minimum, Minutes 20 20 (11) Testing procedures. (i) Melt flow rate. (ii) Tensile strength and ultimate elongation. Note: Quality assurance testing at a jaw separation speed of 500 mm/min (20 in./min) is permissible. Failures at this rate must be retested at the 50 mm/min (2 in./min) rate to determine section compliance. (iii) Cold bend. (iv) Shrinkback. Material Temperature Polyethylene 115 ±1 °C Crystalline propylene/ethylene Copolymer 130 ±1 °C (v) Oxygen induction time. (12) Other methods of testing may be used if acceptable to RUS. (c) Identification of pairs and twisting of pairs. (i) The tip and ring conductor of each pair; and (ii) Each pair in the completed wire. (2) The colors to be used to provide identification of the tip and ring conductor of each pair are shown in the following table: Pair No. Color Tip Ring 1 White Blue 2 White Orange 3 White Green (3) Standards of color. (4) Positive identification of the tip and ring conductors of each pair by marking each conductor of a pair with the color of its mate is permissible. The method of marking must be accepted by RUS prior to its use. (5) Other methods of providing positive identification of the tip and ring conductors of each pair may be employed if accepted by RUS prior to its use. (6) The insulated conductors must be twisted into pairs. (7) In order to provide sufficiently high crosstalk isolation, the pair twists must be designed to enable the wire to meet the capacitance unbalance and the crosstalk loss requirements of paragraphs (m)(2), (m)(3), and (m)(4) of this section. (8) The average length of pair twists in any pair in the finished wire, when measured on any 3 meter (m) (10 foot(ft)) length, must not exceed 152 mm (6 in.). (9) An alternative method of forming the two pair wire is the use of a star-quad configuration. (i) The assembly of the star-quad must be such as to enable the wire to meet the capacitance unbalance and the crosstalk loss requirements of paragraphs (m)(2), (m)(3), and (m)(4) of this section. (ii) The four individual insulated conductors must be twisted together to form a star-quad configuration with the tip and ring conductors of each pair diagonally opposite each other in the quad. (iii) The average length of twist for the star-quad in the finished wire, when measured on any 3 m (10 ft) length, must not exceed 152 mm (6 in.). (iv) The following color scheme must be used to provide identification of the tip and ring conductor of each pair in the star-quad: Pair No. Color Tip Ring 1 White with blue stripe Blue 2 White with orange stripe Orange (v) If desired, the blue and orange conductors may contain a white stripe. The stripes in this case must be narrow enough so that the tip and ring identification is obvious. (d) Forming of the wire core. (2) The filling compound must be applied to the wire core in such a way as to provide a completely filled core as is commercially practical. (3) If desired for manufacturing reasons, white or colored binders of nonhygroscopic and nonwicking material may be applied over the core. (e) Filling compound. (2) The filling compound must be free from dirt, metallic particles, and other foreign matter. It must be applied in such a way as to fill the space within the wire core. (3) The filling compound must be nontoxic and present no dermal hazards. (4) The filling compound must exhibit the following dielectric properties at a temperature of 23 ±3 °C when measured in accordance with ASTM D 150-87 or ASTM D 4872-88. (i) The dissipation factor must not exceed 0.0015 at a frequency of 1 megahertz (MHz). (ii) The dielectric constant must not exceed 2.30. (5) The volume resistivity must not be less than 10 12 (6) The individual wire manufacturer must satisfy RUS that the filling compound selected for use is suitable for its intended application. The filling compound must be compatible with the wire components when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4568-86 at a temperature of 80 °C. (f) Core wrap (optional). (2) The core wrap must provide a sufficient heat barrier to prevent visible evidence of conductor insulation deformation or adhesion between conductors, caused by adverse heat transfer during the inner jacketing operation. (3) If required for manufacturing reasons, white or colored binders of nonhygroscopic and nonwicking material may be applied over the core wrap. (4) Sufficient filling compound must be applied to the core wrap that voids or air spaces existing between the core and inner side of the core wrap are minimized. (g) Inner jacket. (2) The jacket must be free from holes, splits, blisters, or other imperfections and must be as smooth and concentric as is consistent with the best commercial practice. (3) The inner jacket material and test requirements must be as specified for the outer jacket material per paragraphs (j)(3) through (j)(5)(iv) of this section. (4) The inner jacket thickness at any point must not be less than 0.5 mm (0.020 in.). The thickness must be determined from measurements on 50 mm (2 in.) samples taken not less than 0.3 m (1 ft) from either end of the wire. The average must be determined from 4 readings taken approximately 90 °apart on any cross section of the samples. The maximum and minimum points must be determined by exploratory measurements. The maximum thickness minus the minimum thickness at any cross section must not exceed 43 percent of the average thickness at that cross section. (h) Flooding compound. (2) The flooding compound must be compatible with the jacket when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4568-86 at a temperature of 80 °C. The floodant must exhibit adhesive properties sufficient to prevent jacket slip when tested in accordance with the requirements of appendix A, paragraph (III)(5), of this section. (3) The individual wire manufacturer must satisfy RUS that the flooding compound selected for use is acceptable for the application. (i) Shield. (i) If the shield is applied longitudinally, it must be corrugated. (ii) If the shield is applied helically, it must be smooth. (2) The overlap for longitudinally applied shields must be a minimum of 2 mm (0.075 in.) The overlap for helically applied shields must be a minimum of 23 percent of the tape width. (3) General requirements for application of the shielding material are as follows: (i) Successive lengths of shielding tapes may be joined during the manufacturing process by means of cold weld, electric weld, soldering with a nonacid flux, or other acceptable means; (ii) Where two ends of a metal shield are to be joined together, care shall be taken to clean the metal surfaces in order to provide for a good mechanical and electrical connection; (iii) The shields of each length of wire must be tested for continuity. A one meter (3 ft) section of shield containing a factory joint must exhibit not more than 110 percent of the resistance of a shield of equal length without a joint; (iv) The breaking strength of any section of a shield tape containing a factory joint must not be less than 80 percent of the breaking strength of an adjacent section of the shield of equal length without a joint; (v) The reduction in thickness of the shielding material due to the corrugating or application process must be kept to a minimum and must not exceed 10 percent at any spot; and (vi) The shielding material must be applied in such a manner as to enable the wire to pass the bend test as specified in paragraph (n)(3) of this section. (4) The following materials are acceptable for use as wire shielding: Standard Wire Gopher Resistant Wire Copper Alloy 220 (Bronze) Copper-Clad Stainless Steel (0.1016 ±0.0076 mm) 0.1270 ±0.0127 mm (0.0040 ±0.0003 in.) (0.0050 ±0.0005 in.) Copper Alloy 220 (Bronze) Copper Alloy 664 0.1270 ±0.0127 mm 0.1397 ±0.0127 mm (0.0050 ±0.0005 in.) (0.0055 ±0.0005 in.) (i) The copper-clad steels and copper alloy 664 shielding tapes must be capable of meeting the following performance requirements prior to application to the wire: Property Requirement Tensile Strength Minimum, MPa (psi) 379 (55,000) Tensile Yield Minimum, MPa (psi) 241 (35,000) Elongation Minimum, percent in 50 mm (2 in.) 15 (ii) Copper alloy 220. (iii) Copper-clad stainless steel. (iv) Copper alloy 664. (v) Copper-clad alloy steel. (j) Outer jacket. (2) The jacket must be free from holes, splits, blisters, or other imperfections and must be as smooth and concentric as is consistent with the best commercial practice. (3) The raw material used for the outer jacket must be one of the five types listed in paragraphs (j)(3)(i) through (j)(3)(v) of this section. The raw material must contain an antioxidant to provide long term stabilization and the materials must contain a 2.60 ±0.25 percent concentration of furnace black to provide ultraviolet shielding. Both the antioxidant and furnace black must be compounded into the material by the raw material supplier. (i) Low density, high molecular weight polyethylene (LDHMW) must conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1248-84(1989), Type I, Class C, Category 4 or 5, Grade J3. (ii) Low density, high molecular weight ethylene copolymer (LDHMW) must conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1248-84 (1989), Type I, Class C, Category 4 or 5, Grade J3. (iii) Linear low density, high molecular weight polyethylene (LLDHMW) must conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1248-84(1989), Type I, Class C, Category 4 or 5, Grade J3. (iv) High density polyethylene (HD) must conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1248-84(1989), Type III, Class C, Category 4 or 5, Grade J4. (v) Medium density polyethylene (MD) must conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1248-84(1989), Type II, Class C, Category 4 or 5, Grade J4. (vi) Particle size of the carbon selected for use must not average greater than 20 nanometers. (vii) Absorption coefficient must be a minimum of 400 in accordance with the procedures of ASTM D 3349-86. (4) The outer jacketing material removed from or tested on the wire must be capable of meeting the following performance requirements: Property LLDHMW, Ethylene Copolymer LDHMW Polyethylene HD or MD Polyethylene Melt Flow Rate Percent increase from raw material Maximum 50 50 <0.41 (Initial Melt Index) 100 — — 0.41-2.00 (Initial Melt Index) 50 — — Tensile Strength Minimum, MPa (psi) 12.0 (1,700) 12.0 (1,700) 16.5 (2,400) Ultimate Elongation Percent, Minimum 400 400 300 Shrinkback Percent of Length, Maximum 5 5 5 Impact Failures, Maximum 2/10 2/10 2/10 (5) Testing procedures. (i) Melt flow rate. (ii) Tensile strength and ultimate elongation. (iii) Shrinkback. (iv) Impact. (6) Jacket thickness. (7) Eccentricity. (k) Sheath slitting cord (optional). (2) When a sheath slitting cord is used it must be nonhygroscopic and nonwicking, continuous throughout a length of wire, and of sufficient strength to open the sheath without breaking the cord. (3) Sheath slitting cords must be capable of consistently slitting the jacket(s) and/or shield for a continuous length of 0.6 m (2 ft) when tested in accordance with the procedure specified in appendix B of this section. (l) Identification marker and length marker. (2) The number of conductor pairs and their gauge size must be marked on the jacket. (3) The marking must be printed on the jacket at regular intervals of not more than 1.5 m (5 ft). (4) An alternative method of marking may be used if accepted by RUS prior to its use. (5) The completed wire must have sequentially numbered length markers in FEET OR METERS at regular intervals of not more than 1.5 m (5 ft) along the outside of the jacket. (6) The method of length marking must be such that for any single length of wire, continuous sequential numbering must be employed. (7) The numbers must be dimensioned and spaced to produce good legibility and must be approximately 3 mm (0.125 in.) in height. An occasional illegible marking is permissible if there is a legible marking located not more than 1.5 m (5 ft) from it. (8) The method of marking must be by means of suitable surface markings producing a clear, distinguishable, contrasting marking acceptable to RUS. Where direct or transverse printing is employed, the characters should be indented to produce greater durability of marking. Any other method of length marking must be acceptable to RUS as producing a marker suitable for the field. Size, shape and spacing of numbers, durability, and overall legibility of the marker will be considered in acceptance of the method. (9) The accuracy of the length marking must be such that the actual length of any wire section is never less than the length indicated by the marking and never more than one percent greater than the length indicated by the marking. (10) The color of the initial marking must be white or silver. If the initial marking fails to meet the requirements of the preceding paragraphs, it will be permissible to either remove the defective marking and re-mark with the white or silver color or leave the defective marking on the wire and re-mark with yellow. No further re-marking is permitted. Any re-marking must be on a different portion of the wire circumference than any existing marking when possible and have a numbering sequence differing from any other existing marking by at least 5,000. (11) Any reel of wire which contains more than one set of sequential markings must be labeled to indicate the color and sequence of marking to be used. The labeling must be applied to the reel and also to the wire. (m) Electrical requirements Mutual capacitance and conductance. (ii) The mutual conductance (corrected for length and gauge) of any pair must not exceed 2 micromhos/kilometer (micromhos/km) (3.3 micromhos/mile) when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4566-90 at a frequency of 1.0 ±0.1 kHz and a temperature of 23 ±3 °C. (2) Pair-to-pair capacitance unbalance. (3) Pair-to-ground capacitance unbalance Pair-to-ground. (ii) When measuring pair-to-ground capacitance unbalance, all pairs, except the pair under test, are grounded to the shield. (iii) Pair-to-ground capacitance unbalance may vary directly with the length of the wire. (4) Far-end crosstalk loss. o o o x x x (5) Attenuation. Conductor AWG Individual Pair Attenuation dB/km (decibel/mile (dB/mile)) Maximum Minimum 22 6.8 (11.0) 5.0 (8.1) 24 8.7 (14.0) 6.6 (10.7) (6) Insulation resistance. (7) High voltage test. (A) 5.0 kilovolts for 22-gauge conductors; and (B) 4.0 kilovolts for 24-gauge conductors. (ii) In each length of completed wire, the dielectric strength between the shield and all conductors in the core must be tested in accordance with ASTM D 4566-90 and must withstand, for 3 seconds, a dc potential whose value is not less than 20 kilovolts. (8) Conductor resistance. AWG Maximum Resistance ohms/kilometer (ohms/1000 ft) 22 57.1 (17.4) 24 90.2 (27.5) (9) Resistance unbalance. (ii) The resistance unbalance between tip and ring conductors shall be random with respect to the direction of unbalance. That is, the resistance of the tip conductors shall not be consistently higher with respect to the ring conductors and vice versa. (n) Mechanical requirements Defective wire. (2) Wire breaking strength. (3) Wire bending test. (4) Water penetration test. (ii) After the one hour period, there must be no water leakage in the sheath interfaces, under the core wrap or between any insulated conductors in the core. (iii) If water leakage is detected in the first sample, one 3 m (10 ft) additional adjacent sample from the same reel of wire must be tested in accordance with paragraph (n)(4)(ii) of this section. If the second sample exhibits water leakage, the entire reel of wire is to be rejected. If the second sample exhibits no leakage, the entire reel of wire is considered acceptable. (5) Compound flow test. (o) Acceptance testing and extent of testing. (2) For initial acceptance, the manufacturer must submit: (i) An original signature certification that the product fully complies with each requirement of this section; (ii) Qualification Test Data, per appendix A of this section; (iii) To periodic plant inspections; (iv) A certification that the product does or does not comply with the domestic origin manufacturing provisions of the “Buy American” requirements of the Rural Electrification Act of 1938 (7 U.S.C. 901 et seq. (v) Written user testimonials concerning performance of the product; and (vi) Other nonproprietary data deemed necessary by the Chief, Outside Plant Branch (Telephone). (3) For requalification acceptance, the manufacturer must submit an original signature certification that the product fully complies with each section of the specification, excluding the Qualification Section, and a certification that the product does or does not comply with the domestic origin manufacturing provisions of the “Buy American” requirements of the Rural Electrification Act of 1938 (7 U.S.C. 901 et seq. (4) Initial and requalification acceptance requests should be addressed to: Chairman, Technical Standards, Committee “A” (Telephone), Telecommunications Standards Division, Rural Utilities Service, Washington, DC 20250-1500. (5) Tests on 100 percent of completed wire. (i) The shield of each length of wire must be tested for continuity using the procedures of ASTM D 4566-90. (ii) Dielectric strength between all conductors and the shield must be tested to determine freedom from grounds in accordance with paragraph (m)(7)(ii) of this section. (iii) Each conductor in the completed wire must be tested for continuity using the procedures of ASTM D 4566-90. (iv) Dielectric strength between conductors must be tested to ensure freedom from shorts and crosses in accordance with paragraph (m)(7)(i) of this section. (v) The average mutual capacitance must be measured on all wires. (6) Capability tests. (i) Performance requirements for conductor insulation and jacket material; (ii) Performance requirements for filling and flooding compounds; (iii) Sequential marking and lettering; (iv) Capacitance unbalance and crosstalk; (v) Insulation resistance; (vi) Conductor resistance and resistance unbalance; (vii) Wire bending and wire breaking strength tests; (viii) Mutual conductance and attenuation; and (ix) Water penetration and compound flow tests. (p) Summary of records of electrical and physical tests. (2) Measurements and computed values must be rounded off to the number of places of figures specified for the requirement according to ASTM E 29-90. (q) Manufacturing irregularities. (2) Minor defects in the outer jackets (defects having a dimension of 3 mm (0.125 in.) or less in any direction) may be repaired by means of heat fusing in accordance with good commercial practices utilizing sheath grade compound. (r) Preparation for shipment. (2) The thermal wrap must comply with the requirements of appendix C of this section. When a thermal reel wrap is supplied, the wrap must be applied to the reel and must be suitably secured in place to minimize thermal exposure to the wire during storage and shipment. The use of the thermal reel wrap as a means of reel protection will be at the option of the manufacturer unless specified by the end user. (3) The outer end of the wire must be securely fastened to the reel head so as to prevent the wire from becoming loose in transit. The inner end of the wire must be securely fastened in such a way as to make it readily available if required for electrical testing. Spikes, staples, or other fastening devices which penetrate the wire jacket must not be used. The method of fastening the wire ends must be accepted by RUS prior to it being used. (4) Each length of wire must be wound on a separate reel unless otherwise specified or agreed to by the purchaser. (5) Each reel must be plainly marked to indicate the direction in which it should be rolled to prevent loosening of the wire on the reel. (6) Each reel must be stenciled or labeled on either one or both sides with the name of the manufacturer, year of manufacture, actual shipping length, an inner and outer end sequential length marking, description of the wire, reel number and the RUS wire designation: Wire Designation BFW Wire Construction Pair Count Conductor Gauge N = Copper Alloy 220 (Bronze) Shield Y = Gopher Resistant Shields Example: BFWY 3-24 Buried Filled Wire, Gopher Resistant Shield, 3 pair, 24 AWG (7) Both ends of the filled buried wire, manufactured to the requirements of this section, must be equipped with end caps which are acceptable to RUS. (The information and recordkeeping requirements of this section have been approved by the Office of Management and Budget under the control number 0572-0059) Appendix A to § 1755.860—Qualification Test Methods (I) The test procedures described in this appendix are for qualification of initial designs and major modifications of accepted designs. Included in (V) of this appendix are suggested formats that may be used in submitting test results to RUS. (II) Sample Selection and Preparation. (a) Length A shall be 10 ±0.2 meters (33 ±0.5 feet) long and must be maintained at 23 ±3 °C. One length is required. (b) Length B shall be 12 ±0.2 meters (40 ±0.5 feet) long. Prepare the test sample by removing the inner and outer jacket, shield, and core wrap, if present, for a sufficient distance on both ends to allow the insulated conductors to be flared out. Remove sufficient conductor insulation so that appropriate electrical test connections can be made at both ends. Coil the specimen with a diameter of 15 to 20 times its sheath diameter. Three lengths are required. (c) Length C shall be one meter (3 feet) long. Four lengths are required. (d) Length D shall be 300 millimeters (1 foot) long. Four lengths are required. (e) Length E shall be 600 millimeters (2 feet) long. Four lengths are required. (f) Length F shall be 3 meters (10 feet) long and must be maintained at 23 ±3 °C for the duration of the test. Two lengths are required. (2) Data Reference Temperature. (III) Environmental Tests Heat Aging Test Test Samples. (b) Sequence of Tests. (i) Water Immersion Test outlined in (III)(2) of this appendix; (ii) Water Penetration Test outlined in (III)(3) of this appendix; . (iii) Insulation Compression Test outlined in (III)(4) of this appendix; and (iv) Jacket Slip Strength Test outlined in (III)(5) of this appendix. (c) Initial Measurements. (ii) The attenuation at 150 kilohertz may be calculated from open circuit admittance (Yoc) and short circuit impedance (Zsc) or may be obtained by direct measurement of attenuation. (iii) Record on suggested formats attached in (V) of this appendix or on other easily readable formats. (d) Heat Conditioning. (ii) At the end of this period note any exudation of filling compound. Measure and calculate the parameters given in (III)(1)(c) of this appendix. Record on suggested formats attached in (V) of this appendix or on other easily readable formats. (iii) Cut away and discard a one meter (3 foot) section from each end of length B. (e) Overall Electrical Deviation. (ii) The stability of the electrical parameters after completion of this test must be within the following prescribed limits: (A) Capacitance. (B) The change in average mutual capacitance must be less than 5 percent over the frequency range of 1 to 150 kilohertz; (C) Conductance. (D) Attenuation. (2) Water Immersion Electrical Test Test Sample Selection. (b) Test Sample Preparation. (c) Capacitance and Conductance Testing. (i) Remeasure the mutual capacitance and conductance after the wires have been submerged for 24 hours and again after 30 days. (ii) Record each sample separately on the suggested formats attached in (V) of this appendix or on other easily readable formats. (d) Overall Electrical Deviation. (ii) The stability of the electrical parameters after of the test must be within the following prescribed limits: (A) Capacitance. (B) Conductance. (3) Water Penetration Testing. (b) Test per Option A or Option B. (i) Option A. (ii) Option B. (4) Insulation Compression Test. Test Sample D. (b) Sample Testing. (5) Jacket Slip Strength Test Sample Selection. (b) Sample Preparation. (c) Sample Conditioning and Testing. (6) Humidity Exposure. (b) Immediately after completing the measurements, expose the test sample to 100 temperature cyclings. Relative humidity within the chamber must be maintained at 90 ±2 percent. One cycle consists of beginning at a stabilized chamber and test sample temperature of 52 ±1 °C, increasing the temperature to 57 ±1 °C, allowing the chamber and test samples to stabilize at this level, then dropping the temperature back to 52 ±1 °C. (c) Repeat steps (III)(1)(d)(ii) through (III)(5)(c) of this appendix. (7) Temperature Cycling. (b) Immediately after completing the measurements, subject the test sample to 10 cycles of temperature between −40 °C and + 60 °C. The test sample must be held at each temperature extreme for a minimum of 1 1/2 (c) Repeat steps (III)(1)(d)(ii) through (III)(5)(c) of this appendix. (IV) Control Sample Test Samples. (2) Repeat steps (III)(2) through (III)(5)(c) of this appendix except use length A instead of length B. (3) Surge Test. (b) The samples must be capable of withstanding, without damage, a single surge voltage of 20 kilovolts peak between conductors, and 35 kilovolts peak between conductors and the shield as hereinafter described. The surge voltage must be developed from a capacitor discharge through a forming resistor connected in parallel with the dielectric of the test sample. The surge generator constants must be such as to produce a surge of 1.5 × 40 microseconds wave shape. (c) The shape of the generated wave must be determined at a reduced voltage by connecting an oscilloscope across the forming resistor with the wire sample connected in parallel with the forming resistor. The capacitor bank is charged to the test voltage and then discharged through the forming resistor and test sample. The test sample will be considered to have passed the test if there is no distinct change in the wave shape obtained with the initial reduced voltage compared to that obtained after the application of the test voltage. (V) The following suggested formats may be used in submitting the test results to RUS: Environmental Conditioning ______________ FREQUENCY kilohertz PAIR NUMBER CAPACITANCE CONDUCTANCE nF/km (nF/mile) micromhos/km (micromhos/mile) Initial Final Initial Final 1 ________ ________ ________ ________ 2 ________ ________ ________ ________ 3 ________ ________ ________ ________ Average x ________ ________ ________ ________ Overall Percent Difference in Average x Environmental Conditioning ________________________ FREQUENCY kilohertz PAIR NUMBER CAPACITANCE CONDUCTANCE ATTENUATION nF/km (nF/mile) micromhos/km (micromhos/mile) dB/km (dB/mile) Initial Final Initial Final Initial Final 1 ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ 2 ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ 3 ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ Average x ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ Overall Percent Difference in Average x Environmental Conditioning ______________________________ WATER IMMERSION TEST ( kilohertz) PAIR NUMBER CAPACITANCE CONDUCTANCE nF/km (nF/mile) micromhos/km (micromhos/mile) Initial 24 hours Final Initial 24 hours Final 1 ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ 2 ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ 3 ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ Average x ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ Overall Percent Difference in Average x Water Penetration Test Option A Option B End Leakage grams Weight Gain grams End Leakage grams Penetration mm (in.) Control __________ __________ __________ __________ Heat Age __________ __________ __________ __________ Humidity Exposure __________ __________ __________ __________ Temperature Cycling __________ __________ __________ __________ Insulation Compression Failures Control ________________ Heat Age ________________ Humidity Exposure ________________ Temperature Cycling ________________ Jacket Slip Strength @ 50 °C Load in newtons (pound-force) Control ________________ Heat Age ________________ Humidity Exposure ________________ Temperature Cycling ________________ Filler Exudation (grams) Heat Age ________________ Humidity Exposure ________________ Temperature Cycle ________________ Surge Test (kilovolts) Conductor to Conductor ________________ Shield to Conductors ________________ Appendix B to § 1755.860—Sheath Slitting Cord Qualification (I) The test procedures described in this appendix are for qualification of initial and subsequent changes in sheath slitting cords. (II) Sample Selection. (III) Test Procedure. (2) The prepared test specimens must be maintained at a temperature of 23 ±1 °C for at least 4 hours immediately prior to and during the test. (3) Wrap the sheath slitting cord around the plier jaws to ensure a good grip. (4) Grasp and hold the wire in a convenient position while gently and firmly pulling the sheath slitting cord longitudinally in the direction away from the wire end. The angle of pull may vary to any convenient and functional degree. A small starting notch is permissible. (5) The sheath slitting cord is considered acceptable if the cord can slit the jacket and/or shield for a continuous length of 0.6 meter (2 feet) without breaking the cord. Appendix C to § 1755.860—Thermal Reel Wrap Qualification (I) The test procedures described in this appendix are for qualification of initial and subsequent changes in thermal reel wraps. (II) Sample Selection. (III) Test Procedure. (2) Tape thermocouples to the jackets of each sample to measure the jacket temperature. (3) Cover one sample with the thermal reel wrap. (4) Expose the samples to a radiant heat source capable of heating the uncovered jacket sample to a minimum of 71 °C. A 600 watt photoflood lamp or an equivalent lamp having the light spectrum approximately that of the sun shall be used. (5) The height of the lamp above the jacket shall be 380 millimeters (15 inches) or a height that produces the 71 °C jacket temperature on the unwrapped sample. (6) After the samples have stabilized at the temperature, the jacket temperatures of the samples must be recorded after one hour of exposure to the heat source. (7) Compute the temperature difference between the jackets. (8) For the thermal reel wrap to be acceptable to RUS, the temperature differences between the jacket with the thermal reel wrap and the jacket without the reel wrap must be greater than or equal to 17 °C. [58 FR 61004, Nov. 19, 1993, as amended at 60 FR 1711, Jan. 5, 1995; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] §§ 1755.861-1755.869 [Reserved] § 1755.870 RUS specification for terminating cables. (a) Scope. (i) The conductors are solid tinned copper, individually insulated with extruded solid dual insulating compounds. (ii) The insulated conductors are twisted into pairs which are then stranded or oscillated to form a cylindrical core. (iii) The cable structure is completed by the application of a core wrap, a shield, and a polyvinyl chloride jacket. (2) The number of pairs and gauge size of conductors which are used within the RUS program are provided in the following table: American Wire Gauge (AWG) 22 24 Number of Pairs 12 12 50 50 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 600 600 800 800 Note: (3) All cables sold to RUS borrowers for projects involving RUS loan funds under this section must be accepted by RUS Technical Standards Committee “A” (Telephone). For cables manufactured to the specification of this section, all design changes to an accepted design must be submitted for acceptance. RUS will be the sole authority on what constitutes a design change. (4) Materials, manufacturing techniques, or cable designs not specifically addressed by this section may be allowed if accepted by RUS. Justification for acceptance of modified materials, manufacturing techniques, or cable designs shall be provided to substantiate product utility and long term stability and endurance. (5) The American National Standard Institute/Electronic Industries Association (ANSI/EIA) 359-A-84, EIA Standard Colors for Color Identification and Coding, referenced in this section is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of ANSI/EIA 359-A-84 are available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250-1500, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (6) American Society for Testing and Materials Specifications (ASTM) B 33-91, Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; ASTM B 736-92a Standard Specification for Aluminum, Aluminum Alloy and Aluminum-Clad Steel Cable Shielding Stock; ASTM D 1248-84 (1989), Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials; ASTM D 1535-89, Standard Test Method for Specifying Color by the Munsell System; ASTM D 2287-81 (Reapproved 1988), Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds; ASTM D 2436-85, Standard Specification for Forced-Convection Laboratory Ovens for Electrical Insulation; ASTM D 2633-82 (Reapproved 1989), Standard Methods of Testing Thermoplastic Insulations and Jackets for Wire and Cable; ASTM D 4101-82 (1988), Standard Specification for Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials; ASTM D 4565-90a, Standard Test Methods for Physical and Environmental Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable; ASTM D 4566-90, Standard Test Methods for Electrical Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable; and ASTM E 29-90, Standard Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with Specifications, referenced in this section are incorporated by reference by RUS. These incorporations by references were approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the ASTM standards are available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250-1500, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (7) American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), NFPA 70-1993 National Electrical Code referenced in this section is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. A copy of the ANSI/NFPA standard is available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250-1500, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (8) Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1666, Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts, dated January 22, 1991, referenced in this section is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. A copy of the UL standard is available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250-1500, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (b) Conductors and conductor insulation. Dimensions and Permissible Variations (2) Joints made in conductors during the manufacturing process may be brazed, using a silver alloy solder and nonacid flux, or they may be welded using either an electrical or cold welding technique. In joints made in uninsulated conductors, the two conductor ends shall be butted. Splices made in insulated conductors need not be butted but may be joined in a manner acceptable to RUS. (3) The tensile strength of any section of a conductor, containing a factory joint, shall not be less than 85 percent of the tensile strength of an adjacent section of the solid conductor of equal length without a joint. (4) Engineering Information: The sizes of wire used and their nominal diameters shall be as shown in the following table: AWG Nominal diameter Millimeters (Inches) 22 0.643 (0.0253) 24 0.511 (0.0201) (5) Each conductor shall be insulated with a primary layer of natural or white solid, insulating grade, high density polyethylene or crystalline propylene/ethylene copolymer and an outer skin of colored, solid, insulating grade, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) using one of the insulating materials listed in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (iii) of this section. (i) The polyethylene raw material selected to meet the requirements of this section shall be Type III, Class A, Category 4 or 5, Grade E9, in accordance with ASTM D 1248-84 (1989). (ii) The crystalline propylene/ethylene raw material selected to meet the requirements of this section shall be Class PP 200B 40003 E11 in accordance with ASTM D 4101-82 (1988). (iii) The PVC raw material selected to meet the requirements of this section shall be either Type PVC-64751E3XO, Type PVC-76751E3XO, or Type PVC-77751E3XO in accordance with ASTM D 2287-81 (1988). (iv) Raw materials intended as conductor insulation furnished to these requirements shall be free from dirt, metallic particles, and other foreign matter. (v) All insulating raw materials shall be accepted by RUS prior to their use. (6) All conductors in any single length of cable shall be insulated with the same type of material. (7) A permissible overall performance level of faults in conductor insulation when using the test procedures in paragraph (b)(8) of this section shall average not greater than one fault per 12,000 conductor meters (40,000 conductor feet) for each gauge of conductor. (8) The test used to determine compliance with paragraph (b)(7) of this section shall be conducted as follows: (i) Samples tested shall be taken from finished cables selected at random from standard production cable. The samples tested shall contain a minimum of 300 conductor meters (1,000 conductor feet) for cables sizes less than 50 pairs and 1,500 conductor meters (5,000 conductor feet) for cables sizes greater than or equal to 50 pairs. No further sample need be taken from the same cable production run within 6,000 cable meters (20,000 cable feet) of the original test sample from that run. (ii) The cable sample shall have its jacket, shield, and core wrap removed and its core shall be immersed in tap water for a minimum period of 6 hours. In lieu of removing the jacket, shield, and core wrap from the core, the entire cable may be tested. In this case, the core shall be completely filled with tap water, under pressure; then the cable assembly shall be immersed for a minimum period of 6 hours. With the cable core still fully immersed, except for end connections, the insulation resistance (IR) of all conductors to water shall be measured using a direct current (dc) voltage of 100 volts to 550 volts. (iii) An IR value of less than 500 megohms for any individual insulated conductor tested at or corrected to a temperature of 23 °C is considered a failure. If the cable sample is more than 7.5 meters (25 feet) long, all failing conductors shall be retested and reported in 7.5 meter (25 foot) segments. (iv) The pair count, gauge, footage, and number of insulation faults shall be recorded. This information shall be retained on a 6 month running basis for review by RUS when requested. (v) A fault rate, in a continuous length in any one reel, in excess of one fault per 3,000 conductor meters (10,000 conductor feet) due to manufacturing defects is cause for rejection. A minimum of 6,000 conductor meters (20,000 conductor feet) is required to develop a noncompliance in a reel. (9) Repairs to the conductor insulation during manufacturing are permissible. The method of repair shall be accepted by RUS prior to its use. The repaired insulation shall be capable of meeting the relevant electrical requirements of this section. (10) All repaired sections of insulation shall be retested in the same manner as originally tested for compliance with paragraph (b)(7) of this section. (11) The colored composite insulating material removed from or tested on the conductor, from a finished cable, shall be capable of meeting the following performance requirements: Property Composite insulation Tensile Strength, Minimum Megapascals (MPa) (Pounds per square inch (psi)) 16.5 (2400) Ultimate Elongation Percent, Minimum 125 Cold Bend Failures, Maximum 0/10 Shrinkback, Maximum Millimeter (mm) (Inches (in.)) 9.5 (3/8) Adhesion, Maximum Newtons (N) (Pound-force (lbf)) 13.3 (3) Compression Minimum, N (lbf) 1780 (400) (12) Testing procedures. (i) Tensile strength and ultimate elongation. Note: Quality assurance testing at a jaw separation speed of 500 mm/min (20 in./min) is permissible. Failures at this rate shall be retested at the 50 mm/min (2 in./min) rate to determine specification compliance. (ii) Cold bend. (iii) Shrinkback. (iv) Adhesion. (v) Compression. (13) Other methods of testing may be used if acceptable to RUS. (c) Identification of pairs and twisting of pairs. (i) The tip and ring conductor of each pair; and (ii) Each pair in the completed cable. (2) The colors used to provide identification of the tip and ring conductor of each pair shall be as shown in the following table: Pair No. Color Tip Ring 1 White Blue 2 White Orange 3 White Green 4 White Brown 5 White Slate 6 Red Blue 7 Red Orange 8 Red Green 9 Red Brown 10 Red Slate 11 Black Blue 12 Black Orange 13 Black Green 14 Black Brown 15 Black Slate 16 Yellow Blue 17 Yellow Orange 18 Yellow Green 19 Yellow Brown 20 Yellow Slate 21 Violet Blue 22 Violet Orange 23 Violet Green 24 Violet Brown 25 Violet Slate (3) Standards of color. (4) Positive identification of the tip and ring conductors of each pair by marking each conductor of a pair with the color of its mate is permissible. The method of marking shall be accepted by RUS prior to its use. (5) Other methods of providing positive identification of the tip and ring conductors of each pair may be employed if accepted by RUS prior to its use. (6) The insulated conductors shall be twisted into pairs. (7) In order to provide sufficiently high crosstalk isolation, the pair twists shall be designed to enable the cable to meet the capacitance unbalance and the crosstalk loss requirements of paragraphs (h)(2), (h)(3), and (h)(4) of this section. (8) The average length of pair twists in any pair in the finished cable, when measured on any 3 meter (m) (10 foot (ft)) length, shall not exceed 152 mm (6 in.). (d) Forming of the cable core. (2) When desired for lay-up reasons, the basic group may be divided into two or more subgroups called units. (3) Each group, or unit in a particular group, shall be enclosed in bindings of the colors indicated for its particular pair count. The pair count, indicated by the color of insulation, shall be consecutive as indicated in paragraph (d)(5) of this section through units in a group. (4) Threads or tapes used as binders shall be nonhygroscopic and nonwicking. The threads shall consists of a suitable number of ends of each color arranged as color bands. When tapes are used as binders, they shall be colored. Binders shall be applied with a lay of not more than 100 mm (4 in.). The colored binders shall be readily recognizable as the basic intended color and shall be distinguishable from all other colors. (5) The colors of the bindings and their significance with respect to pair count shall be as shown in the following table: Group No. Color of bindings Group pair count 1 White-Blue 1-25 2 White-Orange 26-50 3 White-Green 51-75 4 White-Brown 76-100 5 White-Slate 101-125 6 Red-Blue 126-150 7 Red-Orange 151-175 8 Red-Green 176-200 9 Red-Brown 201-225 10 Red-Slate 226-250 11 Black-Blue 251-275 12 Black-Orange 276-300 13 Black-Green 301-325 14 Black-Brown 326-350 15 Black-Slate 351-375 16 Yellow-Blue 376-400 17 Yellow-Orange 401-425 18 Yellow-Green 426-450 19 Yellow-Brown 451-475 20 Yellow-Slate 476-500 21 Violet-Blue 501-525 22 Violet-Orange 526-550 23 Violet-Green 551-575 24 Violet-Brown 576-600 (6) The use of the white unit binder in cables of 100 pair or less is optional. (7) When desired for manufacturing reasons, two or more 25 pair groups may be bound together with nonhygroscopic and nonwicking threads or tapes into super-units. The group binders and the super-unit binders shall be colored such that the combination of the two binders shall positively identify each 25 pair group from every other 25 pair group in the cable. (8) Super-unit binders shall be of the colors shown in the following table: Super-Unit Binder Colors Pair No. Binder color 1-600 White 601-1200 Red (e) Core wrap. (2) The core wrap shall provide a sufficient heat barrier to prevent visible evidence of conductor insulation deformation or adhesion between conductors, caused by adverse heat transfer during the jacketing operation. (3) Engineering Information: If required for manufacturing reasons, white or uncolored binders of nonhygroscopic and nonwicking material may be applied over the core and/or core wrap. (f) Shield. (2) The shield may be applied over the core wrap with or without corrugations (smooth) and shall be bonded to the outer jacket. (3) The shield overlap shall be a minimum of 3 mm (0.125 in.) for cables with core diameters of 15 mm (0.625 in.) or less and a minimum of 6 mm (0.25 in.) for cables with core diameters greater than 15 mm (0.625 in.). The core diameter is defined as the diameter under the core wrap and binding. (4) General requirements for application of the shielding material shall be as follows: (i) Successive lengths of shielding tapes may be joined during the manufacturing process by means of cold weld, electric weld, soldering with a nonacid flux, or other acceptable means; (ii) The metal shield with the plastic coating shall have the coating removed prior to joining the metal ends together. After joining, the plastic coating shall be restored without voids using good manufacturing techniques; (iii) The shields of each length of cable shall be tested for continuity. A one meter (3 ft) section of shield containing a factory joint shall exhibit not more than 110 percent of the resistance of a shield of equal length without a joint; (iv) The breaking strength of any section of a shield tape containing a factory joint shall not be less than 80 percent of the breaking strength of an adjacent section of the shield of equal length without a joint; (v) The reduction in thickness of the shielding material due to the corrugating or application process shall be kept to a minimum and shall not exceed 10 percent at any spot; and (vi) The shielding material shall be applied in such a manner as to enable the cable to pass the bend test as specified in paragraph (i)(1) of this section. (5) The dimensions of the uncoated aluminum tape shall be 0.2030±0.0254 mm (0.0080±0.0010 in.). (6) The aluminum tape shall conform to either Alloy AA-1100-0, AA-1145-0, or AA-1235-0 as covered in the latest edition of Aluminum Standards and Data, issued by the Aluminum Association, except that requirements for tensile strength are waived. (7) The single-sided plastic coated aluminum shield shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 736-92a, Type I Coating, Class 1 or 2, or Type II Coating, Class 1. The minimum thickness of the Type I Coating shall be 0.038 mm (0.0015 in.). The minimum thickness of the Type II Coating shall be 0.008 mm (0.0003 in.). (8) The plastic coated aluminum shield shall be tested for resistance to water migration by immersing a one meter (3 ft) length of tape under a one meter (3 ft) head of water containing a soluble dye plus 0.25 percent (%) wetting agent. (i) After a minimum of 5 minutes, no dye shall appear between the interface of the shield tape and the plastic coating. (ii) The actual test method shall be acceptable to RUS. (9) The bond between the plastic coated shield and the jacket shall conform to the following requirements: (i) Prepare test strips approximately 200 mm (8 in.) in length. Slit the jacket and shield longitudinally to produce 4 strips evenly spaced and centered in 4 quadrants on the jacket circumference. One of the strips shall be centered over the overlapped edge of the shielding tape. The strips shall be 13 mm (0.5 in.) wide. For cable diameters less than 19 mm (0.75 in.) make two strips evenly spaced. (ii) Separate the shield and jacket for a sufficient distance to allow the shield and jacket to be fitted in the upper and lower jaws of a tensile machine. Record the maximum force required to separate the shield and jacket to the nearest newton (pound-force). Repeat this action for each test strip. (iii) The force required to separate the jacket from the shield shall not be less than 9 N (2 lbf) for any individual strip when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(9)(ii) of this section. The average force for all strips of any cable shall not be less than 18 N (4 lbf). (g) Cable jacket and extraneous material. (2) The jacket shall be free from holes, splits, blisters, or other imperfections and shall be as smooth and concentric as is consistent with the best commercial practice. (3) The raw material used for the cable jacket shall be one of the following four types: (i) Type PVC-55554EOXO in accordance with ASTM D 2287-81(1988); (ii) Type PVC-65554EOXO in accordance with ASTM D 2287-81(1988); (iii) Type PVC-55556EOXO in accordance with ASTM D 2287-81(1988); or (iv) Type PVC-66554EOXO in accordance with ASTM D 2287-81(1988). (4) The jacketing material removed from or tested on the cable shall be capable of meeting the following performance requirements: Property Jacket performance Tensile Strength-Unaged Minimum, MPa (psi) 13.8 (2000) Ultimate Elongation-Unaged Minimum, Percent (%) 200 Tensile Strength-Aged Minimum, % of original value 80 Ultimate Elongation-Aged Minimum, % of original value 50 Impact Failures, Maximum 2/10 (5) Testing procedures. (i) Tensile strength and ultimate elongation-unaged. Note: Quality assurance testing at a jaw separation speed of 500 mm/min (20 in./min) is permissible. Failures at this rate shall be retested at the 50 mm/min (2 in./min) rate to determine specification compliance. (ii) Tensile strength and ultimate elongation-aged. (iii) Impact. (6) Jacket thickness. No. of pairs Nominal jacket thickness mm (in.) 25 or less 1.4 (0.055) 50 1.5 (0.060) 100 1.7 (0.065) 200 1.9 (0.075) 300 2.2 (0.085) 400 2.4 (0.095) 600 2.9 (0.115) 800 and over 3.3 (0.130) (i) End sample method. Minimum Average Thickness—90% of nominal thickness Minimum Thickness—70% of nominal thickness (ii) Continuous uniformity thickness gauge method. Minimum Average Thickness—90% of nominal thickness Minimum (Min.) Thickness—70 % of nominal thickness Maximum (Max.) Eccentricity—55% Eccentricity = Max. Thickness—Min. Thickness (Average Thickness) × 100 (B) Maximum and minimum thickness values. (7) The color of the jacket shall be either black or dark grey in conformance with the Munsell Color System specified in ASTM D 1535-89. (8) There shall be no water or other contaminants in the finished cable which would have a detrimental effect on its performance or its useful life. (h) Electrical requirements Mutual capacitance and conductance. Number of cable pairs Mutual capacitance Nanofarad/kilometer (Nanofarad/mile) 12 52±4 (83±7) Over 12 52±2 (83±4) (ii) The root mean square (rms) deviation of the mutual capacitance of all pairs from the average mutual capacitance of that reel shall not exceed 3.0 % when calculated in accordance with ASTM D 4566-90. (iii) The mutual conductance (corrected for length and gauge) of any pair shall not exceed 3.7 micromhos/kilometer (micromhos/km) (6.0 micromhos/mile) when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4566-90 at a frequency of 1.0±0.1 kHz and a temperature of 23±3 °C. (2) Pair-to-pair capacitance unbalance. (3) Pair-to-ground capacitance unbalance. (ii) When measuring pair-to-ground capacitance unbalance all pairs except the pair under test are grounded to the shield except when measuring cable containing super-units in which case all other pairs in the same super-unit shall be grounded to the shield. (iii) Pair-to-ground capacitance unbalance may vary directly with the length of the cable. (4) Crosstalk loss. (ii) The FEXT crosstalk loss between any pair combination of a cable shall not be less than 58 dB/km (63 dB/1000 ft) at a frequency of 150 kHz. If the loss K o o o x x x (iii) The near-end crosstalk loss (NEXT) as measured within and between units of a completed cable in accordance with ASTM D 4566-90 at a frequency of 772 kHz shall not be less than the following mean minus sigma (M-S) crosstalk requirement for any unit within the cable: Unit size M-S decibel (dB) Within Unit: 12 and 13 pairs 56 18 and 25 pairs 60 Between Unit: Adjacent 13 pairs 65 Adjacent 25 pairs 66 Nonadjacent (all) 81 Where M-S is the Mean near-end coupling loss based on the combined total of all pair combinations, less one Standard Deviation, Sigma, of the mean value. (5) Insulation resistance. (6) High voltage test. (A) 3.6 kilovolts for 22-gauge conductors; or (B) 3.0 kilovolts for 24-gauge conductors. (ii) In each length of completed cable, the dielectric strength between the shield and all conductors in the core shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 4566-90 and shall withstand, for 3 seconds, a dc potential whose value is not less than 10 kilovolts. (7) Conductor resistance. AWG Maximum resistance ohms/kilometer (ohms/1000 ft) 22 60.7 (18.5) 24 95.1 (29.0) (8) Resistance unbalance. AWG Resistance Maximum for Average percent Individual pair percent 22 1.5 4.0 24 1.5 5.0 (ii) The resistance unbalance between tip and ring conductors shall be random with respect to the direction of unbalance. That is, the resistance of the tip conductors shall not be consistently higher with respect to the ring conductors and vice versa. (9) Electrical variations. (ii) The maximum number of pairs in a cable which may vary as specified in paragraph (h)(9)(iii) of this section from the electrical parameters given in this section are listed in this paragraph. These pairs may be excluded from the arithmetic calculation: Nominal pair count Maximum No. of pairs with allowable electrical variation 12-100 1 101-300 2 301-400 3 401-600 4 601 and above 6 (iii) Parameter variations Capacitance unbalance-to-ground. (B) Resistance unbalance. (C) Far end crosstalk. Note: RUS recognizes that in large pair count cables (600 pair and above) a cross, short, or open circuit condition occasionally may develop in a pair which does not affect the performance of the other cable pairs. In these circumstances rejection of the entire cable may be economically unsound or repairs may be impractical. In such circumstances the manufacturer may desire to negotiate with the customer for acceptance of the cable. No more than 0.5 percent of the pairs may be involved. (i) Mechanical requirements Cable cold bend test. Cable outside diameter Mandrel diameter <40 mm (1.5 in.) 15x ≥40 mm (1.5 in.) 20x (2) Cable flame test. (3) Cable listing. (j) Sheath slitting cord (optional). (2) When a sheath slitting cord is used it shall be nonhygroscopic and nonwicking, continuous throughout a length of cable, and of sufficient strength to open the sheath without breaking the cord. (3) Sheath slitting cords shall be capable of consistently slitting the jacket and/or shield for a continuous length of 0.6 m (2 ft) when tested in accordance with the procedure specified in appendix B of this section. (k) Identification marker and length marker. (2) The number of conductor pairs and their gauge size shall be marked on the jacket. (3) The marking shall be printed on the jacket at regular intervals of not more than 1.5 m (5 ft). (4) An alternative method of marking may be used if accepted by RUS prior to its use. (5) The completed cable shall have sequentially numbered length markers in FEET OR METERS at regular intervals of not more than 1.5 m (5 ft) along the outside of the jacket. (6) The method of length marking shall be such that for any single length of cable, continuous sequential numbering shall be employed. (7) The numbers shall be dimensioned and spaced to produce good legibility and shall be approximately 3 mm (0.125 in.) in height. An occasional illegible marking is permissible if there is a legible marking located not more than 1.5 m (5 ft) from it. (8) The method of marking shall be by means of suitable surface markings producing a clear, distinguishable, contrasting marking acceptable to RUS. Where direct or transverse printing is employed, the characters should be indented to produce greater durability of marking. Any other method of length marking shall be acceptable to RUS as producing a marker suitable for the field. Size, shape and spacing of numbers, durability, and overall legibility of the marker shall be considered in acceptance of the method. (9) The accuracy of the length marking shall be such that the actual length of any cable section is never less than the length indicated by the marking and never more than one percent greater than the length indicated by the marking. (10) The color of the initial marking for a black colored jacket shall be either white or silver. The color of the initial marking for a dark grey colored jacket shall be either red or black. If the initial marking of the black colored jacket fails to meet the requirements of the preceding paragraphs, it will be permissible to either remove the defective marking and re-mark with the white or silver color or leave the defective marking on the cable and re-mark with yellow. If the initial marking of the dark grey colored jacket fails to meet the requirements of the preceding paragraphs, it will be permissible to either remove the defective marking and re-mark with the red or black color or leave the defective marking on the cable and re-mark with yellow. No further re-marking is permitted. Any re-marking shall be on a different portion of the cable circumference than any existing marking when possible and have a numbering sequence differing from any other existing marking by at least 5,000. (11) Any reel of cable which contains more than one set of sequential markings shall be labeled to indicate the color and sequence of marking to be used. The labeling shall be applied to the reel and also to the cable. (l) Preconnectorized cable (2) The splicing modules shall meet the requirements of RUS Bulletin 345-54, PE-52, RUS Specification for Telephone Cable Splicing Connectors (Incorporated by Reference at § 1755.97), and be accepted by RUS prior to their use. (m) Acceptance testing and extent of testing. (2) For initial acceptance, the manufacturer shall submit: (i) An original signature certification that the product fully complies with each section of the specification; (ii) Qualification Test Data, per appendix A of this section; (iii) To periodic plant inspections; (iv) A certification that the product does or does not comply with the domestic origin manufacturing provisions of the “Buy American” requirements of the Rural Electrification Act of 1938 (7 U.S.C. 901 et seq. (v) Written user testimonials concerning performance of the product; and (vi) Other nonproprietary data deemed necessary by the Chief, Outside Plant Branch (Telephone). (3) For requalification acceptance, the manufacturer shall submit an original signature certification that the product fully complies with each section of the specification, excluding the Qualification Section, and a certification that the product does or does not comply with the domestic origin manufacturing provisions of the “Buy American” requirements of the Rural Electrification Act of 1938 (7 U.S.C. 901 et seq. (4) Initial and requalification acceptance requests should be addressed to: Chairman, Technical Standards Committee “A” (Telephone), Telecommunications Standards Division, Rural Utilities Service, Washington, DC 20250-1500. (5) Tests on 100 percent of completed cable. (ii) Dielectric strength between all conductors and the shield shall be tested to determine freedom from grounds in accordance with paragraph (h)(6)(ii) of this section. (iii) Each conductor in the completed cable shall be tested for continuity using the procedures of ASTM D 4566-90. (iv) Dielectric strength between conductors shall be tested to ensure freedom from shorts and crosses in accordance with paragraph (h)(6)(i) of this section. (v) Each conductor in the completed preconnectorized cable shall be tested for continuity. (vi) Each length of completed preconnectorized cable shall be tested for split pairs. (vii) The average mutual capacitance shall be measured on all cables. If the average mutual capacitance for the first 100 pairs tested from randomly selected groups is between 50 and 53 nF/km (80 to 85 nF/mile), the remainder of the pairs need not to be tested on the 100 percent basis. (See paragraph (h)(1) of this section). (6) Capability tests. (i) Performance requirements for conductor insulation and jacket material; (ii) Bonding properties of coated or laminated shielding materials; (iii) Sequential marking and lettering; (iv) Capacitance unbalance and crosstalk; (v) Insulation resistance; (vi) Conductor resistance and resistance unbalance; (vii) Cable cold bend and cable flame tests; and (viii) Mutual conductance. (n) Summary of records of electrical and physical tests. (2) Measurements and computed values shall be rounded off to the number of places of figures specified for the requirement according to ASTM E 29-90. (o) Manufacturing irregularities. (2) No repairs or defects in the jacket are allowed. (p) Preparation for shipment. (2) A waterproof corrugated board or other means of protection acceptable to RUS shall be applied to the reel and shall be suitably secured in place to prevent damage to the cable during storage and shipment. (3) The outer end of the cable shall be securely fastened to the reel head so as to prevent the cable from becoming loose in transit. The inner end of the cable shall be securely fastened in such a way as to make it readily available if required for electrical testing. Spikes, staples, or other fastening devices which penetrate the cable jacket shall not be used. The method of fastening the cable ends shall be accepted by RUS prior to it being used. (4) Each length of cable shall be wound on a separate reel unless otherwise specified or agreed to by the purchaser. (5) The arbor hole shall admit a spindle 63 mm (2.5 in.) in diameter without binding. Steel arbor hole liners may be used but shall be acceptable to RUS prior to their use. (6) Each reel shall be plainly marked to indicate the direction in which it should be rolled to prevent loosening of the cable on the reel. (7) Each reel shall be stenciled or labeled on either one or both sides with the name of the manufacturer, year of manufacture, actual shipping length, an inner and outer end sequential length marking, description of the cable, reel number and the RUS cable designation: Cable Designation CT Cable Construction Pair Count Conductor Gauge A = Coated Aluminum Shield P = Preconnectorized Cable Example: CTAP 100-22 Terminating Cable, Coated Aluminum Shield, Preconnectorized, 100 pairs, 22 AWG. (8) When preconnectorized cable is shipped, the splicing modules shall be protected to prevent damage during shipment and handling. The protection method shall be acceptable to RUS prior to its use. (The information collection and recordkeeping requirements of this section have been approved by the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) under control number 0572-0059) Appendix A to § 1755.870—Qualification Test Methods (I) The test procedures described in this appendix are for qualification of initial designs and major modifications of accepted designs. Included in paragraph (V) of this appendix are suggested formats that may be used in submitting test results to RUS. (II) Sample Selection and Preparation. (a) Length A shall be 12 ±0.2 meters (40 ±0.5 feet) long. Prepare the test sample by removing the jacket, shield, and core wrap for a sufficient distance on both ends to allow the insulated conductors to be flared out. Remove sufficient conductor insulation so that appropriate electrical test connections can be made at both ends. Coil the sample with a diameter of 15 to 20 times its sheath diameter. Two lengths are required. (b) Length B shall be 300 millimeters (1 foot) long. Three lengths are required. (c) Length C shall be 3 meters (10 feet) long and shall be maintained at 23 ±3 °C for the duration of the test. Two lengths are required. (2) Data Reference Temperature. (III) Environmental Tests Heat Aging Test Test Samples. (b) Sequence of Tests. (c) Initial Measurements. (ii) Record on suggested formats in paragraph (V) of this appendix or on other easily readable formats. (d) Heat Conditioning. (ii) At the end of this period. Measure and calculate the parameters given in paragraph (III)(1)(c) of this appendix. Record on suggested formats in paragraph (V) of this appendix or on other easily readable formats. (e) Overall Electrical Deviation. (ii) The stability of the electrical parameters after completion of this test shall be within the following prescribed limits: (A) Capacitance. (B) The change in average mutual capacitance shall be less than 10 percent over the frequency range of 1 to 150 kilohertz; and (C) Conductance. (2) Insulation Compression Test Test Sample B. (b) Sample Testing. (3) Temperature Cycling. (b) Immediately after completing the measurements, subject the test samples to 10 cycles of temperature between −40 °C and + 60 °C. The test samples shall be held at each temperature extreme for a minimum of 1.5 hours during each cycle of temperature. The air within the temperature cycling chamber shall be circulated throughout the duration of the cycling. (c) Repeat paragraphs (III)(1)(d)(ii) through (III)(2)(b) of this appendix. (IV) Control Sample Test Samples. (2) Repeat paragraphs (III)(2) through (III)(2)(b) of this appendix. (3) Surge Test. (b) The samples shall be capable of withstanding, without damage, a single surge voltage of 20 kilovolts peak between conductors, and 35 kilovolts peak between conductors and the shield as hereinafter described. The surge voltage shall be developed from a capacitor discharge through a forming resistor connected in parallel with the dielectric of the test sample. The surge generator constants shall be such as to produce a surge of 1.5 × 40 microseconds wave shape. (c) The shape of the generated wave shall be determined at a reduced voltage by connecting an oscilloscope across the forming resistor with the cable sample connected in parallel with the forming resistor. The capacitor bank is charged to the test voltage and then discharged through the forming resistor and test sample. The test sample shall be considered to have passed the test if there is no distinct change in the wave shape obtained with the initial reduced voltage compared to that obtained after the application of the test voltage. (V) The following suggested formats may be used in submitting the test results to RUS: Environmental Conditioning __________________ Frequency 1 Kilohertz Pair No. Capacitance nF/km (nF/mile) Conductance micromhos/km (micromhos/mile) Initial Final Initial Final 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 Average x Overall Percent Difference in Average x Environmental Conditioning ____________________ Frequency 150 Kilohertz Pair No. Capacitance nF/km (nF/mile) Conductance micromhos/km (micromhos/mile) Initial Final Initial Final 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 Average x Overall Percent Difference in Average x Environmental Conditioning ____________________ Frequency 772 Kilohertz Pair No. Capacitance nF/km (nF/mile) Conductance micromhos/km (micromhos/mile) Initial Final Initial Final 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 Average x Overall Percent Difference in Average x Failures Insulation Compression: Control Heat Age Temperature Cycling Surge Test (kilovolts): Conductor-to-Conductor Shield-to-Conductors Appendix B to § 1755.870—Sheath Slitting Cord Qualification (I) This test procedure described in this appendix is for qualification of initial and subsequent changes in sheath slitting cords. (II) Sample selection. (III) Test procedure. (2) The prepared test specimens shall be maintained at a temperature of 23 ±1 °C for at least 4 hours immediately prior to and during the test. (3) Wrap the sheath slitting cord around the plier jaws to ensure a good grip. (4) Grasp and hold the cable in a convenient position while gently and firmly pulling the sheath slitting cord longitudinally in the direction away from the cable end. The angle of pull may vary to any convenient and functional degree. A small starting notch is permissible. (5) The sheath slitting cord is considered acceptable if the cord can slit the jacket and/or shield for a continuous length of 0.6 m (2 ft) without breaking the cord. [59 FR 30507, June 14, 1994; 59 FR 34899, July 7, 1994, as amended at 60 FR 1711, Jan. 5, 1995; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] §§ 1755.871-1755.889 [Reserved] § 1755.890 RUS specification for filled telephone cables with expanded insulation. (a) Scope. (i) The conductors are solid copper, individually insulated with an extruded cellular insulating compound which may be either totally expanded or expanded with a solid skin coating. (ii) The insulated conductors are twisted into pairs which are then stranded or oscillated to form a cylindrical core. (iii) For high frequency applications, the cable core may be separated into compartments with screening shields. (iv) A moisture resistant filling compound is applied to the stranded conductors completely covering the insulated conductors and filling the interstices between pairs and units. (v) The cable structure is completed by the application of suitable core wrapping material, a flooding compound, a shield or a shield/armor, and an overall plastic jacket. (2) The number of pairs and gauge size of conductors which are used within the RUS program are provided in the following table: AWG 19 22 24 26 Pairs 6 6 6 12 12 12 18 18 18 25 25 25 25 50 50 50 75 75 75 100 100 100 150 150 150 200 200 200 300 300 300 400 400 400 600 600 600 900 900 900 1000 1000 1000 1200 1200 1500 1500 1800 1800 2100 2400 2700 Note: (3) Screened cable, when specified, must meet all requirements of this section. The pair sizes of screened cables used within the RUS program are referenced in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section. (4) All cables sold to RUS borrowers for projects involving RUS loan funds under this section must be accepted by RUS Technical Standards Committee “A” (Telephone). For cables manufactured to the specification of this section, all design changes to an accepted design must be submitted for acceptance. RUS will be the sole authority on what constitutes a design change. (5) Materials, manufacturing techniques, or cable designs not specifically addressed by this section may be allowed if accepted by RUS. Justification for acceptance of modified materials, manufacturing techniques, or cable designs must be provided to substantiate product utility and long-term stability and endurance. (6) The American National Standard Institute/Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ANSI/ICEA) S-84-608-1988, Standard For Telecommunications Cable, Filled, Polyolefin Insulated, Copper Conductor Technical Requirements referenced throughout this section is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988 are available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (7) American Society for Testing and Materials specifications (ASTM) A 505-87, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements For; ASTM B 193-87, Standard Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor Materials; ASTM B 224-80, Standard Classification of Coppers; ASTM B 694-86, Standard Specification for Copper, Copper Alloy, and Copper-Clad Stainless Steel Sheet and Strip for Electrical Cable Shielding; ASTM D 4565-90a, Standard Test Methods for Physical and Environmental Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable; and ASTM D 4566-90, Standard Test Methods for Electrical Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable referenced in this section are incorporated by reference by RUS. These incorporations by references were approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the ASTM standards are available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (b) Conductors and conductor insulation. (2) Each conductor must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 2.1. (3) Factory joints made in conductors during the manufacturing process must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 2.2. (4) The raw materials used for conductor insulation must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 3.1 through 3.1.3. (5) The finished conductor insulation must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 3.2.2, 3.2.3, and 3.3. (6) Insulated conductor must not have an overall diameter greater than 2 millimeters (mm) (0.081 inch (in.)). (7) A permissible overall performance level of faults in conductor insulation must average not greater than one fault per 12,000 conductor meters (40,000 conductor feet) for each gauge of conductor. (i) All insulated conductors must be continuously tested for insulation faults during the twinning operation with a method of testing acceptable to RUS. The length count and number of faults must be recorded. The information must be retained for a period of 6 months and be available for review by RUS when requested. (ii) The voltages for determining compliance with the requirements of this section are as follows: AWG Direct Current Voltages (kilovolts) 19 4.5 22 3.6 24 3.0 26 2.4 (8) Repairs to the conductor insulation during manufacture are permissible. The method of repair must be accepted by RUS prior to its use. The repaired insulation must be capable of meeting the relevant electrical requirements of this section. (9) All repaired sections of insulation must be retested in the same manner as originally tested for compliance with paragraph (b)(7) of this section. (10) The colored insulating material removed from or tested on the conductor, from a finished cable, must meet the performance requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 3.4.1 through 3.4.6. (c) Identification of pairs and twisting of pairs. (i) The tip and ring conductor of each pair; and (ii) Each pair in the completed cable. (2) The colors to be used in the pairs in the 25 pair group, together with the pair numbers must be in accordance with the table specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 3.5. (3) Positive identification of the tip and ring conductors of each pair by marking each conductor of a pair with the color of its mate is permissible. The method of marking must be accepted by RUS prior to its use. (4) Other methods of providing positive identification of the tip and ring conductors of each pair may be employed if accepted by RUS prior to its use. (5) The insulated conductors must be twisted into pairs. (6) In order to provide sufficiently high crosstalk isolation, the pair twists must be designed to enable the cable to meet the capacitance unbalance and crosstalk loss requirements of paragraphs (k)(5), (k)(6), and (k)(8) this section. (7) The average length of pair twists in any pair in the finished cable, when measured on any 3 meter (10 foot) length, must not exceed the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 3.5. (d) Forming of the cable core. (2) When desired for lay-up reasons, the basic group may be divided into two or more subgroups called units. (3) Each group, or unit in a particular group, must be enclosed in bindings of the colors indicated for its particular pair count. The pair count, indicated by the colors of insulation, must be consecutive as indicated in paragraph (d)(6) of this section through units in a group. (4) The filling compound must be applied to the cable core in such a way as to provide as near a completely filled core as is commercially practical. (5) Threads and tapes used as binders must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 4.2 and 4.2.1. (6) The colors of the bindings and their significance with respect to pair count must be as follows: Group No. Color of Bindings Group Pair Count 1 White-Blue 1-25 2 White-Orange 26-50 3 White-Green 51-75 4 White-Brown 76-100 5 White-Slate 101-125 6 Red-Blue 126-150 7 Red-Orange 151-175 8 Red-Green 176-200 9 Red-Brown 201-225 10 Red-Slate 226-250 11 Black-Blue 251-275 12 Black-Orange 276-300 13 Black-Green 301-325 14 Black-Brown 326-350 15 Black-Slate 351-375 16 Yellow-Blue 376-400 17 Yellow-Orange 401-425 18 Yellow-Green 426-450 19 Yellow-Brown 451-475 20 Yellow-Slate 476-500 21 Violet-Blue 501-525 22 Violet-Orange 526-550 23 Violet-Green 551-575 24 Violet-Brown 576-600 (7) The use of the white unit binder in cables of 100 pairs or less is optional. (8) When desired for manufacturing reasons, two or more 25 pair groups may be bound together with nonhygroscopic and nonwicking threads or tapes into a super-unit. Threads or tapes must meet the requirements specified in paragraph (d)(5) of this section. The group binders and the super-unit binders must be color coded such that the combination of the two binders must positively identify each 25 pair group from every other 25 pair group in the cable. Super-unit binders must be of the color shown in the following table: Super-Unit Binder Colors Pair Numbers Binder Color 1-600 White 601-1200 Red 1201-1800 Black 1801-2400 Yellow 2401-3000 Violet 3001-3600 Blue 3601-4200 Orange 4201-4800 Green 4801-5400 Brown 5401-6000 Slate (9) Color binders must not be missing for more than 90 meters (300 feet) from any 25 pair group or from any subgroup used as part of a super-unit. At any cable cross-section, no adjacent 25 pair groups and no more than one subgroup of any super-unit may have missing binders. In no case must the total number of missing binders exceed three. Missing super-unit binders must not be permitted for any distance. (10) Any reel of cable which contains missing binders must be labeled indicating the colors and location of the binders involved. The labeling must be applied to the reel and also to the cable. (e) Screened cable. (2) At the option of the user or manufacturer, identified service pairs providing for voice order and fault location may be placed in screened cables. (i) The number of service pairs provided must be one per twenty-five operating pairs plus two for a cable size up to and including 400 pairs, subject to a minimum of four service pairs. The pair counts for screened cables are as follows: Screened Cable Pair Counts Carrier Pair Count Service Pairs Total Pair Count 24 4 28 50 4 54 100 6 106 150 8 158 200 10 210 300 14 314 400 18 418 (ii) The service pairs must be equally divided among the compartments. The color sequence must be repeated in each compartment. (iii) The electrical and physical characteristics of each service pair must meet all the requirements set forth in this section. (iv) The colors used for the service pairs must be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(5) of this section. The color code used for the service pairs together with the service pair number are shown in the following table: Color Code For Service Pairs Service Pair No. Color Tip Ring 1 White Red 2 “ Black 3 “ Yellow 4 “ Violet 5 Red Black 6 “ Yellow 7 “ Violet 8 Black Yellow 9 “ Violet (3) The screen tape must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 5.1 through 5.4. (4) The screen tape must be tested for dielectric strength by completely removing the protective coating from one end to be used for grounding purposes. (i) Using an electrode, over a 30 centimeter (1 foot) length, apply a direct current (dc) voltage at the rate of rise of 500 volts/second until failure. (ii) No breakdown should occur below 8 kilovolts. (f) Filling compound. (2) The filling compound must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 4.4 through 4.4.4. (3) The individual cable manufacturer must satisfy RUS that the filling compound selected for use is suitable for its intended application. The filling compound must be applied to the cable in such a manner that the cable components will not be degraded. (g) Core wrap. (2) If required for manufacturing reasons, white or colored binders of nonhygroscopic and nonwicking material may be applied over the core and/or wrap. When used, binders must meet the requirements specified in paragraph (d)(5) of this section. (3) Sufficient filling compound must have been applied to the core wrap so that voids or air spaces existing between the core and the inner side of the core wrap are minimized. (h) Flooding compound. (2) The flooding compound must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 4.5 and the jacket slip test requirements of appendix A, paragraph (III)(5) of this section. (3) The individual cable manufacturer must satisfy RUS that the flooding compound selected for use is acceptable for the application. (i) Shield and optional armor. (2) For unarmored cable the shield overlap must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.2. Core diameter is defined as the diameter under the core wrap and binding. (3) For cables containing the coated aluminum shield/coated steel armor (CACSP) sheath design, the coated aluminum shield must be applied in accordance with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.2, Dual Tape Shielding System. (4) General requirements for application of the shielding material are as follows: (i) Successive lengths of shielding tapes may be joined during the manufacturing process by means of cold weld, electric weld, soldering with a nonacid flux or other acceptable means. (ii) Shield splices must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.3. (iii) The corrugations and the application process of the coated aluminum and copper bearing shields must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.1. (iv) The shielding material must be applied in such a manner as to enable the cable to pass the cold bend test specified in paragraph (l)(3) of this section. (5) The following is a list of acceptable materials for use as cable shielding. Other types of shielding materials may also be used provided they are accepted by RUS prior to their use. Standard Cable Gopher Resistant Cable 8-mil Coated Aluminum 1 10-mil Copper 5-mil Copper 6-mil Copper-Clad 1 1 1 (i) The 8-mil aluminum tape must be plastic coated on both sides and must comply with the requirements of ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.2.2. (ii) The 5-mil copper tape must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.2.3. (iii) The 10-mil copper tape must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.2.4. (iv) The 6-mil copper clad stainless steel tape must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.2.5. (v) The 5-mil copper clad stainless steel tape must be in the fully annealed condition and must conform to the requirements of American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B 694-86, with a cladding ratio of 16/68/16. (A) The electrical conductivity of the clad tape must be a minimum of 28 percent of the International Annealed Copper Standard (IACS) when measured per ASTM B 193-87. (B) The tape must be nominally 0.13 millimeter (0.005 inch) thick with a minimum thickness of 0.11 millimeter (0.0045 inch). (vi) The 5-mil copper clad alloy steel tape must be in the fully annealed condition and the copper component must conform to the requirements of ASTM B 224-80 and the alloy steel component must conform to the requirements of ASTM A 505-87, with a cladding ratio of 16/68/16. (A) The electrical conductivity of the copper clad alloy steel tape must comply with the requirement specified in (5)(v)(A) of this section. (B) The thickness of the copper clad alloy steel tape must comply with the requirements specified in (5)(v)(B) of this section. (vii) The 6-mil and 7-mil 194 copper alloy tapes must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.2.6. (6) The corrugation extensibility of the coated aluminum shield must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.4. (7) When the jacket is bonded to the plastic coated aluminum shield, the bond between the jacket and shield must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 7.2.6. (8) A single plastic coated steel corrugated armor must be applied longitudinally directly over the coated aluminum shield listed in paragraph (i)(5) of this section with an overlap complying with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.2, Outer Steel Tape. (9) Successive lengths of steel armoring tapes may be joined during the manufacturing process by means of cold weld, electric weld, soldering with a nonacid flux or other acceptable means. Armor splices must comply with the breaking strength and resistance requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.3. (10) The corrugations and the application process of the coated steel armor must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.3.1. (i) The corrugations of the armor tape must coincide with the corrugations of the coated aluminum shield. (ii) Overlapped portions of the armor tape must be in register (corrugations must coincide at overlap) and in contact at the outer edge. (11) The armoring material must be so applied to enable the cable to pass the cold bend test specified in paragraph (l)(3) of this section. (12) The 6-mil steel tape must be electrolytic chrome coated steel (ECCS) plastic coated on both sides and must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 6.2.8. (13) When the jacket is bonded to the plastic coated steel armor, the bond between the jacket and armor must comply with the requirement specified in ANSI/ICEA-S-84-608-1988, paragraph 7.2.6. (j) Cable jacket. (2) The raw materials used for the cable jacket must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 7.2.1. (3) Jacketing material removed from or tested on the cable must meet the performance requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 7.2.3 and 7.2.4. (4) The thickness of the jacket must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 7.2.2. (k) Electrical requirements Conductor resistance. (2) Resistance unbalance. (ii) The resistance unbalance between tip and ring conductors shall be random with respect to the direction of unbalance. That is, the resistance of the tip conductors shall not be consistently higher with respect to the ring conductors and vice versa. (3) Mutual capacitance. (4) Capacitance difference. (ii) When measuring screened cable, the inner and outer pairs must be selected from both sides of the screen. (5) Pair-to-pair capacitance unbalance Pair-to-pair. (ii) Screened cable. (A) Between pairs adjacent in a layer in an individual compartment; (B) Between pairs in centers of 4 pairs or less in an individual compartment; and (C) Between pairs in adjacent layers in an individual compartment when the number of pairs in the inner (smaller) layer is 6 or less. The center is counted as a layer. (iii) In cables with 25 pairs or less, the root-mean-square (rms) value is to include all the pair-to-pair unbalances measured for each compartment separately. (iv) In cables containing more than 25 pairs, the rms value must include the pair-to-pair unbalances in the separate compartments. (6) Pair-to-ground capacitance unbalance Pair-to-ground. (ii) When measuring pair-to-ground capacitance unbalance all pairs except the pair under test are grounded to the shield and/or shield/armor except when measuring cables containing super units in which case all other pairs in the same super unit must be grounded to the shield. (iii) The screen tape must be left floating during the test. (iv) Pair-to-ground capacitance unbalance may vary directly with the length of the cable. (7) Attenuation. (ii) For T1C type cables over 12 pairs, the maximum average attenuation of all pairs on any reel must not exceed the values listed below when measured at a frequency of 1576 kilohertz at or corrected to a temperature of 20 ±1 °C. The test must be conducted in accordance with ASTM D 4566-90. AWG Maximum Average Attenuation decibel/kilometer (dB/km) (decibel/mile) 19 14.9 (24.0) 22 21.6 (34.8) 24 27.2 (43.8) (8) Crosstalk loss. (ii) The near-end power sum crosstalk loss (NEXT) as measured on completed cable must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 8.8, NEXT Table. (iii) Screened cable. (B) For T1C screened cable the NEXT as measured on the completed cable must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraphs 8.9 and 8.9.2. (9) Insulation resistance. (10) High voltage test. (ii) In each length of completed cable, the dielectric between the shield and/or armor and conductors in the core must comply with the requirements specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 8.13, Single Jacketed, Foam and/or Foam-Skin Column. In screened cable the screen tape must be left floating. (iii) Screened cable. (B) In this test, the cable shield and/or armor must be left floating. (11) Electrical variations. (ii) The maximum number of pairs in a cable which may vary as specified in paragraph (k)(11)(iii) of this section from the electrical parameters given in this section are listed below. These pairs may be excluded from the arithmetic calculation. Nominal Pair Count Maximum Number of Pairs With Allowable Electrical Variation 6-100 1 101-300 2 301-400 3 401-600 4 601 and above 6 (iii) Parameter variations. Capacitance unbalance-to-ground. (B) Resistance unbalance. (C) Conductor resistance, maximum. AWG ohms/kilometer (ohms/1000 feet) 19 29.9 (9.1) 22 60.0 (18.3) 24 94.5 (28.8) 26 151.6 (46.2) Note: (l) Mechanical requirements Compound flow test. (2) Water penetration test. (3) Cable cold bend test. (4) Cable impact test. (5) Jacket notch test (CACSP sheath only). (6) Cable torsion test (CACSP sheath only). (m) Sheath slitting cord (optional). (2) When a sheath slitting cord is used it must be nonhygroscopic and nonwicking, continuous throughout a length of cable and of sufficient strength to open the sheath without breaking the cord. (n) Identification marker and length marker. (2) The markings must be printed on the jacket at regular intervals of not more than 0.6 meter (2 feet). (3) The completed cable must have sequentially numbered length markers in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 10.1.5. The color of the ink used for the initial outer jacket marking must be either white or silver. (o) Preconnectorized cable (optional). (2) The splicing modules must meet the requirements of RUS Bulletin 345-54, PE-52, RUS Specification for Telephone Cable Splicing Connectors (Incorporated by Reference at § 1755.97), and be accepted by RUS prior to their use. (p) Acceptance testing and extent of testing. (2) For initial acceptance, the manufacturer must submit: (i) An original signature certification that the product fully complies with each section of the specification; (ii) Qualification Test Data, per appendix A of this section; (iii) To periodic plant inspections; (iv) A certification that the product does or does not comply with the domestic origin manufacturing provisions of the “Buy American” requirements of the Rural Electrification Act of 1938 (7 U.S.C. 901 et seq. (v) Written user testimonials concerning field performance of the product; and (vi) Other nonproprietary data deemed necessary by the Chief, Outside Plant Branch (Telephone). (3) For requalification acceptance, the manufacturer must submit an original signature certification that the product fully complies with each section of the specification, excluding the Qualification Section, and a certification that the product does or does not comply with the domestic origin manufacturing provisions of the “Buy American” requirements of the Rural Electrification Act of 1938 (7 U.S.C. 901 et seq. (4) Initial and requalification acceptance requests should be addressed to: Chairman, Technical Standards Committee “A” (Telephone), Telecommunications Standard Division, Rural Utilities Service, Washington, DC 20250-1500. (5) Tests on 100 percent of completed cable. (ii) The screen tape of each length of screened cable must be tested for continuity in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 8.16. (iii) Dielectric strength between conductors and shield and/or armor must be tested to determine freedom from grounds in accordance with paragraph (k)(10)(ii) of this section. (iv) Dielectric strength between conductors and screen tape must be tested to determine freedom from grounds in accordance with paragraph (k)(10)(iii) of this section. (v) Each conductor in the completed cable must be tested for continuity in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 8.16. (vi) Dielectric strength between conductors, in each length of completed cable, must be tested to insure freedom from shorts and crosses in each length of completed cable in accordance with paragraph (k)(10)(i) of this section. (vii) Each conductor in the completed preconnectorized cable must be tested for continuity. (viii) Each length of completed preconnectorized cable must be tested for split pairs. (ix) The average mutual capacitance must be measured on all cables. If the average mutual capacitance for the first 100 pairs tested from randomly selected groups is between 50 and 53 nanofarads/kilometer (nF/km) (80 and 85 nanofarad/mile), the remainder of the pairs need not be tested on the 100 percent basis (See paragraph (k)(3) of this section). (6) Capability tests. (i) Performance requirements for conductor insulation, jacketing material, and filling and flooding compounds; (ii) Bonding properties of coated or laminated shielding and armoring materials and performance requirements for screen tape; (iii) Sequential marking and lettering; (iv) Capacitance difference, capacitance unbalance, crosstalk, and attenuation; (v) Insulation resistance, conductor resistance, and resistance unbalance; (vi) Cable cold bend and cable impact tests; (vii) Water penetration and compound flow tests; and (viii) Jacket notch and cable torsion tests. (q) Summary of records of electrical and physical tests. (2) Measurements and computed values must be rounded off to the number of places or figures specified for the requirement according to ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 1.3. (r) Manufacturing irregularities. (2) Minor defects in jackets (defects having a dimension of 3 millimeters (0.125 inch.) or less in any direction) may be repaired by means of heat fusing in accordance with good commercial practices utilizing sheath grade compounds. (s) Preparation for shipment. (2) The thermal wrap must comply with the requirements of ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 10.3. When a thermal reel wrap is supplied, the wrap must be applied to the reel and must be suitably secured in place to minimize thermal exposure to the cable during storage and shipment. The use of the thermal reel wrap as a means of reel protection will be at the option of the manufacturer unless specified by the end user. (3) The outer end of the cable must be securely fastened to the reel head so as to prevent the cable from becoming loose in transit. The inner end of the cable must be securely fastened in such a way as to make it readily available if required for electrical testing. Spikes, staples, or other fastening devices which penetrate the cable jacket must not be used. The method of fastening the cable ends must be acceptable to RUS and accepted prior to its use. (4) Each length of cable must be wound on a separate reel unless otherwise specified or agreed to by the purchaser. (5) The arbor hole must admit a spindle 63 millimeters (2.5 inches) in diameter without binding. Steel arbor hole liners may be used but must be accepted by RUS prior to their use. (6) Each reel must be plainly marked to indicate the direction in which it should be rolled to prevent loosening of the cable on the reel. (7) Each reel must be stenciled or labeled on either one or both sides with the information specified in ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 10.4 and the RUS cable designation: Cable Designation BFCE Cable Construction Pair Count Conductor Gauge E = Expanded Insulation A = Coated Aluminum Shield C = Copper Shield Y = Gopher Resistant Shield X = Armored, Separate Shield H = T1 Screened Cable H1C = T1C Screened Cable P = Preconnectorized Example: BFCEXH100-22 Buried Filled Cable, Expanded Insulation, Armored (w/separate shield), T1 Screened Cable, 100 pair, 22 AWG. (8) When cable manufactured to the requirements of this specification is shipped, both ends must be equipped with end caps acceptable to RUS. (9) When preconnectorized cables are shipped, the splicing modules must be protected to prevent damage during shipment and handling. The protection method must be acceptable to RUS and accepted prior to its use. (10) All cables ordered for use in underground duct applications must be equipped with a factory-installed pulling-eye on the outer end in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-1988, paragraph 10.5.2. (The information and recordkeeping requirements of this section have been approved by the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) under the control number 0572-0059) Appendix A to § 1755.890—Qualification Test Methods (I) The test procedures described in this appendix are for qualification of initial cable designs and major modifications of accepted designs. Included in (V) of this appendix are suggested formats that may to be used in submitting test results to RUS. (II) Sample selection and preparation. (a) Length A must be 10 ±0.2 meters (33 ±0.5 feet) long and must be maintained at 23 ±3 °C. One length is required. (b) Length B must be 12 ±0.2 meters (40 ±0.5 feet) long. Prepare the test sample by removing the jacket, shield or shield/armor, and core wrap for a sufficient distance on both ends to allow the insulated conductors to be flared out. Remove sufficient conductor insulation so that appropriate electrical test connections can be made at both ends. Coil the sample with a diameter of 15 to 20 times its sheath diameter. Three lengths are required. (c) Length C must be one meter (3 feet) long. Four lengths are required. (d) Length D must be 300 millimeters (1 foot) long. Four lengths are required. (e) Length E must be 600 millimeters (2 feet) long. Four lengths are required. (f) Length F must be 3 meters (10 feet) long and must be maintained at 23 ±3 °C for the duration of the test. Two lengths are required. (2) Data reference temperature. (III) Environmental tests Heat aging test Test samples. (b) Sequence of tests. (i) Water Immersion Test outlined in (III)(2) of this appendix; (ii) Water Penetration Test outlined in (III)(3) of this appendix; (iii) Insulation Compression Test outlined in (III)(4) of this appendix; and (iv) Jacket Slip Strength Test outlined in (III)(5) of this appendix. (c) Initial Measurements. (ii) The attenuation at 150 and 772 kilohertz may be calculated from open circuit admittance (Yoc) and short circuit impedance (Zsc) or may be obtained by direct measurement of attenuation. (iii) Record on suggested formats in (V) of this appendix or on other easily readable formats. (d) Heat conditioning. (ii) At the end of this period note any exudation of cable filler. Measure and calculate the parameters given in (III)(1)(c) of this appendix. Record on suggested formats in (V) of this appendix or other easily readable formats. (iii) Cut away and discard a one meter (3 foot) section from each end of length B. (e) Overall electrical deviation. (ii) The stability of the electrical parameters after completion of this test must be within the following prescribed limits: (A) Capacitance. (B) The change in average mutual capacitance must be less than 5 percent over frequency 1 to 150 kilohertz; and (C) Attenuation. (2) Water immersion electrical test Test sample selection. (b) Test sample preparation. (c) Capacitance testing. (i) Remeasure the mutual capacitance after the cables have been submerged for 24 hours and again after 30 days. (ii) Record each sample separately on suggested formats attached or on other easily readable formats. (d) Overall electrical deviation. (ii) The average mutual capacitance must be within 5 percent of its original value. (3) Water penetration testing. (b) Test per Option A or Option B—(i) Option A. (ii) Option B. (4) Insulation compression test Test sample D. (b) Sample testing. (5) Jacket slip strength test Sample selection. (b) Sample preparation. (c) Sample conditioning and testing. (6) Humidity exposure. (b) Immediately after completing the measurements, expose the test sample to 100 temperature cyclings. Relative humidity within the chamber must be maintained at 90 ±2 percent. One cycle consists of beginning at a stabilized chamber and test sample temperature of 52 ±1 °C, increasing the temperature to 57 ±1 °C, allowing the chamber and test samples to stabilize at this level, then dropping the temperature back to 52 ±1 °C. (c) Repeat steps (III)(1)(d)(ii) through (III)(5)(c) of this appendix. (7) Temperature cycling. (b) Immediately after completing the measurements, subject the test sample to the 10 cycles of temperature between a minimum of −40 °C and + 60 °C. The test sample must be held at each temperature extreme for a minimum of 1 1/2 (c) Repeat steps (III)(1)(d)(ii) through (III)(5)(c) of this appendix. (IV) Control sample Test samples. (2) Repeat steps (III)(2) through (III)(5)(c) of this appendix except use length A instead of length B. (3) Surge test. (b) The samples must be capable of withstanding without damage, a single surge voltage of 15 kilovolts peak between conductors, and a 25 kilovolts peak surge voltage between conductors and the shield or shield/armor as hereinafter described. The surge voltage must be developed from a capacitor discharged through a forming resistor connected in parallel with the dielectric of the test sample. The surge generator constants must be such as to produce a surge of 1.5 × 40 microsecond wave shape. (c) The shape of the generated wave must be determined at a reduced voltage by connecting an oscilloscope across the forming resistor with the cable sample connected in parallel with the forming resistor. The capacitor bank is charged to the test voltage and then discharged through the forming resistor and test sample. The test sample will be considered to have passed the test if there is no distinct change in the wave shape obtained with the initial reduced voltage compared to that obtained after the application of the test voltage. (V) The following suggested formats may be used in submitting the test results to RUS: Environmental Conditioning______________ Frequency kilohertz Pair Number Capacitance nF/km (nanofarad/mile) Initial Final 1 ____________ ____________ 3 ____________ ____________ 5 ____________ ____________ 7 ____________ ____________ 9 ____________ ____________ 11 ____________ ____________ 13 ____________ ____________ 15 ____________ ____________ 17 ____________ ____________ 19 ____________ ____________ 21 ____________ ____________ 23 ____________ ____________ 25 ____________ ____________ Average x ____________ ____________ Overall Percent Difference in Average x Environmental Conditioning______________ Frequency kilohertz Pair Number Capacitance Attenuation nF/km (nanofarad/mile) dB/km (decibel/mile) Initial Final Initial Final 1 ______ ______ ______ ______ 3 ______ ______ ______ ______ 5 ______ ______ ______ ______ 7 ______ ______ ______ ______ 9 ______ ______ ______ ______ 11 ______ ______ ______ ______ 13 ______ ______ ______ ______ 15 ______ ______ ______ ______ 17 ______ ______ ______ ______ 19 ______ ______ ______ ______ 21 ______ ______ ______ ______ 23 ______ ______ ______ ______ 25 ______ ______ ______ ______ Average x ______ ______ ______ ______ Overall Percent Difference in Average x Environmental Conditioning______________ Frequency kilohertz Pair Number Capacitance Attenuation nF/km (nanofarad/mile) dB/km (decibel/mile) Initial Final Initial Final 1 ______ ______ ______ ______ 3 ______ ______ ______ ______ 5 ______ ______ ______ ______ 7 ______ ______ ______ ______ 9 ______ ______ ______ ______ 11 ______ ______ ______ ______ 13 ______ ______ ______ ______ 15 ______ ______ ______ ______ 17 ______ ______ ______ ______ 19 ______ ______ ______ ______ 21 ______ ______ ______ ______ 23 ______ ______ ______ ______ 25 ______ ______ ______ ______ Average x ______ ______ ______ ______ Overall Percent Difference in Average x Environmental Conditioning______________ Water Immersion Test ( kilohertz) Pair Number Capacitance nF/km (nanofarad/mile) Initial 24 Hours Final 1 ______ ______ ______ 3 ______ ______ ______ 5 ______ ______ ______ 7 ______ ______ ______ 9 ______ ______ ______ 11 ______ ______ ______ 13 ______ ______ ______ 15 ______ ______ ______ 17 ______ ______ ______ 19 ______ ______ ______ 21 ______ ______ ______ 23 ______ ______ ______ 25 ______ ______ ______ Average x ______ ______ ______ Overall Percent Difference in Average x Water Penetration Test Option A Option B End Leakage grams Weight Gain grams End Leakage grams Penetration mm (in.) Control Heat Age Humidity Exposure Temperature Cycling Insulation Compression Failures Control ________________ Heat Age ________________ Humidity Exposure ________________ Temperature Cycling ________________ Jacket Slip Strength @ 50 °C Load in newtons (pound-force) Control ________________ Heat Age ________________ Humidity Exposure ________________ Temperature Cycling ________________ Filler Exudation (grams) Heat Age ________________ Humidity Exposure ________________ Temperature Cycling ________________ Surge Test (kilovolts) Conductor to Conductor ________________ Shield to Conductors ________________ [58 FR 29328, May 20, 1993, as amended at 60 FR 1711, Jan. 5, 1995; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1755.900 Abbreviations and Definitions. The following abbreviations and definitions apply to §§ 1755.901 and 1755.902: (a) Abbreviations. (2) ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials; (3) °C Centigrade temperature scale; (4) dB Decibel; (5) CSM Central strength member; (6) dB/km Decibels per 1 kilometer; (7) ECCS Electrolytic chrome coated steel; (8) EIA Electronic Industries Alliance; (9) EIA/TIA Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry Association; (10) FTTH Fiber-to-the-Home; (11) Gbps Gigabit per second or Gbit/s; (12) GE General Electric; (13) HDPE High density polyethylene; (14) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; (15) Km kilometer(s;) (16) LDPE Low density polyethylene; (17) m meter(s;) (18) Max. Maximum; (19) Mbit Megabits; (20) MDPE Medium density polyethylene; (21) MHz-km Megahertz-kilometer; (22) Min. Minimum; (23) MFD Mode-Field Diameter; (24) nm Nanometer(s;) (25) N Newton(s;) (26) NA Numerical aperture; (27) NESC National Electrical Safety Code; (28) OC Optical cable; (29) O.D. Outside Diameter; (30) OF Optical fiber; (31) OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration; (32) OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer; (33) % Percent; (34) ps/(nm · km) Picosecond per nanometer times kilometer; (35) ps/(nm 2 (36) PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion; (37) RUS Rural Utilities Service; (38) s Second(s); (39) SI International System (of Units) (From the French Système international d'unités (40) µm Micrometer. (b) Definitions Accept; Acceptance http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/listing_procedures/index_listing_procedures.htm, Acceptance of Standards, Specifications, Equipment Contract Forms, Manual Sections, Drawings, Materials and Equipment for the Telephone Program, http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/publications/bulletins.htm. (2) Agency (3) Armor (4) Attenuation (5) Bandwidth (6) Birefringence (7) Cable cutoff wavelength (8) Chromatic dispersion (9) Cladding (10) Core (11) Cutoff wavelength (12) Dielectric cable (13) Differential group delay (14) Graded Refractive Index Profile (15) List of Acceptable Materials “List of Materials Acceptable for Use on Telecommunications Systems of RUS Borrowers.” http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/materials/lstomat.htm. (16) Loose tube buffer (17) Matched cable LOSS (dB) = −10 LOG 10 1 2 2 1 2 where subscripts 1 and 2 refer to any two cabled fibers to be spliced. (18) Mil (19) Minimum bending diameter (20) Mode-field diameter (21) Multimode fiber (22) Numerical Aperture (NA) (23) Optical fiber (24) Optical point discontinuities (25) Optical waveguide (26) Polarization mode dispersion (27) PMD Q Q Q (28) Ribbon (29) Shield (30) Single mode fiber (31) Step Refractive Index Profile (32) Tight tube buffer [74 FR 20561, May 5, 2009] § 1755.901 Incorporation by Reference. (a) Incorporation by reference. Federal Register. [email protected]. http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (b) The American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. ANSI/IEEE C2-2007, The National Electrical Safety Code, http://standards.ieee.org/nesc/index.html. (c) The following Insulated Cable Engineers Association standards are available for purchase from the Insulated Cable Engineers, Inc. (ICEA), P.O. Box 1568, Carrollton, GA 30112 or from Global Engineering Documents, 15 Iverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112, telephone 1-800-854-7179 (USA and Canada) or 303-792-2181 (International), or online at http://global.ihs.com (1) ICEA S-110-717-2003, Standard for Optical Drop Cable, (2) ANSI/ICEA S-87-640-2006, Standard for Optical Fiber Outside Plant Communications Cable, (d) The following American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards are available for purchase from ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. Telephone (610) 832-9585, Fax (610) 832-9555, by e-mail at [email protected], http://www.astm.org http://webstore.ansi.org/ansidocstore/default.asp (1) ASTM A 640-97, (Reapproved 2002) e1 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Strand for Messenger Support of Figure 8 Cable, (2) ASTM B 736-00, Standard Specification for Aluminum, Aluminum Alloy and Aluminum-Clad Steel Cable Shielding Stock, (3) ASTM D 4565-99, Standard Test Methods for Physical and Environmental Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable, (4) ASTM D 4566-98, Standard Test Methods for Electrical Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable, (5) ASTM D 4568-99, Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Compatibility Between Cable Filling and Flooding Compounds and Polyolefin Wire and Cable Materials, (e) The following Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industries Association (TIA/EIA) standards are available from Electronic Industries Association, Engineering Department, 1722 Eye Street, NW., Washington, DC 20006; or from Global Engineering Documents, 15 Iverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112, telephone 1-800-854-7179 (USA and Canada) or (303) 792-2181 (International), or online at http://global.ihs.com; http://www.tiaonline.org/standards/catalog: (1) TIA/EIA Standard 455-3A, FOTP-3, Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling on Optical Fibers, Optical Cable, and Other Passive Fiber Optic Components, (2) [Reserved] (f) The following International Telecommunication Union (ITU) recommendations may be obtained from ITU, Place des Nations, 1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland, telephone + 41 22 730 6141 or online at http://www.itu.int/ITU-T/publications/recs.html (1) ITU-T Recommendation G.652, Series G: Transmission Systems and Media, Digital Systems and Networks, Transmission media characteristics—Optical fibre cables, Characteristics of a single-mode optical fibre and cable, (2) ITU-T Recommendation G.655, Series G: Transmission Systems and Media, Digital Systems and Networks, Transmission media characteristics—Optical fibre cables, Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fibre and cable, (3) ITU-T Recommendation G.656, Series G: Transmission Systems and Media, Digital Systems and Networks, Transmission media characteristics—Optical fibre cables, Characteristics of a fibre and cable with non-zero dispersion for wideband optical transport, (4) ITU-T Recommendation G.657, Series G: Transmission Systems and Media, Digital Systems and Networks, Transmission media characteristics—Optical fibre cables, Characteristics of a bending loss insensitive single mode optical fibre and cable for the access network, (5) ITU-T Recommendation L.58, Series L: Construction, Installation and Protection of Cables and Other Elements of Outside Plant, Optical fibre cables: Special Needs for Access Network, [74 FR 20561, May 5, 2009] § 1755.902 Minimum performance Specification for fiber optic cables. (a) Scope. (1) General. (ii) The optical waveguides are glass fibers having directly-applied protective coatings, and are called “fibers,” herein. These fibers may be assembled in either loose fiber bundles with a protective core tube, encased in several protective buffer tubes, in tight buffer tubes, or ribbon bundles with a protective core tube. (iii) Fillers, strength members, core wraps, and bedding tapes may complete the cable core. (iv) The core or buffer tubes containing the fibers and the interstices between the buffer tubes, fillers, and strength members in the core structure are filled with a suitable material or water swellable elements to exclude water. (v) The cable structure is completed by an extruded overall plastic jacket. A shield or armor or combination thereof may be included under the jacket. The jacket may have strength members embedded in it, in some designs. (vi) Buried installation requires armor under the outer jacket. (vii) For self-supporting cable, the outer jacket may be extruded over the support messenger and cable core. (viii) Cables for mid-span applications for network access must be designed for easy mid-span access to the fibers. The manufacturer may use reversing oscillating stranding (SZ) described in section 6.4 of ITU-T Recommendation L.58, Construction, Installation and Protection of Cables and Other Elements of Outside Plant i.e. (2) The normal temperature ranges for cables must meet paragraph 1.1.3 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640, Standard for Optical Fiber Outside Plant Communications Cable (3) Tensile rating. i.e. (4) ADSS and other self-supporting cables. National Electrical Safety Code Ice and Wind Loading Extreme Wind Loading. (5) Minimum bend diameter. Minimum Bend Diameter (6) The cable is fully color coded so that each fiber is distinguishable from every other fiber. A basic color scheme of twelve colors allows individual fiber identification. Colored tubes, binders, threads, strippings, or markings provide fiber group identification. (7) Cables must demonstrate compliance with the qualification testing requirements of this section to ensure satisfactory end-use performance characteristics for the intended applications. (8) Optical cable designs not specifically addressed by this section may be allowed if accepted by the Agency. Justification for acceptance of a modified design must be provided to substantiate product utility and long term stability and endurance. For information on how to obtain Agency product acceptance, refer to the procedures listed at http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/listing_procedures/index_listing_procedures.htm Acceptance of Standards, Specifications, Equipment Contract Forms, Manual Sections, Drawings, Materials and Equipment for the Telephone Program http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/publications/bulletins.htm. (9) All cables sold to RUS telecommunications borrowers for projects involving RUS loan funds must be accepted by the Agency's Technical Standards Committee “A” (Telecommunications). Any design change to existing acceptable designs must be submitted to the Agency for acceptance. As stated in paragraph 8 above, refer to the procedures listed at http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/listing_procedures/index_listing_procedures.htm (10) The Agency intends that the optical fibers contained in the cables meeting the requirements of this section have characteristics that will allow signals having a range of wavelengths to be carried simultaneously. (b) Optical fibers. (2) Zero-dispersion. G.652.B attributes G.652.D attributes G.657 class A attributes (3) Non-zero-dispersion. G.656 attributes (4) Multimode fibers. (5) Matched cable. (6) Buyers will normally specify the MFD for the fibers in the cable. When a buyer does not specify the MFD at 1310 nm, the fibers must be manufactured to an MFD of 9.2 µm with a maximum tolerance range of ±0.5 µm (362 ±20 microinch), unless the end user agrees to accept cable with fibers specified to a different MFD. When the end user does specify a MFD and tolerance conflicting with the MFD maximum tolerance allowed by paragraph (d)(5) of this section, the requirements of paragraph (d)(5) must prevail. (7) Factory splices are not allowed. (8) Coating. (9) All optical fibers in any single length of cable must be of the same type, unless otherwise specified by end user. (10) Optical fiber dimensions and data reporting must be as required by paragraph 7.13.1.1 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (c) Buffers. (2) The tubes for single mode loose tube cables must be designed to allow a maximum mid-span buffer tube exposure of 6.096 meters (20 feet). The buyer should be aware that certain housing hardware may require cable designed for 6.096 meters of buffer tube storage. (3) Optical fibers covered in near contact with an extrusion (tight tube) must have an intermediate soft buffer to allow for thermal expansions and minor pressures. The buffer tube dimension must be established by the manufacturer to meet the requirement of this section. Tight buffer tubes must be removable without damage to the fiber when following the manufacturer's recommended procedures. The tight buffered fiber must be strippable per paragraph 7.20 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (4) Both loose tube and tight tube coverings of each color and other fiber package types removed from the finished cable must meet the following shrinkback and cold bend performance requirements. The fibers may be left in the tube. (i) Shrinkback. (ii) Cold bend. Note to paragraph ( c ii Channel cores and similar slotted single component core designs do not need to be tested for cold bend. (d) Fiber identification. (2) For the following items the colors designated for identification within the cable must comply with paragraphs 4.2.2 and 4.3.2 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)): loose buffer tubes, tight tube buffer fibers, individual fibers in multi-fiber tubes, slots, bundles or units of fibers, and the units in cables with more than one unit. (e) Optical fiber ribbon. (2) Ribbon fiber count must be specified by the end user, i.e. (3) Ribbon dimensions must be as agreed by the end user and manufacturer per paragraph 3.4.4.1 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (4) Ribbons must meet each of the following tests. These tests are included in the paragraphs of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)), indicated in parenthesis below. (i) Ribbon Dimensions (ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 paragraphs 7.14 through 7.14.2)—measures ribbon dimension. (ii) Ribbon Twist Test (ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 paragraphs 7.15 through 7.15.2)—evaluates the ability of the ribbon to resist splitting or other damage while undergoing dynamic cyclically twisting the ribbon under load. (iii) Ribbon Residual Twist Test (ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 paragraphs 7.16 through 7.16.2)—evaluates the degree of permanent twist in a cabled optical ribbon. (iv) Ribbon Separability Test (ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 paragraphs 7.17 through 7.17.2)—evaluates the ability to separate fibers. (5) Ribbons must meet paragraph 3.4.4.6 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)), Ribbon Strippability. (f) Strength members. (2) The strength members may be metallic or nonmetallic. (3) The combined strength of all the strength members must be sufficient to support the stress of installation and to protect the cable in service. (4) Strength members may be incorporated into the core as a central support member or filler, as fillers between the fiber packages, as an annular serving over the core, as an annular serving over the intermediate jacket, embedded in the outer jacket, or as a combination of any of these methods. (5) The central support member or filler must contain no more than one splice per kilometer of cable. Individual fillers placed between the fiber packages and placed as annular servings over the core must contain no more than one splice per kilometer of cable. Cable sections having central member or filler splices must meet the same physical requirements as un-spliced cable sections. (6) In each length of completed cable having a metallic central member, the dielectric strength between the shield or armor, when present, and the metallic center member must withstand at least 15 kilovolts when tested per ASTM D 4566 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(d)). The voltage must be applied for 3 seconds minimum; no failures are allowed. (g) Cable core. (2) The standard cylindrical group or core designs commonly consist of 4, 6, 12, 18, or 24 fibers. Cylindrical groups or core designs larger than the sizes shown above must meet all the applicable requirements of this section. (3) When threads or tapes are used in cables using water blocking elements as core binders, they must be a non-hygroscopic and non-wicking dielectric material or be rendered by the gel or water blocking material produced by the ingress of water. (4) When threads or tapes are used as unit binders to define optical fiber units in loose tube, tight tube, slotted, or bundled cored designs, they must be non-hygroscopic and non-wicking dielectric material or be rendered by the filling compound or water blocking material contained in the binder. The colors of the binders must be per paragraphs (f)(2) and (f)(3) of this section. (h) Core water blocking. (2) The materials or elements must be homogeneous and uniformly mixed; free from dirt, metallic particles and other foreign matter; easily removed; nontoxic and present no dermal hazards. The filling compound and water blocking elements must contain a suitable antioxidant or be of such composition as to provide long term stability. (3) The individual cable manufacturer must satisfy the Agency that the filling compound or water blocking elements selected for use is suitable for its intended application by submitting test data showing compliance with ASTM D 4568 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(d)). The filling compound and water blocking elements must be compatible with the cable components when tested per ASTM D 4568 at a temperature of 80 °C (176 °F). The jacket must retain a minimum of 85% of its un-aged tensile and elongation values. (i) Water blocking material. (2) The flooding compound or water blocking elements must be compatible with the jacket when tested per paragraphs 7.19 and 7.19.1 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). The aged jacket must retain a minimum of 85% of its un-aged tensile strength and elongation values when tested per paragraph 7.19.2.3. The flooding compound must exhibit adhesive properties sufficient to prevent jacket slip when tested per paragraph 7.30.1 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 and meets paragraph 7.30.2 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 for minimum sheath adherence of 14 N/mm for armored cables. (3) The individual cable manufacturer must satisfy the Agency by submitting test data showing compliance with the appropriate cable performance testing requirements of this section that the flooding compound or water blocking elements selected for use is acceptable for the application. (j) Core wrap. (2) The core wrap(s) can be used to provide a heat barrier to prevent deformation or adhesion between the fiber tubes or can be used to contain the core. (k) Inner jackets. (2) For armored and unarmored cable, an inner jacket is optional. The inner jacket may absorb stresses in the cable core that may be introduced by armor application or by armored cable installation. (3) The inner jacket material and test requirements must be the same as the outer jacket material, except that either black or natural polyethylene may be used and the thickness requirements are included in paragraph (m)(4) of this section. In the case of natural polyethylene, the requirements for absorption coefficient and the inclusion of furnace black are waived. (4) The inner jacket thickness must be determined by the manufacturer, but must be no less than a nominal jacket thickness of 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) with a minimum jacket thickness of 0.35 mm (0.01 inch). (l) Outer jacket. (2) The jacket must be free from holes, splits, blisters, or other imperfections and must be as smooth and concentric as is consistent with the best commercial practice. (3) The jacket must contain an antioxidant to provide long term stabilization and must contain a minimum of 2.35 percent concentration of furnace black to provide ultraviolet shielding measures as required by paragraph 5.4.2 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)), except that the concentration of furnace black does not necessarily need to be initially contained in the raw material and may be added later during the jacket making process. (4) The raw material used for the outer jacket must be one of the types listed below. (i) Type L1. (ii) Type L2. (iii) Type M. (iv) Type H. (5) Particle size of the carbon selected for use must not average greater than 20 nm. (6) The outer jacketing material removed from or tested on the cable must be capable of meeting the performance requirements of Table 5.1 found in ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (7) Testing Procedures. (i) Jacket material density measurement. (ii) Tensile strength, yield strength, and ultimate elongation. (iii) Jacket material absorption coefficient test. (iv) Environmental stress crack resistance test. (v) Jacket shrinkage test. (8) Jacket thickness. (9) Jacket repairs. (m) Armor. (2) The uncoated steel tape must be electrolytic chrome coated steel (ECCS) and must meet the requirements of paragraph B.2.4 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (3) The reduction in thickness of the armoring material due to the corrugating or application process must be kept to a minimum and must not exceed 10 percent at any spot. (4) The armor of each length of cable must be electrically continuous with no more than one joint or splice allowed in any length of one kilometer of cable. This requirement does not apply to a joint or splice made in the raw material by the raw material manufacturer. (5) The breaking strength of any section of an armor tape, containing a factory splice joint, must not be less than 80 percent of the breaking strength of an adjacent section of the armor of equal length without a joint. (6) For cables containing no flooding compound over the armor, the overlap portions of the armor tape must be bonded in cables having a flat, non-corrugated armor to meet the mechanical requirements of paragraphs (t)(1) through (t)(16)(ii) of this section. If the tape is corrugated, the overlap portions of the armor must be sufficiently bonded and the corrugations must be sufficiently in register to meet the requirements of paragraphs (t)(1) through (t)(16)(ii) of this section. (7) The armor tape must be so applied as to enable the cable to pass the Cable Low (−30 °C (−22 °F)) and High (60 °C (140 °F)) Temperatures Bend Test, as required by paragraph (t)(3) of this section. (8) The protective coating on the steel armor must meet the Bonding-to-Metal, Heat Sealability, Lap-Shear and Moisture Resistance requirements of Type I, Class 2 coated metals per ASTM B 736 (incorporated by reference in § 1755.901(d)). (9) When the jacket is bonded to the plastic coated armor, the bond between the plastic coated armor and the outer jacket must not be less than 525 Newtons per meter (36 pound-force) over at least 90 percent of the cable circumference when tested per ASTM D 4565 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(d)). For cables with strength members embedded in the jacket, and residing directly over the armor, the area of the armor directly under the strength member is excluded from the 90 percent calculation. (n) Figure 8 aerial cables. (i) Any section of a completed strand containing a joint must have minimum tensile strength and elongation of 29,500 Newtons (6,632 pound-force) and 3.5 percent, respectively, when tested per the procedures specified in ASTM A 640 (incorporated by reference in § 1755.901(d)). (ii) The individual wires from a completed strand which contains joints must not fracture when tested per the “Ductility of Steel” procedures specified in ASTM A 640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(d)), except that the mandrel diameter must be equal to 5 times the nominal diameter of the individual wires. (iii) The support strand must be completely covered with a flooding compound that offers corrosion protection. The flooding compound must be homogeneous and uniformly mixed. (iv) The flooding compound must be nontoxic and present no dermal hazard. (v) The flooding compound must be free from dirt, metallic particles, and other foreign matter that may interfere with the performance of the cable. (2) Other methods of providing self-supporting cable specifically not addressed in this section may be allowed if accepted. Justification for acceptance of a modified design must be provided to substantiate product utility and long term stability and endurance. To obtain the Agency's acceptance of a modified design, refer to the product acceptance procedures available at http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/listing_procedures/index_listing_procedures.htm, (3) Jacket thickness requirements. (i) The minimum jacket thickness at any point over the support messenger must meet the requirements of paragraph D.3 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (ii) The web dimension for self-supporting aerial cable must meet the requirements of paragraph D.3 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (o) Sheath slitting cord. (2) When a sheath slitting cord is used it must be capable of slitting the jacket or jacket and armor, at least one meter (3.3 feet) length without breaking the cord at a temperature of 23 ±5 °C (73 ±9 °F). (3) The sheath slitting cord must meet the sheath slitting cord test described in paragraph (t)(1) of this section. (p) Identification markers. (2) The color of the initial marking must be white or silver. If the initial marking fails to meet the requirements of the preceding paragraphs, it will be permissible to either remove the defective marking and re-mark with the white or silver color or leave the defective marking on the cable and re-mark with yellow. No further re-marking is permitted. Any re-marking must be done on a different portion of the cable's circumference where the existing marking is found and have a numbering sequence differing from any other marking by at least 3,000. Any reel of cable that contains more than one set of sequential markings must be labeled to indicate the color and sequence of marking to be used. The labeling must be applied to the reel and also to the cable. (3) Each length of cable must be permanently labeled OPTICAL CABLE, OC, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE, or OF on the outer jacket and identified as to manufacturer and year of manufacture. (4) Each length of cable intended for direct burial installation must be marked with a telephone handset in compliance with requirements of the Rule 350G of the ANSI/IEEE C2-2007 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(b)). (5) Each length of cable must be identified as to the manufacturer and year of manufacturing. The manufacturer and year of manufacturing may also be indicated by other means as indicated in paragraphs 6.1.2 through 6.1.4 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (6) The number of fibers on the jacket must be marked on the jacket. (7) The completed cable must have sequentially numbered length markers in METERS or FEET at regular intervals of not more than 2 feet or not more than 1 meter along the outside of the jacket. Continuous sequential numbering must be employed in a single length of cable. The numbers must be dimensioned and spaced to produce good legibility and must be approximately 3 millimeters (118 mils) in height. An occasional illegible marking is permissible when it is located within 2 meters of a legible making for cables marked in meters or 4 feet for cables marked in feet. (8) Agreement between the actual length of the cable and the length marking on the cable jacket must be within the limits of + 1 percent and −0 percent. (9) Jacket print test. (q) Performance of a finished cable Zero dispersion optical fiber cable. G.652.B attributes, G.652.D attributes, G.657 class A attributes, (i) The attenuation methods must be per Table 8.4, Optical attenuation measurement methods, (ii) The cable must have a maximum attenuation of 0.1 dB at a point of discontinuity (a localized deviation of the optical fiber loss). Per paragraphs 8.4 and 8.4.1 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)), measurements must be conducted at 1310 and 1550 nm, and at 1625 nm when specified by the end user. (iii) The cable cutoff wavelength (γ cc (2) Nonzero dispersion optical fiber cable. G.656 attributes, (i) The attenuation methods must be per Table 8.4, Optical attenuation measurement methods (ii) The cable must have a maximum attenuation of 0.1 dB at a point of discontinuity (a localized deviation of the optical fiber loss). Per paragraphs 8.4 and 8.4.1 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)), measurements must be conducted at 1310 and 1550 nm, and at 1625 nm when specified by the end user. (iii) The cable cutoff wavelength (γ cc (3) Multimode optical fiber cable. Attenuation coefficient performance requirement (dB/k), , Multimode bandwidth coefficient performance requirements (MHz-km , Points discontinuity acceptance criteria (dB), (4) Because the accuracy of attenuation measurements for single mode fibers becomes questionable when measured on short cable lengths, attenuation measurements are to be made utilizing characterization cable lengths. Master Cable reels must be tested and the attenuation values measured will be used for shorter ship lengths of cable. (5) Because the accuracy of attenuation measurements for multimode fibers becomes questionable when measured on short cable lengths, attenuation measurements are to be made utilizing characterization cable lengths. If the ship length of cable is less than one kilometer, the attenuation values measured on longer lengths of cable (characterization length of cable) before cutting to the ship lengths of cable may be applied to the ship lengths. (6) Attenuation must be measured per Table 8.4 , Optical Attenuation Measurement Methods, (7) The bandwidth of multimode fibers in a finished cable must be no less than the values specified in ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)), Table 8.2 per paragraphs 8.3.1 and 8.3.2. (r) Mechanical requirements. (1) Sheath slitting cord test. (2) Material compatibility and cable aging test. (3) Cable low and high bend test. (4) Compound flow test. (5) Cyclic flexing test. (6) Water penetration test. (7) Cable impact test. (8) Cable tensile loading and fiber strain test. (9) Cable compression test. (10) Cable twist test. (11) Cable Lighting damage susceptibility test. (12) Cable external freezing test. (13) Cable temperature cycling test. (14) Cable sheath adherence test. (15) Mid-span test. (i) The specimen must be installed in a commercially available pedestal or closure or in a device that mimics their performance, as follows: A length of cable sheath, equal to the mid-span length, must be removed from the middle of the test specimen so as to allow access to the buffer tubes. All binders, tapes, strength members, etc. must be removed. The buffer tubes must be left intact. The cable ends defining the ends of the mid-span length must be properly secured in the closure to the more stringent of the cable or hardware manufacturer's recommendations. Strength members must be secured with an end stop type clamp and the outer jacket must be clamped to prevent slippage. A minimum of 6.096 meters (20 feet) of cable must extend from the entry and exit ports of the closure for the purpose of making optical measurements. If a device that mimics the performance of pedestals or closures is used, the buffer tubes must be wound in a coil with a minimum width of 3 inches and minimum length of 12 inches. (ii) The expressed buffer tubes must be loosely constrained during the test. (iii) The enclosure, with installed cable, must be placed in an environmental chamber for temperature cycling. It is acceptable for some or all of the two 20 feet (6.096 meters) cable segments to extend outside the environmental chamber. (iv) Lids, pedestal enclosures, or closure covers must be removed if possible to allow for temperature equilibrium of the buffer tubes. If this is not possible, the manufacturer must demonstrate that the buffer tubes are at temperature equilibrium prior to beginning the soak time. (v) Measure the attenuation of single mode fibers at 1550 ±10 nm. The supplier must certify the performance of lower specified wavelengths comply with the mid-span performance requirements. (vi) After measuring the attenuation of the optical fibers, test the cable sample per TIA/EIA Standard 455-3A (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(e)). Temperature cycling, measurements, and data reporting must conform to TIA/EIA Standard 455-3A. The test must be conducted for at least five complete cycles. The following detailed test conditions must apply: (A) TIA/EIA Standard 455-3A (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(e)), Section 4.1—Loose tube single mode optical cable sample must be tested. (B) TIA/EIA Standard 455-3A (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(e)), Section 4.2—An Agency accepted 8 to 12 inch diameter optical buried distribution pedestal or a device that mimics their performance must be tested. (C) Mid-span opening for installation of loose tube single mode optical cable in pedestal must be 6.096 meters (20 feet). (D) TIA/EIA Standard 455-3A (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(e)), Section 5.1—3 hours soak time. (E) TIA/EIA Standard 455-3A (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(e)), Section 5.2—Test Condition C-2, minimum −40 °C (−40 °F) and maximum 70 °Celsius (158 °F). (F) TIA/EIA Standard 455-3A (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(e)), Section 5.7.2—A statistically representative amount of transmitting fibers in all express buffer tubes passing through the pedestal and stored must be measured. (G) The buffer tubes in the closure or pedestal must not be handled or moved during temperature cycling or attenuation measurements. (vii) Fiber cable attenuation measured through the express buffer tubes during the last cycle at −40 °C (−40 °F) and + 70 °C (158 °F) must not exceed a maximum increase of 0.1 dB and must not exceed a 0.05 dB average across all tested fibers from the initial baseline measurements. At the conclusion of the temperature cycling, the maximum attenuation increase at 23 °C from the initial baseline measurement must not exceed 0.05 dB which allows for measurement noise that may be encountered during the test. The cable must also be inspected at room temperature at the conclusion of all measurements; the cable must not show visible evidence of fracture of the buffer tubes nor show any degradation of all exposed cable assemblies. (16) Aerial self-supporting cables. (i) Static tensile testing of aerial self-supporting cables. (ii) Cable galloping test. (s) Pre-connectorized cable. (2) All connectors must be accepted by the Agency prior to their use. To obtain the Agency's acceptance of connectors, refer to product acceptance procedures available at http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/listing_procedures/index_listing_procedures.htm (t) Acceptance testing. http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/listing_procedures/index_listing_procedures.htm, (2) Acceptance. (i) An original signature certification that the product fully complies with each paragraph of this section; (ii) Qualification Test Data, per the Appendix to this section; (iii) A set of instructions for handling the cable; (iv) OSHA Material Safety Data Sheets for all components; (v) Agree to periodic plant inspections; (vi) A certification stating whether the cable, as sold to RUS Telecommunications borrowers, complies with the following two provisions: (A) Final assembly or manufacture of the product, as the product would be used by an RUS Telecommunications borrower, is completed in the United States or eligible countries (currently, Mexico, Canada and Israel); and (B) The cost of United States and eligible countries' components (in any combination) within the product is more than 50 percent of the total cost of all components utilized in the product. The cost of non-domestic components (components not manufactured within the United States or eligible countries) which are included in the finished product must include all duties, taxes, and delivery charges to the point of assembly or manufacture; (vii) Written user testimonials concerning performance of the product; and (viii) Other nonproprietary data deemed necessary. (3) Re-qualification acceptance. (4) Initial and re-qualification acceptance requests should be addressed to: (5) Tests on 100 Percent of Completed Cable. (ii) Attenuation for each optical fiber in the cable must be measured. (iii) Optical discontinuities greater than 0.1 dB must be isolated and their location and amplitude recorded. (6) Capability tests. (i) Numerical aperture and bandwidth of multimode fibers; (ii) Cut off wavelength of single mode fibers; (iii) Dispersion of single mode fibers; (iv) Shrinkback and cold testing of loose tube and tight tube buffers, and mid-span testing of cables of a loose tube design with tube storage; (v) Adhesion properties of the protective fiber coating; (vi) Dielectric strength between the armor and the metallic central member; (vii) Performance requirements for the fibers. (viii) Performance requirements for the inner and outer jacketing materials; (ix) Performance requirements for the filling and flooding compounds; (x) Bonding properties of the coated armoring material; (xi) Sequential marking and lettering; and (xii) Mechanical tests described in paragraphs (t)(1) through (t)(16)(ii) of this section. (u) Records tests. (2) Measurements and computed values must be rounded off to the number of places or figures specified for the requirement per paragraph 1.3 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (v) Manufacturing irregularities. (2) Minor defects in the inner and outer jacket (defects having a dimension of 3 millimeter or less in any direction) may be repaired by means of heat fusing per good commercial practices utilizing sheath grade compounds. (w) Packaging and preparation for shipment. (2) A circumferential thermal wrap or other means of protection must be secured between the outer edges of the reel flange to protect the cable against damage during storage and shipment. The thermal wrap must meet the requirements included in the Thermal Reel Wrap Test, (i) Sample selection. (ii) Test procedure. (B) Tape thermocouples to the jackets of each sample to measure the jacket temperature. (C) Cover one sample with the thermal reel wrap. (D) Expose the samples to a radiant heat source capable of heating the uncovered sample to a minimum of 71 °C (160 °F). A GE 600 watt photoflood lamp or an equivalent lamp having the light spectrum approximately that of the sun must be used. (E) The height of the lamp above the jacket must be 380 millimeters (15 inches) or an equivalent height that produces the 71 °C (160 °F) jacket temperature on the unwrapped sample must be used. (F) After the samples have stabilized at the temperature, the jacket temperatures of the samples must be recorded after one hour of exposure to the heat source. (G) Compute the temperature difference between jackets. (H) The temperature difference between the jacket with the thermal reel wrap and the jacket without the reel wrap must be greater than or equal to 17 °C (63 °F). (3) Cables must be sealed at the ends to prevent entrance of moisture. (4) The end-of-pull (outer end) of the cable must be securely fastened to prevent the cable from coming loose during transit. The start-of-pull (inner end) of the cable must project through a slot in the flange of the reel, around an inner riser, or into a recess on the flange near the drum and fastened in such a way to prevent the cable from becoming loose during installation. (5) Spikes, staples or other fastening devices must be used in a manner which will not result in penetration of the cable. (6) The arbor hole must admit a spindle 63.5 millimeters (2.5 inches) in diameter without binding. (7) Each reel must be plainly marked to indicate the direction in which it should be rolled to prevent loosening of the cable on the reel. (8) Each reel must be stenciled or lettered with the name of the manufacturer. (9) The following information must be either stenciled on the reel or on a tag firmly attached to the reel: Optical Cable, Type and Number of Fibers, Armored or Non-armored, Year of Manufacture, Name of Cable Manufacturer, Length of Cable, Reel Number, 7 CFR 1755.902, Minimum Bending Diameter for both Residual and Loaded Condition during installation. Example: Optical Cable, G.657 class A, 4 fibers, Armored, XYZ Company, 1050 meters, Reel Number 3, 7 CFR 1755.902. Minimum Bending Diameter: Residual (Installed): 20 times Cable O.D., Loaded Condition: 40 times Cable O.D. Appendix to § 1755.902 Fiber Optic Cables Bulletin 1753F-601(PE-90) Qualifications Test Data [Initial qualification and three year re-qualification test data required for TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROGRAM product acceptance. Please note that some tests may apply only to a particular cable design.] Paragraph Test Initial 3 Year (e)(4)(i) Shrinkback X (e)(4)(ii) Cold Bend X (t)(1) Sheath Slitting Cord X (t)(2) Material Compatibility X (t)(3) Cable Low & High Bend X X (t)(4) Compound Flow X (t)(5) Cyclic Flexing X X (t)(6) Water Penetration X X (t)(7) Cable Impact X X (t)(8) Cable Tensile Loading & Fiber Strain X X (t)(9) Cable Compression X (t)(10) Cable Twist X X (t)(11) Cable Lighting Damage Susceptibility X (t)(12) Cable External Freezing X (t)(13) Cable Temperature Cycling X X (t)(14) Cable Sheath Adherence X (t)(15) Mid-Span X X (t)(16)(i) Static Tensile Testing of Aerial Self-Supporting Cables X X (t)(16)(ii) Cable Galloping X (y)(2)(i) Thermal Reel Wrap test X [74 FR 20561, May 5, 2009] § 1755.903 Fiber optic service entrance cables. (a) Scope. (1) General. (ii) The optical waveguides are glass fibers having directly-applied protective coatings, and are called “fibers,” herein. These fibers may be assembled in either loose fiber bundles with a protective core tube, encased in several protective buffer tubes, in tight buffer tubes, or ribbon bundles with a protective core tube. (iii) Fillers, strength members, core wraps, and bedding tapes may complete the cable core. (iv) The core or buffer tubes containing the fibers and the interstices between the buffer tubes, fillers, and strength members in the core structure are filled with a suitable material or water swellable elements to exclude water. (v) The cable structure is completed by an extruded overall plastic jacket. A shield or armor or combination thereof may be included under the jacket. This jacket may have strength members embedded in it, in some designs. (vi) For rodent resistance or for additional protection with direct buried installations, it is recommended the use of armor under the outer jacket. (vii) For self-supporting cable the outer jacket may be extruded over the support messenger and cable core. (viii) For detection purposes, the cable may have toning elements embedded or extruded with the outer jacket. (2) The cable is fully color coded so that each fiber is distinguishable from every other fiber. A basic color scheme of twelve colors allows individual fiber identification. Colored tubes, binders, threads, striping, or markings provide fiber group identification. (3) Cables manufactured to the requirements of this section must demonstrate compliance with the qualification testing requirements to ensure satisfactory end-use performance characteristics for the intended applications. (4) Optical cable designs not specifically addressed by this section may be allowed. Justification for acceptance of a modified design must be provided to substantiate product utility and long term stability and endurance. For information on how to obtain Agency's acceptance of such a modified design, refer to the product acceptance procedures available at http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/listing_procedures/index_listing_procedures.htm (5) The cable must be designed for the temperatures ranges of Table 1-1, Cable Normal Temperature Ranges (6) Tensile rating. Tensile Rating (7) Self-supporting cables. Ice and Wind Loading Extreme Wind Loading. (8) Minimum bend diameter. Minimum Bend Diameter (9) All cables sold to RUS Telecommunications borrowers must be accepted by the Agency's Technical Standards Committee “A” for projects involving RUS loan funds. All design changes to Agency acceptable designs must be submitted to the Agency for acceptance. Optical cable designs not specifically addressed by this section may be allowed, if accepted by the Agency. Justification for acceptance of a modified design must be provided to substantiate product utility and long term stability and endurance. For information on how to obtain the Agency's acceptance of cables, refer to the product acceptance procedures available at http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/listing_procedures/index_listing_procedures.htm (10) The Agency intends that the optical fibers contained in the cables meeting the requirement of this section have characteristics that will allow signals, having a range of wavelengths, to be carried simultaneously. (11) The manufacturer is responsible to establish a quality assurance system meeting industry standards described in paragraph 1.8 of ICEA S-110-717 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (12) The cable made must meet paragraph 1.10 of ICEA S-110-717 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (b) Optical fibers. (2) Optical fibers must meet the fiber attributes of Table 2, G.652.B attributes G.652.D attributes G.657 class A attributes (i) Additionally, optical ribbon fibers must meet paragraph 3.3, Optical Fiber Ribbons (ii) [Reserved] (3) Multimode fibers. (4) Matched cable. (5) Buyers will normally specify the MFD for the fibers in the cable. When a buyer does not specify the MFD at 1310 nm, the fibers must be manufactured to an MFD of 9.2 µm with a maximum tolerance range of ±0.5 µm (362 ±20 microinch), unless the buyer agrees to accept cable with fibers specified to a different MFD. When the buyer does specify a MFD and tolerance conflicting with the MFD maximum tolerance allowed by paragraph (d)(4) of this section, the requirements of paragraph (d)(4) must prevail. (6) Factory splices are not allowed. (7) All optical fibers in any single length of cable must be of the same type unless otherwise specified by end user. (8) Optical fiber dimensions and data reporting must be as required by paragraph 7.13.1.1 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (c) Buffers/coating. Loose Buffer Tube Dimensions (2) The loose tube coverings of each color and other fiber package types removed from the finished cable must meet the following shrinkback and cold bend performance requirements. The fibers may be left in the tube. (i) Shrinkback. (ii) Cold bend. (3) Optical fiber coating must meet the requirements of paragraph 2.4, Optical Fiber Coatings and Requirements (i) All protective coverings in any single length of cable must be continuous and be of the same material except at splice locations. (ii) The protective coverings must be free from holes, splits, blisters, and other imperfections and must be as smooth and concentric as is consistent with the best commercial practice. (iii) Repairs to the fiber coatings are not allowed. (d) Fiber and buffer tube identification. (e) Strength members. Strength Members Static Tensile Testing of Aerial Self-Supporting Cables (2) Strength members may be incorporated into the core as a central support member or filler, as fillers between the fiber packages, as an annular serving over the core, as an annular serving over the intermediate jacket, embedded in the outer jacket or as a combination of any of these methods. (3) The central support member or filler must contain no more than one splice per kilometer of cable. Individual fillers placed between the fiber packages and placed as annular servings over the core must contain no more than one splice per kilometer of cable. Cable sections having central member or filler splices must meet the same physical requirements as un-spliced cable sections. (4) Notwithstanding what has been indicated in other parts of this document, in each length of completed cable having a metallic central member, the dielectric strength between the optional armor and the metallic center member must withstand at least 15 kilovolts direct current for 3 seconds. (f) Forming the cable core. (2) The standard cylindrical group or core designs must consist of 12 fibers or less. (3) When threads or tapes are used as core binders, they must be colored either white or natural and must be a non-hygroscopic and non-wicking dielectric material. Water swell-able threads and tapes are permitted. (g) Filling/flooding compounds and water blocking elements. (i) Filling compounds must be applied into the interior of the loose fiber tubes and into the interstices of the core. When a core wrap is used, the filling compound must also be applied to the core wrap, over the core wrap and between the core wrap and inner jacket when required. (ii) Flooding compounds must be sufficiently applied between the optional inner jacket and armor and between the armor and outer jacket so that voids and air spaces in these areas are minimized. The use of floodant between the armor and outer jacket is not required when uniform bonding, per paragraph l(9) of this section, is achieved between the plastic-clad armor and the outer jacket. Floodant must exhibit adhesive properties sufficient to prevent jacket slip when tested per the requirements of paragraphs 7.26 through 7.26.2 of Part 7, Testing, Test Methods, and Requirements (iii) Water blocking elements must achieve equal or better performance in preventing the ingress and migration of water as compared to filling and flooding compounds. In lieu of a flooding compound, water blocking elements may be applied between the optional inner jacket and armor and between the armor and outer jacket to prevent water migration. The use of the water blocking elements between the armor and outer jacket is not required when uniform bonding, per paragraph (l)(10) of this section, is achieved between the plastic-clad armor and the outer jacket. (2) The materials must be homogeneous and uniformly mixed; free from dirt, metallic particles and other foreign matter; easily removed; nontoxic and present no dermal hazards. (3) The individual cable manufacturer must satisfy the Agency that the filling compound or water blocking elements selected for use is suitable for its intended application. (i) Filling/Flooding compound materials must be compatible with the cable components when tested per paragraph 7.16, Material Compatibility and Cable Aging Test (ii) Water blocking elements must be compatible with the cable components when tested per paragraph 7.16, Material Compatibility and Cable Aging Test (h) Core wrap (optional). (2) The core wrap(s) can be used to provide a heat barrier to prevent deformation or adhesion between the fiber tubes or can be used to contain the core. (3) When core wraps are used, sufficient filling compound must be applied to the core wraps so that voids or air spaces existing between the core wraps and between the core and the inner side of the core wrap are minimized. (i) Inner jacket (optional). (2) The inner jacket material and test requirements must be the same as for the outer jacket material per paragraph (n) of this section, except that either black or natural polyethylene may be used. In the case of natural polyethylene, the requirements for absorption coefficient and the inclusion of furnace black are waived. (j) Armor (optional). (2) The uncoated steel tape must be electrolytic chrome coated steel (ECCS) with a thickness of 0.155 ±0.015 millimeters. (3) The reduction in thickness of the armoring material due to the corrugating or application process must be kept to a minimum and must not exceed 10 percent at any spot. (4) The armor of each length of cable must be electrically continuous with no more than one joint or splice allowed per kilometer of cable. This requirement does not apply to a joint or splice made in the raw material by the raw material manufacturer. (5) The breaking strength of any section of an armor tape, containing a factory splice joint, must not be less than 80 percent of the breaking strength of an adjacent section of the armor of equal length without a joint. (6) For cables containing no floodant over the armor, the overlap portions of the armor tape must be bonded in cables having a flat, non-corrugated armor to meet the requirements of paragraphs (r)(1) and (r)(2) of this section. If the tape is corrugated, the overlap portions of the armor must be sufficiently bonded and the corrugations must be sufficiently in register to meet the requirements of paragraphs (r)(1) and (r)(2) of this section. (7) The armor tape must be so applied as to enable the cable to meet the testing requirements of paragraphs (r)(1) and (r)(2) of this section. (8) The protective coating on the steel armor must meet the Bonding-to-Metal, Heat Sealability, Lap-Shear and Moisture Resistance requirements of Type I, Class 2 coated metals per ASTM B 736 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(d)). (9) When the jacket is bonded to the plastic coated armor, the bond between the plastic coated armor and the outer jacket must not be less than 525 Newtons per meter over at least 90 percent of the cable circumference when tested per ASTM D 4565 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(d)). For cables with strength members embedded in the jacket, and residing directly over the armor, the area of the armor directly under the strength member is excluded from the 90 percent calculation. (k) Optional support messenger (aerial cable). (2) Based on the storm loading districts referenced in Section 25, Loading of Grades B and C, of ANSI/IEEE C2-2007 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(b)), and the maximum span and location of cable installation provided by the end user, the manufacturer must provide a cable design with sag and tension tables showing the maximum span and sag information for that particular installation. The information included must be for Rule B, Ice and Wind Loading Extreme Wind Loading. (l) Outer jacket. (2) The jacket must be free from holes, splits, blisters, or other imperfections, and must be as smooth and concentric as is consistent with the best commercial practice. (3) Jacket materials must meet the stipulations of paragraph 5.4 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)), except that the concentration of furnace black does not necessarily need to be initially contained in the raw material and may be added later during the jacket making process. Jacket thickness must have a 0.50 mm minimum thickness over the core or over any radial strength member used as the primary strength element(s), 0.20 mm when not used as the primary strength member, and 0.30 mm over any optional toning elements. (4) Jacket Repairs must meet the stipulations of paragraph 5.5, Jacket Repairs (5) Jacket Testing: Testing, Test Methods, and Requirements (m) Sheath slitting cord (optional). (2) When a sheath slitting cord is used it must be non-hygroscopic and non-wicking, or be rendered such by the filling or flooding compound, continuous throughout a length of cable and of sufficient strength to open the sheath over at least a one meter length without breaking the cord at a temperature of 23 ±5 °C. (n) Identification and length markers. (2) Each length of cable intended for direct burial installation must be marked with a telephone handset in compliance with the requirements of the Rule 350G of ANSI/IEEE C2-2007 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(b)). (3) Mark the number of fibers on the jacket. (4) The identification and date marking must conform to paragraph 6.1, Identification and Date Marking, of ICEA S-110-717 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (5) The length marking must conform to paragraph 6.3, Length Marking, of ICEA S-110-717 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (o) Optical performance of a finished cable. G.652.B attributes, G.652.D attributes, class A attributes, (i) The attenuation methods must be per Table 8.4, Optical attenuation measurement methods, (ii) The cable must have a maximum attenuation of 0.1 dB at a point of discontinuity (a localized deviation of the optical fiber loss). Per paragraphs 8.4 and 8.4.1 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)), measurements must be conducted at 1310 and 1550 nm, and at 1625 nm when specified by the end user. (iii) The cable cutoff wavelength (γ cc (2) Multimode optical fiber cable. Attenuation coefficient performance requirement (dB/km), , Multimode bandwidth coefficient performance requirements (MHz-km , Points discontinuity acceptance criteria (d), (3) Because the accuracy of attenuation measurements for single mode fibers becomes questionable when measured on short cable lengths, attenuation measurements are to be made utilizing characterization cable lengths. Master Cable reels must be tested and the attenuation values measured will be used for shorter ship lengths of cable. (4) Because the accuracy of attenuation measurements for multimode fibers becomes questionable when measured on short cable lengths, attenuation measurements are to be made utilizing characterization cable lengths. If the ship length of cable is less than one kilometer, the attenuation values measured on longer lengths of cable (characterization length of cable) before cutting to the ship lengths of cable may be applied to the ship lengths. (5) Attenuation must be measured per Table 8.4, Optical Attenuation Measurement Methods, (6) The bandwidth of multimode fibers in a finished cable must be no less than the values specified in Table 8.2 per paragraph 8.3.1 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (p) Mechanical requirements. Cable Testing: (2) Bend test. (q) Pre-connectorized cable (optional). (2) All connectors must be accepted by the Agency prior to their use. For information on how to obtain the Agency's acceptance, refer to the product acceptance procedures available at http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/listing_procedures/index_listing_procedures.htm (r) Acceptance testing and extent of testing. http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/listing_procedures/index_listing_procedures.htm (2) For initial acceptance, the manufacturer must submit: (i) An original signature certification that the product fully complies with each paragraph of this section; (ii) Qualification Test Data for demonstrating that the cable meets the requirements of this section; (iii) A set of instructions for handling the cable; (iv) OSHA Material Safety Data Sheets for all components; (v) Agree to periodic plant inspections; (vi) Agency's “Buy American” Requirements. For each cable for which the Agency acceptance is requested, the manufacturer must include a certification stating whether the cable complies with the following two domestic origin manufacturing provisions: (A) Final assembly or manufacture of the product, as the product would be used by an Agency's borrower, is completed in the United States or eligible countries. For a list of eligible countries, see http://www.usda.gov/rus/telecom/publications/eligible.htm; (B) The cost of United States and eligible countries' components (in any combination) within the product is more than 50 percent of the total cost of all components utilized in the product. The cost of non-domestic components (components not manufactured within the United States or eligible countries) which are included in the finished product must include all duties, taxes, and delivery charges to the point of assembly or manufacture; (vii) Written user testimonials concerning performance of the product; and (viii) Other nonproprietary data deemed necessary by the Chief, Technical Support Branch (Telecommunications). (3) For continued Agency product acceptance, the manufacturer must submit an original signature certification that the product fully complies with each paragraph of this section and a certification stating whether the cable meets the two domestic provisions of paragraph (t)(2)(vi) above for acceptance by January every three years. The certification must be based on test data showing compliance with the requirements of this section. The test data must have been gathered within 90 days of the submission and must be kept on files per paragraph (u)(1). (4) Initial and re-qualification acceptance requests should be addressed to: Chairman, Technical Standards Committee “A” (Telecommunications), STOP 1550, Advanced Services Division, Rural Development Utilities Program, Washington, DC 20250-1550. (s) Records of optical and physical tests. (2) Measurements and computed values must be rounded off to the number of places or figures specified for the requirement per paragraph 1.3 of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (incorporated by reference at § 1755.901(c)). (t) Manufacturing irregularities. (2) Minor defects in the inner and outer jacket (defects having a dimension of 3 millimeter or less in any direction) may be repaired by means of heat fusing per good commercial practices utilizing sheath grade compounds. (3) Buffer tube repair is permitted only in conjunction with fiber splicing. (u) Packaging and preparation for shipment. Packaging and Marking, (2) For cables shipped on reels a circumferential thermal wrap or other means of protection complying with section (w)(3) of this section must be secured between the outer edges of the reel flange to protect the cable against damage during storage and shipment. This requirement applies to reels weighing more than 75 lbs. The thermal wrap is optional for reels weighing 75 lbs or less. (3) The thermal wrap must meet the requirements included in the Thermal Reel Wrap Test, (i) Sample selection. (ii) Test procedure. (B) Tape thermocouples to the jackets of each sample to measure the jacket temperature. (C) Cover one sample with the thermal reel wrap. (D) Expose the samples to a radiant heat source capable of heating the uncovered sample to a minimum of 71 °C (160 °F). A GE 600 watt photoflood lamp or an equivalent lamp having the light spectrum approximately that of the sun must be used. (E) The height of the lamp above the jacket must be 380 millimeters (15 inches) or an equivalent height that produces the 71 °C (160 °F) jacket temperature on the unwrapped sample must be used. (F) After the samples have stabilized at the temperature, the jacket temperatures of the samples must be recorded after one hour of exposure to the heat source. (G) Compute the temperature difference between jackets. (H) The temperature difference between the jacket with the thermal reel wrap and the jacket without the reel wrap must be greater than or equal to 17 °C (63 °F). (4) Cable must be sealed at the ends to prevent entrance of moisture. (5) The end-of-pull (outer end) of the cable must be securely fastened to prevent the cable from coming loose during transit. The start-of-pull (inner end) of the cable must project through a slot in the flange of the reel, around an inner riser, or into a recess on the flange near the drum and fastened in such a way to prevent the cable from becoming loose during installation. (6) Spikes, staples or other fastening devices must be used in a manner which will not result in penetration of the cable. (7) The minimum size arbor hole must be 44.5 mm (1.75 inch) and must admit a spindle without binding. (8) Each reel must be plainly marked to indicate the direction in which it should be rolled to prevent loosening of the cable on the reel. (9) Each reel must be stenciled or lettered with the name of the manufacturer. (10) The following information must be either stenciled on the reel or on a tag firmly attached to the reel: Optical Cable, Type and Number of Fibers, Armored or Nonarmored, Year of Manufacture, Name of Cable Manufacturer, Length of Cable, Reel Number, REA 7 CFR 1755.903. Example: Optical Cable, G.657 class A, 4 fibers, Armored. XYZ Company, 1050 meters, Reel Number 3, REA 7 CFR 1755.903. (11) When pre-connectorized cable is shipped, the splicing modules must be protected to prevent damage during shipment and handling. [74 FR 20561, May 5, 2009] § 1755.910 RUS specification for outside plant housings and serving area interface systems. (a) Scope. (2) The housing and terminal requirements reflect the best engineering judgment available at the present time and may be subject to change due to advances in technology, economic conditions, or other factors. (3) The test procedures described in this section are required by RUS to demonstrate the functional reliability of the product. However, other standard or unique test procedures may serve the same function. In such cases, RUS shall evaluate the test procedures and results on an individual basis. (4) The test procedures specified herein satisfy the requirements of housings as well as the requirements of terminals that may be installed within housings. Some of the requirements are interrelated to several tests designed to determine the performance aspects of terminals and are directly affected by testing required for housings. Therefore, the manufacturer should carefully review all the test requirements in order to develop a testing schedule that is comprehensive, efficient in terms of the number of test specimens required and can be accomplished in an orderly and logical sequence. (5) The specified tests may require special facilities to comply with Federal, State, or local regulatory requirements. Some test procedures are potentially hazardous to personnel because of the high voltages and mechanical forces involved. Safety precautions are necessary to prevent injury. (6) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 94, Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances, fourth edition, dated June 18, 1991, referenced in this section is incorporated by reference by RUS. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. A copy of the UL standard is available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845-S, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250-1500, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (7) The American Society for Testing and Materials Specifications (ASTM) A 109-91, Standard Specification for Steel, Strip, Carbon, Cold-Rolled; ASTM A 153-82 (Reapproved 1987), Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; ASTM A 366/A 366M-91, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality; ASTM A 525-91b, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process; ASTM A 526/A 526M-90, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality; ASTM A 569/A 569M-91a, Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality; ASTM A 621/A 621M-92, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Drawing Quality; ASTM B 117-90, Standard Test Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing; ASTM B 539-90, Standard Test Methods for Measuring Contact Resistance of Electrical Connections (Static Contacts); ASTM B 633-85, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; ASTM D 523-89, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss; ASTM D 610-85 (Reapproved 1989), Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces; ASTM D 822-89, Standard Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus; ASTM D 1535-89, Standard Test Method for Specifying Color by the Munsell System; ASTM D 1654-92, Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments; ASTM D 1693-70 (Reapproved 1988), Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics; ASTM D 2197-86 (Reapproved 1991), Standard Test Method for Adhesion of Organic Coatings by Scrape Adhesion; ASTM D 2247-92, Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity; ASTM D 2565-92, Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc-Type Light-Exposure Apparatus With and Without Water for Exposure of Plastics; ASTM D 2794-92, Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact); ASTM D 3928-89, Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Gloss or Sheen Uniformity; ASTM D 4568-86, Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Compatibility Between Cable Filling and Flooding Compounds and Polyolefin Cable Materials; ASTM G 21-90, Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; and ASTM G 23-90, Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials, referenced in this section are incorporated by reference by RUS. These incorporations by references were approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 7 CFR part 51. Copies of the ASTM standards are available for inspection during normal business hours at RUS, room 2845-S, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250-1500, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (b) General information. (2) Pedestals are housings primarily intended to house, organize, and protect cable terminations incorporating terminal blocks, splice connectors and modules, ground lugs and load coils. Activities typically performed in a pedestal are cable splicing, shield bonding and grounding, inductive loading, and connection of subscriber drops. (3) Serving area interface (SAI) cabinets are housings intended to perform some of the same functions as pedestals but are primarily intended to serve as the connecting terminal between feeder cable and distribution cables. (4) Outside plant housings shall be manufactured in accordance with National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements, Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) requirements, Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards (OSHA), and all other applicable Federal, State, and local requirements including, but not limited to, statutes, rules, regulations, orders, or ordinances otherwise imposed by law. (c) General documentation requirements Installation and maintenance instructions. (ii) When requested by RUS, or an RUS borrower, the manufacturer shall prepare a training package for the purpose of training technicians in the use and installation of the product and its auxiliary equipment. (iii) The manufacturer shall provide ordering information for repair parts. Repair parts shall be obtainable through a local distributor or shall be easily obtainable. Information describing equivalent parts and their sources should be provided for those parts that may also be obtained from other sources. (2) Quality assurance. (3) RUS acceptance applications. (ii) For initial acceptance the manufacturer shall: (A) Submit an original signature certification that the product complies with each section of the specification; (B) Provide qualification test data; (C) Provide OSHA Material Safety Data Sheets for the product; (D) Provide a detailed explanation concerning the intended use and capacity of the product; (E) Provide a complete set of instructions, recommendations for equipment organization and splicing; (F) Agree to periodic plant inspections; (G) Provide a certification that the product does or does not comply with the domestic origin manufacturing provisions of the “Buy American” requirements of the Rural Electrification Act of 1938 (52 Stat. 818); (H) Provide user testimonials concerning field performance of the product; (I) Provide product samples if requested by RUS; and (J) Provide any other data required by the Chief, Outside Plant Branch (Telephone). (iii) Each requirement of this section must be addressed in submissions for acceptance. The designation N/A may be entered when the requirements do not apply. (iv) Acceptance requests should be addressed to: Chairman, Technical Standards, Committee “A” (Telephone), Telecommunications Standards Division, Rural Utilities Service, Washington, DC 20250-1500. (d) Functional design criteria for housings General requirements. (ii) Housings shall be of sufficient size to permit easily managed installation, operational, testing, and maintenance operations. The general shape of outside plant housings is usually comparable to that of a rectangular column or cylinder, with the shape of any particular housing being left to the manufacturer's discretion. Each design is subject to acceptance by RUS. (2) Housing types and capacities. (ii) The classifications of pedestals are the general purpose channel Type (H) and the dome Type (M). The Type H pedestal has either front only access or back and front access while the Type M pedestal has top only access. Pedestals are further designated as follows: Stake mounted Type Pole mounted Pole mounted (extra high) BD3 H BD3A BD4 H BD4A BD5 H BD5A BD7 H BD7A BD14 M BD14A BD14AG BD15 M BD15A BD15AG BD16 M BD16A BD16AG (iii) The minimum volume associated with the pedestal designations shall be as shown in the following table: Pedestal 1 Minimum volume Cubic centimeters cm 3 (Cubic Inches) (in. 3 BD3, BD3A 2 9,000 (550) BD4, BD4A 2 15,000 (900) BD5, BD5A 2 35,000 (2,100) BD7( 2 72,000 (4,400) BD14, BD14A, BD14AG 3 9,000 (550) BD15, BD15A, BD15AG 3 27,000 (1,600) BD16, BD16A, BD16AG 3 38,000 (2,300) Note 1: Note 2: Note 3: (iv) Equipment cabinets intended for use as SAI housings shall be assigned size designations according to their maximum pair termination capacities. The capacity will vary depending on the type of terminating equipment used. SAI cabinets shall be suffix designated with an “A” for pole mounting, “X” for pad mounting, and “S” for stake mounting. (v) Large pair count splice cabinets are classified according to their splice capacity. Approximately 48 cm 3 3 (vi) The minimum volume associated with large pair count splice cabinets shall be as shown in the following table: Splice cabinet 1 Minimum volume Maximum splice capacity (pairs) (cm. 3 (in. 3 BD6000 295,000 (18,000) 6,000 BD8000 393,000 (24,000) 8,000 BD10000 491,000 (30,000) 10,000 Note 1: (3) Design and fabrication requirements for housings. (ii) Type M pedestal housings shall consist of a one piece upper sleeve designed to fit over the base cover trapping air to prohibit water from entering the splice area when installed in locations prone to temporary flooding. Pedestals designed to be mounted extra high on poles for locations susceptible to deep snow shall have a bottom close-off option available to prohibit the ingress of birds, rodents and insects. (iii) The external housing components on all outside plant housings shall provide reasonable protection against accidental removal or vandalism. Housings shall be equipped with a cover plate retaining bolt and cup washer that may be opened only with an industry accepted socket type can wrench. Housings may be equipped with provisions to allow the purchaser to install a padlock. (iv) Installed housings shall resist the disassembling force of frost heaving applied to the bottom of ground line cover plates. The base cover must remain stationary to stabilize the contents of the housing cavity. (v) In an effort to provide protection against dust penetration, blowing snow, rain, and ultraviolet light degradation of internal components, all mechanical gaps shall be restricted. The use of seals, overlaps, gaskets, and/or dovetailing is required to assure satisfactory protection of housed equipment. (vi) Knockouts, cutouts, or notches designed to accommodate aerial service drops shall not be permitted. A design option for housings intended to accommodate service drops shall include a separate channel or equivalent in the base cover to allow future additions of service drops without the removal of gravel or the moisture barrier in the base of the housing. Service wire channels must be designed to prevent the entry of birds, reptiles, rodents and insects. (vii) Minimal venting of SAI housings may be necessary to relieve internal pressure and condensation. (viii) There shall be no aluminum housing components that will become buried in the soil when the housing is properly installed. (ix) Housing components may be assembled using rivets, welds, glue, bolts and nuts, or other techniques suitable for the materials involved. (x) Housings and their components that require field assembly must be capable of being assembled with tools normally available to outside plant technicians. (xi) Hinged doors on SAI housings and large pair count splice housings shall be equipped with a device that restrains the doors in the open position. (xii) Outside plant housings shall be free of sharp edges, burrs, etc., that could present a safety hazard to personnel involved in installation and use of the product or to the general public. Surfaces inside housings must not allow pinching of conductors during installation of cover plates or the opening and closing of doors. (xiii) A ground line mark shall be provided, approximately 15 cm (6 in.) below the top edge of the housing base cover plate on housings intended for ground level mounting. Base cover plates shall have a minimum height of 31 cm (12 in.). (xiv) Any housing, which weighs in excess of 91 kilograms (kg) (200 pounds (lb)), including its contents, shall be equipped with lifting brackets for attaching hoisting cables or chains. (xv) Housing stakes shall be a minimum of 107 cm (42 in.) in length. If fabricated from steel, they shall have a minimum thickness of No. 13 gauge as measured according to American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A 525-91b. Stakes shall be formed into a “U” channel with a minimum depth of 2 cm (0.75 in.). The stake shall be a single part of suitable design strength for driving 91 cm (36 in.) into the soil with hand tools without damage such as bending or warping. The stake shall have adequate mounting holes having a minimum separation of 15 cm (6 in.) for mounting the housing baseplate. The stake material must resist corrosion and deterioration when exposed to soil and atmospheric conditions. (xvi) The housing design must permit a logical progression of installation steps that would normally be encountered in typical field installations. (xvii) Provisions for attaching housings to stakes, poles, walls, other housings, or pads shall be provided for each design intended for those purposes. Locations of holes for mounting attachments may be provided by knockouts on above ground components. Mounting hole locations for below ground components may be predrilled. (xviii) Pole mounting hardware shall provide at least 1.3 cm (0.5 in.) clearance from the pole to the housing. Pole mounting brackets shall accommodate the wide range of pole sizes used in the telephone industry. (xix) Pad-mounted housings shall have hardware available for anchoring the housing base to the pad. A template may be provided to assist in the location of mounting attachment details for pad preparation. (xx) Housings equipped with stub cables shall have strain relief devices to permit shipping and handling of the housing without damage to the housing or stub cables. Only RUS accepted cable shall be used for stub cables. The cable manufacturer's recommendations concerning minimum bend radius shall be observed. The minimum bend radius for most copper cables is 10 times the cable diameter. (xxi) Cable supports shall be provided near the top of the ground line cover and other appropriate locations within the housing to provide cable stability consistent with the intended use and capacity of the housing. Cable supports shall be capable of holding a minimum load of 23 kg (50 lb). (xxii) An adequate supply of nonmetallic retainer clips or tie wraps capable of supporting a minimum load of 23 kg (50 lb) shall be provided with the housing. Adequate spaces for installation of the clips or tie wraps must be provided on the housing backplate and cable supports. (xxiii) Housing chambers designed for splicing operations shall be equipped with insulated supporting straps or rods suitable for supporting splice bundles. The insulation on the straps or rods shall extend for the entire length of the device and shall have a dielectric strength of 15 kilovolts (kv) direct current (dc) minimum. Housings having an “H” frame design where both front and rear covers may be removed may incorporate insulated tie bars to be used as cable supports. (xxiv) Housings designed to contain equipment in addition to splices shall be equipped with a device for physically separating the splice area from the service area of the housing. (xxv) A dielectric shield rated at 15 kv dc shall be provided to enclose the cable splice area. The shield shall extend from the lower cable supports to within 2.5 cm (1 in.) of the top of the housing. The shield shall be equipped with Velcro or equivalent fastening devices designed to hold the shield in both the open or closed positions. The fastening devices shall extend along the entire vertical edge of the dielectric shield. (xxvi) Mounting arrangements for a variety of terminal blocks and other equipment shall be provided by means of good housekeeping panels or other devices that may enhance the service aspect of the housing. (xxvii) Housings designed for SAI cabinets may be shipped with terminal blocks installed and stub cables attached. If this option is exercised, the stub cables and terminal blocks must be RUS accepted. In all cases, SAI cabinets must be equipped with appropriate mounting devices for installing the peripheral equipment required for a serving area interface. (xxviii) SAI cabinets shall be designed to provide physical separation between the splicing area and the area provided for running cross-connect jumpers. (xxix) SAI cabinets and large splice housings must have an external feature for attaching a padlock to prevent unauthorized entry. (xxx) Each housing shall have a tinned or zinc electroplated copper alloy or equivalent connector plate or bar to be used for terminating ground and cable shield bond connections. The device shall be equipped with captive studs and nuts with captive lock washers designed for attaching 6 American Wire Gauge (AWG) copper bonding harness wire or braid and a 6 AWG copper ground wire. Connector plates shall be equipped with enough studs and nuts to provide individual connections equivalent to the maximum number of cable sheaths recommended for the housing. Housings shall incorporate design features that enable the field installation of at least one additional connector plate for service conditions that require numerous connections. A bonding and grounding system capable of providing support and strain relief for service wires shall be provided for housings intended for use as distribution points. The bonding system shall be designed to provide sheath continuity as cable and service wires are installed, and prior to any other operation being performed. The bonding arrangement shall provide electrical continuity between all bonds and the ground connector plate. The bonding and grounding arrangement shall permit the lifting of individual cable ground connections for testing and cable locating activities without jeopardizing the grounding potential of other cables that may enter the housing. The bonding and grounding system shall be capable of conducting a current of 1000 amperes for at least 20 seconds. (4) Warning sign. (ii) For pedestals, the sign shall be centered horizontally on the front cover and the top of the sign shall be not more than 10 cm (4 in.) from the top of the housing. (iii) For SAI cabinets, the sign shall be centered horizontally and vertically on the door. If there are two doors, the sign shall be mounted on the left door. (iv) Deviations from warning sign location requirements are permitted only for housing design constraints. Alternate sign locations will be considered by RUS. (v) The RUS standard sign design is shown in Figure 1. (5) Housing materials. (ii) All materials are required to have fire resistance ratings consistent with recognized industry standards. External materials must be flame resistant. (iii) All materials used in the manufacture of housings or component parts must achieve the required strength properties, resist deterioration when exposed to outdoor conditions, and be acceptable to RUS for the specific application. New materials or materials not familiar to the RUS staff shall be supported by test and performance data which demonstrates their suitability for the intended use. (iv) Nonmetallic housing materials shall have a fungus growth rating no greater than one according to ASTM G 21-90. (v) Metallic components shall be either corrosion resistant or protected against corrosion and must not produce galvanic corrosion in wet or humid conditions on other metals that may be present in the housing environment. (vi) Mill galvanized steel used in the manufacture of housings shall comply with the appropriate requirements of one of the following standards: (A) ASTM A 109-91; (B) ASTM A 366/A 366M-91; (C) ASTM A 525-91b; or (D) ASTM A 526/A 526M-90. (vii) Hot rolled steel shall comply with the appropriate requirements of one of the following standards: (A) ASTM A 569/A 569M-91a; or (B) ASTM A 621/A 621M-92. (viii) Cold rolled steel shall comply with the appropriate requirements of one of the following standards: (A) ASTM A l09-91; or (B) ASTM A 366/A 366M-91. (ix) Steel parts used for internal housing brackets shall be hexavalent chromate coated or zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B 633-85. (x) Hardware items used for assembling or fastening housing components shall be 300 series or passivated 400 series stainless steel or hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A l53-82 (1987). Other materials will be considered by RUS on an individual basis. (xi) Aluminum components shall be fabricated from alloy types 5052 or 6061 or other types that have been recognized as having acceptable corrosion resistance and formability and weldability features. (xii) Nonmetallic parts must be resistant to solvents and stress cracking and shall be compatible with metals and other materials such as conductor insulations and filling compounds used in the manufacture of cable. Plastic materials must be noncorrosive to metals and resist deterioration when exposed to industrial chemical pollutants, ultra-violet rays, road salts, cleaning agents, insecticides, fertilizers, or other detrimental elements normally encountered in the outdoor environment. (xiii) Housing door seals and gaskets may be manufactured from rubber or synthetic rubber-like elastomer materials. Seals and gaskets shall exhibit a high degree of weatherability with an effective life of at least 30 years in the outdoor environment. The material shall be tear resistant and have a low compression set. (6) Housing finish requirements. (ii) There shall be inherent design provisions to prevent objectionable deterioration of the housing such as rusting, exposure of fiber or delamination. Secondary protection, such as galvanizing over steel per ASTM A 526/A 526M-90 or anodizing over aluminum, shall be provided to ensure reliability over the projected 30 year design life of the housing. (iii) Painted metal housings shall have a minimum gloss of 60 (60 °specular) in accordance with ASTM D 523-89. (iv) All painted surfaces shall have a uniform color and texture in accordance with ASTM D 3928-89. Nonmetallic housings shall meet recognized industry standards concerning optical appearance for gloss and haze as applicable for the material. (v) The colors of housings that RUS will consider for acceptance shall be as follows: Color Standard Gray-Green Munsell 6.5 GY 6.03/1.6 Munsell 4.4 GY 6.74/1.5 Green Munsell 8.8 G 2.65/5.3 Orange Federal Standard 595A Color Number l2246 Munsell 0.15YR 5.26/13.15 Chocolate Munsell 5.27YR 2.40/2.60 Color Number 835 (7) Installation requirements. (ii) No special tools or equipment other than that usually carried by outside plant technicians and construction crews must be required for installation of the housing. Security devices are the exception to this requirement. (iii) Installation hardware shall maintain housings in an erect and stable position when subjected to normal storm loads. Pad-mounted designs must accommodate precast or cast-in-place reinforced concrete or other suitable prefabricated material. Brackets, inserts for fastening, conduit openings, or other items necessary for a pad-mounted installation must be provided. The manufacturer shall provide detailed drawings or a template for locating inserts, conduit openings, or slots for cast-in-place pad construction. (e) Performance criteria and test procedures for housings General information. (ii) Testing shall be performed at a room temperature of 24±3 °C (75±5 °C). Temperatures for testing performed at other than room temperature shall be determined as near the center of the product under test as practical. (2) Description of test housing. (ii) The typical test sample shall consist of the exterior housing components such as covers, backplates, good housekeeping panels, cap assembly, anchor posts, decals, etc. Interior components must include the bonding and grounding hardware for cables and service wires and the dielectric shield. The housing may include terminal blocks or cross-connect modules, cable splices, or the typical outside plant equipment the housing is designed to contain and protect. (3) Environmental requirement for housings Thermal shock. (ii) Thermal shock and humidity. (iii) Humidity and condensation. (iv) Weatherability. (v) Low temperature durability. (A) To insure complete saturation of the three test panels, soak them for 96 hours in a container of distilled water 22±2 °C (71.6±4 °F); (B) Lower the temperature of the water and the immersed test panels to −28±2 °C (−18.4±4 °F) and stabilize for 24 hours; (C) Thaw the water with the samples to 22±2 °C (71.6±4 °F) and stabilize for 24 hours; (D) Repeat the procedure 24 times. Any cracking, crazing, deforming, or delaminating on any of the three test panels shall be considered a failure; and (E) Remove the samples from the water and impact test the three panels by delivering a force of 11.3 N-m (100 lb-in.) using a Gardner-Impact Tester to each specimen at 71, 22, and −28±2 °C (159.8, 71.6, and −18.4±4 °F), after stabilizing them at those temperatures for at least two hours. Visual inspection shall reveal no deformation or perforations on any of the test panels. (vi) Corrosion resistance. (vii) Fungi resistance. (viii) Stress crack resistance. 1/2 1/2 (A) Industry recognized filling compounds; (B) Isopar M; (C) Industry recognized solvents; (D) Industry recognized encapsulants; and (E) Commonly used insect, pest, and weed control products and agricultural fertilizers. (ix) Chemical resistance. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (B) There shall be no swelling, deformation, or softening of the material samples or any discoloration of the solution. (x) Ultraviolet resistance. (xi) Weathertightness. (xii) Wind Resistance. 1 Maximum area of largest surface square centimeters cm 2 2 Load kg (lb) 5,200 (800) or less 18 (40) 5,201 to 9,100 (801 to 1,400) 32 (70) 9,101 to 13,000 (1,401 to 2,000) 45 (100) 13,001 to 16,200 (2,001 to 2,500) 57 (125) Note: ( 2 ( 3 (B)( 1 Height cm (in.) Maximum area of largest surface cm 2 2 Load kg (lb) 122 (48) or less 11,000 (1,700) or less 91 (200) 11,001-13,000 (1,701-2,000) 104 (230) 13,001-14,900 (2,001-2,300) 118 (260) 123-152 (49-60) 11,700 (1,800) or less 91 (200) 11,701-14,300 (1,801-2,200) 109 (240) 14,301-16,200 (2,201-2,500) 127 (280) 16,201-18,800 (2,501-2,900) 145 (320) 18,801-20,800 (2,901-3,200) 163 (360) 20,801-23,400 (3,201-3,600) 181 (400) 153-183 (61-72) 14,300 (2,200) or less 109 (240) 14,301-16,900 (2,201-2,600) 127 (280) 16,901-19,500 (2,601-3,000) 150 (330) 19,501-22,700 (3,001-3,500) 172 (380) 22,701-25,300 (3,501-3,900) 190 (420) 25,301-27,900 (3,901-4,300) 213 (470) Note: ( 2 ( 3 (xiii) Fire resistance. (B) Polymeric materials shall be tested in accordance with the Underwriters Laboratories Publication (UL) 94, dated June 18, 1991. Materials used in housing components shall have a rating of 94V-0 or 94V-1 and shall not sustain combustion when an open flame source is removed. (4) Mechanical requirements for housings Impact resistance. Minimum volume cm 3 3 Minimum width or depth cm (in.) Impact force N-m (lb-ft) Less than 35,000 (2,100) Less than 13 (5) 68 (50) 35,000 (2,100) or greater 13 (5) or greater 136 (100) (A) The impact force shall be delivered to the front, back, and top surfaces. Circular housings shall be impacted on side surfaces 180 °apart and on the top. The device used to deliver the force shall be spherical and approximately 25 to 31 cm (10 to 12 in.) in diameter. A typical test procedure may include the use of a hard rubber bowling ball, weighing 6 to 7 kg (13 to 16 lb), enclosed in a mesh bag, attached to a rope with a metal ring. The load shall be dropped vertically on the top surface and applied to the sides with a pendulum motion using the appropriate height and extension arm to achieve the required impact force. The housing must be impacted at the approximate mid-point of the surface area. (B) Housings shall be conditioned for a minimum of eight hours at −40 °C (−40 °F) in an environmental chamber prior to testing. If the chamber is insufficient in size to conduct tests within the chamber, the housing may be removed and shall be tested within 10 minutes after removal. (C) After impact testing, the housing shall not exhibit fractured or ruptured surfaces sufficient to allow the ingress of moisture or dust. The housing shall not exhibit mechanical damage that would impair the functioning of hinges, latches, locks, etc. (ii) Load deflection. (iii) Vibration requirements. (iv) Drop test requirements. (A) Packaged housings and their contents weighing 91 kg (200 lb) or less shall be capable of enduring a single drop on each face or corner without damage from a height specified as follows: Packaged housing including contents weight kg (lb) Drop height cm (in.) 0 to 9 (0 to 20) 76 (30) 10 to 23 (21 to 50) 61 (24) 24 to 45 (51 to 100) 53 (21) 46 to 91 (101 to 200) 46 (18) (B) Packaged housings and their contents weighing more than 91 kg (200 lb) shall be capable of enduring a single drop on each of two diagonally opposite corners of the package without significant damage from a height specified as follows: Packaged housing including contents weight kg (lb) Drop height cm (in.) 92 to 453 (201 to 1000) 30 (12) Over to 453 (1000) 15 (6) ( 1 ( 2 1 ( 3 ( 4 3 (C) Unpackaged housings and their contents weighing 23 kg (50 lb) or less shall be capable of enduring a single drop on each face and adjacent corners without significant damage from a height specified as follows: Packaged housing including contents weight kg (lb) Drop height cm (in.) 0 to 9 (0 to 20) 10 (4) 10 to 23 (21 to 50) 8 (3) (D)( 1 Packaged housing including contents weight kg (lb) Drop height cm (in.) 23 to 45 (51 to 100) 5 (2) ( 2 (v) Firearms resistance. 3/4 (vi) Lifting hardware requirements. (vii) Stub cable strain relief tests. (viii) Door restrainer evaluation. Maximum area of door surface cm 2 2 Load 5,200 (800) or less 72 (160) 5,201 to 9,100 (801 to 1,400) 127 (280) 9,101 to 13,000 (1,401 to 2,000) 181 (400) Note: (B) There shall be no functional failure of the restraining device nor mechanical damage to the housing. (ix) Security evaluation. (5) Electrical requirements for housings. (6) Finish requirements Impact resistance. (ii) Finish adhesion. (iii) Color evaluation. (iv) Gloss evaluation. (v) Secondary finish evaluation. (f) Functional design criteria for binding post terminal blocks used in SAI cabinets General description. (2) Design and fabrication requirements. (ii) All individual terminals or terminal fields must be enclosed and the terminal enclosure must be totally filled with an encapsulating grease or gel which prevents connection degradation caused by moisture and corrosion. The encapsulant must provide complete encapsulation of terminal metallic connections and surfaces and totally fill all voids and cavities within individual terminal enclosures or terminal field enclosures to prevent ingress of moisture. The encapsulant must not restrict access to the terminal or restrict craft personnel from making connections. The encapsulant must be compatible with the standard materials used in cross-connect hardware and wiring. (iii) Binding post terminals shall not be susceptible to damage under normal use of standard tools used by outside plant technicians such as screwdrivers and test set clips. In addition, use of other tools such as scissors, diagonal cutters and long nose pliers for tightening and loosening screws shall not result in damage to the terminal. (iv) Terminals shall be designed so that a typical technician using customary tools shall be able to terminate cross-connect wire on a pair of terminals, or to remove it, without causing an electrical short between any two terminals or any other adjacent terminals. (v) The terminal count sequence shall be indicated using numerals of at least 0.25 cm (0.10 in.) in height. (vi) A means shall be provided to distinguish feeder terminals from distribution terminals. (vii) A means shall be provided to identify tip terminals and ring terminals in a terminal field. The identification convention shall indicate tip on the left with ring on the right for horizontal spacing and tip on the top with ring on the bottom for vertical spacing. (viii) The preferred height of the highest terminal in the connector field in a ground mounted SAI unit shall be 168 cm (66 in.) or less as measured from the top surface of the mounting pad. The bottom or lowest terminals in the connector field shall be at least 46 cm (18 in.) from the top surface of the pad. (ix) Pole mounted aerial units shall be 84 cm (33 in.) or less in width. The maximum allowable height of the highest terminals in a pole mounted aerial unit is 168 cm (66 in.) as measured from the top surface of the standard balcony seat used with the interface. For computation purposes, 15 cm (6 in.) shall be allowed for the distance between the bottom of the interface and the top of the balcony seat. (3) Auxiliary features. (ii) A 25 or 50 pair test connector shall be available which can be used to make reliable electrical contact to terminals associated with discrete 25 pair binder groups. The multi-pair test connector shall be provided with a minimum of 1.8 m (6 ft) of suitable cabling terminated to a connector, for interfacing with test sets common to the industry. The multi-pair test connector shall be functional on all terminal groups. (iii) A special service marker shall be available which must attach to a binding post terminal to identify special circuits and insulate exposed metal parts from accidental shorts from tools and wires. A supply of 25 special service markers shall be provided with each SAI cabinet. The color of special service markers shall be red. (iv)(A) A supply of twisted pair cross-connect wire shall be supplied with housings that are equipped with cross-connect terminals or that have provisions for mounting cross-connect terminals. The minimum length of cross-connect wire supplied is dependent on the SAI cabinet terminal capacity as follows: Cabinet termination capacity (pairs) Wire length 1 to 600 60 m (200 ft) 601 to 1200 120 m (400 ft) Over 1200 180 m (600 ft) (B) The cabinet shall be equipped to store the length of wire in a manner designed for convenient dispensing. The cross-connect wire supply shall be easily replaceable. (g) Performance criteria and test procedures for binding post terminal blocks used in SAI cabinets General. (2) Environmental requirements Insulation resistance/high humidity and salt fog exposure. 4 12 (A) High humidity. 6 (B) Salt fog. 6 (ii) Insulation resistance/simulated rain exposure. 6 (B) With the cabinet doors open, a spray of tap water at a rate of 3.8 liters per minute (1 gallon per minute) at 276 kilo-pascals (40 pounds per square inch) shall be directed on the terminal array for a period of 1 minute saturating all of the terminals. Following the spray application the doors shall be closed. The cabinet shall be maintained in a temperature environment of 26 to 28 °C (78 to 82 °F) at 95±3% RH for 6 hours. The insulation resistance shall then be measured as specified in paragraph (g)(2)(i) of this section. The minimum insulation resistance shall not be less than 1 × 10 6 (iii) Contact resistance. (A) The test shall consist of eight-hour temperature cycles with one-hour dwells at extreme temperatures of −40 °C to + 60 °C (−40 °F to + 140 °F), and temperature changes at an average rate of 16 °C (60 °F) per hour between the extremes. The relative humidity shall be maintained at 95±3%. The eight-hour test shall be conducted for 512 cycles. Millivolt drop measurements shall be made initially and after 2, 8, 16, 32, 64, 256, and 512 cycles with the samples at room temperature. The resistance measurement technique must conform to ASTM B 539-90. The measurement method must have an accuracy of at least ±30 microohms for resistances less than 50 milliohms. The change in contact resistance shall not exceed 2 milliohms. (B) A minimum of 100 terminals equipped with cross-connect wire installed in a manner typical of the industry shall be maintained at 118 °C (245 °F) during the test period, except during disturbance measurement periods where each wire connection to the terminals shall have a 0.23 kg (0.5 lb) force momentarily applied in a manner to stress the connection. Initial millivolt measurements shall be made without disturbing the joints in accordance with paragraph (g)(2)(iii)(A) of this section with the samples at room temperature. After initial measurement each sample shall be disturbed followed by a millivolt drop measurement after 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and 33 days. The change in contact resistance should be less than 2 milliohms when compared to the initial measurement. (iv) Fire resistance. (v) Encapsulant material compatibility. (vi) Encapsulant flow test. (3) Mechanical requirements Vibration. (ii) Torsional capacity of binding posts. (A) Test specimens shall include the terminals along the matrix edge at mid-span locations as well as centrally located terminals. Tests shall be conducted using a torque indicating screwdriver, or wrench, with an accuracy of ±0.17 N-m (±1.5 lb-in.) or better. The torque indicating device shall be used to tighten a screw or nut until failure of the screw or nut is achieved. Tests shall be conducted while the test specimen is stabilized at temperatures of −40 °C, 20 °C, and 71 °C (−40 °F, + 68 °F, and at + 160 °F). Record the torques at terminal failure. At least 10 test specimens shall be tested at each temperature. The failure torque shall not be less than 2.8 N-m (25.0 lb-in.) for each temperature. (B) The post or stud of the binding post terminal shall not fail before the screw or nut when increasing torque. The faceplate or receptacle restraining the post or stud shall not fail before the screw or nut when increasing torque. (iii) Lateral loading capacity of binding posts. (iv) Axial pullout resistance. (v) Test connector reliability. (B) A multi-pair test connector shall be attached to the binding post terminal field and tests for opens between the binding post terminals and the test connector shall be conducted. All circuits must prove good. The test shall be repeated along the terminal matrix edges, center, top, and bottom. (vi) Service cycle reliability. (4) Dielectric strength. (5) Operational requirements Durability. (ii) Twenty-five jumper connections shall be made on each of two binding post connectors chosen at random from a representative sample in an assembled interface unit. After exposure to this test, these and adjacent connectors shall be inspected for damage such as cracks or chips in metal or plastic parts. Failure consists of structural damage, open circuits through the connector, or inability to pass the torsional, lateral loading, or axial pullout tests described in paragraphs (g)(3)(ii) through (g)(3)(iv) of this section. (iii) Select six binding posts at random in a representative interface. On each connector, attach any test cord included with the unit and then remove the test cord as follows. On binding post sample 1, remove the cord normally ten times. On binding post sample 2, remove the cord ten times by jerking the test leads straight out. In these and the remaining tests, do this without releasing any manual attachment mechanisms. On sample 3, remove ten times by jerking downward at 45 °from horizontal; sample 4, upward at 45 °ten times; sample 5, left 45 °ten times; sample 6, right 45 °ten times. Check for opens and damage in the test cord, clips, and connectors. Failure consists of structural damage, open circuits through the connector, or inability of the terminal blocks to pass the torsional, lateral loading, axial pullout, test connector reliability, or dielectric strength tests described in paragraphs (g)(3)(ii) through (g)(3)(v)(B), and paragraph (g)(4) of this section. (iv) Use craft tools such as scissors, diagonal cutters, and long nose pliers to loosen and tighten screws where the binding post design does not prohibit the possibility. Failure consists of severe structural damage. (h) Functional design criteria for insulation displacement type cross-connect modules used in SAI cabinets General (2) Design and fabrication requirements. (ii) The cross-connect module manufacturer shall make available any nonstandard tools and test apparatus which are required for splicing, placing of jumpers, and the performance of maintenance operations. (iii) The module shall be designed so that a typical outside plant technician using tools shall be able to terminate cross-connect wire on terminals, or to remove them without causing electrical shorts between any other terminals. (iv) The pair count sequence terminated on a module shall be easily visible and shall have numerals of at least 0.25 cm (0.10 in.) in height. (v) Feeder terminations shall be easily distinguished from distribution terminations. (vi) Tip and ring terminations shall be easily visible and shall be identifiable as described in paragraph (f)(2)(vi) of this section. (vii) The preferred locations for cross-connect modules to be mounted inside a housing is the same as those for terminals and are described in paragraphs (f)(2)(vii) and (f)(2)(viii) of this section. (3) Auxiliary features. (ii) Special service markers shall be available for cross-connect modules as described in paragraph (f)(3)(iii) of this section. (iii) Housings equipped with, or designed for, cross-connect modules shall contain a supply of cross-connect wire as described in paragraph (f)(3)(iv) of this section. (i) Performance criteria and test procedures for insulation displacement type cross-connect modules General. (2) Environmental requirements. (ii) Insulation resistance/high humidity and salt fog exposure. 6 (iii) Insulation resistance/simulated rain exposure. 6 (iv) Contact resistance. (v) Fire resistance. (vi) Encapsulant material compatibility. (vii) Encapsulant flow test. (3) Mechanical requirements Vibration. (ii) Test connector reliability. (iii) Service cycle reliability. (iv) Jumper wire pull-out resistance. (v) Cable conductor pull-out resistance. (4) Electrical requirements Dielectric strength. (ii) The dielectric strength of a contact within the cross-connect module to contacts on either side shall be tested. The module shall be tested in a dry environment with an ac power source capable of supplying 8 kv at a rate of increase of 500 volts per second, a circuit breaker to open at breakdown, and a voltmeter to record the breakdown potential. Cross-connect modules shall be prepared in accordance with industry accepted splicing techniques with leads trimmed to approximately 38 cm (15 in.). The dielectric strength of each contact to the contacts on either side shall have an average dielectric strength of approximately 5.0 kv. (5) Operational requirements Durability. (ii) Twenty-five jumper connections shall be made on each of two contacts chosen at random from a representative sample in an assembled interface unit. After this test, these and surrounding contacts shall be inspected for damage such as cracks or chips in metal or plastic parts. Failure consists of structural damage, open circuits through the connector, or inability to pass the jumper wire pullout tests described in paragraph (i)(3)(iv) of this section. (iii) Select six contacts at random in a representative interface. On each of these contacts attach any test cord included with the unit as specified under normal use of that cord and then remove the test cord as follows. On sample 1, remove the cord normally ten times. On sample 2, remove the clip ten times by jerking the test leads straight out. In these and the remaining tests, do this without releasing any manual attachment mechanisms. On sample 3, remove ten times by jerking downward at 45 °from horizontal; sample 4, upward 45 °ten times; sample 5, left 45 °ten times; sample 6, right 45 °ten times. Check for opens and damage in the test cord, clips, and cross-connect modules. Failure consists of structural damage, open circuits through the connector, or inability of module to pass the test connector reliability, jumper wire pullout, and dielectric strength tests described in paragraphs (i)(3)(ii), (i)(3)(iv), and (i)(4)(ii) of this section. (j) Packaging and identification requirements Product identification. (ii) The date of manufacture, model number, serial number and RUS assigned designations shall be placed on a decal inside housings. The product identification nomenclature must correspond with the nomenclature used in the manufacturer's quality assurance program. (2) Packaging requirements. (ii) The product with all the necessary parts shall be shipped in one container unless significant advantages to the user can be obtained otherwise. Packaging of parts in the carton shall be such that the parts become available in the order in which they are needed. The package should be clearly marked as to which end to open. Packages shall be clearly labeled, and correspond to the names given in the instructions. (iii) Products packed in shipping containers shall be cushioned, blocked, braced, and anchored to prevent movement and damage. (iv) All products shall be secured to pallets with non-metallic strapping. The strapping and the manner employed shall be of sufficient quantity, width, and thickness to preclude failure during transit and handling. (v) The use of shrink or stretch film to secure the load to the pallet is permitted. However, such film must be applied over the required strapping. (vi) Containers that are too large or heavy to be palletized, such as crates, shall be shipped in their own containers. When practical, these containers shall be provided with skids to facilitate fork-lift handling. (vii) When packaged, the outer cartons shall meet the requirements of the Uniform Freight Classification and the National Motor Freight Classification. (3) Container marking requirements. (ii) The RUS assigned housing designation shall be stamped or marked on the outside of the package container with letter and number sizes large enough for easy identification. (iii) Each package shall be marked with its approximate gross weight. (iv) All containers carrying delicate or fragile items shall be marked to clearly identify this condition. (v) All marking shall be clear, legible, and as large as space permits. (The information and recordkeeping requirements of this section have been approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 0572-0059) [59 FR 53044, Oct. 21, 1994, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004]

Related documents

• 50 CFR Part 600 — Magnuson-Stevens Act Provisions#512148
• 50 CFR Part 622 — Fisheries of the Caribbean, Gulf of America, and South Atlantic#512149
• 50 CFR Part 635 — Atlantic Highly Migratory Species#512150
• 50 CFR Part 648 — Fisheries of the Northeastern United States#512151
• 50 CFR Part 660 — Fisheries off West Coast States#512152